The Science of the Senses and How We

The Science of the Senses and How We
Brain Sense
The Science of the Senses
and How We Process
the World Around Us
Faith Hickman Brynie
American Management Association
New York • Atlanta • Brussels • Chicago • Mexico City
San Francisco • Shanghai • Tokyo • Toronto • Washington, D.C.
Special discounts on bulk quantities of AMACOM books are available to corporations, professional associations, and other organizations. For details, contact Special Sales Department,
AMACOM, a division of American Management Association, 1601 Broadway, New York,
NY 10019.
Tel: 800-250-5308. Fax: 518-891-2372.
E-mail: [email protected]
Website: www.amacombooks.org/go/specialsales
To view all AMACOM titles go to: www.amacombooks.org
This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the
subject matter covered. It is sold with the understanding that the publisher is not engaged in rendering legal, accounting, or other professional service. If legal advice or other expert assistance is
required, the services of a competent professional person should be sought.
Although this book does not always specifically identify trademarked names, AMACOM uses them
for editorial purposes only, with no intention of trademark violation.
This medical and health information in this book is not intended to be used for diagnosis or treatment and is not to be relied upon as a substitute for medical advice and treatment specifically tailored to the needs of each patient. Any person desiring medical information and treatment should
consult a qualified physician. Neither the author nor the publisher are responsible for the misuse
of information found in this book.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Brynie, Faith Hickman
Brain sense : the science of the senses and how we process the world around us /
Faith Hickman Brynie.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN-13: 978-0-8144-1324-1
ISBN-10: 0-8144-1324-2
1. Senses and sensation. I. Title.
BF233.B97 2010
152.1—dc22
2009017998
© 2009 Faith Hickman Brynie.
Illustrations by Susan Gilbert, CMI.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
This publication may not be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in whole or in
part, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of AMACOM, a division of American Management Association, 1601 Broadway, New York, NY 10019.
Printing number
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
have been told that my need to understand things is a disease. This book is
dedicated to all those who are similarly afflicted.
I
This page intentionally left blank
Our brains are good for getting us around and mating successfully, and even for doing some serious physics, but they
go blank when they try to understand how they produce
the awareness that is our prized essence. The consolation
is that we shall always be of intense interest to ourselves,
long after quantum theory has become old hat.
—Colin McGinn
“An Unbridgeable Gulf ”
2007
This page intentionally left blank
CONTENTS
Preface: Falling in Love with Science
ix
Acknowledgments
xiii
PART ONE
TOUCH
1 Life Without Touch
3
2 In from the Cold
9
3 On Which Side Is Your Bread Buttered?
15
4 Pain and the Placebo Effect
21
5 Nematodes, Haptics, and Brain–Machine Interfaces
29
PART TWO
SMELL
It’s Valentine’s Day . . . Sniff!
39
7 Do Odors Dance in Your Nose?
45
8 Life Without Scent
53
9 The Sweaty Scent of Sex
59
10 Express Train to Happiness
65
6
vii
viii
Contents
PART THREE
TASTE
11 The Bitter Truth
75
12 Coconut Crazy
83
13 Cooking Up Some Brain Chemistry
89
14 How to Knit a Baby Taste Bud
95
15 Expecting What You Taste and Tasting What You Expect
PART FOUR
101
VISION
16 The Big Picture
109
17 Color and Memory
117
18 Sizing Things Up
123
19 On the Move
130
20 Vision and the Video Game
137
PART FIVE
HEARING
21 Hearing, Left and Right
147
22 Listening and Language
154
23 My Ears Are Ringing
160
24 Music and the Plastic Brain
166
25 Cochlear Implant: One Man’s Journey
174
PART SIX
BEYOND THE BIG FIVE
26 Synesthesia: When Senses Overlap
183
27 If This Looks Like Déjà Vu, You Ain’t Seen Nuthin’ Yet
190
28 Feeling a Phantom
197
29 Probabilities and the Paranormal
206
30 Time
212
Appendix
The Brain and the Nervous System—A Primer
219
Notes
235
Recommended Resources
263
Index
267
Preface:
Falling in Love with Science
don’t recall when I first fell in love with science, but I remember the day
when I said, “’Til death do us part.” I was counting raspberry bushes. They
grew wild around the abandoned strip mines of Appalachia. As an ecology
student at West Virginia University in Morgantown, I clambering around an old
mine’s precarious slopes with twenty other eager undergraduates. We shot line
transects and counted the bushes, orienting our test sites by the compass, while
measuring roped-off segments ten-meters square for careful counting and mapping. The day was hot and sticky. The prickly bushes tore our clothes and gouged
our flesh. Black coal dust clogged our lungs. Sunburned and sweaty, we learned
that wrestling truth from reality was difficult . . . and fun!
Field science infatuated me that day, but my pledge of lifelong devotion to
the scientific process came a few days later, when we pooled data from several
teams. We made graphs of numbers of raspberry bushes, north and east, upslope
and down. The graphs sang to me. Their meaning popped off the page and danced
around my desk. In axes, points, clusters, and lines, the numbers of raspberry
bushes revealed the history of the mine. In the days long before ecology became
a household word, those bars, dots, lines, and curves mirrored the fifty-year history of the mine, disclosing how the site had been worked, when it had been
abandoned, where the acid mine drainage had polluted most, and how nature
had attempted—with wild raspberries—to bandage the land so it could heal from
within. The data painted a picture more beautiful to me than any art museum
masterpiece.
From that day on, I never questioned my choice of a career. It was science
for me, in some form, and I’ve tried quite a few. In the bacteriology labs at West
I
ix
x
Preface: Falling in Love with Science
Virginia University, I grew on agar culture plates the acidophilic microorganisms
that can survive in acid mine drainage when nothing else can. At Oak Ridge National Laboratories, I zapped protozoans with ultraviolet light to see if they would
die. They did. At West Virginia University Medical Center, I worked under a
grant from the U.S. Army, screening the effects of possible new malarial drugs
on blood samples run through a labyrinth of tubes, reaction vessels, and colorimeters. (Computers do all that now.) In Colorado, I mixed reagents for thyroid
tests in a medical lab. I stuck thermometers down prairie dog burrows in Rocky
Mountain National Park, and I set up anemometers in mountain meadows.
Then I got into science teaching and educational reform because I wanted every
young person to fall in love with science just as I had. Writing curriculum and
designing educational materials led me into topics ranging from medical genetics
to land use planning.
In the early 1990s, I read a sentence that riveted my attention. The neuroscientist Richard Restak wrote, “The [human] brain is the only organ in the known
universe that seeks to understand itself.”1 That sentence stopped me dead in my
tracks. Here was the science of science itself—an organ of tissue and blood attempting to understand its own functioning. To my mind, that was bigger than
malaria drugs, bigger than burrowing animals, bigger even than my raspberry
bushes. I couldn’t wait to find out what neuroscientists were doing with their
brains as they attempted to comprehend . . . their own brains! So I started digging though the scientific literature and eventually I wrote a book called 101
Questions Your Brain Has Asked About Itself But Couldn’t Answer . . . Until Now.
The book was moderately successful, garnering a “Best Book” honor from the
American Association for the Advancement of Science in 1999. The book is now
in its second edition and continuing to make a contribution, I hope.
For me, however, one hundred and one questions formed only the tip of the
iceberg. The more questions I asked and the more I read and learned, the more
I wanted to know. I became fascinated with research on how the brain and senses
interact—thus this book’s title, Brain Sense. “Brain sense” is a field that many
tillers are plowing: the neurologists who study the interaction of peripheral and
central nervous system; the brain mappers who chart the regions of the brain that
handle specialized functions and the nerve networks that connect those regions;
the biochemists who probe the molecular receptors that initiate the impulses
of the chemical senses; the biophysicists who explore how light and sound waves
can sometimes translate themselves into sensory perceptions; the physicians and
surgeons who seek to treat the maladies that befall the senses and the brain; the
engineers and biomechanicists who try to understand how perception works so
they can construct devices ranging from prosthetics to virtual reality simulators;
the cognitive psychologists who want to understand how we learn; the behavioral
psychologists who hope to explain why we do the things we do; and the clinical
psychologists who strive to cure the intellectual, social, and emotional sequelae
of sensory perception gone awry.
Preface: Falling in Love with Science
xi
The organization of this book follows traditional lines. There’s a part on each
of the five major senses: touch, smell, taste, vision, and hearing. The book begins with touch because, in my opinion, it’s the least appreciated of all the senses
and perhaps the most vital. We explore the chemical senses next, because taste
and smell work in similar ways. Next come sight and sound, the senses that we
rely on the most and can trust the least.
In the individual chapters about each sense, I’ve tried to include some stories about how ordinary people live when their sensory capacities are diminished
or lost. I’ve also included as much of the latest in scientific research as I could
jam onto each page. There is so much going on in brain-sense research, I can
scarcely scratch the surface here, but I hope that the studies I’ve chosen for inclusion impart some sense of the endless fascination of that work.
Throughout these chapters, you’ll notice two recurring themes. The first is
brain plasticity. Plasticity means that the brain changes throughout life. Once,
we thought of the adult brain as fixed and unchanging (except for the deterioration that comes with age), but research in the last two decades has shattered that
notion. The brain is constantly rewiring itself, reshaping its own structure, recruiting new circuits to perform its work when old ones are damaged or lost. It
even re-creates memories each time it retrieves them. The implications of brain
plasticity for understanding our senses, our consciousness, and the essence of
what it means to be human are nothing short of staggering.
The second theme is what I’ve come to think of as a negotiable reality. We
believe in our senses, and we trust that they are providing us with objective, complete, and accurate data about the world around us. We are wrong. Our brains
construct our reality, molding every input to what we expect, what we imagine,
what we wish for. Our brains have minds of their own. They shape light waves
into expected images, sound waves into patterns ranging from noise to music.
Our sense of touch is malleable, variable, and refinable. We taste and smell what
we believe we will taste and smell. In precisely the same environment, you and
I will neither see, hear, taste, touch, nor smell the same things—nor will we draw
the same conclusions about the information our senses have collected. Our personal worlds are constructions built by our brains using the raw materials of the
senses—raw materials that are greatly modified during the construction process.
That idea of a negotiable reality is the reason for the last part of this book,
“Beyond the Big Five,” which looks briefly at some of the other “senses” or sensory experiences that don’t fit with the big five but are too intriguing to ignore,
such as the mingling of the senses known as synesthesia, the experience of déjà
vu, the phantom sensations and phantom pain often experienced by people who
have amputations, the possibilities and probabilities of extraordinary sensory perception, and the brain’s sense of time kept by a body clock far more precise than
most of us realize.
I hope that people who know a lot about the brain and the senses will read
this book. I hope that people who know very little about those topics will read it,
xii
Preface: Falling in Love with Science
too. For those readers who are interested in the brain and the senses but don’t
know much about the brain’s structure and function, I’ve included an appendix
at the end of the book, “The Brain and the Nervous System—A Primer,” which
provides a short course in neuroscience and explains many of the terms and concepts used in this book. It also includes diagrams showing the locations of many
of the brain regions discussed in the book. Before long, you’ll know your occipital lobe from your parietal, and you’ll be well on your way to comprehending
your own “brain sense.”
From beginning to end, this book is many things. It’s part memoir because
it’s my opportunity to reminisce about some things I’ve learned from science and
from life. It’s part investigative reporting because I’ve delved into the work of some
cutting-edge researchers who are designing clever experiments to gain answers
to questions that we didn’t even know how to ask a decade ago. It’s part biography because I want you to know—as I have come to know—what real scientists
are like as they work in real labs on real questions that have never before been
answered. It’s part textbook because basic knowledge about how our senses work
is important to everyone. It’s part history because we can’t appreciate where we’re
going if we don’t value where we’ve been. It’s part newspaper because it contains
some of the late-breaking stories that are making headlines on a daily basis. It’s
part travel journal because I invite you to fly with me as I visit working neuroscientists in Washington, Minnesota, Michigan, and Massachusetts. It’s part
personality profiles because the scientists I met and talked with are intriguing
people, doing interesting work and living full and satisfying lives. I want readers
of this book to see scientists as I have seen them—not as geeky weirdos in lab
coats, but as warm, humorous, engaging human beings who thrive on the search
for knowledge as they toil among the “raspberry bushes” of their chosen research
specialty.
Most of all, this book is a tribute to courage and to some of the wonderful
people who shared their stories with me: the tour guide who faced death as her
ship sank in Antarctica; the hairdresser who lost her sense of smell to brain injury; the woman who had a mastectomy but continues to feel her breasts; the
young poet, born deaf, who had a cochlear implant; the synesthete who sees letters in colors; the electronic genius who engineers phone lines and ignores his
tinnitus; the teenager who was born without the sense of touch and the mother
who has loved him totally and unconditionally through all he has achieved.
Finally, this book is a love letter to science and scientists. I’ve been wedded
to science all my life, and my fascination with the questions, methods, and inferences of scientific research has never diminished. Science isn’t the only way
to see, to know, to understand, but it’s the one that won my heart. Come meet
the love of my life.
Acknowledgments
any institutions and individuals provided valuable information in the
research phases of this book. I’ve drawn on the work of hundreds of
scientists—too many to list—whom I admire deeply and thank wholeheartedly. I exchanged emails with dozens of them. I enjoyed speaking with
some of them. I traveled to visit a few of them. I treasure them all. Whatever is
right in this book is to their credit. Whatever is wrong can be attributed to my
fallibility.
Special thanks go to those scientists who allowed me to visit their laboratories and who took time from their busy academic schedules to meet with me and
teach me those things that are best learned human to human, face to face. Special appreciation to Scott Murray, University of Washington; Shawn Green, University of Minnesota; Wayne Aldridge and Steve Mahler, University of Michigan;
Susan Brown, University of Michigan; Daniel Goble (by webcam), Katholieke
Universiteit Leuven, Heverlee, Belgium; Lucia Vaina, Boston University; Mandayam Srinivasan, Massachusetts Institute of Technology; and Gottfried Schlaug
and Andrea Norton, Department of Neurology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical
Center in Boston. Also special thanks to some I’ve never met but hope to some
day: phantom limb expert Emma Duerden, psychotherapist Nanette Mongelluzzo, and language researcher Ghislaine Dehaene-Lambertz.
I appreciate the efforts of my agent, Grace Freedson, in making this book
possible. Thanks to Amacom editor Barry Richardson for his enthusiasm and
encouragement. Thanks also to production editor Michael Sivilli and editorial
wizard Barbara Chernow for all their hard work.
M
xiii
xiv
Acknowledgments
I am most grateful to those individuals who selflessly shared their personal
stories, including Chuck Aoki, Dave Chappelle, Theresa Dunlop, Marv Gisser,
Karyn Maier, Jennifer Nelson, Andrea Salas, and Stephen Michael Verigood.
And to Kim McKee, the poet, my gratitude; I wish I could have used one of her
poems in every chapter.
The greatest gratitude is earned by those who tolerate on a daily basis the rigors of a process that bears little reward beyond itself. Ann, you are always in my
heart and thoughts, and now Rob and Katherine join you there. As for you, Lloyd,
you make sense of every day for me, and yours is the kindest heart and the best
brain of all.
PART ONE
TOUCH
Children are born true scientists. They spontaneously
experiment and experience and reexperience again. They
. . . touch-test for hardness, softness, springiness, roughness,
smoothness, coldness, warmness: they heft, shake, punch,
squeeze, push, crush, rub, and try to pull things apart.
—R. Buckminster Fuller
“Children Are Born True Scientists”
1978
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 1
Life Without Touch
n many ways, Chuck Aoki is a typical teenager. At seventeen, he’s an avid athlete. His Minnesota Timberwolves basketball team won the national junior
championship in 2008. He plays rugby competitively, too. Tennis and baseball are his recreational sports. He likes the history and English courses in his
Minneapolis high school, and he is confident that he did well on his SATs, although he hasn’t received his scores yet. He likes Taco Bell food. He finds girls
confusing. “Women dance around the bushes. Men get straight to the point,” he
says.1 He and his friends like to ride the bus to downtown Minneapolis to go to
a movie, eat at a restaurant, or hang out at the mall. He’s lined up a summer job
as a human resources assistant for the Minnesota Twins baseball team, a perfect
situation for him since he loves sports. Chuck hopes to go to college on a basketball scholarship. He will major in psychology or sports management.
But for all that, Chuck Aoki isn’t a typical teenager. He was born with no
sense of touch in his arms, hands, legs, and feet. With a few spots as exceptions,
he feels in his limbs neither heat nor cold nor contact nor pressure nor vibration
nor pain, although he experiences normal sensation in his head and trunk. His
legs were repeatedly damaged in childhood when he walked, ran, and played
baseball. His joints have disintegrated and his bones are crumbling. He’s fulltime in a wheelchair now; his athletic teams are wheelchair basketball and quadriplegic rugby. He’s lost eight of his fingers down to the first joint. Text messaging
on his cell phone produces bleeding sores on what’s left of his thumbs. Buttoning a shirt is impossible. Cutting lettuce for tacos or taking a pizza from the oven
poses a serious risk.
I
3
4
touch
Chuck was born with an extremely rare, inherited disorder called hereditary
sensory and autonomic neuropathy (HSAN) type 2. This is his story as he shared
it with me in a sidewalk café one sunny afternoon. It’s also the story of his mother,
Jennifer Nelson. She’s a librarian for the Minneapolis public library system and
the proudest mom I’ve ever met.
GROWING UP
“You young mothers. You worry too much,” the pediatrician told Jennifer
when Chuck was a baby. The infant was teething. He’d chewed his fingers to raw
and bleeding pulps.
“Is that normal?” Jennifer asked. The doctor wrote a prescription for antibiotics. The baby had an ear infection, he said.
Throughout infancy, Chuck cried intensely and interminably. Only full body
contact, his tiny trunk held tight against his mother’s skin, could console him.
“Is that normal?” Jennifer asked. The doctor wrote more prescriptions for more
antibiotics to treat more ear infections.
Chuck walked at nine months, but he walked on his knees. “Is that normal?”
Jennifer asked. More antibiotics. Babies get lots of ear infections.
But by the time Chuck celebrated his first birthday, the fact that something
was wrong could no longer be blamed on ear infections. The tentative diagnosis
of HSAN type 2 came when a neurologist examined a sensory nerve taken from
the boy’s foot. The fiber was smaller than it should have been, and it lacked the
dozens of tiny, hairlike projections usually seen on nerves. The fiber also lacked
the myelin sheath that surrounds, protects, and insulates normal nerves. In the
absence of myelin, nerve impulses could not travel along Chuck’s sensory nerves.
The baby’s motor nerves were normal, so his brain could direct his limbs to move,
but his sensory nerves were nonfunctional. He could feel nothing past his shoulders and his hips.
Chuck was eighteen months old. None of the doctors knew how to treat his
condition; they’d never seen anything like it before. The only model came from
diabetic neuropathy, which shares some common features with the inherited neuropathies. Diabetic neuropathy compromises blood flow, leading to infections
and the “spontaneous amputations” that have robbed Chuck of his fingers, one by
one, over the years. Chuck also developed Charcot joints, in which inflammation and loss of healthy bone lead to the overgrowth of abnormal bone tissue, fragmentation, and instability. Why? Because when he walked, he felt the ground
only from his hips. He had no feedback to tell him how much force he was exerting with the muscles of his legs and feet, so he stomped too hard. Similarly, when
using his hands, his sensation begins at his shoulders. He pushes too hard when
he uses a computer, plays video games, or holds a spoon. As a result, his hands
constantly bleed and callus. His mother debrides and bandages his wounds daily.
Life Without Touch
5
As a small child, he could grasp with his palm but he never learned to make
the finely controlled, pinching movements needed to pick up small objects. Because he felt no pain, everyday activities were hazardous. “We pursued a strategy
of avoidance,” Jennifer says. The hot water temperature was lowered so that
Chuck would not burn himself. Jennifer was ever vigilant, keeping the boy away
from flames, sharp objects, and hot surfaces.
Jennifer recalls a family vacation to Oregon when Chuck was seven. “We
played on the beach all day,” Jennifer says, “and that evening Chuck’s left knee
was swollen to the size of a grapefruit.” The child had been seeing a rheumatologist, and Jennifer suspected a flare-up. She called the doctor and asked what
to do; the family was planning to take a train home the next day. In the absence
of an open wound, infection, or any obvious break, the doctor advised merely
watching the situation and keeping the boy off the leg as much as possible on the
journey home.
Back in Minneapolis, Chuck went for x-rays. Nothing showed up. He went
for an MRI. Nothing appeared wrong except for the persistent inflammation, so
Jennifer continued icing and wrapping the joint. Weeks passed with no sign of
improvement, so the rheumatologist consulted a specialist radiologist. The radiologist examined the images and found a shadow that previous examiners had
missed. An orthopedist then decided to open the leg surgically. He found a fracture of the femur, the large bone of the thigh. “Chuck had been walking around
for six weeks on a broken leg,” Jennifer says. He was home from school for eight
weeks. He had a cast on for twelve weeks. Soon after the cast was removed, he
broke his ankle, so he had to be in another cast. He couldn’t use crutches because
he couldn’t coordinate the alternating right- and left-arm actions that crutches
require.
When Chuck was nine, doctors discovered that the earlier fracture of the left
femur had destroyed most of the bone’s growth plate. Subsequent surgery closed
the entire growth plate in his right leg and what remained of the growth plate in
his left leg to prevent unequal limb growth. “A limb length discrepancy would
be dangerous on a daily basis,” Jennifer says, “getting in and out of the shower
and that kind of thing.” After that, he snapped his anterior cruciate ligament
(ACL). “We don’t know how he did it. We didn’t repair it. What would be the
point?” asks Jennifer. “His feet are flat, his ankles have sunk into his heels, and
both of his feet are deformed,” she says. Chuck has been using a wheelchair
full-time since he was twelve.
DIAGNOSING HSAN
Throughout Chuck’s childhood, his parents remained uncertain about their
son’s diagnosis. They took the boy to the Mayo Clinic when he was nine in hopes
of getting a definitive answer. A precise diagnosis was important, Jennifer explains,
6
touch
because it would help the family plan for Chuck’s health and care as he grew.
His neuropathy was obvious, but the autonomic part of the HSAN description
was not. The autonomic nervous system controls those bodily functions outside
conscious control. It regulates heart rate, blood pressure, intestinal action, and
glandular function. In all those ways, Chuck appeared normal. Did he really
have HSAN? If so, was it really type 2? There are several kinds, each with its own
symptoms, course, and prognosis.
To look for the autonomic component of the diagnosis, doctors at the Mayo
Clinic did a sweat study on Chuck. “They put him on a little gurney, sprinkled
him with powder, and put him into a makeshift, plastic covered oven, and heated
the space up,” Jennifer explains. “Then they charted where his body turned
purple, which is where he sweated. He doesn’t sweat from his fingertips and he
doesn’t sweat below his knees. There was the autonomic part of his neuropathy
that we hadn’t known about.” The HSAN type 2 diagnosis was confirmed.
The broad category of all hereditary sensory neuropathies (HSNs) includes
as few as four and as many as six disorders, depending on which classification
system is used. All types are genetic, and all involve loss of feeling in the hands
and feet. One HSN that is more common and better known that Chuck’s disorder is familial dysautonomia (FD, HSAN type 3, or Riley-Day syndrome). Children with FD often experience feeding difficulties and fail to produce tears when
they cry. Other symptoms may include lung dysfunctions, cardiac irregularities,
poor growth, and scoliosis. Children with FD are most often born to parents of
Eastern European Jewish heritage, with an incidence of one in every 3,600 live
births.2 Genetic tests are used to diagnose FD but not the other HSAN types.
Chuck’s HSAN type 2 is inherited as an autosomal recessive. That means
both Jennifer and her husband, Andy, carry the gene on chromosome 12. Their
chance of having a child with the disorder is one in four. (Chuck’s younger
brother, Henry, is unaffected.) Although the inheritance pattern is understood,
the reasons why symptoms vary among individuals are not. Some babies with
HSAN type 2 feed poorly, exhibit poor muscle tone, and can’t maintain body
temperature. Chuck had none of those symptoms, but like most others with the
disorder, he suffered numerous fractures of hands, feet, and legs, as well as Charcot joints. Also like most others with the condition, Chuck’s muscular strength
is normal.
THE BRAIN WITHOUT TOUCH
As for what happens in the brain when touch signals fail to enter it, Jennifer
and Chuck’s doctors can only speculate. The somatosensory (“body sense”) region of the cerebral cortex lies in the parietal lobe at the top of the brain, near
the crown of the head. Adjacent to it and forward from it, in the frontal lobe, lies
the primary motor cortex, where voluntary actions are triggered. These two long,
Life Without Touch
7
Touch the Pain Away
Mothers and infants know what the rest of us may forget—a tender touch
takes some of the pain away. A pediatrics team in Boston divided mothers
and their newborn infants into two groups. Half of the mothers held their
babies in whole-body, skin-to-skin contact while a physician performed the
standard heel-stick procedure to draw blood samples from the infants. The
other half of the babies were wrapped in receiving blankets and placed in
bassinets while the blood was drawn. Babies in contact with their mothers
grimaced 65 percent less than the bassinet-held babies did, and their crying
time was a whopping 82 percent less. The held babies did not experience
the same rise in heart rate as the control babies did. The researchers concluded that skin-to-skin contact reduces both stress and pain for infants.3
skinny areas lie sandwiched together, and their nerve fibers are organized in descending rows, like twins lined up side by side. Each nerve and each small area
is dedicated to a particular body part—forming side-by-side regions for feeling
and movement in the left arm, the right leg, and so on. But the two parallel rows
are not identical. In the motor cortex, the amount of “processing power” devoted
to a body part varies with the precision of the movements that body part can
make. So, for example, the fingers get more space in the motor cortex than the
toes do. In the somatosensory cortex, the allocation of space depends on the body
part’s sensitivity to heat, cold, pressure, vibration, contact, or pain. Thus, the fingertips and lips get a disproportionate share of the somatosensory cortex. The
back gets short shrift.
This basic anatomy suggests (but by no means proves) that Chuck’s somatosensory cortex may have allocated space differently from the way it is allocated
in other children. Receiving no sensory impulses from his limbs, the parts of his
somatosensory cortex that would have processed touch information from arms,
leg, hands, and feet probably failed to develop. Did the sensory nerves from his
head and trunk take over the brain’s spare “real estate”? There’s no way to know,
but it’s possible. It’s possible, also, that his motor cortex is organized differently,
although what happens to the motor cortex if it fails to receive somatosensory
feedback is unknown. Still, we can make some guesses in Chuck’s case. Athletes
who practice their sport and attain a high level of mastery probably devote larger
areas of the motor cortex to the body parts they use most. I suspect Chuck’s practice of basketball skills and his mastery of his sport have modified his motor cortex and probably his cerebellum as well—for that’s where movements that are
practiced enough to become automatic are coordinated.
8
touch
LIVING TO THE FULLEST
Although the brain can reorganize itself to some extent to meet the demands
of its owner’s life, major brain regions maintain their own specialized functions.
As one expert put it, a brain region steals from its next-door neighbor, not the
whole town. So Chuck’s brain regions for hearing, vision, and the other senses
probably aren’t any different from anyone else’s. But what he’s learned to do with
his senses is another matter. Chuck says that he relies on vision to manage daily
living. He dribbles a basketball expertly (an action some doctors think he should
be unable to perform), using his peripheral vision to judge where the ball is and
how forcibly he is propelling it. When playing video games, he holds the controller in front of his eyes and peers over the top to see the screen. He’s learning
to drive a hand-controlled car. He says he uses his peripheral vision to determine
where his hands are on the steering wheel, brake, and throttle.
Chuck’s vision, strength, and motivation have helped him achieve in sports.
He recently started playing wheelchair rugby on an adult team sponsored by the
Courage Center in Minneapolis. He’s getting good at it. He practiced with the
U.S. Paralympics team in 2008. “Maybe I can get named to the USQRA [United
States Quad Rugby Association] team. . . . That would be a step toward a world
championship team or the Paralympics team,” he says.
As for touch, “It’s not all it’s cracked up to be,” Chuck jokes, then adds more
seriously, “I’ve never had it, so I’ve adapted, and I don’t really get what I’m missing. . . . It’s not like it has negatively affected me in any really serious way.”
“He thrives in his life,” Jennifer says. “It is fun to watch him.”
Chapter 2
In from the Cold
rgentinean Andrea Salas isn’t just pretty. She’s flat-out gorgeous. Although
no relation to the fashion model of the same name, she’s even more beautiful, in my opinion. The glow of a summer sunset streaks her cascade of
auburn hair. Her caramel colored skin is flawless. Usually, when she speaks, her
doe eyes dance with merriment.
But not today.
Today she is dredging up memories of her brush with death in Antarctica.
The deep waters of the world’s most extreme environment threatened to take her
life. If the sea didn’t, the cold surely would have.
A
ALL ABOARD FOR THE ANTARCTIC
November 23, 2007. Andrea’s ship, the Explorer, had been at sea for thirteen
of its scheduled eighteen days of sightseeing along the margins of Antarctica.
Andrea, age thirty-eight, was a veteran Antarctic guide, having served on two
previous voyages. This time, as one of sixty-four crew members, she was working
as assistant to the leader of the expedition team. She organized lectures, wet landings, and recreational activities for the Explorer‘s ninety-one passengers, a sixteennation aggregate of intrepid tourists who had opened their wallets wide for this,
the adventure trip of a lifetime.
The ship had departed from Ushuaia, Argentina, a town that fights a perpetual feud with Chile’s Punta Arenas over which is the southernmost city in the
world. The itinerary called for a stop in the Falkland Islands—the Malvinas to
the Argentineans—and a visit to an abandoned whaling station in South Georgia.
9
10
touch
From there, Andrea and her shipmates traveled to Elephant Island, famous as
the last refuge of the men of Shackleton’s Endurance Expedition of 1914–1916.
Shackleton failed to cross the Antarctic continent on foot as he had planned, and
he was forced to leave his men on Elephant Island while he piloted a single
lifeboat across eight hundred miles of open ocean to find help on South Georgia. The landscapes of the islands were breathtaking, Andrea recalls. Wildlife is
scarce in this, the most inhospitable environment on earth, but the tourists marveled at the albatrosses of Steeple Jason in the Falklands. They oohed and aahed
over the king penguin rookeries of South Georgia.
November is early for an Antarctic trip. The sun doesn’t rise in Antarctica
until September, and summer doesn’t arrive until January when the weather
warms to a balmy –15° to –35°C (–5° to –31°F). The weather was exceptionally
cold on this trip. Andrea kept her charges wrapped in layers of thermal underwear, polar fleece, and waterproof jackets. Boots swaddled feet, while waders cocooned passengers toes-to-chest for wet landings. The season and the cold brought
with them some disappointments for the passengers and crew of the Explorer. A
planned side trip to South Orkney Island had to be canceled because the seas
were beginning to crowd with icebergs.
It might have been a portent, but the Explorer steamed on.
On this Thursday night, Andrea left her cabin on the crew deck, below sea
level. There, while resting in bed, she could hear ice hitting the hull. She wasn’t
worried. The Explorer was built to handle icy seas. She headed to the bar to enjoy a drink with fellow crew members and some passengers. The bar was warm;
the drinkers, convivial.
ABANDON SHIP!
Around midnight two passengers rushed into the bar, shouting, “There’s
water! There’s water!” Everyone ran from the bar, only to collide with the captain who was ascending the stairs. “The captain told us water was coming in
through a hole,” Andrea says. She raced to her cabin, as did the others, pulling on
warm clothes and collecting her life jacket, while the captain announced from
the bridge that emergency evacuation was commencing. “This is not a drill!”
“We got to the muster stations almost immediately,” Andrea reports. Huddled there in the dark and biting cold, passengers listened to reassurances from
the captain over the public address system. Attempts were underway to repair the
hull, but just in case, emergency rescue stations in Chile and Argentina had
been radioed, as had other ships in the area. Andrea joined her fellow crew members in distributing hot drinks and hope while awaiting the order to abandon ship.
It wasn’t long before that order came. Repair attempts had failed, and seawater
was pouring in through a breach in the hull. Its cause? Probably impact with an
iceberg.
In from the Cold
11
Now came the greatest challenge: Andrea and 153 others would have to
brave the turbulent Antarctic seas and the bitter cold in nothing more than small
lifeboats and Zodiacs, the inflatable rubber boats usually employed for tendering to shore from the ship and sightseeing along rocky coasts and beaches. Andrea hustled passengers into the emergency craft, making sure that each boat had
a crew member to handle the motor and steering.
She and two other crew members lowered one of the Zodiacs into the water
and scrambled aboard. Zodiacs are not lifeboats, but in Andrea’s opinion, they
represented a better choice for escape than did Explorer‘s aging orange lifeboats,
which were heavy, clumsy, and poorly powered, although provisioned with food
and water. The Zodiacs have powerful motors; they are light and are highly maneuverable. Still, they are open, small, and cramped when holding more than
four or five people.
Andrea’s Zodiac maneuvered next to one of the crowded, heavy lifeboats,
transferring seven passengers into the rubber inflatable. When all the boats were
in the water, the crew lashed the lifeboats and Zodiacs together with ropes, using the Zodiacs’ engines to keep the lifeboats from ramming into icebergs. The
passengers and crew of the Explorer had radios that allowed communication
among themselves but not with the outside world. They were alone and adrift in
the Antarctic seas.
The ten people on Andrea’s Zodiac crouched under blankets, settling in for
a long wait. Mostly they all stayed silent, the smell of apprehension heavy in the
air. “Those were the longest hours of my life,” Andrea says. The wind whizzed
past her ears. The cold crept through her seawater-soaked clothing to ice her bones.
In conditions like these, she discovered, waterproof jackets aren’t waterproof.
“My feet and hands were very cold,” she says. “I never feared death, but I did
fear that I might lose a hand, a finger, a foot. I don’t know how cold it has to be
to lose a part of your body, but I was afraid it would happen because I knew I
would not get any warmer.” She and her compatriots were stacked in the Zodiac
like cord wood. They had no way to move, no means of generating or sharing
heat. “I couldn’t feel my hands inside my gloves,” Andrea says. “My feet were
blocks of ice.”
COLD-SENSING
While Andrea waited for rescue, she felt overwhelmed by a paralyzing sense
of cold in every part of her body. What gave her that feeling? What was going on
in her nervous system to create that perception? The answer lies in tiny receptors on the membranes of neuronal projections that lie close to the skin’s surface.
It’s long been known that touch neurons specialize. Some respond only to
pressure; some, only to light touch. Several subsets of neurons fire an impulse
when the ambient temperature rises. Others detect only a decline—or cooling.
12
touch
(Any temperature lower than that of the human body, 37°C or 98.6°F, is “cold”
in the physiological sense.) One type of neuron fires at relatively warm temperatures, 15° to 4°C (59° to 39°F); yet another type activates at temperatures below 0°C (32°F).1 Still another kind generates an impulse only when cold is so
intense that it’s painful.
For a long time, no one understood what was going on in temperaturedetecting neurons, but that changed in 2002 when several research teams delivered up two prizes: receptors on nerve cell membranes that respond to coolfeeling chemicals such as menthol; and cold-activated ion channels in cell
membranes. The receptors work just as taste and smell receptors do; after locking onto a molecule of a cool-feeling chemical, they provoke some change in
the cell that, in turn, triggers a nerve impulse. The channels do precisely what
their name suggests. They either open in response to cold, allowing ions (charged
atoms or molecules) to flow into the cell,2 or they close to prevent them from
leaking out—maintaining the cell’s positive charge.3
The influx of positively charged sodium or calcium ions (or the maintenance
of a positive charge) causes electrical potentials to change across the outer membrane of the neuron. That happens because a neuron at rest has a slightly negative charge inside it, compared with a positive charge outside. When cold causes
an ion channel to open, sodium ions flow into the cell, thus changing the charge
along its membrane. For a tiny fraction of a second, the inside of the cell becomes
positive; the outside becomes negative. This reversal in one tiny area creates a
current that affects the membrane farther along. Channels there open, and sodium
flows into another section of the nerve fiber, then another, then another. That’s
how the impulse travels—eventually to the brain.
Receptors and ion channels can work alone or in concert, in the same cell
or in different cells. One receptor channel called TRPM8 has been studied extensively. Also called CMR1 (cold and menthol receptor 1), it’s a major player
in detecting gentle cooling. Researchers at the University of California at San
Francisco found its genetic base when they isolated cold-sensitive, mentholsensitive neurons from rats. They took the TRPM8 gene from those cells and
placed it into cultured neurons that were neither cold- nor menthol-sensitive.
The cells changed their function and became cold- and menthol-detecting neurons. Why? Because the gene directed the construction of TRPM8 receptors on
the cell membrane.4
Another team of researchers that same year discovered how cells that have
TRPM8 receptors respond to temperatures in the 23°C to 10°C (73° to 50°F)
range. The calcium concentration increases inside the cell. This suggests that
TRPM8 is both a receptor and an ion channel.5 The scientists don’t know how
cold affects the channel, but they describe two possible mechanisms. Cold might
change the shape of the channel directly, or it might trigger the release of a chemical (a “second messenger”) that, in turn, prompts TRPM8 to open.6
In from the Cold
13
Does Cold Make Your Family Sick?
Familial cold autoinflammatory syndrome (FCAS) is so rare, only six hundred people in the world have it. Its name is something of a misnomer. It
doesn’t take severe cold to trigger an attack. Some FCAS patients say that
merely walking by an open freezer in a grocery store is enough to bring one
on. Ordinary room temperatures are too cold for many FCAS sufferers.7
People with FCAS experience a constellation of symptoms that may
include fever, chills, hives, rash, nausea, eye irritations, headache, muscle
aches, and pain, stiffness, and swelling in the joints. “It’s like you’re freezing from the inside out,” says FCAS patient Rachel Doherty. “Your whole
body contracts until you warm up, which can take hours or days.”8
The disease is inherited; the dominant gene for the condition passes
from parent to child. If either the father or the mother has it, a child’s
chance of getting it is (usually) one-half. The cause of FCAS is often a
mutation in the gene CIAS1 on chromosome 1—although other genes
may be involved. The disorder begins in infancy and may worsen over time.
Despite the disease’s debilitating symptoms, most people with FCAS lead
normal lives.
Until 2008, the only treatment for FCAS was warming, along with
nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs (such as ibuprofen) or corticosteroids.
In that year, clinical trials showed success with drugs that trap or block the
immune-system chemical interleukin-1, which plays a role in the inflammatory reaction.9
Another possible mode of action has been explored by researchers in Spain.
They studied “voltage-gated” potassium channels in cell membranes. Neurons
insensitive to cold have them, but cold-sensitive neurons do not. The channels
function as “excitability brakes” during cooling in insensitive cells. They stop an
impulse from beginning. Cold-sensitive neurons lack such voltage gates, so temperature changes can initiate an impulse in them. This relationship was established when the Spanish team blocked the action of the voltage-gated potassium
channels in cold-insensitive neurons. About 60 percent of the neurons began
firing impulses in the cold.10
The human body can differentiate a temperature change as small as a single
degree Celsius, but only a few heat- or cold-sensitive ion channels like TRPM8
are known. How can relatively few cellular structures account for such a finely
tuned capacity? The answer may lie in the ability of the channels to shape-shift.
In cell cultures, channels that respond to increases in temperature are known to
14
touch
rearrange themselves by combining with other channels within their same structural “family” (not TRPMs but another category called TRPVs). The resulting
complexes demonstrate characteristics intermediate between those of the “parent” forms. Research teams can measure the intermediate electrical charges and
ion-gating properties of these “hybrid” channels. This ability to shuffle and recombine means that the number and variety of channel types are large. Although
channels that respond to decreases in temperature have not been researched, it’s
likely that they, too, combine with others to form intermediate types. Whether
such channel complexes act as functional temperature sensors in living organisms remains unknown.11
RESCUE!
Andrea never gave a thought to her TRP receptors. She had survival on her
mind.
As the wee hours of the morning gave way to a (blessedly) clear dawn around
3 A.M. (nights deliver less than three hours of darkness at this latitude in November), Andrea and nine others watched from the safety of their Zodiac as the Explorer began to list starboard. The Explorer‘s engines had failed, perhaps swamped
by water. The boat careened drunkenly with the swirling currents, powerless and
empty after the captain was the last to abandon his post. Explorer drifted toward
seas increasingly jammed with icebergs, driven by a rising wind. Before it sank
at the end of the day, the Explorer would be completely surrounded by pack ice.
Andrea remembers the noise. “The sound of a ship when it is breaking and
about to sink is just like in the movies,” she says, her dark-chocolate eyes wide
with the memory. “I could hear pipes breaking.” The eerie creak of twisting
metal assaulted her ears unceasingly as what passes for an Antarctic dawn brightened into morning.
And yet they waited for hours more, hoping against hope for a rescue they
could not be sure would come.
Then the Norwegian cruise ship, the Nornodge, topped the horizon. Rescue!
The Zodiacs raced toward the Nornodge, with the slower lifeboats trailing behind. “We didn’t mind getting wet anymore,” Andrea says, her eyes brightening
now that she can report a happy ending. Miraculously, not a single person suffered injury—not even frostbite. The Nornodge doctor offered treatment to the
rescued sailors—all 154 of them. Only two took advantage of the offer.
Andrea recalls how her sense of lethal cold disappeared when the rescue ship
arrived. “When I stood to look at the Nornodge, all the heat returned to my body,”
she says. “The hope I gained from seeing it sent a wave of warmth through me.
It was the excitement of feeling safe. Knowing that it was over, I didn’t feel cold
anymore.”
Chapter 3
On Which Side
Is Your Bread Buttered?
o this: Go to the kitchen and take out the bread and butter. Now butter
a slice of bread, but, for the first time in your life, don’t do it automatically. Think about what you are doing. Since nerves from the left and
ride sides of the body cross when they enter your brain, your left brain controls
your right hand and vice versa. If you are like most people, you’ll find yourself
using your preferred or dominant hand (probably the one you write with) to butter the bread, while your other hand holds the slice. Now notice something else.
Again, if you are like most people, you’ll look at the butter as you spread it. You’ll
pay no attention to the bread and the nondominant hand that’s stabilizing it.
Thus, if you are right-handed, your left brain is controlling the knife and monitoring the butter-spreading visually. Your right brain stabilizes the bread with your
left hand, monitoring the force and position of the slice with your sense of touch.
(It’s the opposite if you’re left-handed.)
So, you may be thinking, what’s the big deal?
It turns out that how you butter a slice of bread reveals a great deal about
how the brain processes sensory information. Put away the bread and butter and
fly off with me to the University of Michigan in Ann Arbor to learn more.
D
PROBING PROPRIOCEPTION
Where else would a university house a division of kinesiology but in a 1930s
Tudor revival-style building straight out of a gothic novel? Standing incongruously within spitting distance of the University of Michigan’s ultramodern hospital complex, the red brick Observatory Lodge is heavily ornamented with
15
16
touch
stucco veneers, angled half-timbers, hexagonal bay windows, and more gables
than seven.
Behind one of those gables, in a fourth-floor aerie that serves as laboratory,
office, and student research center, I find motion scientist Susan Brown. She’s a
warm, friendly woman with red hair and dancing eyes, stylishly and colorfully
dressed in contrast to the spare, starkly functional room where she works. But
there’s no need for decoration here. There’s work to be done. Several students
busy themselves at computer stations around the room, eyeing me curiously.
Brown has prepared for my visit. She’s set up a webcam at one of the computers so we can converse with her former graduate student, Dann Goble, now
a postdoctoral fellow at the Research Center for Movement Control and Neuroplasticity at Katholieke Universiteit Leuven in Heverlee, Belgium. It’s evening
in Belgium, and youthful, soft-spoken Dann relaxes with a Stella Artois as he
describes how his research began when he first started working with Brown in
his student days.
“We were running some simple experiments,” Goble says, “looking at how
well people can match position when they don’t have vision.” For those experiments, Goble blindfolded his subjects and placed their arms on supports, elbows
out and hands on levers. One arm then moved to a certain spot and back again.
Sometimes Goble moved his subjects’ arms for them. Sometimes the volunteers
initiated their own movements. In either case, the task was simple: match the
movement, either with the same arm or the opposite arm, hitting the same spot
as closely as possible using not vision, but the proprioceptive sense—the sense
of where the body is in space.
“For many years,” Goble explains, “nearly all the experiments that were carried out in movement science looked at how the dominant arm works. But we
decided for some reason to test both arms, and we obtained this really strange
result: The nondominant arm was working better than the dominant arm.”
Goble doubted his own findings. Maybe he wasn’t performing the test correctly.
He checked and double-checked, but nothing seemed to be wrong with the procedure, so Goble went back to the research literature to see if anyone before him
had reported such a finding. Sure enough, in a long-overlooked paper from
nearly thirty years ago, he found a similar result, not for the arm but for the
thumb. Research subjects had once matched thumb positions better with their
nonpreferred hand than with their preferred,1 but no one in the research community had paid much attention to such an oddity. The dominant arm and hand
are always better at everything, aren’t they? Goble’s findings flew in the face of
“what everybody knows.” “That’s when we thought maybe we were really on to
something,” Goble says.
Together Goble and Brown set up a series of experiments to explore “laterality,” or the distinction between the operation of right and left arms. If what they
were beginning to suspect were true, their research could take them far beyond the
On Which Side Is Your Bread Buttered?
17
Is Proprioception the Same as Touch?
Proprioception is the sense of the body’s position in space—and of its movement, speed, and force. Brown and Goble say proprioception and touch
are more or less the same thing, although proprioception may be thought
of as a particular type of touch. The receptors that initiate impulses of pressure, vibration, and temperature lie in the skin. The receptors more important for proprioception lie deeper—in the joints, tendons, and muscles.
The muscle spindle, found in the body of a muscle, is one type of proprioceptor; it signals changes in muscle length. The Golgi tendon organ, which
lies in the tendons that attach muscle to bone, provides information about
changes in muscle tension. These receptors send their impulses to the somatosensory cortex of the brain. It lies in the parietal lobe (the top of the
head). Proprioceptive information also travels to the cerebellum, where
automatic and habitual motions are controlled.
oddities of matching thumbs and arms, even beyond the daily rigors of buttering
bread. Could it be, they wondered, that the two arms differ in their preferred sensory inputs, with the dominant hand attuned to vision and the nondominant
acting as the primary source of proprioceptive information?
The researchers began testing their “sensory modality hypothesis of handedness” with experiments that allowed proprioceptive information only. Blindfolded volunteers worked under three separate conditions, each a little more
complex than its predecessor in what the brain was required to do:
Task 1: same arm match. One arm (either left or right) was moved to a target position between 20 and 60 degrees of elbow extension and held for two seconds before being returned to the starting position. The task was to move that
same arm back to that same position, using only proprioceptive memory on a
single side of the brain (because it was the same arm).
Task 2: opposite arm match with reference. One arm was moved in the same
way as in task 1, but it was left in the target position, so it could serve as a stable
marker. The charge was to move the opposite arm to the same position. This task
required no proprioceptive memory, but it was more difficult, because it required
communication between one side of the brain and the other—matching one arm
to the other.
Task 3: opposite arm match without reference. As in task 1, one arm was
moved to a target position, held for two seconds, then returned to the starting position. The task was to repeat the movement with the opposite arm. This was the
18
touch
most difficult task of all because it required proprioceptive memory as well as
communication between the two sides of the brain.
On all three tasks, the nondominant arm (the left for most people) was better at matching positions. Furthermore, the left arm/right brain superiority grew
with the difficulty of the task. Task 3, the opposite arm match without reference
that required both memory and cross-brain communication, showed the biggest
difference of all. The nondominant arm’s performance was even better than on
the two simpler tasks, which required either memory or the brain’s cross-talk, but
not both.2
Brown and Goble conducted another series of experiment to compare performance when visual cues were provided. As expected, the dominant arm excelled,3 but when only proprioception was allowed, the nondominant arm won
every time. Over several years, Brown and Goble tried other approaches. They
tested children. Same result. They tested the elderly. Same result. They conducted
experiments in which volunteers matched not position, but force. Still, the results
were always the same. In a right-handed person, the left arm/right brain partnership is a champion proprioceptive team.
LATERALITY
Ask one hundred people which is their preferred hand, and nine out of ten
will say their right. Apparently, the preference for right-hand, right-arm activity
has been around as long as humans have been throwing spears and painting pictures on cave walls. The right-handed use of stone tools appears in images that
date back 35,000 years. Since the left brain controls the right hand, it’s tempting
to think that the left hemisphere is more or less in charge of most skilled movements, since we think we don’t do much with our nondominant (left) arm, and
some researchers find evidence that that’s true. One study showed that the right
motor cortex actively controls movements of the left hand, but that the left motor cortex is active in movements of both hands.4 No one can explain that finding, but it’s possible that the left hemisphere sends messages to the left hand (by
way of the right hemisphere) via the corpus callosum, the stalk of brain fibers
that connects the brain’s two halves.
While it’s true that the preferred hand is better at many tasks, Brown and
Goble have shown that it’s probably not the major source of proprioceptive feedback to the brain—at least not when the two arms must perform in different, yet
complementary, ways. They aren’t the only scientists to reach that conclusion.
Researchers had found that patients with right-hemisphere brain injuries have
more trouble reproducing movements than do those with left-hemisphere lesions.5
Some brain-imaging studies have compared brain activity while subjects reached
for remembered targets. In some cases, the targets were visual; in others, they
were proprioceptive. During the proprioceptive tasks, the right hemisphere’s
On Which Side Is Your Bread Buttered?
19
Pinocchio’s Nose
Vibration disturbs the proprioceptive sense, and the illusion of Pinocchio’s
nose proves it. Here’s how it goes: Close your eyes and place the tip of your
finger on your nose. Your brain immediately draws conclusions about the
length of your nose. But if someone were to vibrate your elbow joint, you’d
feel that your nose had suddenly grown longer. Why? Because vibration
stimulates muscle spindles, misleading the brain into concluding that the
vibrated muscles have stretched and the arm has moved, although the limb
has actually remained immobile. The brain draws the only logical conclusion it can: If your arm muscle has stretched and if your finger is still on
your nose, your nose must have grown longer.
“Vibration is a great tool for fooling the nervous system,” Susan Brown
says, and researchers have used that fact to uncover further evidence for
right-brain dominance of the proprioceptive sense. An international team
of researchers from Sweden, Japan, German, and the United Kingdom
vibrated tendons in the arms of right-handed, blindfolded volunteers. The
vibration made the subjects feel that their fingers were curling in toward
their palms, although, in reality, their hands remained fixed. The scientists
used functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) to pinpoint the
brain’s response to the perceived, but unreal, motion. They found that the
proprioceptive regions of the brain’s right hemisphere grew much more active than those of the left, no matter which hand was thought to move. “Our
results provide evidence for a right hemisphere dominance for perception
of limb movement,” the researchers concluded.6
somatosensory area showed greater activity than did the left, even when all the
sensory information came from the preferred right arm.7
ASYMMETRIES IN THE REAL WORLD
The specialized, yet cooperative, partnership between the two arms has obvious applications in daily life. In right-handed people, the left hemisphere’s
affinity for vision promotes fast, accurate, visually guided action of the preferred
right arm, as when reaching for a slice of bread. The right hemisphere’s specialization in proprioceptive feedback helps the nondominant, left arm maintain the
position of an object, such as holding a slice of bread, while the preferred right
arm acts on it—in this example, spreading the butter.
20
touch
Brown’s and Goble’s research helps us better understand how our brains,
arms, and hands work, but it has practical applications, too, in rehabilitative treatments for those with movement and proprioceptive disabilities. Goble has worked
with children who have cerebral palsy. He’s tested them on matching tasks and
found what he expected. Children with right hemisphere damage are usually
worse at proprioceptive matching tasks than those with damage on the left side.
Brown has been testing some home-based training protocols with adults who
have cerebral palsy. The training requires subjects to perform small tasks, such
as picking up objects with chopsticks or turning over cards. She tells of a man with
cerebral palsy who, now in his early thirties, has always reached across his body
with his left hand to put the key in the ignition of his car. After only eight weeks
of home training, he can now use his right.
“We have a mix of both right-side-affected and left-side-affected [people] in
that study,” Brown explains, “but they are all getting the same intervention. . . .
We don’t have enough numbers, but we wonder if we are getting more of an effect for those that might have damage to one side of the brain because it’s more
responsive to the types of training we are using.” Brown is also starting a collaboration with the University of Michigan Stroke Clinic to develop training regimens specifically designed for right- and left-side impairments. “We have enough
basic science data, but now we need to translate that into a clinical environment,”
she says. A great deal has changed in treating patients since researchers learned
how the brain rewires and restructures itself after an illness or injury. “It’s a big deal
now in clinical rehabilitation to pay attention to sensory feedback and not just
concentrate on getting the brain to contract muscles to produce movement,”
Brown says. “Brain plasticity has caused a real paradigm shift in rehabilitation.”
Chapter 4
Pain and the Placebo Effect
t’s tempting to think that our senses provide us with an accurate representation of the external and internal environment. We believe that our eyes project into our brains a perfect three-dimensional video recording of the objects
and events around us. It’s easy to surmise that our ears detect and transmit all incoming sound waves with sound-studio clarity, and that our mouths, noses, and
fingertips provide us with all the evidence we need to draw indisputable conclusions about tastes, odors, and textures.
We are kidding ourselves. Our senses respond to only a fraction of what’s out
there, and they respond in ways so malleable and idiosyncratic as to call into
question the whole concept of truth. Consider the legendary unreliability of eyewitness accounts. In a recent study, Canadian researchers showed a video clip of
a movie action sequence to eighty-eight undergraduates who then discussed what
they had seen either with one or with several of their peers. In the debriefing sessions, a researcher, posing as a peer, deliberately introduced misinformation into
the discussion. Later, on true-false tests of facts about the movie scene, participants in the one-on-one condition accepted the impostor’s false suggestions 68
percent of the time; participants in the larger groups were taken in 49 percent of
the time.1
Perhaps our eyes, ears, and memories can be fooled, you may think, but internal pain is different. We know where we hurt, how much we hurt, and how
we feel when the pain increases, diminishes, or disappears. Pain is a very personal
and intimate sense, and there is no sidestepping it, denying it, or talking your
way out of it. You know when you hurt!
Or do you?
I
21
22
touch
What Is Pain?
An estimated 50 million Americans experience persistent pain, often from
backache, headache, arthritis, or cancer.2 Like everything else in the brain,
pain is a matter of physics and chemistry. The response starts with stimulation of nerve fibers called nociceptors. They lie in the skin, muscle, and
other body tissues. Their impulses carry messages to the thalamus and cerebral cortex of the brain where pain signals are processed. Pain signals also
pass to other brain regions such as the rostral ventromedial medulla (RVM),
where the “volume” of the pain message can be turned up or turned down
through signals sent from the RVM to the spinal cord.3
Unlike the nerve endings that respond to light touch or pressure, nociceptors ordinarily need a strong stimulus to begin firing. Inflamed or
injured tissues, however, release chemicals that make nociceptors more
sensitive so that a weaker stimulus causes them to fire. Unlike many other
kinds of receptors, which quit triggering a signal when stimulated for too
long, nociceptors become increasingly sensitive with continuing or repeated
stimulation.
All this action is under genetic control, and so is the experience of pain.
Researchers at the University of Michigan and the National Institutes of
Health have found that a variation in a single gene helps to explain why
some people can tolerate more pain than others can. The gene has two
forms called met and val. Both code for the enzyme COMT, which breaks
down the neurotransmitters dopamine and noradrenaline. (Neurotransmitters are the chemicals that ferry an impulse from one neuron to the
next.) COMT removes neurotransmitter molecules from the space between
neurons when an impulse is finished.
However, because the genes met and val are different, they make the
enzyme in slightly different forms. People who have two copies of the met
form have a much greater response to pain than those who have two copies
of the val form. Those who have one copy of each form have pain tolerance somewhere in between. The val form, it seems, makes an enzyme that
does its job efficiently and rapidly, reducing the experience of pain for its
lucky owner.4
THE PLACEBO EFFECT
Let’s do a thought experiment. Round up three hundred harried commuters
with headaches—not hard to do on the New York subway any workday rush hour.
Of course, they are shouting and whining strident protests, which only worsen
Pain and the Placebo Effect
23
their headaches, which is precisely what you want. You reassure them that you’ll
get their names mentioned in the New York Times in recognition of their public
service (you can’t afford to pay them), and that settles them down long enough
for you to herd them into three soundproof rooms, one hundred headaches per
room.
Now the fun begins. You do nothing with the first one hundred. They get to
glare at one another Big-Apple-style and ruminate on their throbbing temples.
You make an eloquent speech to the second group, informing them that they are
the lucky recipients of a newly developed and powerful painkilling miracle drug.
(It’s actually aspirin with codeine, a proven pain reliever.) Then you leave them,
too, alone with each other and their pain, contemplating their lawsuits against
you. You make the same speech to the third one hundred, but you are lying to
them. They think you are giving them a pain-relieving drug. In truth, they get a
sugar pill.
After a half hour, you ask your three hundred captives to report on their headaches. In the “do nothing” group, twenty say their headaches are gone. Eighty
are still suffering. In the second group, ninety report the complete disappearance
of pain; that drug is certainly a miracle potion, the people say, and they wonder
where they can purchase it. In the third group, the ones you deceived, forty-five
still have headaches, but fifty-five do not. That pill did the trick, they say, happily
reboarding the subway pain-free. Your experiment was a success and you are off
the hook, unless one of your subjects is a liability lawyer.
But forget the legal ramifications for now. Look at what the experiment revealed. A sugar pill has no physiological action that will cure a headache, but
thirty-five of your headache-free subjects in the third group provide evidence to
the contrary. (Why thirty-five and not fifty-five? Because the results from the first
group, the “do nothing” group, show headache pain will cease in 20 percent of
your subjects after a half-hour regardless.) Thus, for 35 percent of the subjects
in our thought experiment, the sugar pill was just as much a miracle drug as
the painkiller the members of the “real drug” group received. This “cure” in the
absence of any truly therapeutic agent is the placebo effect, and it’s more than a
curiosity. It’s a direct result of brain action. But how?
Before we answer that question, we need to define precisely what the placebo
effect is. It is not spontaneous remission. That’s what the twenty people in the
first group (and presumably twenty more in each of the other two groups as well)
experienced. Some of us, no matter what the disease, get better for unknown reasons. The disease process simply reverses itself without any intervention. Whether
remission is mere chance or the result of some self-healing process remains anybody’s guess.
Neither is the placebo effect deception or self-delusion. The people whose
headaches disappear after ingestion of the sugar pill are not lying, cheating, simple-minded, or insane. Their pain disappears—and not because they consciously
wish it to. In study after study, where both subjects and experimenters are “blind”
24
touch
to the experimental conditions—that is, no one, including the researchers, knows
who is getting the placebo—measurable, clinically replicable improvements in
disease conditions occur in a sizable fraction of all cases.
Furthermore, the placebo effect is no small or insignificant statistical aberration. Researchers at Brigham and Women’s Hospital in Boston performed some
mathematical magic to combine the results of nineteen separate studies (conducted between 1970 and 2006) on patients with irritable bowel syndrome. Across
all studies, the placebo response averaged nearly 43 percent, ranging from a low
of 15 percent to a high of 72 percent. The longer the period of treatment and the
larger the number of physician visits, the greater the placebo effect.5
Finally, the placebo effect is not restricted to subjective self-reports of pain,
mood, or attitude. Physical changes are real. Working under a grant from the
National Institutes of Health, a multistate team of researchers tested fifty-five
asthma patients who had recurrent mild to moderate symptoms. Patients were
randomly assigned either to treatment (salmeterol) or to placebo groups, and all
participants were blind to the test; neither the patients nor their doctors knew
who was getting the placebo and who was getting the drug. The researchers assessed not the patients’ self-reports of symptoms, but the degree of constriction
in their bronchial tubes. A one-dose trial showed the placebo effect in more than
half the patients. A stringent two-dose trial narrowed the field to 18 percent of
subjects who were unequivocal placebo responders. Five of the subjects (9 percent) were completed “cured” by the placebo treatment.6
THE PLACEBO EFFECT IN THE BRAIN
The placebo effect is not deception, fluke, experimenter bias, or statistical
anomaly. It is, instead, a product of expectation. The human brain anticipates
outcomes, and anticipation produces those outcomes. The placebo effect is selffulfilling prophecy, and it follows the patterns you’d predict if the brain were, indeed, producing its own desired outcomes. For example, researchers have found
the following:7
•
•
•
•
•
Placebos follow the same dose-response curve as real medicines. Two pills
give more relief than one, and a larger capsule is better than a smaller one.
Placebo injections do more than placebo pills.
Substances that actually treat one condition but are used as a placebo for
another have a greater placebo effect that sugar pills.
The greater the pain, the greater the placebo effect. It’s as if the more relief we desire, the more we attain.
You don’t have to be sick for a placebo to work. Placebo stimulants, placebo
tranquilizers, and even placebo alcohol produce predictable effects in
healthy subjects.
Pain and the Placebo Effect
•
25
Placebo effects can be localized. In one experiment, Italian researchers
injected capsaicin into the hands and feet of brave volunteers. Capsaicin
is a derivative of hot peppers; it produces a burning sensation. The wily
scientists then applied a cream to only one hand or foot and told their subjects that the cream was a powerful local anesthetic. In truth, the cream
was an inactive placebo. Nevertheless, the subjects reported less or no
burning on the treated hand or foot, but the burning sensation was strong
elsewhere.8
As in all brain actions, the placebo effect is the product of chemical changes.
The first clues to the chemical basis of the placebo effect came in 1978, when
research on pain in the dentist’s office showed that the drug naloxone can block
placebo-induced pain relief.9 Naloxone is an opioid antagonist; it locks onto the
brain’s natural painkillers, the endorphins, and stops them from doing their job.
Numerous studies have supported the conclusion that endorphins in the brain
produce the placebo effect. In patients with chronic pain, for example, placebo
responders were found to have higher concentrations of endorphins in their
spinal fluid than placebo nonresponders.10 One clue that expectation triggers
the release of endorphins came from other studies of naloxone conducted the
1990s. Italian researchers reported that naloxone blocked the placebo effect produced by strong expectation cues; but in the absence of expectation, the drug
had no effect.11
Some researchers and theorists debate whether expectation or conditioned
learning accounts for the placebo effect, but it’s not hard to construe conditioning as a special case of expectation. Conditioned learning is the classic Pavlovian
response. When dogs were fed at the same time that a bell was rung, it wasn’t
long before the dogs started to salivate at the sound of the bell, although no food
was present. The neutral stimulus (the bell) became associated with the effectproducing stimulus (the food). The same mechanism might explain some forms
of the placebo effect. If a pill or injection (neutral stimulus) has been associated
with a physiologically active drug (effect-producing stimulus) in the past, then
later the pill alone may produce the action without the drug. For example, your
body won’t make any more growth hormone just because your doctor tells you
it will. But if you take the drug sumatriptan, which actually does increase growth
hormone secretion, and later you take a placebo that you think is sumatriptan,
guess what? Your body will make more growth hormone when you take the
placebo drug, even if your doctor tells you it won’t.12
That is an example of the placebo effect that involves neither pain nor the
brain’s production of endorphins, but, if conditioning is considered a form of
expectation, it makes the same point. Your brain will direct your body to act
as it’s expected to act—whether the expectation is consciously perceived or unconsciously learned.
26
touch
Placebos for Emotional Pain
Expectation is strong medicine for a variety of physical and emotional ills,
even our perceptions of horrific images and events. A research team led by
Predrag Petrovic of the Karolinska Institutet in Stockholm showed emotionally loaded pictures, such as images of mutilated bodies, to fifteen
healthy, adult volunteers. On the first day of the two-day experiment, the
researchers gave the volunteers an antianxiety drug to dampen their subjects’ emotional response to the pictures. Then the scientists gave an antidote to the drug and told the volunteers that the antidote would restore the
full intensity of their emotional reactions.
The next day, the subjects were told they would take the same drugs,
but they were deceived. They got nothing more than a placebo salt solution when they viewed the pictures. The placebo reduced the subjects’ negative reactions to the unpleasant pictures by an average of 29 percent.
Functional MRI scans of the volunteers’ brains showed that the placebo
reduced activity in the brain’s emotion-processing centers. The effect was
mathematically predictable; as brain activity diminished, so did the perception of negative emotions in response to the pictures. The scans also
showed increased activity in the same brain regions known to respond with
the placebo effect in reducing the perception of pain. The effect was greatest in those subjects who reported the largest effect from the real antianxiety
drug administered on the first day.13
What’s the point of administering a real drug the first day and a placebo
the second? This experimental design treats the placebo effect as a case of
conditioned learning. If you’ve experienced a positive benefit from a treatment in the past, your expectation of its benefit in the future is stronger, and
so is the placebo effect.
MAKING THE MOST OF THE PLACEBO EFFECT
At one time, researchers viewed the placebo effect as an impediment—a
statistical annoyance that got in the way of objectively evaluating the efficacy of
potentially legitimate therapies. That view has changed. The placebo effect
is today seen as an important part of the healing process. It’s been studied as a
treatment for Parkinson’s disease, depression, chronic pain, and more. For large
numbers of patients—the placebo responders—belief in the therapy will create
or enhance its effectiveness.
Pain and the Placebo Effect
27
Life in Chronic Pain
People who suffer constant pain carry with them a load of other miseries:
depression, anxiety, sleep disturbances—even difficulty making decisions.
Dante Chialvo, a researcher at Northwestern University, has found a reason why.
Chialvo’s research team used functional magnetic resonance imaging
(fMRI) to scan the brains of thirty adult volunteers. Half the volunteers had
chronic low-back pain. Half were pain-free. The subjects used a fingerspanning device to rate continuously the height of a bar moving across a
computer screen.
In the pain-free group, activation of some parts of the cortex while performing the task corresponded with deactivation of other parts—a state
Chialvo calls a “resting state network.” The chronic-pain subjects performed
as well on the task as their pain-free counterparts, but their brains operated
differently. One part of the network did not quiet down as it did in the painfree subjects.14
A healthy, pain-free brain, Chialvo asserts, maintains a state of “cooperative equilibrium.” When some regions are active, others quiet down. But
in people who experience chronic pain, many brain regions fail to deactivate. A region of the frontal cortex associated with emotion “never shuts up,”
Chialvo says.
This constant firing of neurons could cause permanent damage. “This
continuous dysfunction in the equilibrium of the brain can change the
wiring forever,” Chialvo says. “It could be that pain produces depression
and the other reported abnormalities because it disturbs the balance of the
brain as a whole.”15
Placebo treatments for Parkinson’s disease offer a good example. Parkinson’s
is a decline in the brain’s ability to control movement. The disease causes a slow,
shuffling walk, stiff shoulders, and trembling. Parkinson’s symptoms result from
the death of neurons in several regions of the brain. The affected neurons normally control motion by releasing the neurotransmitter dopamine. Cell death
means that people who have Parkinson’s have too little dopamine in their brains.
One recent study of placebo treatments used positron emission tomography
(PET) to measure the brain’s manufacture and release of dopamine. Predictably,
the brain produced more dopamine when patients were given a placebo and told
to expect an improvement in their motor performance.16
28
touch
In some respects, the placebo effect offers the best of all possible alternatives:
therapeutic effects without the risk of negative side effects. It does, however, have
its downside. Just as expectation can produce positive outcomes, it can also produce negative ones. That’s the “nocebo” effect, named from the Latin for “I shall
harm.” A harmless—but dreaded or feared—treatment induces a new illness or
exacerbates an existing one. Practitioners of black magic and voodoo curses have
known that for centuries, but the nocebo effect is difficult to research for obvious reasons. It’s unethical to threaten people with illness, but a few brave investigators tried it before institutional review committees began to place stringent
constraints on research involving human and animal subjects. For example, in
1968, scientists asked forty nonasthmatic persons and forty asthmatics to inhale
water vapor purported to contain potent irritants and allergens. The nonasthmatics had no reaction to the vapor, but nearly half of the asthmatics did. They
experienced a measurable narrowing of their airways. Twelve of them responded
with asthma attacks that were successfully treated with the same saline solution,
which they were led to believe contained an effective antiasthma drug.17
Doctors could do more with the placebo effect if they could understand why
it works for some people but not others. Part of the answer is—once again—
expectation. Jon-Kar Zubieta of the University of Michigan at Ann Arbor used
PET to study the brains of men who had jaw pain. Zubieta gave them a saline
solution that he told them might relieve their pain. Brain scans showed that their
brains produced more endorphins after they received the placebo. They also
produced endorphins in more regions of the brain. Those men who said ahead
of time that they expected the most relief had more endorphins than their more
skeptical peers. The endorphin difference was pronounced in the brain’s dorsolateral prefrontal cortex, a brain region involved in paying attention and making
decisions.18 It’s as if the men made up their minds to get well and their brains
cooperated by forming and releasing the proper medication.
Brain researchers such as Zubieta are working to sort through the complexity of the numerous brain regions and neurotransmitters that produce placebo
or nocebo results. Theirs is no easy task. The placebo effect is not a single phenomenon, but the result of the complex interplay of anatomical, biochemical,
and psychological factors. The same can be said for all the senses, I suspect. We
see, hear, taste, touch, and smell pretty much what we expect to.
Chapter 5
Nematodes, Haptics, and
Brain–Machine Interfaces
f you want to learn how the sense of touch works, ask a nematode. Granted,
there’s nothing particularly appealing about blind roundworms that slither
around in the dirt all day, but nematodes are naturals when it comes to touch.
Researchers have been studying them since the 1980s, and these creepy-crawlers
have revealed a lot about how touch works in all animals, including people.
The nematode of choice is the lowly Caenorhabditis elegans, or C. elegans
for short. At no more than a millimeter long, C. elegans isn’t much to look at and
it leads a dull life—by human standards anyway. It has no eyes, so its main sensory inputs are chemical and mechanical. Its days are all the same. It wiggles its
way through the soil feeling the dirt, the bacteria it eats, and other nematodes—
with whom it interacts only to reproduce—controlling all its sensory and motor
activity through the precisely 302 neurons that make up its entire nervous system. About thirty of those neurons, roughly 10 percent, are devoted exclusively
to touch.1
C. elegans is the darling of touch researchers because it’s small and easy to
maintain. It reproduces rapidly, lives its entire life in two weeks, and produces
two hundred offspring, so there’s never a shortage of research subjects. Most
important, C. elegans has big, easily accessible neurons—each of which can be
studied individually.2 What’s more, its mechanoreceptors (touch-sensitive neurons and their associated cells) are “conserved across evolutionary history.” That
means your touch sense works pretty much the same as a nematode’s. Sorry if
you’re offended, but it’s all a matter of chemistry, and once nature finds a successful mechanism, she sticks with it.
I
29
30
touch
HOW TOUCH WORKS
The basic idea for any sense is the same: A stimulus prompts a neuron to
generate an electrical impulse. In touch, the stimulus is mechanical. Pressure
on the nerve endings embedded in mechanoreceptors such as Pacinian and
Meissner’s corpuscles (see sidebar) triggers an electrical signal. How? The electrical signal begins when a mechanical stimulus causes an ion channel in the
membrane of a neuron to open. Ions are charged particles, and the channels
are just what they sound like—tiny canals through which charged particles can
enter a cell when a gate opens.
From studies of C. elegans, researchers know that a mechanical stimulus
changes the structure of channels in the membrane of a touch-sensitive neuron.
The change opens the channels’ gates, allowing positively charged sodium (Na1+)
ions to flood in. The influx of ions changes the relative charges of the cell inside
and outside, opening the gate to yet another channel, one that permits calcium
ions (Ca2+) to enter. That channel bears the unassuming name EGL-19. Activation of the EGL-19 channel sends an electrical impulse from a touch-sensitive
neuron to an interneuron (one that carries messages between neurons). In the
nematode, the interneuron ferries the signal to a motor neuron, which, in turn,
stimulates a tiny roundworm muscle to contract, causing the animal to move.
Signals from touch neurons also travel to opposing motor neurons that inhibit
motion, so the animal can move in one direction, with movement in the opposite direction blocked.
And move this animal does, with a sophisticated repertoire of touch-triggered
movements at its command. When it encounters an obstacle, for example, the
worm reverses direction. The mechanoreceptors that produce that response
are called ASH, FLP, and OLQ, among others. ASH neurons are also at work
when the nematode turns away from poisons such as heavy metals, alcohol, and
detergents.
When something touches its nose, C. elegans turns its head away from the
stimulus. The mechanoreceptors OLQ and IL1 produce this head-withdrawal
response. These neurons are also active when the roundworm is bobbing its head
from side to side as it wiggles through the soil, hunting for food.
Researchers have done some weird things to C. elegans. One of them is to drag
an eyelash hair along the animal’s body to see if the worm responds to fine touch.
It does, by reversing direction to move away from the hair. Exactly five neurons
give the worm this sensation of gentle touch. (A sixth, while probably not required for gentle touch, is assumed to be a touch neuron because its structure is
virtually identical to the other five. It may be a stretch receptor.) These touch
neurons are arranged in a line along the worm’s body, close to the skin’s surface.
One way to find out how touch neurons work is to breed mutant roundworms and screen them for their loss of the gentle-touch response. Martin Chal-
Nematodes, Haptics, and Brain–Machine Interfaces
31
A Historical Lexicon of Mechanoreceptors
In humans, touch is handled by neurons in the skin, joints, and mesenteries
(membranes that support organs). Those neurons respond specifically and
exclusively to a particular kind of touch, such as light contact, pressure, vibration, or body position. Some are free nerve endings that respond only
to pain. Some are thermoreceptors; they initiate an impulse only when
activated by heat or cold.
Others are specialized into classes of mechanoreceptors that vary in
both how they are built and what they do. Mechanoreceptors are basically
layers of cells organized in a distinctive way, with a mechanically responsive neuron nestled inside. In humans, the four main types are named after
their discoverers:
•
•
•
•
Meissner’s corpuscles are sensitive to light touch. They are also important to the perception of texture, and they are most receptive to
stretching. They occur near the skin’s surface. They are named for
Georg Meissner, the German anatomist and physiologist (1829–1905)
who also has his name on Meissner’s plexus, the network of nerve
fibers that surrounds the small intestine.
Merkel’s corpuscles, also called Merkel cell-neurite complexes or
Merkel endings, detect sustained pressure and low-frequency vibrations. They distinguish very fine texture changes, such as when reading Braille. Like Meissner’s corpuscles, they are located close to the
skin’s surface. In 1875, Friedrich Merkel (1845–1919) discovered them
in the skin of a pig’s snout.
Ruffini’s corpuscles lie deeper. They detect sustained pressure. Also
called Ruffini’s brushes or Ruffini’s end organs, they are named for
Angelo Ruffini (1864–1929), an Italian histologist and embryologist
who discovered them in 1894.
Pacinian corpuscles detect deep pressure and high-frequency vibrations. Along with Ruffini’s corpuscles, they lie deeper under the skin.
They’ll fire in response to a sharp poke, but not a sustained push.
Their discoverer was the Italian anatomist Filippo Pacini (1812–1883),
who reported them in 1840. He’s also credited as the first to isolate
the bacteria that cause cholera (1854).
fie and his team at Columbia have done just that, identifying about twenty genes
named mec (mechanosensory abnormal). An abnormality in any one of the mec
genes results in the loss of the gentle-touch response, without the loss of other
32
touch
normal movement patterns.3 Each of the mec genes directs the cell to make a
MEC protein, and each protein plays its own special role—either in the development of the touch neurons in the egg, larval, or juvenile stages, or in the operation of the mechanoreceptor in the adult worm. For example, if gene mec-1
is abnormal, so is the protein MEC-1, and touch neurons don’t attach to the
worm’s skin properly during larval development.
Another example is the gene mec-4 and its protein MEC-4. That protein conducts sodium and perhaps calcium ions into the cell. If it’s abnormal, ions don’t
rush in and the animal is touch insensitive, although the touch receptor neurons
are structurally normal.4 We know this because of a research technique that uses
fluorescent dyes of different types. When apart, the dyes are invisible, but when
they unite, they give off a fluorescent glow that can be detected through a microscopic technique called fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET). When
the dyes are applied to touch neurons in C. elegans, low calcium concentrations
keep the dyes apart and they remain colorless; but rising levels of calcium ions
(Ca2+) bring the dyes together to generate a greenish glow that FRET can pick
up.5 Such experiments have revealed that, among other things, MEC-4 and
MEC-10 probably aid in pulling calcium channels open when the roundworm
is gently touched.6 Another likely candidate for that role is the OSM-9 protein,
which belongs to a different molecular family, one called TRP.7
HAPTICS
The biochemical machinery of touch in C. elegans can keep molecular and
cellular biologists enraptured for decades, but the engineers quickly lose interest. They have bigger bridges to build. A small but growing cadre of technological whiz kids wants to understand touch not as an end in itself, but as means to
a number of other ends. These researchers want to know how the sense of touch
works so they can replicate it in their machines, ranging from prosthetics for
paraplegics to robotic technicians that can clean your teeth.
I went to see one such engineer at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. He’s Mandayam Srinivasan, director of MIT’s Laboratory for Human and
Machine Haptics, better known as the Touch Lab. Haptics, he says, is a broad
term that encompasses both the sense of touch and the manipulation of objects
by humans, by machines, or by a combination of the two in real or virtual environments. The researchers in Srinivasan’s lab work on three fronts: (1) human
haptics, the study of human sensing and manipulation through touch; (2) machine haptics, the design, construction, and use of machines to replace or augment human touch; and (3) computer haptics, the development of algorithms
and software to generate and transmit a reality-simulating touch and feel from
simulated, virtual objects—the computer graphics of the touch world, so to speak.
Nematodes, Haptics, and Brain–Machine Interfaces
33
Srinivasan entered neuroscience research through the back door. He trained
as both a civil engineer and an aerospace engineer; he earned his Ph.D. in applied mechanics at Yale. “My thesis had hundreds of equations, but no experiments. I was a totally theoretical engineer, an applied mathematician. . . . After
my Ph.D., I got tired of shuffling equations, so I got into a neuroscience lab at
Yale Medical School,” he says. Srinivasan began to study biology there, but he
retained his engineer’s point of view: “I had expertise in the mechanics of deformable media,” he explains, “and it turns out that mechanics is to touch what
optics is to vision and acoustics is to hearing.”
Srinivasan’s engineering perspective paid off, for he was able to explore the
territory that the biologists had not. To him, touch is a force applied against a
semiflexible surface, the skin. In order to create the sensation of touch, without
the bother of interacting with a real object, haptic engineers need only generate
the proper kind of targeted force. At the haptic device interface, which can be
something like a pen-shaped stick or a strip of pressure-actuators worn on the
neck or arm, the human operating in a virtual world of touch receives signals
generated via a computer. The signals create the illusion of hard–soft, rough–
smooth, strong–weak, vibrating–still, or any other touch perception the haptic
engineer wishes to generate.
To Srinivasan, nature’s touch interface—the fingerpad—is a complex of
interactive tissues exhibiting various forms of mechanical behavior, including
inhomogeneity (composed of different parts) and anisotropy (unequal physical
properties along different axes). The various sensory detectors in the fingerpad
also operate at different rates and exhibit varying degrees of time dependence in
their functions. Skin varies in its compliance (how well it conforms to the force
applied) and its frictional properties (responses to various textures). The mechanical properties of skin and the underlying tissues determine how forces “load”
on its surface, how they are transmitted through its layers, and how the forces are
detected and signaled by skin’s near-surface and deeper-down mechanoreceptors.8 To Srinivasan and his team, identifying those factors leads in two directions:
Write a series of mathematical equations to explain how touch works and use
those equations to make machines deliver touch sensations, either to a human
being or to a robot.
In the MIT Touch Lab, Srinivasan’s team has developed both the hardware
and the software that humans need to interact with objects that aren’t there. Perhaps the most famous is the PHANTOM, a deceptively simple pen-shaped probe
now marketed by SensAble Technologies (Woburn, MA). The PHANTOM gives
its user a sense of the shape, softness, texture, and friction of solid surfaces that
don’t exist.
The potential uses of haptic devices such as the PHANTOM are legion. One
big area is the training of medical personnel. Just as flight simulators train pilots,
34
touch
surgical simulators let medical students see, touch, and manipulate convincing
models of tissues and organs long before they cut into the real thing. Srinivasan’s
lab has developed a simulator for training anesthesiologists to give epidural injections. A minimally invasive surgery simulator is being developed, too.
Srinivasan made headlines in 2002 when he collaborated with haptic researchers at the University College London to demonstrate the first instance of
“transatlantic touch.” Two users, working via the Internet in London and Boston,
collaborated in lifting a virtual-reality box. Using the PHANTOM to receive the
sensation of touch, each lifter could feel the force of the box and experience the
changes in its position as a distant collaborator acted on it.9
Other potential applications of haptic research include the following:
•
•
•
•
Medicine: micro- and macro-robots for minimally invasive surgery; remote
diagnosis for telemedicine; aids for the disabled, such as haptic interfaces
for the blind
Entertainment: video games and simulators that enable the user to feel and
manipulate virtual solids, fluids, tools, and avatars
Industry: haptic-feedback, computer-assisted design systems that allow the
designer to manipulate the mechanical components of an assembly during
the design stage
Arts and education: concert rooms, virtual art exhibits, and museums
in which the users can “play” musical instruments or “sculpt” their own
statues10
BRAIN–MACHINE INTERFACES
As the deceptively simple prototypes I examined in Srinivasan’s lab reveal,
real-life haptic devices are nowhere near what Hollywood depicts. Haptic interface tools can transmit the sensation of force to the user, but their range, resolution, and frequency bandwidths have a long way to go before they can match the
human sense of touch. To engineers like Srinivasan, such improvements will
come from better calculations of mechanical forces and more “degrees of freedom” in robotic manipulators. (Degrees of freedom are the points at which
movements are possible, such as—in the human arm—various independent and
combined positions of the shoulder, elbow, and wrist.) Tactile simulators need
the fine resolution that human skin can muster. Tactile arrays have other design
constraints. They must be inexpensive, lightweight, comfortable, and compact
enough to be worn without impeding the user’s movement. There’s also the problem of synchronizing visual and auditory information with haptic feedback—no
small matter since the different senses work via different inputs and at different
rates. “The current models of virtual objects that can be displayed haptically in
Nematodes, Haptics, and Brain–Machine Interfaces
35
Why Lo-Tech Back Scratchers Feel High-Tech Good
It’s not a high-tech gadget, but the old-fashioned back scratcher is one of
the most effective of all haptic devices. Until recently, no one understood
why scratching is so pleasant, but Wake Forest University researchers
changed all that in 2008 when they disclosed what goes on in the brain
when we scratch.
The study, led by dermatologist Gil Yosipovitch, reported fMRI scans
of the brains of thirteen healthy participants while their lower legs were
scratched with a small brush. Scratching periods of thirty seconds alternated with resting periods of the same length for a total of five minutes.
Yosipovitch found that areas of the brain associated with negative
emotions and memories became less active during scratching. The reduced activity occurred in the brain’s anterior cingulate cortex, an area associated with aversion to unpleasant sensory experiences, and the posterior
cingulate cortex, which is associated with memory. When participants said
that the scratching felt most intense, activation in these areas was lowest.
Some areas of the brain became more active during the scratching;
they included the secondary somatosensory cortex, a sensory area involved
in pain, and the prefrontal cortex, which is associated with compulsive
behavior.11
“We know scratching is pleasurable, but we haven’t known why. It’s
possible that scratching may suppress the emotional components of itch
and bring about its relief,” says Yosipovitch. The activation of the prefrontal
cortex “could explain the compulsion to continue scratching,” he adds.12
One drawback to the study is that the scratching occurred in the absence of a genuine itch. Yosipovitch’s team is continuing the research to
find out if the brain acts the same when that annoying itch just has to be
scratched.
real-time are quite simplistic compared to the static and dynamic behavior of
objects in the real world,” Srinivasan says.13
One of the goals of haptic research is to develop devices that will assist people who have lost the use of a limb to accident or disease. In 2008 researchers at
the University of Pittsburgh made progress toward that goal when two monkeys
in their laboratory successfully used the power of their brains alone to control robotic arms and hands. Unlike similar, earlier experiments in which brain power
controlled the movement of a cursor on a screen, this robotic action was three-
36
touch
dimensional and personal. The monkeys picked up food, fed themselves, and
even licked their robotic fingers.
To achieve this level of brain–machine communication, the researchers
first analyzed the collective firings of neurons in the animals’ brains when the
monkeys moved their natural arms. Then the investigators wrote software that
translated the patterns of neuronal firing into signals that controlled the movements of the robotic limb. Although the monkeys received no sense of touch
feedback per se, they were able to control their robotic arms in a natural way, and
the feedback—successful food retrieval and feeding—was sufficient to sustain
the action. So precise was the control that the monkeys could adjust the grip of
the robotic hand to accommodate varying sizes and thicknesses of food pieces.
To the researchers’ surprise, the monkeys learned that marshmallows and grapes
would stick to their hands, so a firm grip wasn’t necessary when those foods were
on offer.14
Such achievements in haptic research are laudable, but the field still has a
long way to go. “I could talk for a year on what I have discovered and probably
ten years about what I have not,” Srinivasan says. He recalls a list of his top ten
questions about touch he wrote when he first entered the neuroscience research
lab at Yale Medical School in 1983. “I think I have probably barely answered
about three of those ten, but at the same time I have answered ten more that were
not on that list,” he says. But each of those questions has spawned ten more. “We
researchers are never out of business,” Srinivasan says.
PART TWO
SMELL
Of our five senses, that of Smelling has been treated with
comparative indifference. However, as knowledge progresses, the various faculties with which the Creator has
thought proper in his wisdom to endow man will become
developed, and the faculty of Smelling will meet with its
share of tuition as well as Sight, Hearing, Touch, and Taste.
—G.W. Septimus Piesse
The Art of Perfumery
1857
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 6
It’s Valentine’s Day . . . Sniff!
t’s Valentine’s Day. Close your eyes and open that heart-shaped box. How
do you know there are chocolates inside? Why, that sweet smell is both unmistakable and unforgettable.
But what makes that smell unique? If you stop to think about it, there’s a lot
that goes on in detecting that odor, knowing it’s chocolate (and not Brussels
sprouts), remembering how much you love chocolate, and actually taking a piece.
Let’s look at how the brain handles smells, step by step.
I
WIRED FOR SMELL
The sense of smell is hardwired into the human nose and brain. Molecules
of odorant move up through the two nasal cavities until they come to the olfactory epithelium. This region in the nasal lining, about the size of a postage stamp,
contains 10 to 20 million olfactory neurons. Spiny projections (dendrites) of these
neurons extend to the epithelial surface where they end in knobs. On the knobs
are tiny hairs that float in a layer of mucus. The hairs contain odor receptors, one
kind per cell, among the thousand or so that humans have. Odor molecules fit
receptors the same way that keys fit locks. When an odoriferous molecule binds
to its perfectly matched receptor, a nerve impulse begins. (Or maybe there is
more to it; see Chapter 7.)
Particular types of receptors are limited to specific regions of the olfactory
epithelium, but thousands of cells express a single receptor. Most receptors respond to several different odorants, but some fit only one (or a few very similar
ones).1 When an odorant molecule binds to a receptor, the receptor releases a
39
40
smell
The Chemistry of Smell
To activate the nose/brain smell machinery, a molecule must be:
•
•
•
Volatile (easily evaporated into the air)
Water soluble, to pass through the mucus inside the nostrils and reach
the olfactory cells
Capable of attaching to the surface of receptor cells
Many molecules meet those criteria, but few people agree on how
odors are best described and classified. The eighteenth-century scientist
Linnaeus proposed seven categories of smell: camphor, musk, floral, minty,
pungent, putrid, and ether. More than a century later, the German psychologist Hans Henning had a different idea. He constructed a “smell
prism” using six odors: flowery, fruity, spicy, foul, burnt, and resinous. He
said every odor could be placed on a three-dimensional grid created by those
six points.
Today, many other systems are in use, but none captures to everyone’s
liking the range and subtleties of what the nose “knows.” One of the problems is that the size and shape of molecules should predict their odor, but
they don’t always. In general, chains of four to eight carbon atoms in aldehydes and alcohols have strong odors. The odors of six-carbon benzene rings
depend on where side chains of carbon, hydrogen, or oxygen atoms are attached. Large rings of fourteen to nineteen carbon atoms can be rearranged
a lot without changing their odor.
The way an odorant is perceived can even vary with its amount. For example, indole in small amounts smells like flowers. In high concentrations,
it smells putrid.
G protein. The release of the G protein triggers another molecule—a “second
messenger”—that causes a nerve impulse to begin. The impulse travels from the
cell body of the neuron along its long, fibrous axon. Axons from many neurons
merge into axon bundles and into the olfactory nerve (cranial nerve I). The cells
that express a single receptor type send their axons into a single point in the olfactory bulb of the brain.2 Those are points of “synaptic convergence” are called
glomeruli. The convergence must let the brain know which type of receptor is
being stimulated.
Unlike impulses from the other senses, odor signals are not sorted in the brain’s
central switching and relay station, the thalamus. Rather, they travel directly to
It’s Valentine’s Day . . . Sniff!
41
the brain’s center of emotion, the amygdala, and to its memory-forming center,
the hippocampus. From the glomeruli, signals travel also to the primary sensory
cortex, including regions of the frontal lobes. In right-handed people, the right
hemisphere of the brain is slightly dominant over the left in processing smells.3
Once the transmission is received in various regions of the brain, appropriate messages are sent to other parts of the brain and body. Activity in the language
and emotion regions of the brain’s cortex lets you name and appreciate a smell
(“Hmmm, chocolate!”) and act on it (“I’ll take a piece!”)
A MATH PROBLEM
Although signals begin in a single type of receptor, many receptors bind to
more than one type of odorant. Also, odorants activate more than one kind of
receptor. So how does the brain end up distinguishing one smell from another?
The answer lies in a series of connections among neurons that carry messages
into several regions of the cortex.
In 1991 Columbia University scientists Linda Buck and Richard Axel discovered the receptor proteins that bind to odorant molecules. Buck and Axel received
the Nobel Prize, and research on smell has boomed in the last twenty years,
much of it directed toward the puzzling question of how humans can detect some
ten thousand different odors using only one thousand different kinds of receptors.
(To make the math problem worse, only about 350 of those receptors actually
work. The others have lost their function over human evolutionary history.)
To solve the math problem, Japanese scientists worked with Buck to test
smell receptors in mice. They loaded olfactory neurons with a fluorescent dye.
If an odorant activated a neuron, the dye changed color. The researchers showed
that different odorants activate different combinations of receptors. The brain
identifies odors by evaluating patterns of impulses. To oversimplify for the sake
of example, imagine that chocolate candy stimulates receptors A, B, and C. Simmering hot chocolate stimulates B, C, and D. The brain distinguishes the two
because the combinations are different.
These complex and spread-out patterns create “odor maps” in the brain. In
the olfactory cortex of the brain, a single odor is represented by activity in a distinct area of sparsely distributed neurons. Different odorants elicit different maps,
but the maps can overlap. An increase in the concentration of an odorant expands the area of the map and triggers activity in additional neurons in the brain’s
cortex. Odorants that are chemically similar have maps that look a lot alike. Combinations of two odors activate neurons that neither odor alone can account for.4
To Nobel laureate Linda Buck, such mapping patterns suggest “an underlying
logic to the mapping of odor identities in the cortex.”5
That logic and the odor maps that result from it are remarkably similar
among individuals. Although experience may affect scent preferences, we are all
42
smell
hardwired for smell pretty much the same.6 And just as the twenty-six letters of
the alphabet can be combined in different ways to produce millions of words,
the impulse patterns from 350 receptor types can combine in multiple ways to
allow humans to recognize some ten thousand different odors. Cornell University scientist Jane Friedrich explains the process this way: “Let’s say you smell an
essence oil like jasmine, which is a pure smell. Your ability to smell that jasmine
is based on a small combination of olfactory receptor proteins. Those proteins
produce a pattern your brain recognizes.”7
READY, SMELL, GO!
While we often assume that our reactions to smells are inborn—for example,
babies smile when they smell vanilla and cry when they smell rotting meat—we
may not be as hardwired for scent preferences as we think we are. Researchers at
Rockefeller University studied a single neuron in the olfactory system of the nematode C. elegans (see Chapter 5). That neuron is especially sensitive to the odor
of butanone. The scientists found that nematodes that were fed when the scent of
butanone was in the air quickly learned to love the fragrance. They wiggled and
squirmed their tiny bodies eagerly toward the odor. But if the air smelled of butanone when the animals were starved (for only two hours; these researcher were
not cruel to nematodes!), the animals later ran away from the butanone scent.
The researchers demonstrated that experience altered the neuron’s response to
the scent, triggering a change from attraction to avoidance. People aren’t nematodes, and our olfactory systems work differently, but the Rockefeller team suspects olfactory neurons in the human brain may show the same adaptability.8
That research may help explain why individuals vary in what they smell and
in how we perceive an odor. In a classic experiment performed over thirty years
Smell Cells of a Different Breed
Until recently most scientists thought that only olfactory sensory neurons
detect odors. They were wrong. In the upper reaches of the nose lies a different category of cells, the solitary chemosensory cells (CSCs). CSCs
aren’t your everyday odor detectors; they send their messages only when
the concentrations of an odorant are extremely high. The message is more
than one of increased intensity. It’s the noxious, irritating message of a
smell that can cause burning, stinging, itching, or pain. CSCs send messages to the brain via the trigeminal nerve (cranial nerve V). That nerve
usually carries impulses of touch and pain from the face.9
It’s Valentine’s Day . . . Sniff!
43
Take Time to Smell . . . (the Mints)
Sniff and sniff again. Taking a tenth of a second longer to savor a scent
increases your chances of identifying it, say researchers at the Monell
Chemical Senses Center in Philadelphia.10 That observation is of more
than passing interest. It reveals a lot about how the brain processes olfactory inputs. As Buck and Axel showed, odorants stimulate several different
receptors, and the brain responds not to a single signal but to a pattern of
multiple signals. Some kind of code must lead to identification, but its
content remains uncertain.
Jay Gottfried at Northwestern University has taken one step toward
cracking that code. He’s shown that learning smells requires no effort.
Simple exposure is sufficient, and the longer the time, the better. He used
fMRI to record brain activity in people exposed to minty and floral scents.
The subjects sniffed the odors for more than three minutes. The lengthy
exposure taught them to discriminate not just a single minty or floral odor,
but numerous variants within each class.11 “When you have prolonged sensory experience with one smell, you become an expert for smells that are
part of that original category,” says Gottfried.12 That expertise revealed itself in the brain scans. The longer a subject sniffed, the greater the activity
in the brain’s orbitofrontal cortex, a region associated with emotion and
motivation as well as smell.
ago, test subjects sniffed isobutyric acid. Most of them said the acid smelled like
dirty socks, but a few said it had a pleasant, fruity odor. It turned out that those
few weren’t smelling the acid at all. Their noses and brains couldn’t detect it.
The fruity smell was coming from impurities in the acid. Such experiments
suggest that some of us are nosy superstars, while others are scent simpletons.
The difference may not matter much in everyday life, but it matters a lot when
manufacturers hire panels to judge the scent of a new perfume or the aroma of
a Valentine’s Day treat.
Individual differences aren’t the only mysteries waiting to be solved. Scientists are also trying to learn why we notice odors in the first place and why we stop
smelling them if they linger. Johns Hopkins researchers say that a nerve cell
“chorus” may enable the brain to pay attention to one thing above all others.
Neurons firing in unison signal Attention!—allowing you to home in on chocolate and ignore everything else.13 The brain’s motor centers get in the act, too.
An unconscious message to the nose says, Sniff! Sniffing brings a rush of air—
and more of the odorant—into the nose. Stanford scientists say that sniffing acts
as a wake-up call for the brain. It primes the brain to receive a smell impulse.14
44
smell
Other scientists, also at Johns Hopkins, have found what they believe to be
the “nose plug” that makes us stop smelling an odor that lasts a long time. It is
actually a channel in the sensory neurons of the nose that opens when an odor
is present and closes as the neuron becomes desensitized to the smell. A protein
called CNGA4 does the job.15
There’s no doubt that odors can be learned, but how that learning occurs
remained a mystery until 2009, when researchers at Case Western Reserve University discovered “synaptic memory” in the brain’s smell centers. Usually, neuroscientists investigate how impulses move from lower down in the brain (where
impulses arrive) to higher up (where impulses are interpreted), but Ben Strowbridge and his team traced a pathway running in the opposite direction, through
a rarely studied projection of neurons that runs from the brain’s olfactory cortex
back down to the olfactory bulb. Strowbridge found evidence of long-term potentiation (LTP), which is the strengthening of the connections among neurons the
more they are used. LTP is the basis of all learning and it’s known to occur in virtually all areas of the brain, but its occurrence in the olfactory system had never
before been demonstrated. Based on his studies, Strowbridge thinks that brain
regions do a lot of talking back and forth when smells are learned.16
The processes that explain the learning of smells may also explain, in part,
why odors are powerful triggers for behavior. Contrary to conventional wisdom,
the human sense of smell is remarkably acute. A research team led by scientists
at the University of California at Berkeley asked blindfolded volunteers to follow
a trail of chocolate scent merely by sniffing. Most people accomplished this task
with ease, and their performance improved with practice.17 What’s more, their
brains automatically associated the sweet smell of chocolate with the reward chemicals the brain makes in response to the taste of a gooey, fudgey goodie.
It’s enough to make you pause for thought, before helping yourself to another piece of Valentine’s Day candy!
Chapter 7
Do Odors Dance
in Your Nose?
hile I’ll admit to an occasional daydream about Denzel Washington
or Jimmy Smits, the true object of my unbridled imagination is Luca
Turin.
Here’s how my daydream goes.
I slave over this book for well over a year, and after it is published, it becomes a bestseller overnight. The world is beating a path to my door, but I’m unwaveringly modest and retiring until I get a call from Luca Turin. He’s read my
chapters on smell and loves every syllable, so he invites me to London to visit
and discuss his one and true love—perfume.
Even the writers of bestsellers have to wait six months for their royalties, so
I decline the invitation because everyone knows about the price of fish and
chips in England these days. But Turin insists, reassuring me that he has already
persuaded one of the Big Six perfume manufacturers to foot the entire bill, including a first-class seat for me on British Airways and a deluxe suite at the
Dorchester.
Well, I can hardly turn down a deal like that, so I’m on the next flight, having purchased a brand new bottle of Sécrétions Magnifiques for the trip. Turin
sang its praises in a perfume review as a brilliant amalgam of “harbor bilge in an
elegant floral.”1 That sounds like the signature scent for me, so off I go with many
of my fellow passengers on the airplane keeping a respectful distance. Could it
be the harbor bilge?
Never mind. In London, Turin greets me enthusiastically and ushers me into
his creatively messy office. I know what to expect because I read The Emperor of
Scent, Chandler Burr’s book about Turin:
W
45
46
smell
The office . . . looked like a hand-grenade test site. Transistors, wires,
tubes, plane tickets, bottles of perfume, obscure scientific journals and
copies of Vogue and magazines about airplanes, gadgets of every size
and design and God knows what else, and everywhere, vials and vials
and vials.2
In my daydream, Turin begins extracting vials from those jumbled piles,
opening them, waving them under my nose, explaining to me the brilliance of
a touch of indole (flowers) in this one and a touch of skatole (feces) in that one!
In my daydream, I’m no different than in real life—I can’t tell muguet from mop
water—but Turin has me totally captivated. He’s animated, charming, eccentric,
passionate—Russell Crowe in A Beautiful Mind without the schizophrenia. He
explains everything there is to know about smell and scent, and I soak it all up
like a scratch-and-sniff patch.
But who, you may be wondering, is Luca Turin and why do I daydream about
him? To my knowledge, he’s never been on the cover of any magazine. He’s
never made a movie, not even a commercial. He’s never received a Grammy or
an Oscar or a Tony, although he’s been described as a sharp dresser, so I can imagine him on the red carpet. He’s said to be a “polymath, a brilliant, intellectually
restless, self-educated aesthete.”3
That’s all fine, but the main reason he’s my idol is that he’s bent some very
prestigious academic noses out of joint with his highly refuted theory about how
the sense of smell works. To my mind, the only thing more fun than science is
controversy, and Turin is swirling in a skatole-scented maelstrom of both. He’s
brazenly and unabashedly the maverick of scent science, and that sparks my
imagination. Here’s the essence.
LUCA TURIN AND VIBRATION THEORY
Conventional wisdom holds that molecules of odorants lock onto receptors
in the nose. They fit there because of their size and shape. When they dock—
like a boat in a narrow slip—they cause a subtle change in the shape of the receptor. That shape-change triggers a nerve impulse. Next thing you know, you
smell burned toast.
Luca Turin thinks that’s wrong. He says shape is only one part of the explanation for how we smell. He says that smell receptors in the nose respond to the
vibration of molecules after the docking. Perceived odors differ because the frequency of molecules’ vibration differs—not just their size and shape. To support
his assertion, Turin points out that some molecules that are almost identical in
shape smell very different. Others that have different shapes, but vibrate at the
same frequency, smell more or less alike.
Do Odors Dance in Your Nose?
47
Turin isn’t the first to propose such an idea. In the 1920s and 1930s Malcolm
Dyson, who had the misfortune to be gassed in World War I, experimented (perhaps predictably) with the class of compounds called isothiocyanates: mustard
gas and phosgene. He started adding atoms to the compounds and changing their
shape. Some of his compounds smelled like mustard. Others smelled liked anise.
When he started to compare his molecules’ architecture to their smell, he found
disparities. Some of his molecules had similar shapes, but they smelled different,
while some with different shapes smelled the same. Dyson knew that molecules
vibrate, but he had no way to measure their frequencies. Nonetheless, he proposed that the human nose must be responding to “osmic frequencies.”
No one paid much attention to Dyson’s idea, and those who did punched
holes in it, but in the 1950s Canadian scientist Robert Wright breathed new life
into the notion. He proposed that (in Luca Turin’s words) “some receptor would
actually feel the molecule buzz.”4 Wright made some good arguments, and he
continued espousing them through the 1970s. Unfortunately, the range of “smellable” frequencies he postulated was too narrow, and his ideas never garnered
much serious attention.
Then, in the 1990s, along came Turin. He suggested that the vibrational frequency of the molecule offered a better explanation for odor than did simple
molecular shape.5 Turin rejected the idea that each type of smell receptor might
respond to a different frequency. He asserted instead that each type responds to
the same frequency range. Some molecules have no odor because they are too
large to fit into a receptor. Small molecules that vibrate but have no smell could,
Turin said, lie below the threshold of frequencies that stimulate olfactory receptors.
GOTCHAS!
The skatole hit the atomizer when Turin tried to get his hypothesis published
in the prestigious British journal Nature. His paper was peer reviewed by experts
on smell and summarily dismissed as nothing short of nonsense. Shape theory
explained all that needed explaining, and Turin’s theory had more holes in it
than a butterfly net, the journal editors concluded.
But a skatole-storm started brewing when the press got a whiff of unrest in
the scientific ranks. Turin’s opponents were forced—in public and in private—
to throw some gotchas his way, and there was no shortage of dissent. “Simply
because two different molecules may interact with different receptors does not
necessarily mean that they will smell different,” Tufts neuroscientist Joel White
told Stephen Hill of the NewScientist.6 Differing combinations of receptor activation could account for similar or dissimilar scents—once the brain has its say,
White said. Others concurred. “The brain puts together an odour based on the
pattern of signals,” said perfume expert Charles Sell.7
48
smell
Turin countered that gotcha with some gotchas of his own. If different signals to the brain could produce the same perception of odor, he reasoned, then
could the opposite possibly be true? Could a single set of receptors lead to the
perception of two different odors? Turin argued the answer was no if vibration
explained the sense of smell, but it could happen if size and shape were the only
variables. He offered the compounds ferrocene and nickelocene as examples.
They are the same size and shape, but ferrocene has an iron atom in it. Nickelocene has a nickel atom. Nickelocene has hardly any odor; ferrocene smells spicy.
Turin said vibration explains the difference. Nickelocene has a low-frequency
vibration, below wave number 400, which Turin says is the threshold of scent
detection. Ferrocene has a much higher number, approaching 500, so receptors
in the nose respond to it.
Another big gotcha was the enantiomers. They are mirror-image molecules.
They have the same structure, but they are flipped right to left; they have the same
vibration, but a different shape. Admittedly, most enantiomers smell the same.
In one category, however, the enantiomers smell different. They are the carvones.
R-carvone smells like spearmint. S-carvone smells like caraway. Go explain that,
Turin!
Turin retaliated. He said that the vibration of the different-smelling carvones
is the same only in the solution or gas phase used to test such things in the laboratory. He said smell receptors twist the molecules differently and dock with different segments of them. That means that the docking sites vibrate at different
frequencies. To prove his point, Turin mixed the minty-smelling carvone with
another compound that changed the molecule’s vibration but not is shape. The
result? The smell of caraway.
Still another of Turin’s repudiations involved hydrogen. Hydrogen atoms
exist in three isotopic forms. The ordinary hydrogen atom has one proton in its
nucleus and one electron in its orbit. Electrons weigh too little to worry about,
so the proton accounts for most of hydrogen’s mass. Another isotope of hydrogen
is deuterium. It’s the same as ordinary hydrogen except it has an uncharged particle, a neutron, added to its nucleus. Because both have a single electron in orbit, their size and shape are the same, but their mass is different. So when they
are added to big, organic molecules, they don’t change the big molecule’s shape
and size, but they do change its vibrational frequency. As a rule, the heavier the
molecule, the slower its vibration. Guess what! When Canadian chemists used
deuterium to replace all the ordinary hydrogens in a certain category of compounds called benzaldehydes, the odor was different.8 Vibration theory could
explain that. Shape theory couldn’t.
The Holy Grail, in Turin’s view, was the search for two molecules with different shapes, but the same vibration, that smell the same. The search was long
and difficult, but eventually Turin found a boron compound, decaborane, that
Do Odors Dance in Your Nose?
49
smells like rotten eggs (hydrogen sulfide) although it has no sulfur in it. Its shape
can’t explain its sulfur smell. Its vibrational frequency can.
SHOWDOWN
After Chandler Burr’s The Emperor of Scent was published, lots more gotchas
were flying. Some people loved the book; others deplored it. As for Turin’s theory, one reviewer concluded:
While implausible, Turin’s proposal is certainly a delightful potpourri
of creativity, conjecture, extrapolation, and isolated observations. And
it’s brazen: a universal theory of smell based on one man’s olfactory perceptions. In a grand substitution of ego for psychophysics, Turin claims
that Turin’s theory successfully predicts odors because they smell the
way Turin says they do.9
In 2004 Rockefeller University’s Andreas Keller and Leslie Vosshall tried to
settle the matter for good by doing what scientists do—testing the hypothesis.10
They asked volunteers to smell different odors from vials; the vials were numbered so that neither the researchers nor the subjects could tell what was in them.
The research subjects then reported what they smelled.
In one experiment, the researcher mixed two chemicals. One smelled smoky.
The other smelled like bitter almonds. Turin’s theory predicted that a mixture of
the two should smell like vanilla. It didn’t. In another experiment, the Rockefeller team worked with a class of compounds called the aldehydes. Vibration
theory predicts that aldehydes containing an even number of carbon atoms should
smell something alike (because their vibrational frequencies are similar). Their
odors should be noticeably different from aldehydes with odd numbers of carbon atoms and a different vibrational frequency. Again, no foul-smelling cigar.
The volunteers didn’t find the scents of two odd or two even aldehydes any more
alike than an odd and an even. Finally, Keller and Vosshall tested Turin’s hydrogen and deuterium compounds, criticizing the previous Canadian work on
methodological grounds. In the Rockefeller study, participants couldn’t tell the
difference between deuterated and nondeuterated aldehydes.
In an editorial that accompanied the Rockefeller paper, Nature‘s editors
pulled no punches. They were publishing a paper testing Turin’s hypothesis not
because the notion had merit, they said, but because it had received so much
publicity from “uncritical journalists.” Apparently, the editors didn’t like Turin
any more than they liked the media:
A mature body of scientific theory is like a large building, and the impulse
to demolish it is often little more than a form of intellectual vandalism,
50
smell
The Problem with Peer Review
The experts started vibrating over vibration theory when Turin submitted
a paper about his idea to the prestigious British journal Nature. The journal rejected the paper. Turin’s ideas couldn’t stand up to peer review.
Now let’s stop talking about smell for a minute and turn our noses toward the slightly odiferous process of scientific peer review. Peer review is
a lot like democracy; it’s a lousy system and the best we’ve come up with
yet. On the face of it, it makes sense. Let’s say you’re an expert on the Patagonian raptor Milvago chimango. You’ve been out in the field studying the
bird and you’ve written a paper on the birds’ nesting habits. You are having hot flashes of eagerness to publish your paper, but it will never see print
unless it is favorably reviewed by other experts on the Milvago chimango.
Their opinions, fair or foul, will determine your fate. Surely, that’s wiser
than having reviewers who wouldn’t know a raptor from a lab rat judging
your work. It makes sense: like evaluates like.
In the best of all possible scientific worlds, your reviewers are professionals who respect you and your work. They are as passionate about Patagonian raptors as you are, and they have seen for themselves, during lowland
treks through Argentina and Chile, the same nesting habits you have seen.
Heaps of grant dollars are lying around; no one is competing for funds. Your
reviewers give your paper an A+ and ka-bam! You get your five minutes of
fame on the pages of an erudite journal.
But suppose your alleged peers never heard of you (and if they have,
they judge you to be an eccentric). You’ve been working on the Chilean
side of the mountains, and they have been working on the Argentinean.
Suppose, also, that every paper your reviewers have ever published says that
Milvago chimango nests high in trees. They’ve seen the birds there. They’ve
observed thousands of nests. But you have been beating the bushes, and
now you have elegant analysis of variance tables and histograms to counter
the prevailing wisdom. Most of the birds pick lower nesting sites, you have
discovered, at or near the center of their “substrate,” whether it be a tree,
shrub, cliff, or pole. You’ve even documented a small, but significant, number of nests on or near the ground.
So, how are your peer reviewers going to react? They never heard of
you and your idea is ridiculous. Why should you get grant funds? Case
closed.
Now, I’m not saying that is what happened to Turin. Well, maybe I
am, because Turin is, indeed, looking on a different part of the tree and
spotting a different kind of nest. His peers have not seen it, and they aren’t
Do Odors Dance in Your Nose?
51
inclined to try. All their research is built on another “substrate,” and who’s
going to ditch a lifetime of work (plus a solid reputation) to jump for some
bird-brained idea out of nowhere?
Back to Turin’s book. The Secret of Scent isn’t about Turin. It’s about
science, written large and painted with a wide brush. Turin trained as a biologist, but he refuses to stay focused on the life-science branch of the tree.
He incorporates anatomy, physiology, chemistry, physics, and a good deal
of technology into his vibration theory. His eclecticism sets him at odds
with peer reviewers. Specialists specialize. They limit their vision to a single
phenomenon, narrowly and tightly defined. There aren’t many who look—
as Turin does—at the whole tree, bend its branches, and find nests where
no one else spotted them before.
Or maybe he’s just sniffing up the wrong tree.
an expression of frustration by those who did not succeed as architects.
Some buildings outlive their usefulness, of course, but the threshold for
knocking them down should be high. We hope that the paper from
Keller and Vosshall will serve as a reminder of why that’s so.11
To this day, Turin stands firm. He’s right, he insists, and he emailed me some
answers of his own, rebutting the Keller and Vosshall studies point by point.
Then, he refused to give me permission to publish his rebuttals. I can only guess
why. Distrust of an “uncritical journalist”? I don’t think so. We’re the ones who
listen to him when others won’t. Lack of confidence in his own ideas? Given the
nature of the man’s public character, highly doubtful. Eccentricity? Perversity?
Who knows. Maybe he’s tired of beating a dead horse. Maybe he’s tired of bellowing at one.
So, for now, let the record stand. In the Secret of Scent, Turin devotes less
than two pages to the Keller and Vosshall refutation. He acknowledges that isotope effects are subtle and might not be easily discernible and then dismisses the
Rockefeller study as “a valuable data point in a continuing debate.”12 He marches
on without a sniff of remorse, reporting how his theory gives perfumers a one in
ten chance of finding a fragrant molecule. Shape theory, he contends, gives a
one in one thousand chance.
He may be right about the improved odds. In 2004 Cambridge researchers
organized forty-seven molecules into seven odor categories: ambergris, bitter almond, camphor, rose, jasmine, muguet, and musk. Then they assessed both shape
and vibration to see which better predicted a compound’s fragrance. Vibration
won.13 Although the researchers carefully avoided choosing sides in the dispute,
52
smell
they didn’t deny that their findings have practical advantages for chemists in the
scent industry.
Recently, Turin’s hypothesis gained additional support—so much so that
even Nature chalked up a gotcha for Turin.14 Some colleagues of Turin’s at the
University College London created a mathematical model of how the vibrational
interaction between a receptor and an odorant molecule might work.15 In the
model, the receptor has two “wells” separated by an energy barrier. One of the
two wells contains a bound electron that can break loose and tunnel through
the barrier. When the odor molecule binds to the energy barrier site, the electron goes tunneling though it, setting the molecule to vibrating—something like
a pick plucking a guitar string. That triggers a nerve impulse that goes zipping
off to the brain.
Electron tunneling is an intriguing idea, and it explains some facts about
smell, such as how rapidly odors are detected in the brain—in less than a millisecond, the experts who measure such things say.16 Still, the London-based scientists only worked out the mathematics of it; no one has yet observed leaping
electrons in anybody’s nose.17
Perhaps by the time I take my dream trip to London, someone will have.
Chapter 8
Life Without Scent
sk a hundred people on the street which of their five senses they’d be most
willing to give up, and most will answer smell. Yet smell is vital to human
health and survival. It alerts us to danger and disease. Odor often tells us
which foods are safe to eat and which are spoiled. Scent attracts us to friends and
lovers and sends us running when fire, skunks, and chemical spills threaten. Much
of the flavor of food results from our sense of smell, so the pleasure of eating is
impaired in those who lose their olfactory sense—a condition called anosmia.
Theresa Dunlop knows what anosmia is like. She was injured in an accident
in 1974, when she was twelve. “I was hit by a car and flew twenty feet in the air
and landed on my head. I broke my femur bone and wound up in traction and
a body cast. The lump on my head was so bad that my parents would not let me
see myself in a mirror for a month,” Theresa recalls.
No one said anything about the possible sensory effects of the head injury,
but it wasn’t long before Theresa realized she had lost her sense of smell. She
couldn’t remember the smell of her grandma’s cookies or decaying leaves in autumn. She couldn’t recognize the odor of dirty laundry or a burned dinner.
Her anosmia proved hazardous. “Since I was in traction the nurses did not
want to mess with my bedpans at night so they cut me off from drinking by a certain time. One night a nurse brought me nail polish remover in a little cup. When
she got buzzed and went to help someone else, I saw the cup and thought, Oh,
yay! She forgot and left me some water. I shot the polish remover in my mouth
quickly. I never tasted it on my tongue, and it wasn’t until it was burning my
throat that I realized what a dumb thing I had done. I gagged and spit it up.”
A
53
54
smell
The doctors and nurses blamed the incident on Theresa’s poor memory. No
one mentioned her sense of smell. It was years before Theresa understood the
source of her anosmia. “When I was a young adult and going to hairdressing
school, I had to study the bones, nerves, and muscles of the face and head. It was
then that I realized that the scar on my head was the part of the brain that controls the sense of smell.”
Theresa says her anosmia has continued to trouble her in adult life. She had
a baby and couldn’t tell when a diaper needed changing. She was spending so
much time peeking into the diaper that she finally established a schedule, changing the baby by the clock. Theresa has accidentally mixed noxious bathroom
cleaners, growing faint and dizzy as a result. For a long time, she worked as a hairdresser, but she couldn’t smell the fumes of the dyes and perms. The chemicals
gave her headaches, although she was unaware of the cause. “I would not sense
the need to step aside from many smells,” she says. “I would often get nauseous
because the smells seemed to bypass my nose and go straight to my stomach.”
Theresa grew compulsive about cleanliness. She brushed her teeth too often because she couldn’t tell if she had bad breath. She marks on a calendar the
showers her teen sons take; she worries that one of the boys might have body odor
and she won‘t know. Theresa doesn’t wear fragrances. “Once in my life I might
have wanted to hear, ‘Hmmm, you smell good,’ but the one time I tried to use
perfume, I used too much and gagged my family,” she says.
The kitchen poses a special challenge to an anosmic like Theresa, especially
because smell contributes so much to the sense of taste. For a long time, Theresa
consumed several bottles of ketchup weekly and lots of vinegar, too, “just to feel
like I tasted something,” she recalls. “It was very hard to learn to cook. I had to
follow recipes closely. Now, I don’t hog the ketchup bottle anymore, but I do
have tomato sauce several times a week.” To prevent burned dinners, she relies
on family members and smoke detectors in every room. She can’t have a gas
stove; how could she tell if the pilot light went out?
Human beings are remarkably adaptable, and Theresa is no exception. Most
of the time her brain lets her forget about her anosmia, but sometimes her body
reminds her of what she’s lost. “I can smell things one time a month. I think it is
when I am ovulating—no kidding! Once in awhile I say, ‘What’s that smell?’ and
those I love grimace and say, ‘Oh, no,’ because they know PMS is on its way. . . .
On certain days when I get a brief quick whiff of a flower or something unexpectedly, I wish I could have another chance. When I can smell, [the sense] passes
in a micromoment, and it is only once in a blue moon,” Theresa says.1
THE FACTS ABOUT ANOSMIA
Smell disorders come in several forms. Anosmia is the absence of the ability
to smell. Hyposmia is a decreased sense of smell. Dysosmia is an altered per-
Life Without Scent
55
Smelling in Stereo
How do we determine the location of a scent? To find out, one group of researchers led by Leslie Vosshall at Rockefeller University studied fruit-fly
larvae that had scent-detecting neurons only on the left side of the head,
only on the right side of the head, or on both sides. The investigators reasoned that, if two eyes and two ears help locate sights and sounds in threedimensional space, two “noses” might do the same.
To test the larvae, the scientists used infrared light to visualize odor
gradients, so they could see and measure where odor concentrations were
the greatest. They found that a larva needs only one functioning olfactory
neuron to turn toward a pleasant odor or away from a noxious one. But two
neurons increase the “signal-to-noise ratio” of sensory input. Larvae with
both left- and right-side smell cells find their way to a scented target more
accurately than do their single-sided peers. Flies, Vosshall says, smell in
stereo.2
ception of smell and includes the perception of an odor when no odor is present
(phantosmia). It also includes an erroneous perception of an odor (parosmia or
troposmia).
Smell disorders may be more common than most people—including
physicians—realize. A Swedish research team tested nearly 1,400 healthy adults.
They found some smell dysfunction in 19 percent of them (13 percent hyposmia and 6 percent anosmia).3 The incidence of smell disorders is highest among
older adults; it increases with age. A five-year study of nearly 2,500 residents of
Beaver Dam, Wisconsin, ages fifty-three to ninety-seven, found some loss of
the smell sense in one quarter of them. The prevalence increased with age, to the
point where more than 60 percent of those of ages eighty and older were impaired.
Men were more likely than women to experience smell-sense loss, as were smokers and the victims of stroke, epilepsy, chronic nasal congestion, or upper respiratory tract infection. Less than 10 percent of those affected were aware of their
sensory loss.4
The source of anosmia varies among individuals. The problem can lie anywhere along the pathway from the nasal cavity to the recognition centers high in
the forebrain. In some cases, allergies or chronic inflammation of the nasal lining or the sinuses interfere with airflow and keep odorants from entering the nasal
cavity. Head trauma, multiple sclerosis, or Alzheimer’s disease may alter the brain’s
perception of odorants. One study classified the cause of smell dysfunctions as
21 percent sinus and nose disorders, 36 percent occurring after infections of the
56
smell
upper respiratory tract, 17 percent after head trauma, and the remainder of unknown or miscellaneous causes.5 Nasal polyps and diabetes are risk factors for
anosmia, as is amnesia after head trauma that lasts longer than five minutes.6,7
Brain tumors are rarely the cause when smell loss is the only symptom. In
cases such as Theresa’s, in which head trauma produced the loss, MRI scans show
injuries to the olfactory bulb and tract in 88 percent of cases, to the subfrontal
region of the brain in 60 percent, and to the temporal lobe in 32 percent. Generally, the volume of the olfactory bulb is smaller in anosmic patients who experienced head injuries. Some doctors think the reason is damage to the axons
as they run from the sensory neurons of the nose into the glomeruli.8 Scentdetection abilities appear to relate directly to the size of the olfactory bulb. German researchers captured MRIs of the brains of thirteen patients who experienced
partial loss of the smell sense. In the patients who improved over a period of nineteen months, the olfactory bulb of the brain increased in volume.9
How effectively a dysfunction of the smell sense can be treated depends a lot
on its cause. Sinus surgery can remove blockages, but the sense of smell doesn’t
necessarily improve as a result. Inhaled steroids improve the smell sense in some
patients, and systemic steroids help even larger numbers. Phantosmia can be
treated, too. Blocking a nostril can sometimes relieve the perception of a continuous, unpleasant odor. Topical anesthetics and tranquilizers may provide
temporary relief, and surgery can help in some cases.
REVERSING EVERYDAY ANOSMIA
Theresa’s anosmia is irreversible because the scent-sensing region of her brain
was permanently damaged. But the rest of us endure the loss of odor-detecting
neurons every day and we recover nicely. How? Strong smells, colds, allergies,
injuries—many things can damage sensory neurons inside the nose. They die like
any other cell, but the lining of the nose has a remarkable ability to renew itself.
We have a large and friendly flock of stem cells to thank for our frequent and
unconscious recovery from everyday anosmia. Many different kinds of stem cells
get into the act, some of them replacing the neurons, others replacing structural
components of the nose’s lining. Researchers at Johns Hopkins University used
fate-mapping techniques to find out where new smell-sensing neurons in the
nose originate. (The idea behind fate mapping is that you “mark” a cell—with a
dye, a radioactive tracer, or some other signal—and then see where the marker
ends up.)
In mice, the researchers found that cells called horizontal basal cells (HBCs)
lie idle most of the time—so idle that no one really expected them to be worth
much. But the researchers found otherwise. While other kinds of stem cells
handle “daily maintenance” and “minor repairs,” HBCs swing into action when
Life Without Scent
57
Sniffing: Your Smell Machine
It goes something like this. You’re strolling through a nighttime flower market in Bangkok when you catch an evanescent whiff of something alluring.
What’s that? you wonder, and sniff hard to learn more. You sniff repeatedly
—moving purposefully now—and track that delicious fragrance to a stall
bursting with Plumeria.
The sniffing was key; it set you on your mission. Without actively
drawing air into your nose, you might have scarcely noticed the fleeting
impression of a sweet floral scent. With it, you received a strong smell message and followed your nose to its source.
Scientists at the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine wanted
to find out why our sense of smell works better when we sniff. For answers,
they turned to our old friend, the laboratory mouse, which, like a tourist in
a flower market, tends to sniff, sniff, sniff when some interesting odor wafts
through the air.
The researchers titillated tiny mouse noses with the scents of almonds
and bananas in some experiments. In others, the mice got only the pressure
of an unscented solution up their nostrils. The investigators found that the
pressure was not quite as good as an odorant at stimulating scent-sensing
neurons, but it definitely provoked a nerve impulse. The greater the pressure (within reason, of course), the greater the response. Furthermore, they
found that odorant molecules and mechanical pressure work the same
way; an intermediate messenger molecule called cAMP (cyclic adenosine
monophosphate) activates the nerve impulse, whether the stimulus is scent
or pressure.10
“The mechanosensitivity may increase the sensitivity of our nose, especially when stimulated by weak odors,” says Minghong Ma, leader of the
study and a professor of neuroscience at Penn. “We still don’t know how it
happens, but sniffing is essential for odor perception.”11
major nose reconstruction is called for. They are the emergency squad that dashes
to the rescue, regenerating both neuronal and nonneuronal cells after a major
disaster.12
Without them (if we are like mice, anyway), we’d all be anosmic like Theresa.
Perhaps, also, we’d value our sense of smell more. Theresa is one of the fortunate
ones; she has learned to cope with her anosmia. Some people aren’t so lucky.
Anosmia can have serious psychological effects, including feelings of physical
58
smell
and social vulnerability and victimization. People with anosmia can develop eating disorders because their food loses its flavor. Anosmics can feel alone and misunderstood, with all the zest gone from their lives—both literally and figuratively.
Theresa hopes that her story will lead all of us to appreciate our sense of smell
as she would—if only she could get hers back.
Chapter 9
The Sweaty Scent of Sex
Y
our doctor eyes you gravely. “I don’t think you have a VNO,” she says.
“You do, however, have TAARs.”
Is it time to check your life insurance policy and prepay the crematorium?
No.
Your doctor’s diagnosis tells you that you are a healthy human capable (probably) of responding to the chemical signals other humans emit. You may not have
the VNO (vomeronasal organ, a structure in the nose) that other mammals use
for that purpose. Or, if you do—and there is an area in your nose that is a likely
candidate—it doesn’t work the same way as it does in other mammals.
You do, however, possess an important class of receptors in your olfactory
cells called TAARs (trace amine-associated receptors).1 TAARs may well be the
reason that women who live together menstruate at the same time. They may
also explain why human males and females choose romantic partners with immune systems different—but not too different!—from their own.
All this has to do with pheromones, the chemical substances released by one
individual that have some effect on the physiology or behavior of another. You
don’t smell pheromones the way you smell baking bread or smoldering rubber,
but you respond to them anyway—unconsciously. Or do you? Some experts say
humans have evolved past pheromonal effects. Others say pheromones are the
invisible guests of honor at most of the 2.4 million weddings that take place each
year in the United States, not to mention millions more worldwide.2
Let’s look at the evidence.
59
60
smell
NO VNO? NO PROBLEM
For a long time, the debate about humans and pheromones languished in
the VNO pit. It is well known that other mammals respond to pheromones via
the VNO—the impulses it sends acting as a direct line to brain regions that trigger significant behaviors such as mating. Anatomists and physiologists spent a
lot of time arguing about whether humans have a VNO and whether it is functional. So, despite mounting evidence that chemical substances in the sweat and
urine of one human affect the behavior of another human, the argument stalled.
You can’t respond to a chemical signal if you have no cells, tissues, or organs to
detect it.
The VNO debate remains unresolved still, although a region of the human
nose has been identified as the site for a VNO—but no one is sure whether it
functions. Nevertheless, the argument moved away from the VNO in 2006 when
Stephen Liberles and Linda Buck reported on TAARs. TAARs are receptors in
olfactory cells, but you can’t use them to smell the roses. No one knows yet what
TAARs do in humans, but when Liberles and Buck studied mice, they found
some specific pheromonal effects. One type of TAAR binds to a male hormone
that prompts female mice to enter puberty. Several other types bind to sex hormones that are naturally excreted in the urine of males, but not females. Using
TAARs, Liberles and Buck said, “[M]ice could, in principle, determine the gender and sexual status of other mice.”3 If TAARs can do this in mice, they might
do something similar in people. Mice have fifteen TAARs; humans have six.
PHEROMONES AND THE MATING DANCE
The debate about the VNO and TAARs will probably remain unresolved for
a while, but there’s no shortage of evidence that something chemical is going on
when first comes love, then comes marriage, then comes an older and wiser couple with a baby carriage, diaper bag, and second mortgage. Ladies, your higher
brain centers may have a sense of humor, intelligence, and good looks in mind
when you choose a partner, but your pheromones are looking for a good mate—
one who will help you make strong, healthy babies. That’s where the apparent
ability of human females to assess the immune systems of potential sexual partners comes in. The key lies in a large segment of DNA called the major histocompatibility complex (MHC). The MHC codes for proteins that lie on the
surfaces of cells. Those proteins allow the immune system to distinguish “self”
from “nonself”—that is to tell one’s own proteins (Harmless. Leave them alone)
from the proteins of an invading virus or bacterium (Danger! Attack and destroy!).
A major histocompatibility system in humans is called human leukocyte antigen
(HLA). The more alike the HLA types of two individuals, the more alike are their
The Sweaty Scent of Sex
61
Scent and the Single Sperm
The same odors that attract male to female may also attract sperm to egg.
In 2004 Leslie Vosshall of Rockefeller University reported that one odorantreceptor, called hOR 17-4, directs movement toward a mate. Vosshall tested
tissue-cultured cells with hOR 17-4 receptors to see what odorants bound
to them. She found a strong bond to bourgeonal, an odorant that the human nose–brain combo perceives as a pleasant floral scent similar to lily of
the valley. Human sperm cells detect bourgeonal, too, although the brain
doesn’t know it. Watch human sperm under a microscope and see what
they do when you add a drop of bourgeonal. They swim toward it. Human
eggs probably don’t produce bourgeonal, but they make something chemically similar—so similar that the molecule fits the hOR 17-4 receptor on
sperm. Thus, as Vosshall puts it, “[M]ammalian sperm are indeed capable
of ‘smelling’ their way to the egg.”4 (This begs further speculation: Could
bourgeonal be used as a fertility enhancer, urging lazy sperm to get a move
on? Could a bourgeonal blocker act as an effective contraceptive?)
immune systems; that’s why HLA-typing is done to find a good donor–recipient
match for transplanted organs.
Apparently, the female nose and brain can do a little HLA-typing of their
own. University of Chicago researchers worked with forty-nine unmarried women,
average age twenty-five. The women weren’t using contraceptives and had never
been pregnant. The scientists had six male volunteers wear T-shirts for two consecutive nights. The men avoided odorous foods, pets, cigarette smoke, colognes,
and other strong scents. For the test sessions, the researchers put pieces of the
T-shirts in foil-lined cardboard boxes. The women could smell the shirts through
small holes in the boxes, but they didn’t know they were smelling male bodies.
To keep everybody honest, some of the boxes contained clean shirts (no scent)
or shirts scented with chlorine bleach or clove oil.
The women selected the odor they’d most like to live with and the one they
would choose to avoid. The researchers compared each woman’s odor choices
to her own HLA type. The results were dramatic. There was no preferred or disliked odor across the average of all women. Instead, odor preferences were unique
to individuals and related to HLA type. Individual females selected as their favorite odors those that had some matches to their own HLA type, but not too
many. The women rejected HLA types too similar or too dissimilar to their own.
This detection was so powerful that women could discriminate the body odors
of men who had but a single HLA gene different from their own.5
62
smell
Men Who Stink
“He just came in from the gym smelling like a skunk, and he’s forgotten to
flush the toilet again. What a turnoff!” women complain, but not quite in
unison. Although women generally have more sensitive noses than men,
some females find the odor of male urine rather pleasant, and some don’t
notice that locker-room stench at all. The reason lies in the genes.
The odor receptor OR7D4 attaches to a molecule of androstenone, a
breakdown product of the male hormone testosterone that’s present in
urine and sweat. There are two forms of the gene for that receptor. Call one
R and the other W. Ladies, if you received the RR gene combination from
your parents, chances are that an unflushed toilet offends your senses
mightily. You may not be so offended, however, if you received the RW pair.
Some women with this gene combo dislike the odor, but it doesn’t drive
them nuts. Others can’t smell androstenone at all. Still others find the smell
of androstenone quite pleasant; it smells like vanilla to them.6
As for that disgusting locker room scent, it all lies in receptor OR11H7P,
which binds to a compound in sweat called isovaleric acid. If you have at
least one functional gene for that receptor, you’ll throw your sweaty sweetheart a towel and a bar of soap as he walks in the door. If you possess a mutated gene pair, you won’t mind that locker-room stench a bit.7
Although some studies have produced slightly different results, most find
some kind of link between scent detection in females and HLA type. And it does
seem to be a uniquely feminine capacity. When Brazilian researchers had both
males and females do the sniffing of opposite-sex T-shirts, the women performed
as expected. The men showed no scent preferences for HLA types.8
A MOLECULE IN SWEAT
Much of the early research on pheromone effects in humans was done with
sweat. Sweat contains many components, and it’s impossible to know which one
accounts for an observed response. Sweat also has a detectable odor, so it’s hard to
know whether the response is unconsciously pheromonal or consciously olfactory.
To simplify their experimental designs and fine-tune their interpretations,
scientists have recently zeroed in on androstadienone (AND). AND is a steroid
found in men’s plasma, sweat, semen, and saliva. (Women have it, too, but in
smaller amounts.) Several studies have found that AND reduces nervousness,
tension, and other negative mood states in females.9 It’s not a conscious response
to smell; in such experiments, all solutions are typically scented with a masking
The Sweaty Scent of Sex
63
“But I’m Gay . . .”
Similar findings apply. Gay people respond to pheromones, too, but with
a different pattern of brain activity. Researchers in Sweden used PET to
study brain responses to pheromones in homosexual men, compared to
heterosexual men and women. The team used male AND and another
compound EST, an estrogen derivative found in women’s urine.
EST increased activity in the smell-processing centers in women, but
not in the hypothalamus. In heterosexual men, it triggered increased activity in the hypothalamus.
AND showed the opposite pattern. It revved up the hypothalamus in
women and the smell-processing regions in men.
In the Swedish study, the gay men’s response to AND and EST was the
same as the women’s.10 (Lesbian women have also been studied, but the
results seem less clear.)
This suggests that the hypothalamic response to pheromones relates
not to anatomical gender, but to sexual orientation. The question of cause
and effect, however, cannot be resolved. Whether sexual orientation evokes
the brain response—or whether the brain response shapes sexual orientation
—remains a mystery.
odor—such as cloves—so the women don’t perceive any particular “eau de man.”
Nonetheless, women who sniff AND report feeling more stimulated and in a
better mood than those who sniff a control solution.11
Scientists at the Helen Wills Neuroscience Institute at Berkeley measured
levels of the hormone cortisol in the saliva of women who smelled pure AND.
The idea of this experiment was to see if AND could affect more than mood.
Could it affect body chemistry as well? If did. Smelling AND produced elevated
levels of cortisol in the women.12 The level rose within fifteen minutes and
stayed high for an hour. Cortisol is an arousal hormone; it’s also associated with
stress. (Hmm. There’s a paradox to ponder.)
The study on cortisol doesn’t settle the question of which comes first, mood
or a chemical shift. The researchers report, “We cannot unequivocally determine whether AND influenced cortisol, which then influenced mood, or in turn,
whether AND influenced mood through some nonhormonal mechanism, and
the change in mood then led to a change in cortisol.”13
It’s possible that pheromones may not influence behavior directly, like a
switch, but rather indirectly, like mood lighting. Perhaps pheromones don’t trigger specific behaviors as much as they induce mood states that make particular
64
smell
behaviors more likely. This view gains support from research that uncovers only
“context-dependent” effects of AND. In some studies, women show certain responses to AND only when the experimenter is male or a male is present in the
room.14 In other studies, effects are seen only when the test situation is sexually
arousing, as in watching sexually explicit films.15
PHEROMONES AND THE BRAIN
When investigators look at brain activity, they find some AND-induced responses. One team of researchers used positron emission tomography (PET) scans
to examine women’s brain activity while the women performed a visual task.
When exposed to AND during the task, the women showed heightened activities
in brain regions associated with vision, emotion, and attention.16
The brain doesn’t handle pheromonal cues the same way it handles other
impulses that come in from the nose. For one thing, the processing is faster.17
For another, the processing takes a different path through the brain. Researchers
at McGill University in Montreal used PET to study the brains of individuals
responding to ordinary odors as compared with the body odors of friends and
strangers. The team found that a separate network processes body odors. Smelling
a friend’s body odor activated brain regions that handle familiar stimuli. Smelling
a stranger activated the amygdala and insular regions, much the same as the patterns seen in studies of fear.18
The PET studies also reveal differences in how men and women respond to
AND.19 In women, brain activity increases in the hypothalamus region, not
in the brain’s usual smell-processing centers. The hypothalamus, which lies at
the base of the brain, plays a big role in hormonal changes and sexual behavior.
Men demonstrate the opposite pattern. They show greater activity in the smellprocessing regions of the brain, and only there. This came as a surprise to researchers; they seldom see gender differences in olfaction.
TAARS AND THE VNO
Any way you cut it, the scent-of-sex discussion still pivots around the question of how humans can detect molecules that are not smelled but are somehow
perceived. More evidence that TAARs may be the mechanism came in 2008
from an expected source: bird researchers in Germany. Like humans, birds lack
a VNO. So the researchers combed libraries of chicken genes. The scientists
found three TAARs of the same type as the human/mouse genes for TAAR1,
TAAR2, and TAAR5. TAAR5 is known to be activated by compounds found in
bird feces. So it’s possible that TAARs are working in birds, humans, and other
animals that lack a functioning VNO.20
Chapter 10
Express Train to Happiness
romatherapy speaks to something in my soul. I got hooked on it when I
lived in England. I was teaching biology to more than one hundred highly
hormonal adolescents daily, and my stress quotient was off the charts. A
friend referred me to the local reflexologist and aromatherapist Mrs. Ophelia
Bone. (I did not make up that name. There is an explanation. She wasn’t born a
Bone, so her parents are not to blame; she married a Bone, so her husband is.)
Mrs. Bone (I never called her anything else) had magic fingers and a magic
cabinet full of sweet-smelling oils. She’d rub my feet, massage my aching muscles, and send me home with my personal mixture of oils, the concoction guaranteed to soothe away the miseries my students inflicted on me: lost homework,
vandalized textbooks, failed exams, cheating (some), cursing (more), acid spills
(one), and the complete range of crises that constitute the alpha to omega of a
high school teacher’s workday.
The potions worked, or so I believed and continue to believe to this day.
Thus, because of Ophelia Bone’s prowess, I am a believer in aromatherapy. I
have no doubt that lavender soothes frazzled nerves, sandalwood relieves depression, peppermint improves memory, and lemon boosts sagging spirits. I have
a cupboard full of essential oils to prove my devotion.
How might Mrs. Bone and I have fared had our devotion been tested in the
scientific laboratory? Maybe not as well as we both believe.
A
65
66
smell
PUTTING AROMATHERAPY TO THE TEST
It’s one thing to believe in aromatherapy and quite another to demonstrate
and measure its psychological or physical effects. Researchers have attempted to
do both with mixed results.
For example, some evidence suggests that aromas can improve performance
on various tasks. In one study, French researchers found that reaction times on
simple tasks (responses to sight or sound cues) were shorter in an odor-infused
environment compared to an odor-free condition.1 The improvement occurred
whether the odor was pleasant or unpleasant, perhaps because odors increase
arousal levels, making subjects more alert.
Japanese researchers studied students who worked at a computer in onehour intervals. During break times, the students smelled lavender, jasmine, or
no odor at all. Like most of us, the students’ concentration was poorest in the
afternoon, when drowsiness sets in; but those who smelled lavender during their
break performed better at that time. Jasmine and water had no such effect.2
Odors may influence how we view others. Scientists in the United Kingdom
showed men’s pictures to women, asking them to rate each man’s attractiveness
on a nine-point scale. While viewing the pictures, the women had pleasant (geranium or a male fragrance), unpleasant (rubber or body odor), or no odor in the
room. The women rated the faces as significantly less attractive when they smelled
the unpleasant odor than when they smelled either no odor or a pleasant odor. It
didn’t matter whether the odors were relevant to male bodies (the body odor and
the male fragrance) or not (the rubber and geranium odors).3
Some evidence suggests that odors may even influence dreams. German
researchers piped the odors of rotten eggs or roses into rooms where research
volunteers slept. Subjects who slept in the foul-smelling place reported negative
dreams. Those who slept with roses dreamed happy dreams.4
Emotional changes in response to odors can be tracked in the brain. French
researchers used PET to monitor regional changes in brain activity when various kinds of cues were presented (compared with no stimuli at all). Whether
the cue was sight, sound, or scent, pleasant and unpleasant stimuli—judged
“emotionally charged” by the researchers—triggered increased activity in the
brain’s orbitofrontal cortex, temporal lobe, and superior frontal gyrus. Emotionally charged odors and sights (but not sounds) yielded greater activity in the hypothalamus and the subcallosal gyrus. Scent produced a unique result that sights
and sounds did not: It increased brain activity in the amygdala, one of the brain’s
emotion-producing centers.5
Brain studies using functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) have
shown that the left side of the brain is more active in odor processing among
right-handed people, and vice versa. Making a decision about odor pleasantness
Express Train to Happiness
67
Unhappy? Can’t Smell a Thing
If smell can affect mood, can mood affect the sense of smell? Apparently yes.
A research team in Germany showed pleasant and unpleasant pictures
to volunteers before rating performance on smell tests. After viewing unpleasant pictures, subjects rated test odors as less pleasant and more intense.
After viewing pleasant pictures, odors too seemed more pleasant. The effects were related to mood changes, the researchers said.6
increases activity in the orbitofrontal cortex. During odor perception, the orbitofrontal cortex is more active in women than men, which may explain, in part,
why women are usually better at identifying odors than are men. Unpleasant
odors activate the amygdala and insula more than pleasant odors do, perhaps because unpleasant odors are more emotionally arousing.7
AROMAS AND PAIN
Things get more complicated when we get to the subject of pain. It’s possible that scent can diminish pain—in fact, some researchers find that it does.
The reasons why are unclear. Perhaps odors distract attention away from pain.
Researchers at the McGill Centre for Research on Pain in Montreal used heatinduced pain and pleasant and unpleasant odors to manipulate the attention and
emotional state of volunteers. Shifts in attention between heat and smells did not
alter mood or anxiety, but when people paid attention to their pain, they judged
it as more intense than when they paid attention to the odor.8
Or maybe a scent puts the pain sufferer in a better mood, so the pain seems
less distressing. In one experiment, researchers piped the scent of orange or
lavender into the waiting room of a dental office. They measured the effects of
the scents on anxiety, mood, alertness, and calmness compared to music alone
and a control environment (no odor, no music). They found that both the orange and the lavender reduced anxiety and improved mood compared to music
alone or the no-music–no-scent condition. The researchers concluded that fragrance can alter emotional states and make dentistry more tolerable.9
A study at the University of Florida College of Dentistry compared how subjects rated heat and pressure pain after inhaling lavender, rosemary, and distilled
water (the control). Subjects didn’t rate their pain any differently during the session, but after the session they were more positive. They remembered their pain
as less intense and less unpleasant when they had smelled the lavender—and, to
a lesser extent, the rosemary.10
68
smell
Odors and Memories
Talk about instant travel in space and time! It seems nothing can take you
back to a memory faster than an odor. The experience is called the Proust
phenomenon. It’s named for the French novelist who described a flood of
childhood memories that came back to him after he smelled a madeleine
pastry dipped in linden tea.
It’s hard to argue with Proust’s idea. In our everyday experience, it
seems that nothing jogs the memory better than a smell. To qualify as the
Proust phenomenon, however, an odor-prompted memory needs to be
sudden, autobiographical, old, vivid, and emotional. There’s evidence for
all those things. In a series of experiments, Swedish researchers presented
nearly one hundred older adults with one of three cue types: a word, a picture, or an odor. They asked each person to describe any autobiographical
memory that came to mind after the cue. The scientists found that odor
cues triggered older memories than the words and pictures did. Most of the
odor-cued memories came from the earliest years of life, when the people
were younger than ten. Memories evoked by words and pictures came mostly
from adolescence and young adulthood, ages eleven to twenty. Odorprompted memories carried with them “stronger feelings of being brought
back in time and had been thought of less often than memories evoked by
verbal and visual information.”11
In another series of experiments, the Swedish researchers gave seventytwo older adults one of three cues: odor only, name only, or odor-plus-name.
Again, they asked their subjects to describe autobiographical memories. As
before, the smell-induced memories carried with them the most intense
emotional responses, but words got in the way. The odor-plus-name condition dampened the trend toward memories from the earliest years. Subjective ratings of pleasantness and feelings of going back in time decreased
when odors and their names were presented together.12
The big question, however, is whether odor is better than sight or sound
at bringing back memories. Rachel Herz, a psychologist at Brown University, says it isn’t. She used words, pictures, and odors of campfires, fresh-cut
grass, and popcorn to elicit autobiographical memories in volunteers. She
found that odor-evoked memories were more emotional and evocative
than those prompted by the other cues, but she found no difference in the
vividness or specificity of the memories:13
What I found in these experiments is that, in terms of their accuracy, detail, and vividness, our recollections triggered by scents are
Express Train to Happiness
69
just as good as our memories elicited by seeing, hearing, or touching an item—but no more so. Yet our memories triggered by odors
are distinctive in one important way: their emotionality. We list
more emotions, rate our emotions as having greater intensity, report our memories as being more emotionally laden, and state that
we feel more strongly a sense of being back in the original time
and place when a scent elicits the past than when the same event
is triggered in any other way.14
The structures and functions of the brain explain the Proust phenomenon, Herz thinks. She and her team took fMRI pictures of women’s brains
while the volunteers retrieved personal memories. The scans showed greater
activity in the amygdala and hippocampus when memories were triggered
by an odor—as compared to other cues to memory. The women’s emotional responses were greatest with odor cues, too.15 Both the amygdala and
the hippocampus play important roles in memory formation. Both are
centers for emotional processing as well.
However, not all studies confirm that odor relieves pain. Smells may, in fact,
make pain worse. In one study in the U.K., volunteers dunked their hands and
forearms in freezing water while smelling a pleasant odor (lemon), an unpleasant
odor (machine oil), or no odor. They rated the severity of their pain at five-minute
intervals for fifteen minutes. At five minutes, those smelling either a pleasant
or an unpleasant odor reported greater pain than did the no-odor subjects. At fifteen minutes, pain was greater in the unpleasant-odor group. Thus, in this case,
odor didn’t relieve pain; it exacerbated it.16
Some studies suggest that the pain-relieving effects of odor—if they exist—
vary by gender. Canadian researchers reported that pleasing odors produced a
positive mood in both men and women. Unpleasant odors produced a negative
mood in both sexes. But pain relief was different. Only women gained pain relief
from pleasant scents.17
AROMATHERAPY REVISITED
The team of researchers at Ohio State University who recently took an objective look into aromatherapy might have accepted Mrs. Bone and me into their
study. Some of the fifty-six male and female healthy volunteers for the aromatherapy research project were believers. Others were skeptics, or they just didn’t
have much of an opinion about aromatherapy one way or another.
70
smell
The Scent of Impatience
Walk into many supermarkets and you’ll immediately notice the scent of
freshly baked bread or pastries. In some cases, the fragrance is not coming
from the bakery. It’s actually piped into the ventilation system and blown
at customers as they enter the door. There’s a reason. Good smells do more
than make you hungry. They make you eager to get what you want now . . .
and the object of your desire needn’t be food!
As part of her doctoral research at the University of Toronto, Singaporean Xiuping Li asked thirty-six females how happy they would be if they
won $100 in the lottery now, in three months, in six months, or one year
to two years from now. The women rated their happiness of a scale of 0 to
100. Half of the participants answered the question in an unscented room.
Half worked in a chocolate-chip-cookie–scented environment.
The cookie-scented participants devalued delayed gains. They wanted
their money immediately and were less happy than those in the unscented
environment about future wealth. When tested for the likelihood of making an unplanned and unnecessary purchase (such as a nice sweater), 67
percent in the cookie-scented room were more likely to do so—compared
to only 17 percent in the unscented room.18
The subjects wore cotton balls infused with lemon oil, lavender oil, or distilled water taped below their noses during three days of testing. Heart rates and
blood pressures were monitored. Blood samples were taken. Subjects took psychological tests of mood and perceived stress; they played word games that evaluated
their emotional states. Their ability to heal was measured on a patch of skin to
which tape was repeatedly applied and removed. Reactions to pain were gauged
when the subjects put their feet in ice water.
It sounds like a tough regimen to me, but I’d have made it through, and I
think Mrs. Bone would have, too—for the sake of science. Neither of us would
have been too keen on the results, however. Aromatherapy failed most of its tests.
Neither lemon nor lavender had any effect on pain ratings, stress hormones,
wound healing, or the immune system. Sadly, in some cases, distilled water performed better.
One ray of light emerged from the darkness, however. Lemon improved the
self-reported mood of the volunteers. (After all they went through, I think something should have!) The heightened happiness occurred regardless of expectations or subjects’ previous experiences and their views on aromatherapy.19 Mrs.
Bone and I would have cheered loudly at that.
Express Train to Happiness
71
Name That Scent
Calling a rose by another name does change its smell. That’s the conclusion of researchers at the Montreal Neurological Institute. They had forty
people smell fifteen different odors on three separate occasions. The odors
were inherently pleasant, unpleasant, or neutral, but they were presented
with different names. Positive names were labels like banana bread, peanut
butter, or spearmint gum. Negative names included dry vomit, old turpentine, or insect repellant. Neutral names were simply two-digit numbers such
as 53 or 28.
The researchers measured their subjects’ skin conductance, a generally reliable measure of an emotional response. Subjects also related how
pleasant and intense they thought the odors were. Names affected all the
outcomes, but most strongly the judgment of pleasantness. The same odors
were judged more pleasant when presented with a positive name than
when presented with a neutral or negative name. Intensity ratings were
affected, too. The people rated odorants as stronger when they were linked
with negative names than with positive or neutral words.20
Physical measures bore out the differences in ratings. Skin conductance
increased when odors were presented with positive or negative names. The
scientists concluded that a rose by the name “rotting flower” would not smell
as sweet.
So I won’t clean out my aromatherapy cupboard quite yet, and I doubt Mrs.
Bone will either. “The human body is infinitely complex,” says William Malarkey,
one of the authors of the study. “If an individual patient uses these oils and feels
better, there’s no way we can prove it doesn’t improve that person’s health.”21
This page intentionally left blank
PART THREE
TASTE
Taste’s importance to our daily lives is self-evident in its
metaphors—for example the “sweetness” of welcoming
a newborn child, the “bitterness” of defeat, the “souring”
of a relationship, and describing a truly good human as the
“salt” of the earth.
—Paul A. S. Breslin
Monell Chemical Senses Center
2008
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 11
The Bitter Truth
remember my seventh-grade science class. We were all seated around wet
sinks and gas jets, armed with cotton swabs and little bottles of clear solutions
labeled sweet, sour, salty, and bitter. Our mission: to map our tongues. By
swabbing small amounts of the lemon juice and sugar water onto different areas
of our tongues, we were supposed to “discover” the tongue map shown in our
textbook. Our book’s diagram showed which areas of the tongue respond uniquely
to which flavors. If you couldn’t match the illustration in the book, you weren’t
doing the lab right or there was something wrong with your tongue.
I was careful about how I dipped and swabbed, so there was definitely something wrong with my tongue. I mostly tasted nothing, tasted the same thing no
matter where I put the swab on my tongue, tasted something different from what
the bottle said, or managed to gag myself on the swab. Surreptitiously (because
Miss Chedister tolerated no slackers), I glanced around the room. It looked as if
the same thing was happening to everybody else, even Jenni Simpson who never
got anything less than an A+ and Wayne McArthur who didn’t know his tongue
from his ear. We all did pretty well on that lab, though. With our colored pencils, we copied the tongue map from the textbook onto our lab reports. Chalk up
another breakthrough in science.
I came away from that experience vaguely uncomfortable with science. Sure,
the orderliness of the universe—and the sciences that describe it—remained unmarred. My tongue map looked like it was supposed to, and so did everybody
else’s. But it was all a tacitly agreed-upon lie—my tongue told me that—and if
science isn’t truth, it isn’t anything—at least, that’s what I thought in the seventh
grade. Maybe I still do.
I
75
76
taste
TASTING THE TRUTH
Some of us carry our seventh-grade obsessions into our dotage, so I never got
over the bitter betrayal that stuck on my palate when I learned, a few decades
later, that tongue maps are bunk. “There isn’t any ‘tongue map,’” says Yale’s
Linda Bartoshuk, and she should know.1 She spent years asking people to suck
on little pieces of paper that contained a harmless chemical called PROP (6-npropylthiouracil). Some people can’t taste PROP at all. Others find it slightly
bitter. But some people are a threat to Bartoshuk‘s life and career; the taste of
PROP is so bitter for them that they want to bite somebody, and she is nearby.
Bartoshuk swabbed blue food coloring on the tongues of her hapless victims
(in the name of science, of course). Her blue food coloring stained areas of the
tongue that lack taste buds. The fungiform papillae (where many of the taste
buds are located) stay pink. (They are called fungiform because they are shaped
like mushrooms.) She found that people who don’t taste PROP have the smallest number of fungiform papillae. Those who taste it the most have the largest
number.2 It’s the number that matters, not the location—and the number comes
from your parents. Get too many taster genes from your mom and dad and
you dislike PROP so much that you won’t eat your spinach, cabbage, or Brussels
sprouts. They taste too bitter.5
So who perpetrated this tongue-map hoax on three generations of seventhgraders? Blame the Germans . . . and Harvard. In 1901 a fellow named Hanig
published his Ph.D. dissertation. In it, he drew a numberless graph that showed
certain areas of the tongue to be more sensitive to certain tastes than others. Forty
years later, Harvard professor Edwin Boring manipulated Hanig’s data into a graph
with real numbers that looked impressive. The tip of the tongue tasted sweets,
his graph seemed to show. Bitter-taste sensitivity lay in the back. Sour tastes registered along the edges, while saltiness worked just about everywhere.
The map failed to acknowledge the fifth flavor, umami, which is generally
accepted today as the reason why rib-eye steaks and baby back ribs are so popular (and why cholesterol-lowering drugs are so widely prescribed). The map survived because it was simple to use and pretty to look at, until a new generation
of molecular scientists showed that all taste buds everywhere on the tongue and
palate respond to all flavors. As for tongue maps, “Your brain doesn’t care where
taste is coming from in your mouth,” Bartoshuk says.6
IT’S ALL IN THE RECEPTORS
Taste buds are clusters of about fifty to one hundred taste cells, and it’s not
the bud that’s all that important, but the individual cells. Since you probably
don’t have access to PROP, get some of your taste cells going by putting a spoonful of dry instant coffee in your mouth. Unless you are ageusic, your mouth will
The Bitter Truth
77
Defining Taste and Flavor
Scientists insist on a distinction between taste and flavor. Taste impulses
begin in the taste buds and are usually said to be limited to five: sweet, salty,
sour, bitter, and umami (or savory). Umami, which confuses everybody
who isn’t Japanese, has been described as “brothy” or “meaty.” It is said to
be the taste of amino acids or protein foods in general, or the amino acid
glutamate in particular. The best way to appreciate umami is to sprinkle
some Parmesan cheese on your tongue.
Flavor is more complex than taste alone. It results from a blending of
taste with smell, as well as touch detectors that inform the brain of a food’s
temperature, crunchiness, chewiness, sliminess, or creaminess. That’s why
lemon meringue pie, lemonade, and lemon chicken taste hardly anything
alike.
Fat, which everybody loves, has always been considered a flavor, not a
taste—mostly dependent on smell or “mouth feel.” But that view is disputed.
A few years back, researchers at Purdue University found that the levels of
fat in the blood rise when we do nothing more than put fat in our mouths—
no swallowing or digesting required.3 To learn more, the scientists recruited
some volunteers who took safflower oil capsules after fasting overnight. After that, some tasted cream cheese but didn’t smell it; some smelled cream
cheese but didn’t taste it; some both smelled and tasted it; some did neither. Those who both tasted and smelled the cream cheese had blood fat
levels triple that of the controls. But fat levels rose as much in those who
only tasted (didn’t smell) the cream cheese as in those who did both. Blood
fat didn’t rise above the baseline in people who smelled the cheese but
didn’t taste it. The conclusion? Fat may someday join the “big five” in our
basic menu of tastes.
Another taste sensation is jockeying for position seven on the list. In
2008 researchers at the Monell Chemical Senses Center in Philadelphia
announced that mice can taste calcium. They studied forty different strains
of mice, some of which lap up calcium water like it’s ice cream. The scientists found two receptors on the tongue that bind calcium; one is T1R3,
a receptor better known for responding to sweet tastes. Because mice and
humans share many of the same genes for taste receptors, the Monell researchers think humans may be able to taste calcium, too.4
pucker, and you’ll have no trouble recognizing the coffee’s bitter flavor. That
happens because of a “family” of protein receptors in your taste cells inelegantly
78
taste
named T2R1, T2R2, T2R3, and so on. What’s a receptor? It’s like a slip for a boat.
It’s a little docking place where chemicals can “tie up” for a while.
The T2Rs are found (or not found) in various taste cells. The T2R receptors
are tailor-made for latching onto the molecules of all things bitter. When submicroscopic bits of bitterness tie up to T2R docks, taste cells start chattering.
Only a few of the individual cells have a direct connection to a nerve, but the
entire taste bud does, so all this molecular “talk” forces the taste bud to send a
signal. With all that dry coffee in your mouth, the brain responds with the neurological equivalent of a grimace. Since most things bitter are also poisonous, you’d
best give up coffee. (Or maybe not. There are exceptions to every rule.)
Bitter isn’t the only taste that works that way. Each of the five basic flavors—
bitter, sweet, sour, salty, and umami—has its own specialized receptors and its own
specialized cells where specific receptors operate, say biologists at the University
of California at San Diego. UCSD scientist Charles Zuker (now at Columbia
University Medical Center) and his collaborator Nicholas Ryba of the National
Institutes of Health have identified about thirty receptors for bitter, but they have
found only three for sweet and umami. They named them T1R1, T1R2, and
T1R3. The T1Rs work together, not independently. The main reason we taste
sweets is that T1R2 and T1R3 reside in the same taste cells and play together
well. High concentrations of sugars, but not other sweet things, are handled by
T1R3 alone. The umami taste receptor appears to be a complex of two receptors,
T1R1 and T1R3. The complex is shaped like a Venus flytrap. When the amino
acid glutamate, which is believed to be the source of the umami taste, lands inside the flytrap, the flytrap closes around it, and the umami taste sensation is
born.7 Zuker, Ryba, and their colleagues have found the receptor for sour, too;
it is called PKD2L1. They haven’t found the salty receptors yet, but they are
working on it.
It’s all as neat and tidy as the tongue map in my seventh-grade textbook—
and equally unsatisfying. I’ve always been in love with science, but I’ve learned
that even those we adore have their flaws. If scientists could accept for decades a
misinterpretation of a graph that had no numbers, I’m suspicious of pat answers
about boats at docks that explain everything from bitter English ale (which I love)
to bitter rotten tomatoes (which I don’t) in two paragraphs. I want to know, How
do they know that? Can those researchers in San Diego and Bethesda see little
bitterness molecules tying up like boats? Can they see impulses traveling along
nerve cells like waves along a slinky toy? I don’t think so.
What they can do, however, is identify which genes (pieces of DNA) code
for which proteins. They can then breed mice that don’t have those genes so the
animals don’t make those proteins. They call these mice “knockout” mice, because the researchers can remove (knock out) a particular gene and then see how
it affects the mouse’s health, appearance, behavior—or, in this case, taste pref-
The Bitter Truth
79
erences. The scientists can also give to the mice particular genes the animals
wouldn’t naturally have—in this case, human taste receptor genes.
Taste researchers measure taste preferences in mice by counting how many
times the animals lick at some flavored water, as compared to plain water. More
licks: the mice like the taste. Fewer licks: they are tasting something bad. So in
one experiment, Zuker and Ryba knocked out the gene for the T2R5 receptorprotein that latches onto the compound cycloheximide. Both humans and mice
normally find that substance disgustingly bitter. But mice that didn’t have T2R5
in their taste cells didn‘t care if cycloheximide was in their water. They licked
away happily, oblivious to the bitter taste.
In another experiment, the research team engineered mice to make T2Rs
from humans that mice don’t normally have. Those particular T2Rs are the reason PTC (phenylthiocarbamide) and salicin taste bitter to most humans. The
engineered animals turned away from their PTC- and salicin-laced waters just
as humans would—and ordinary mice wouldn’t.8
So far so good, but that’s only cause by association, isn’t it? To prove that the
T2Rs are the receptors for bitter substances, Zuker and Ryba had to prove that
bitter compounds were docking in the T2R slips. They couldn’t do that in living
animals, but they were able to in cells grown in culture dishes. Their research
confirmed that at least one category of bitter taste receptors had been identified,
but there was a lot more to learn.9
FROM MOUTH TO BRAIN
Life would be a lot simpler for taste researchers if single taste cells contained
only one kind of receptor and responded to only one taste. But things are never
that simple. One complication is that the cells in taste buds that have receptors
aren’t the same ones as the cells that send taste messages to the brain. Therefore,
chemical messengers must get the requisite information to the impulse-sending
neurons and get a signal started. Two candidates for the messenger role are the
neurotransmitters ATP (adenosine triphosphate) and serotonin. Only receptor
cells release ATP, and only impulse-generating cells release serotonin. Those
substances (among others probably) carry out the cell-to-cell signaling needed
to get a taste message traveling.10
There is another complication. Taste cells can contain more than one kind
of receptor and neighboring taste cells “talk” to one another. The brain’s ability
to sort out the message from all this chatter—between bitter and sweet, anyway
(salty and sour are probably different)—may lie in another category of chemicals, some short chains of amino acids called peptides, which are the building
blocks of proteins. Two molecules of interest are neuropeptide Y (NPY) and
cholecystokinin (CCK). Both are present in the same taste cells.
80
taste
A Taste for (Tasteless) Calories
The brain has a mind of its own when it comes to recognizing and discriminating tastes. A multistate team of brain scientists led by Walter Kaye
at the University of California at San Diego did MRI brain scans of twelve
healthy women as they consumed varying concentrations of sucrose (real
sugar) and sucralose (artificial sweetener). The scientists found that both
sucrose and sucralose activated the same primary nerve pathways that
send “sweet messages” to the brain, but sucrose prompted a stronger response in the brain’s anterior insula, frontal operculum, striatum, and anterior cingulate. Furthermore, only sucrose stimulated production of the
neurotransmitter dopamine in midbrain areas seen to “light up” when the
women judged the sweet taste as pleasant. Those results, the researchers
say, show that the brain distinguishes high-calorie sweeteners from caloriefree substitutes, even if the mouth does not.11
A research team at Duke genetically engineered mice to lack the
TRMP5 ion channel in taste receptor cells. Without it, the animals couldn’t
taste sweet, bitter, or umami. The mice showed no interest in artificially
sweetened (no-cal) water, but they demonstrated a marked preference for
sugar (hi-cal sucrose) solutions, a preference based solely on calorie content. Recorded signals from the animal’s neurons showed that the highcalorie food produced a surge of dopamine release in the reward-seeking
centers of the brain. The more the better: the higher the caloric content,
the greater the surge. Fattening foods, the investigators concluded, have
an express train ticket to the brain’s motivational circuitry, even when their
flavors can’t be perceived.12
Scott Herness, a neuroscientist at Ohio State University, thinks NPY and
CCK are important communicators of taste information. He says that NPY
and CCK may initiate different signals traveling to the brain, depending on what
substances are binding to receptors at the moment. NPY makes the taste bud
send a sweet message. CCK triggers a signal for bitterness, Herness says.
The way Herness and his team figured this out is clever. They isolated single
cells from the taste buds of rats, then attached microscopic electrodes to the taste
cells. The electrodes let the researchers detect the cells’ electrical activity. Then
they applied either CCK or NPY to the cells. “NPY activated a completely different signal than CCK did, suggesting that the peptides trigger completely different responses in individual cells,” Herness reported.
In another experiment, Herness stained taste cells and used fluorescent light
to study them; the staining and the light showed which cells were making NPY
The Bitter Truth
81
and CCK. Only certain taste cells had the peptides, but without exception, if a
cell had one, it had the other.13 “That surprised us, too,” Herness said. “It may
be that these cells release both peptides when something sweet or bitter is on the
tongue. CCK might excite the bitter taste and at the same time inhibit the sweet
taste, so the bitter message gets to the brain.”14
This suggests that the perception of taste or flavor (a combination of taste,
smell, texture, heat, and more) is only partly in the mouth. It’s the brain that actually does the tasting—no one disputes that—but how the brain makes up its
mind is debatable. Whether the brain processes a large number of straight-line
messages in a one-for-one fashion or responds to complex patterns of input from
sensory neurons is the subject of hot debate among taste researchers.
“Somewhere up the neural processing pathway there is an integration of
taste information,” Zuker says. “We ultimately want to know how the brain integrates the various inputs from the taste system—bitter, sweet, umami, salt, and
sour—and uses that information to trigger selective behavioral and physiological responses.”15
MAPPING THE TERRITORY
This is where the brain mappers come in, at least in determining the path
that signals follow. The electrical message from a taste receptor stimulates a response in a sensory neuron that’s a mainline to the brainstem at the base of the
skull. The fibers of these neurons run through several of the cranial nerves. The
cranial nerves carry taste information to a region of the brainstem called the nucleus of the solitary tract. From there, secondary or relay neurons pass the taste
message on to the thalamus (which acts as a sort of central dispatch station) and
to two other brain regions: the limbic system and the cerebral cortex.
The limbic system is a general name for a number of different structures
including the hippocampus, hypothalamus, and amygdala. In these brain parts,
memories are formed and emotions are generated. Here’s where you experience
Smell? Taste
Smell cells and receptors differ from similar structures in taste buds in two
important ways. While taste cells may have functioning receptors for several different tastes, olfactory cells possess only one. Expression of genes is
tightly controlled so that each smell cell is a specialist. Another difference
is that taste-receptor cells don’t generate a nerve impulse directly; they pass
that job on to other neurons nearby. Smell cells are different. Each sends
an axon directly to the olfactory bulb of the brain.16
82
taste
a negative reaction to bitter and a positive reaction to sweet, and you’ll learn to
avoid or seek out certain foods or flavors next time, although you may not be aware
of the reason for your attraction or revulsion.
In the cerebral cortex, brain activity increases in response to taste in the
primary taste cortex, which includes regions called the anterior insula and the
frontal operculum (at the side of the head, just above the temples). Brain scans
also show activity in the cingulate cortex a bit higher up. These are the regions
that tell you that your coffee is too bitter or too sweet. Here you can make the
conscious decision that you want more sugar in your coffee—or, if you’ve learned
to like bitter—you prefer it black.
Another region of the brain that gets into the act is the orbitofrontal cortex,
which lies just behind and above the eyes. Here taste information feeds into the
reward assessment and decision-making systems. Taste messages are connected
in this area to the “temporarily organized behavior” of food- or sensation-seeking.
This is a region where we pay attention and act toward a goal.17 Positive and negative judgments about tastes are both made here, although in slightly different
areas.18
My seventh-grade tongue map days are a distant memory, but my cerebral
cortex now pines to retrace the route I’ve taken since then. I think I have come
full circle. I’ve abandoned tongue maps in favor of another sort of map that follows a sensory path from tongue to brainstem to emotions, memory, and cognition. Both maps are oversimplifications. Receptors, nerve pathways, and brain
processing centers are ways and means, but they don’t explain the essence of
the taste experience. I have a new kind of map, but it is only a map. It charts a
territory, but it is not the territory itself. The bitter truth is, I know more than I
did in the seventh grade, but I still don’t know much.
Chapter 12
Coconut Crazy
y daughter Elise and I sit on the beach, slathering ourselves with pints
of sunscreen because all the experts say tanning will kill us. Still, the
sunshine feels warm and our sensibilities mellow. It’s a golden mother–
daughter moment. Elise, at twenty-five, is a rising corporate executive. Our relaxed times together are precious and few.
Abruptly, a dedicated sun worshiper in a yellow string bikini invades our
space. With a flourish, she spreads her towel inches from ours and plops to the
ground. Thumbing her nose at the melanoma statistics, she begins basting her
body with a coconut concoction guaranteed to fry her milky skin to a burnt sienna in minutes. Its scent reminds me of warm, creamy pies and tangy piña
coladas. Elise has a different response.
“Can we move?” Elise asks, looking a little green despite the rose tint of my
sunglasses. She furrows her brow. Her lips curl.
“Sure,” I reply, shoving my paperback novel into my tote bag and slipping
on my flip-flops. Elise is up and running already, a good thirty yards down the
beach before I catch up. “Are you all right?” I inquire with motherly concern.
“It’s the coconut,” she says, punctuating her reply with a gasp and a choke.
Once we’ve settled onto our towels again, she reveals all. Her coming-ofage trip was a spring break to Tenerife in the Canary Islands with two dozen
classmates. One evening, as the tropical sun set and the revelers grew merry, the
libation of choice was a bottle of Malibu . . . or maybe two. Malibu (it was news
to me) is an extremely sweet, coconut-flavored liqueur—hardly the drink most
people would choose for purposes of inebriation—but these were college kids
and they procured what they could. The consequences the next morning were
M
83
84
taste
the predictable pounding head and churning stomach, but Elise was determined
not to miss the scheduled boat ride around the island. The combination of high
seas and Malibu morning was too much for her digestive system.
“Never have I retched like that, before or since,” she admits.
I put my hand up to stop her. I don’t need to hear the nauseating details. My
daughter is a victim of what scientists call hedonic dysfunction. The taste—even
the smell—of coconut repulses her. She exhibits aversive behavior. She runs.
Her brain was permanently altered by overconsumption, and her conscious
mind has extended her midbrain response far beyond the initial stimulus. While
many people relish coconut in all its forms, the mere mention of the word turns
her stomach.
I reassure her lamely, confessing that I have the same response to sweet potatoes, although for very different reasons. We don’t bother to get into them, but
I start to wonder. What happens in our brains when we love or hate a taste? Is
this a simple conditioning response or do we—with too much Malibu or something else—permanently alter our synapses?
HEDONISM AND THE LAB RAT
To find out, I leave the beach and fly off to the University of Michigan in
hopes of meeting Kent Berridge and Wayne Aldridge, two researchers who have
done some exciting work on hedonic dysfunctions like Elise’s. Berridge is a cognitive psychologist who runs an animal laboratory where various kinds of learning
studies are conducted in rats. Microscopic electrodes implanted in the animals’
brains record the firing of neurons when they taste something they like or something they don’t. Berridge is out of town, but one of his graduate students, Steve
Mahler, takes me on a tour of the lab.
We enter a large room, where a half-dozen students and technicians work at
computer stations. Off the main room are smaller experiment rooms equipped
with transparent and mirrored boxes. In them a rat’s every whisker-twitch can be
videorecorded and scrutinized. On one desk, a TV monitor runs a recorded sequence of rat behavior. Taped above the monitor is a message, “Have you scored
today?” Students and research assistants must catalog many hours of recordings
daily, carefully coding the time sequence of every movement a rat makes during
an experiment.
Not all the rats are video images. Some live ones are in the lab today, being
readied for various experiments. One young woman holds a rat to her chest,
cradling it as she would a baby while she gently administers an injection. I like
the rats. They are white and clean. They appear warm, well fed, and comfortable
in their experimental environment, but I’m under no delusions. They will give
up their lives so that we can acquire knowledge, and I approve their sacrifice.
Some things cannot be learned from test tubes, microscope slides, or computer
Coconut Crazy
85
simulations. Those who condemn the use of animals in all scientific experiments
wear blinders, in my view.
I pull myself back from my digression and ask Mahler to describe the work.
“How can you tell if a rat likes or hates a taste?” I ask.
He tells me that rats make faces about foods much the same as people do.
Like most humans, rats adore sweet tastes. When they drink sugar water, they
signal their approval by protruding their tongues forward and sideways. Sometimes they lick their paws, too, as if hoping to lap up the last drop. Mahler calls
these behaviors positive hedonic responses. In contrast, the neutral taste of plain
water elicits a comme ci, comme ça reaction. The animals move their mouths
rhythmically, and that’s pretty much all. They don’t love the water, but they don’t
mind it either.
Aversion is a different story and a very big deal. When rats hate a taste, they
may shake their heads, flail their forelegs, wash their faces, or rub their chins—
but most of all they gape. A gaping rat is a sight to see, and there’s no better way
to elicit a gape than give the animal a strong salt solution. Water that is too salty
causes rats to gape nearly every time.
In their experiments, Mahler, Berridge, Aldridge, and their coworkers have
used these distinctive behaviors to find out what’s going on in rats’ brains when
the animals taste flavors they like and flavors they don’t. Along with observing behaviors, the researchers study the firing of neurons in a region of the brain called
the ventral pallidum (VP).1
Mahler pulls an oversized atlas of brain structure from a shelf and I get a
short course in brain anatomy. The VP is part of the brain’s basal ganglia, several
masses of gray matter fondly nicknamed the brain’s “basement.” Nestled snugly
between the bigger and more famous cerebral hemispheres, the ganglia conduct
a lot of business, including controlling involuntary movements. Damaged or
inoperative neurons in the ganglia cause disorders of movement such as Parkinson’s disease, but that’s not all that goes on there. The ganglia communicate with
many other parts of the brain, including those centers that specialize in emotions
and decision making.
EXPERIMENTING WITH TASTE
I’m eager to learn more, and I thank Mahler for the lab tour. Although I’ve
missed Kent Berridge, I’ve had better luck getting an appointment with Wayne
Aldridge. He meets me at a Starbucks near campus. (There’s nothing coconut
on the menu board, not even a macaroon to go with my lowfat latte.)
Aldridge and I settle at a table to chat. He’s good company, a neurophysiologist who never lost his interest in behavior, he explains. He doesn’t handle or
observe the rats directly. Instead, he makes recordings of neuronal firings in the
animals’ brains and painstakingly identifies the signature signals from single
86
taste
neurons. Just as people can be recognized by their voices, individual nerve cells
speak with a distinctive waveform that Aldridge can capture and interpret. It’s the
pattern of those signals that intrigues Aldridge. He’s trying to crack the “neural
code,” the pattern of activation that, something like Morse code, uses single impulses in various combinations to create the brain’s equivalent of letters, words,
sentences, and paragraphs.
Aldridge reviews for me the experiment that brought me here. A few years
back, he, Berridge, and several students started out by implanting electrodes in
the VPs of eight male rats. The research team went to a lot of trouble to make
sure that they put the electrodes in exactly the right places and that the sensors
would detect and record the firings of precisely 167 individual neurons. The procedure didn’t harm the rats or change their behavior in any way, Aldridge assures
me, and neither did the tubes that fed the rats measured amounts of plain water,
sugar water, and salt water at carefully timed intervals.
The next step was to make and analyze video recordings of behaviors after
the rats drank the solutions. The purpose was to confirm that these rats weren’t
somehow different from all the other rats in the world. Sure enough, there wasn’t
a maverick in the bunch. The rats protruded their tongues (sugar), moved their
mouths (water), and gaped (salt) right on cue.
Now comes the elegant part of the experiment, the part that reveals more
than simple taste preferences. The Michigan team changed the rats’ normal response to salt water by depleting the animals’ bodies of salt. In a salt-deprived
state, brought on by a combination of drugs and a salt-free diet, the animals started
to like the salt solution. They stuck out their tongues and licked their paws, just as
they continued to do for sugar water. Their once aversive response to salt flipped
end over end. The unpleasant turned pleasurable.
Aldridge explains what he learned from examining the firing of neurons in
the VP. The more the animals liked a solution, the faster the neurons in the VP
fired. In the beginning, the response rate for salt was low—much lower than for
the pleasurable sugar. But when the animals’ bodies were salt-deficient, their VP
firing rates doubled, equaling or exceeding the rate that sugar water evoked.
What’s more, the firings in the VP matched up with the behaviors. When happy
rats protruded their tongues, the firing rate was high. Gaping rats (I imagine them
shouting, “Yuk!” if they could) had low VP firing averages.
“We converted something that wasn’t pleasing to something that suddenly
became pleasurable, and when we did that the neurons we were studying switched
their response,” says Aldridge. The VP is a “hedonic hotspot,” he adds. The faster
its neurons fire, the more pleasure the animal experiences.
LIKING AND WANTING
Aldridge tells me that Berridge is famous for having worked out the distinction between liking and wanting. I can’t see much difference, so Aldridge serves
Coconut Crazy
87
Defect in Her Dopamine?
Aldridge is suitably cautious about jumping to conclusions, but based on
what he’s told me, I’m wondering if dopamine might not have something
to do with Elise’s Malibu aversion. True, neurotransmitters have different
effects depending on where they operate in the brain, but dopamine is also
known to be a big player in the drama of conditioned learning. Neurons
that use dopamine start kicking out the stuff when a reward is offered at the
same time as a stimulus; that’s the classic conditioning response. Pair a
stimulus with a reward often enough, and the dopamine response becomes
habitual; skip the reward and dopamine neurons shut down. The same
thing may happen on the negative side. Dopamine might meditate the
learning of “conditioned taste aversions,” like Elise’s hedonic dysfunction.
If punishment follows a stimulus, the animal—including a human one like
Elise—learns to avoid that stimulus.
The work of some Italian scientists supports this idea. They trained lab
rats to hate saccharine by giving the animals lithium within minutes after
the animals drank saccharine-water. (Lithium, I learned, is not high on a
rat’s list of happy pills, but normal rats love saccharine when they can get
it.) The animals learned quickly to avoid saccharine water. But when the
scientists first gave rodents a chemical that blocked dopamine’s action in
certain parts of the brain, the researchers’ efforts to train the animals failed.
The rats lapped up the sweet water no matter how noxious the lithium.2
I wonder how Elise would have fared if she’d had some dopamine
blockers in her bag on that fateful trip to Tenerife. Maybe we could be
enjoying Malibu together today.
up an example that helps me understand. “Suppose,” he says, “you like chocolate. If I give you a lot of chocolate bars and then ask you whether you want
another, even though chocolate bars might be your favorite kind of food, at that
particular moment you may not want another. You would still like the chocolate,
that wouldn’t change that much, but you wouldn’t want it at that time.” Thus,
Aldridge concludes, “The liking of rewards and wanting of rewards are two separate psychological components.”
In the brain, wanting, which he calls incentive motivation, is closely associated with the neurotransmitter dopamine. Block dopamine’s action in the brain
and animals don’t work for a reward anymore. They lose interest in everything,
even eating. Liking is more closely associated with the brain’s natural opiates, the
endorphins. Liking sets the pleasure circuits atingle through endorphin action.
Some of Berridge’s experiments have shown that to be true. “If you inject an
88
taste
opiate-like drug into the brain, you can actually enhance the liking of things,”
Aldridge says.
In the laboratory, the trick is to isolate single variables so that brain signals for
liking, wanting, learning, and sensory processing can be differentiated, one from
the other. Aldridge describes a new series of experiments that do just that. His
team trained the animals to associate sounds with tastes. One sound told the rats
that they were going to get sugar, which they like. A different sound signaled that
a strong salt solution was on the way. Just as before, the researchers collected and
analyzed recordings from individual neurons in the VP. As expected, the liking
neurons fired rapidly in anticipation of sugar. They fired little when the bad taste
of salt was expected. “So we were tracking not only the quality of the taste itself,
but also the anticipated taste,” Aldridge says. Then, as before, the rats were put
into a salt-depleted state. In that state, the firings of neurons in their VPs were
measured when they heard the sounds alone, without the tastes. Remarkably, the
reward neurons now fired rapidly when salt was on the way. That’s what Aldridge
calls “rock solid data.” It shows that the neurons are responding not to taste, but
to wanting. The animals don’t suddenly like a strong salt solution, but they want
the salt.
ELISE’S MALIBU AVERSION
I ask Aldridge about Elise’s Malibu aversion, speculating that the experience
might have deactivated a hedonic hotspot in her ventral pallidum. It’s possible,
but Aldridge cautions against jumping to conclusions. “The most one could say
based on our findings is that the ventral pallidum might be one place in the brain
to look to understand the dysfunction problem,” he says. Brain functions are distributed; no single structure—no single neuron—does just one thing. Circuits
of neurons in the brain aren’t dedicated to a single function. No neurons process
pleasure alone. Neurons firing in series aren’t fixed like a highway, and they
aren’t like electrical circuits either. “Information is all over the brain,” Aldridge
explains, but in experiments like his, it is possible to separate one function from
another and investigate the chemical basis of each.
Elise’s Malibu malady is, in his view, a completely new question that would
take more and different experiments to answer. “We haven’t done a test to know
what happens when an animal has become sated to a good thing. Maybe cell firing in the ventral pallidum would change; maybe it would stay the same. I don’t
think the ventral pallidum is the only brain region involved. Learning is part of
what controls our desires for food and is likely contributing.”
He furrows his brow. “It would take a book to explain how this works in
people, and to some degree it would be a work of fiction.”
I recall my paperback novel on the beach. Perhaps I’ll sip a Malibu after dinner. Elise is traveling on business. She won’t be dining with me.
Chapter 13
Cooking Up Some
Brain Chemistry
ow to cook the perfect steak: If you are grilling outdoors, get the fire as
hot as you can. Put the grill down low, close to that hot fire. If you are
cooking indoors, put a drip-rack under the broiler and get the broiler
unit hot. When you are sure that the grill or broiler rack is very, very hot, plop
on the steak and back away. The meat should pop, crackle, spit, and sizzle. If it
doesn’t, you blew it; your grill or broiler wasn’t hot enough.
After about a minute of exposure to intense heat, the cooking side of the steak
should have some brown crusts on it. If it doesn’t, wait until it does; then turn
the steak over and wait for brown crusts to form on the second side. If you like a
rare steak, your entrée is now done. If you prefer medium rare or medium (but
please, no more than that!), raise the grill surface or lower the broiler pan and
turn down the heat. You can slow cook your steak to the desired level of internal
pinkness after it is hot-seared. But if you haven’t hot-seared it, you haven’t grilled
a steak; you’ve steamed a pot roast.
If you are nodding your head in agreement, thinking Sure, sure, searing forms
a layer that traps the juices, you’ve got the right idea, but for the wrong reason.
The world’s leading molecular gastronomist, Hervé This (pronounced tees), has
collected all the science that’s worth knowing about cooking, and he’s come to
the conclusion that hot searing does no such thing. For one thing, he says in
Kitchen Mysteries, all that sizzling and popping are the sounds of liquid—the
juices—escaping from the meat and vaporizing into the air. When you plop the
grilled steak onto the plate, you see more juices come out, so that brown layer
isn’t much of a juice trap. In fact, hot-searing contracts the connective tissue that
H
89
90
taste
Do We Eat What’s Good for Us?
Your craving for a candy bar probably has more to do with an annoying boss
than a nagging neurotransmitter. Still, there’s a reason for that sweet tooth
that humans share with most other primates. Sweet foods are high-calorie
foods, good sources of energy, and important to the survival of wild animals
scratching for sustenance in scrub forests and savannas. Natural selection
through our evolutionary history favored individuals who tasted the sweet,
loved it, and went climbing for more. (In the days of donut shops and ice
cream stands on every corner, that survival advantage has dropped from the
branches to bite us.)
Today the more salient question is whether our sense of taste prompts
us to avoid certain foods that might be unpleasant, harmful, or downright
deadly. Here, the answer is clearer, and our perception of bitter and sour
tastes offers a real benefit: dangerous alkaloids, strong acids, astringent
tannins, terpenes, and saponins are toxic, and their foul tastes keep them
out of our mouths and stomachs. Not all toxins taste bad, though, so we rely
on learning to teach us what foods to avoid. If a food makes you sick, you
probably won’t eat it again.
Unfortunately, our protective instincts have their downside. Many
healthy vegetables contain bitter compounds. Some of us are less sensitive
to them, so we’re inclined to relish our broccoli and Brussels sprouts. But
for the bitter-taste-sensitives among us, the story is different. Those people
miss their recommended “five a day” because they find the bitter taste of
many vegetables repugnant.
So significant is the human aversion to bitter (and to a lesser extent,
sour) tastes that the food industry has gone all-out to debitter the food supply. Black coffee, green tea, beer, and red wine notwithstanding, you won’t
find many food products these days that have escaped debittering. Most
legumes, fruits, and grains have been bred and cultivated in recent decades
to be less bitter, astringent, or sour than were their wild-type progenitors.
Orange juice is debittered by the chemical breakdown of a compound
called naringin. Most apple juice is treated to remove compounds called
polyphenols, which taste bitter or astringent.1
When they can, food scientists remove bitter compounds from foods,
but that’s not always possible. Other approaches to debittering include trapping bitter compounds inside a physical barrier (capsules, coats, emulsions,
suspensions) and adding salt and sweeteners to mask bitter flavors. (That’s
an ancient strategy. Spices and aromatic herbs have been prized for centuries because of their bitter-masking properties, and hot peppers in some
Cooking Up Some Brain Chemistry
91
form have their devotees worldwide.) Additives that are more modern include molecules that latch onto the offending compounds, tying them up
so they become inactive or blocking them from docking with bitter receptors
in taste cells.
surrounds the muscle fibers in the beef so much that it probably increases the
expulsion of the juices, This contends.2
So why is hot-searing the perfect way to cook steak? Because the intense heat
on the meat’s surface forms a complex cocktail of perhaps six hundred chemical
compounds that, together, taste oh-so-good. Although those yummy molecules
are sometimes attributed to the Maillard reaction (the same reaction that caramelizes sugar, named after the Frenchman Louis-Camille Maillard), the chemical
change-process in steak is actually different. Beefsteak contains hardly any carbohydrate, so there’s no sugar to be caramelized. Steak is mostly protein, and
scientists say that the searing breaks down muscle proteins—myosin, actin, and
myoglobin. The breakdown products combine and recombine in numerous ways,
producing such gourmet delights as bis-2-methyl-3-furyl-disulfide, which has a
deliciously strong, meaty smell.3 Now if that’s not enough to set your brain’s
flavor centers a-zinging, I can’t imagine what will!
BRAIN A-BUSTLING
The minute that juicy, perfectly cooked steak hits the tongue, taste impulses
start traveling to the brain. Where do they go once there? Researchers have in
the last decade or so started to use positron emission tomography (PET) and
functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) to capture on film those parts of
the brain that increase their activity (i.e., receive greater blood flow) in response
to taste stimuli. In humans, impulses from the taste buds enter the brainstem and
synapse in the region of medulla called the nucleus of the solitary tract. The
medulla controls such basic taste-related functions as gagging, swallowing, and
vomiting, as well as salivation and the gastrointestinal reflexes that promote digestion. From there, taste signals run a fast track to the brain’s central dispatch
station, the thalamus, and from there directly to the brain’s “conscious of taste”
centers.
Place your little finger at a forty-five-degree angle from the outer corner of
your eye and you’ll get an idea about where those centers are. Japanese scientists
demonstrated the precise location when they measured blood flow changes in
the brain as volunteers tasted different tastes. The tastes activated the brain’s primary taste cortex, which lies in the frontal operculum and adjoining insula. A
92
taste
secondary taste area lies in the caudolateral orbitofrontal cortex, several millimeters in front of the primary taste region. The fMRI scans showed that different tastes are processed in the different part of these regions.4 Some neurons
respond only to sweet taste, others only to umami, and so on.
Oxford psychologist Edmund Rolls has studied the neurons in the orbitofrontal cortex taste areas, where the sensation of flavor comes together or converges. Rolls says that the texture of food can moderate the activity of single
neurons in this region. Some of them respond to a food’s viscosity, while others
respond to the size of the particles in a food or the food’s temperature. Rolls studied 112 single neurons in the orbitofrontal cortex that respond to the taste, smell,
or sight of food. He found that many are specialists, activated by only one type of
sensory input: taste 34 percent, olfactory 13 percent, and visual 21 percent. But
other neurons do double duty for two senses; they respond to both taste and sight
(13 percent), both taste and smell (13 percent), or both smell and sight (5 percent). But even some of those double-duty neurons have a specialist bent. For
example, some that respond best to sweet tastes also respond more strongly to
the sight of sweet fruit juice than to the sight of a salt solution.5
TASTE, BRAIN, AND BODY
Taste does more than make foods pleasurable. It triggers a series of hormonal
changes that affect the body in all its tissues and organs. A sweet taste in the
mouth, for example, prompts the pancreas to release two hormones: glucagon,
which causes the liver to release glucose; and insulin, which stimulates cells all
over the body to take in glucose and burn it as fuel. In a sense, the body has a
built-in anticipation response. The sweet taste causes it to “gear up” for the carbohydrate food that is coming.
Taste uses a similar mechanism to prepare the body for protein foods. The
trigger for this cascade of changes is the umami taste, which is predominant in
the flavoring agent monosodium glutamate (MSG). French researchers didn’t
find much effect when they fed lab rats water solutions of MSG compared to
plain water, but when they added an MSG solution to the animal’s ordinary chow,
things started to happen. The rats’ metabolic rate rose, and the increase lasted a
full thirty minutes. The animals’ respiratory quotient, a measure of protein utilization, also rose. The umami taste, the researchers concluded, triggered an
“anticipatory reflex.” The taste initiated changes in metabolism and body chemistry that readied the body to handle the protein foods that were soon to follow—
although, in this case, the rat chow was primarily carbohydrate.6
The brain and nervous system bring about this response. Japanese researcher
Akira Niijima fed solutions of MSG to lab rats. The MSG set branches of the
vagus nerve in the stomach, pancreas, and liver humming with impulses. Ordinary salt water had no such effect. Niijima concluded that MSG stimulates taste
Cooking Up Some Brain Chemistry
93
I Taste Your Pain!
The experimental designs that scientists come up with are amazing! Here’s
what some Dutch researchers did. They put some brave volunteers in an
fMRI scanner and recorded activity in the brain’s IFO (anterior insula and
frontal operculum). The investigators already knew that the area steps up
its activity when a human being tastes or smells a disgusting substance or
views a disgusted facial expression. So they showed their subjects pictures
of disgusted, pleased, and neutral facial expressions while the fMRI mapped
how IFOs responded. The researchers also gave their subjects a written test
of empathy. They studied their results to see how well the test predicted an
individual’s IFO activity while viewing the facial expressions.
They found that empathy scores predicted IFO activation for both
pleasant and disgusted facial expressions. The scientists concluded that the
IFO “contributes to empathy by mapping the bodily feelings of others onto
the internal bodily states of the observer.”7 In other words, if I share your
joy or feel your pain, I do so, in part, with the same region of my brain that
despises okra.
receptors in the tongue, which in turn activate the vagus nerve. The vagus
nerve then triggers the reflex response that readies the metabolism for incoming proteins.8
So the reason that perfectly cooked steak tastes so perfect is the series of neurological and biochemical reactions that begins with the docking of glutamate
molecules onto umami receptors in taste cells. The receptor, by the way, is most
likely a molecule its discoverers named taste-mGluR4. Its relative, plain-old
mGluR4, was first found in the brain, where it influences the production and release of the neurotransmitter glutamate.9 Yes, glutamate is both a taste agent and
a neurotransmitter, which is why the smell and taste of a perfectly grilled steak
go . . . well . . . straight to your head.
But maybe all this hoopla about grilling steaks is turning your stomach. I
don’t like steak, you may be thinking, and it’s true that some people don’t. In fact,
you may not prefer protein foods in general. The reason may lie in your perception of the umami taste. British scientists studied the MSG taste thresholds of
volunteers. (The taste threshold is the minimum concentration of a substance
that a person can perceive.) The researchers wanted to find out if the varying
thresholds of individuals predicted the perceived pleasantness of the umami taste
or a person’s preference for dietary protein over carbohydrate or fat.
As expected, while tasting clear soups containing varying amounts of MSG,
some people could taste minuscule amounts, while others couldn’t detect MSG
94
taste
at all. The study participants rated how much they liked the soups and how often they thought they might eat them. They also reported their opinions about
more than twenty common high-protein, high-carbohydrate, and high-fat food
items. On average, the taste threshold failed to predict how well the subjects liked
the soups. However, those who could detect small amounts of MSG thought
the soup was “meaty.” Low thresholds for MSG were also related to “liking” and
“preference” scores for protein foods. People who could detect tiny amounts of
MSG liked protein foods better than those who couldn’t.10
Chapter 14
How to Knit
a Baby Taste Bud
hen I was pregnant many years ago, it was before the era of ultrasound, so I didn’t know if the baby was going to be a boy or a girl
and I didn’t know if the baby was going to be complete, healthy, and
whole. My baby girl turned out to be all those things and more. Her development inside me proceeded textbook fashion, far as I could tell, producing all the
parts, functions, and senses expected of human newborns.
I wanted to dress my baby in garments I had knit myself, but being scienceminded, I didn’t spend my entire pregnancy knitting. I read everything about
prenatal development I could find during the 284 days I waited for my baby’s cry
to keep me awake nights. Those pictures in the embryology books fascinated me.
What a marvel! From a single cell, baby blood and bone arose. A tiny heart
started beating while the embryo looked like nothing more than a tadpole—if I
could have looked inside me to see it. Tiny kidneys pinched themselves off, grew
efficient little filters, and started making urine. A tiny liver turned red-brown and
spongy, getting ready to break down the toxins that would assail her small body
once the climate-controlled safety of the womb was abandoned. Inside my uterus,
fetal muscles bulged and stretched, fetal intestines contracted and relaxed, fetal
nails grew long and sharp. A baby body was knitting itself while my fingers fashioned buntings and bonnets.
My baby knitted together skin for touch, two eyes for vision, two ears for
hearing, a nose for smelling, and a cute little pink tongue for tasting. More important, she crafted a brain capable of receiving and processing all those inputs.
From the moment of her first breath, she detected and comprehended at some
basic level the wavelengths of light and sound; the pressure, cold, heat, and pain
W
95
96
taste
of touch; the airborne molecules of odorants; and the chemical stimulants of the
five tastes—sweet, sour, bitter, salty, and umami.
Growing a baby is easy. The female body knows how to do it, no tech support
required. But for mothers, babies, and the scientists who study them both, the
automatic process holds endless fascination, and researchers are only beginning
to understand how sensory structures such as taste buds form and how their workings get stitched into the fabric of the brain.
CRAFTING THE SENSE OF TASTE
If I were to write a page of instructions for knitting a baby’s sense of taste, I’d
have to start with plans for forming the subunits. Needed: one set of taste buds
containing all the right cells and receptors; one brain with a region specialized
for handling inputs from taste buds; one set of neurons to carry messages from
the taste buds to the brain; another set of neurons in the brain to send the appropriate taste signals to other processing centers, such as the emotions where
feelings about tastes reside and the cognitive centers where babies make decisions about what they like and don’t like, what they’ll eat and won’t eat.
The diagram for stitching the components of a working sense of taste—or
any other sense—begins with cellular differentiation. To stretch the knitting analogy, you need all the right kinds of yarns and stitches in the right places, doing
what they should. Differentiation in an embryo is the series of chemical and physical reactions that turns cells that are all alike into cells that are different—having
different structures and functions and capable of organizing themselves into the
body’s varying tissues and organs—much as a knitting pattern emerges from single interlocking stitches.
The zygote that became my daughter started dividing soon after sperm met
egg. One cell divided into two, two into four, four into eight, and so on, until the
embryo formed a hollow ball of cells, all of them more or less the same. That’s
what she was about the time my home pregnancy test turned blue; but before I
could start knitting booties, she had changed.
Somewhere around three weeks after fertilization, the hollow ball of cells,
the blastula, altered its shape and structure. During this process, which is called
gastrulation, the cells streamed in, over, and around one another, and the hollow ball folded in on itself, creating three cell layers: the endoderm that would
go on to become the lungs and digestive organs; the mesoderm, which would
form muscles and bones; and the ectoderm, which was fated to develop into skin,
brain, and nervous system.
About four weeks after fertilization, I had finished the first pair of booties,
and a part of the ectoderm had thickened to form a cell layer called the neural
plate. The neural groove ran down the middle of the plate, dividing it into right
and left halves. The front part of the neural plate would develop into the brain
How to Knit a Baby Taste Bud
97
where sensory processing occurs. The back part would become the spinal cord
that carries nerve impulses from the body to the brain.
In the fifth and sixth weeks of pregnancy, I bought yarn for knitting baby
blankets and a sweater. That’s when the two sides of the neural plate were fusing, forming the neural tube. Three bulges that arose toward the front of the tube
developed into the main brain regions: the forebrain, midbrain, and hindbrain.
Cell division in the brain was rapid at that time. While I was knitting one stitch
every two seconds, neurons were forming at the rate of 250,000 per minute. Each
neuron was capable of making as many as ten thousand connections to other
neurons in the brain.1
As time went on, both my baby and I had a lot more knitting to do. Mine
was easy to see and comprehend, but hers was infinitely more subtle and intricate. She needed to fashion all her sensory organs, her spinal cord, and a brain
to go with them. Even more important, she had to find a way to stitch the disparate parts together seamlessly to fit and function as a single, integrated sense.
Here, I am thinking specifically about taste, so she needed a tongue, several thousand taste buds, sensory neurons, cranial and spinal nerves fibers, and a brain
that could let her distinguish five different tastes (and, in conjunction with smell
and touch, thousands of different flavors) from no more information that a few
molecules docking on some protein receptors in her mouth.
The books I was reading said her taste apparatus developed on a timeline
something like this:2
•
•
•
•
•
•
When I was about six weeks pregnant, the first taste papillae started to form
toward the back and middle of what would become her tongue.
Nerve fibers from her developing spinal cord started approaching the papillae when I was about seven weeks pregnant.
In the eighth week, the fibers began to form synapses with elongated, poorly
differentiated taste cells on the tongue’s surface.
By the tenth week, shallow grooves formed where taste buds would eventually develop.
By the twelfth week, her taste cells were better differentiated, but they still
had a way to go, and the number of synapses was nearing its maximum.
After the fourteenth week, her taste buds were functional. She could probably taste, although what amniotic fluid tastes like we may never know.
NEEDLING THE TASTE BUDS
All this raises some obvious questions. How do the nerves “know” where to
go as they grow? How do taste buds and the sensory neurons that carry taste message to the brain “hook up,” so that the correct taste nerves get the correct taste
impulses and take them to the correct taste regions in the brain?
98
taste
Sarah Millar, a dermatologist and cell biologist at the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, has part of the answer. She and her colleagues have
studied the tongue’s fungiform taste papillae, the little mushroom-shaped bumps
that lie on the tongue’s surface and contain a large number of taste buds. Humans have about two hundred of those papillae. (Altogether, several different
types of papillae contain a total of about ten thousand taste buds. Each bud contains fifty to one hundred and fifty taste-receptive cells.) Millar has also studied
a group of proteins called Wnt. Wnt proteins occur in a lot of places, but wherever they turn up, they seem to do more or less the same thing. They trigger a
series of chemical changes that cause cells and tissues to coalesce and shape
themselves into organs. Different types of Wnt proteins trigger the development
of many ectodermal structures, including hair follicles, mammary glands, teeth,
stomach linings—even feathers in birds!
To find out if Wnt plays a role in coaxing baby taste buds to form, Millar zeroed in on one particular Wnt protein, Wnt-β-catenin (β is the Greek letter beta).
She genetically engineered some mice to have either a mutant form of Wnt-βcatenin or none at all. She grew their tongue cells in culture dishes. In the mice
with the mutant form, taste buds and fungiform papillae grew too large and too
numerous. In the mice that lacked Wnt-β-catenin, the taste buds and papillae
failed to develop at all.
Millar figured out that Wnt-β-catenin acts as a signaling system. Its production is “switched on” both in taste bud cells and at the places where fungiform
papillae eventually form. The series of chemical changes it initiates cause taste
buds to develop. Wnt also attracts growing nerve fibers to developing taste cells
like ants to a picnic. When the Wnt pathway is working, neurons growing out
from the spinal cord find the taste buds with no problem, and the fetal sense of
taste is born.3
Or almost. As we have to expect, the answer to one question merely raises
another question. We have to ask what keeps Wnt from promoting unlimited
numbers of taste papillae and unlimited numbers of taste neurons, to the point
where the baby ends up being all tongue and tasting-brain and not much more.
Wnt has to be controlled in some way. So, something must put the brakes on.
That something—or at least one such something—is another protein called
(you gotta love these names) Sonic hedgehog (Shh). A team of collaborators from
Mount Sinai Medical Center in New York and the University of Michigan reported, in 2007, still more experiments with cultured tongue cells. They found
both Wnt-β-catenin and Shh in developing papillae. Blocking Shh signaling let
more Wnt form, and more papillae developed as a result. Adding Shh to the cultures inhibited Wnt-β-catenin signaling and stopped papillae formation.4
Nothing is ever simple, so the story goes on, with other regulator proteins
getting into the act, among them still more fun names such as Sox 2, Bmp, Noggin, Fgf, and EGF. If the names make you giggle, here’s one more: The Wnt-β-
How to Knit a Baby Taste Bud
99
Taste Diminishes with Age
The only thing that we seem to gain with age is weight. Everything else diminishes, and taste cells are no exception. Although taste cells are constantly dying and being renewed (the average life span of a taste cell is about
ten days), you’ll have fewer at forty than you had at fourteen, which may
explain why the older we get, the more we shake on the salt and crushed
red peppers.
Older mouths are dryer mouths, too, and less saliva means food molecules don’t wash onto the taste buds as well as they once did. Aging often
means more trips to the pharmacist than young people have to make, for
which those in midlife and beyond are rewarded with medication-induced
dry mouth. Dry mouth can also result from smoking, dehydration, radiation
treatments for cancer, and too little zinc, copper, or nickel in the diet. And
don’t forget Sjögren’s (pronounced SHOW-grins) syndrome. It’s an autoimmune disorder in which the white blood cells, which are supposed to
destroy invading microbes, get confused and attack the moisture-producing
glands. It is one of the most common autoimmune disorders, affecting some
4 million Americans.
Changes in the mouth may not be the only reason taste declines with
age. Changes in the brain may contribute, too. A compound called dynorphin is known to play a part in taste perception. Researchers at the Veterans
Affairs Medical Center in Minneapolis studied the genes that direct dynorphin manufacture in the brains of young and old rats. They found less and
less activity in several brain regions the older the rats became. The declines
occurred in the arcuate nucleus and amygdala, two brain regions strongly
associated with feeding behavior.5 This change may explain, in part, why
appetite decreases in the elderly.
catenin pathway is activated when certain genes bind to receptors called . . . are
you ready for this? . . . Frizzled.
KNITTING THE TASTE-BRAIN
The taste cells inside taste buds inside papillae are only one part of the
story. That baby girl of mine could taste nothing until her infant brain received
a traveling nerve impulse. Those neurons that grew toward the taste buds merged
into two paired cranial nerves. One is the glossopharyngeal nerve (cranial nerve
IX). (Glosso means tongue and pharyn means throat.) It carries impulses from
the back third of the tongue. The other is the chorda tympani branch of the
100
taste
facial nerve (cranial nerve VII). It carries impulses from the front two thirds of
the tongue.
Those nerves carry taste impulses into a part of the brainstem called the
nucleus of the solitary tract. The solitary tract is the first relay station, but the dispatching there is not simple. Besides acting as the gateway to other brain regions
where taste information is received, the solitary tract also connects to several
brainstem sites responsible for taste-initiated reflex functions, such as spitting out
rotten fruit or rancid fats. Those multiple connections through the solitary tract
are especially important for another reason: scientists are still arguing about
whether taste delivers signals from the receptors more or less intact and direct to
the relevant brain regions or whether signals go through a lot of processing steps
before they reach their destination.
Either way, taste messages also travel to the thalamus, which acts as a switching station for sending taste information to various parts of the cortex. Taste impulses also travel to the hypothalamus and amygdala, parts of the limbic system
where emotions arise, and to the frontal lobes where decisions such as “Hmmm!
I love breast milk” are made in newborn brains. So knitting the baby taste bud is
only one small stitch for woman- and baby-kind. It’s knitting the baby brain that
matters.
Chapter 15
Expecting What You Taste
and Tasting What You Expect
once prepared and served a meal that was nothing but Jell-O. That’s not quite
true. There were other things mixed in with the Jell-O, but every dish in the
meal had Jell-O at its heart.
The occasion was festive, long promised, and much anticipated. It came
about because an out-of-town friend gave me a cookbook of Jell-O recipes as a
joke. The joke was more on him than me, because he is a self-confessed Jell-O
freak. He loves Jell-O. Being from Minnesota (no insult intended to the good
people of Minnesota), my friend dislikes spicy foods, anything green, anything
fresh, and most things that have any texture, color, or flavor. He describes himself as “a Velveeta cheese and tater tots kinda guy.” He admits that he’d be more
than happy to eat Jell-O thrice daily. Thus the cookbook and thus my promise to
him: When you visit next year, I’ll make you a meal that’s entirely Jell-o.
And make that meal I did. We sat down to a Jell-O feast. Our asparagus soufflé salad was a bit of a cheat—it was made with unflavored gelatin—but the rest
of the menu was the real deal. I served avocado-horseradish aspic (in raspberry
Jell-O), tuna salad (in lime Jell-O), meatloaf (no-bake, made with lemon Jell-O),
and banana bread (made with apricot Jell-O). For dessert, we ate strawberry pie,
featuring my friend’s favorite color and flavor of Jell-O. We had coffee-flavored
Jell-O and cream with our brandy to end with a touch of class.
The reviews were mixed. The guest of honor was in Jell-O heaven, though
he passed on the aspic. (Too spicy!) Personally, I more or less liked it all, but my
favorite was the meatloaf. Everybody else ate the requisite amounts of each dish
and pronounced the meal successful, although perhaps not memorable. Jell-O,
I
101
102
taste
Tasting What You Know and Knowing What You Taste
Nothing’s wrong with your sense of taste, right? Think again. Researchers
say we are probably pretty good at recognizing tastes when things are working right, but when we lose taste perceptions, we’re clueless. Here’s how
they know: A research team at the University of Pennsylvania School of
Medicine asked nearly five hundred volunteers (mean age fifty-four) to respond “easily,” “somewhat,” or “not at all” to such statements as, “I can detect salt in chips, pretzels, or salted nuts,” “I can detect sourness in vinegar,
pickles, or lemon,” “I can detect sweetness in soda, cookies, or ice cream,”
and “I can detect bitterness in coffee, beer, or tonic water.” Then the researchers gave the subjects various foods to taste. Those subjects who tasted
normally knew it, but those with taste dysfunctions weren’t aware of their
deficit. Ruling out smell as a variable using other tests, the study showed
that ageusic subjects think they can taste what they don’t. Sex and age make
a difference. Older adults get it wrong more often than younger ones; men
generally do worse than women.1
many declared, just wasn’t their favorite dish, although the Jell-O was hardly discernible in anything but the tuna salad.
I have to wonder why they aren’t still raving all over town about that culinary
extravaganza. I think I have an answer: It was just the idea of all that Jell-O! Taste
is not so much what we eat as what we expect to eat. Taste is only partly palate.
It’s more about the brain, and the brain gets what it thinks it will.
ANTICIPATION
Anticipation is a powerful engine. It drives the placebo effect (see Chapter
4), and it has more to do with taste than even a cordon bleu chef might predict.
Certain regions of the brain become active when a pleasant sensory input is
expected. That activation then moderates the activity of sensory processing areas
—so much so that what we taste is more about what we expect than about what
we actually get.
It’s not merely a matter of visual impact, either—not simply color, anyway.
Although we expect yellow pudding to be lemon and purple juice to be grape,
color alone doesn’t set up much in the way of anticipation. A number of researchers have tested color and flavor associations, often using preparations of
the same sweetness but of different colors. Results are usually unremarkable, except that red is often perceived as the sweetest and blue as the least sweet.2 Liquids are rated sweeter than solids, and colored solutions are considered sweeter
Expecting What You Taste and Tasting What You Expect
103
than colorless ones.3 People typically associate yellow and orange with citrus flavors; they associate red, yellow, and orange with fruity flavors. Generally brown,
gray, black, and blue don’t fare well, no matter what the taste descriptor.4 The
influence of odor on taste is probably more important than that of color. Participants in one study rated a strawberry-scented red solution as sweeter than an unscented one of the same hue, although there was no actual difference in the sugar
content.5
Color may not influence taste as much as it does the broader, overall perception of whether a food is appetizing or even marginally palatable. I remember
in college how everyone complained (and worried) about the turquoise-blue
tinge detectable on the margins of the meat served in the dormitory cafeteria. I
was studying science, so I knew that the color was the result of preservatives that
wouldn’t hurt us unless we ate them by the truckload. But my roommates only
eyed me with distrust when I offered rational reassurances. There’s something
wrong with blue meat! Any fool can see that! The conclusion was not that the
meat tasted bad, but simply that it should not be consumed at all.
Experience plays a role, too. Whether you taste something now depends on
whether you have tasted it before—and whether you continue to taste it. Many
We Know What We Know
When it comes to taste, we know what we know and we aren’t about to be
persuaded otherwise. A team of researchers from the Universities of Washington and Florida gave test subjects a mild and creamy cheese with an orange rind and a stronger tasting, dry cheese with a purple rind. They then
had the volunteers rate the cheeses on a scale from mild to strong flavor.
The participants rated the orange-rind cheese as quite mild.
Later, the subjects rated other cheeses for creaminess, not flavor. Their
past experience might have taught them to associate the orange rind with
creaminess, but it had not. Their “training” had taught them that orange
rind meant mild flavor. Creaminess simply wasn’t in the equation. “Once
people learned that a cue predicted an outcome, they became less likely
to learn about this very same cue with respect to a different outcome,” the
investigators wrote.6
This finding is more than a curiosity. It suggests that once we’ve
learned one taste association, we are disinclined to learn another. If, for
example, you learned as a child that green vegetables taste bitter, you may
have trouble accepting them into your adult diet despite their numerous
health benefits.
104
taste
Can You Imagine a Flavor?
If we taste what we expect to, can we imagine a taste? Maybe. Researchers
at Emory University in Atlanta showed people pictures of foods and pictures of scenery while fMRI scans were taken of the volunteers’ brains. The
scenery pictures didn’t activate their primary brain taste centers, but the
food pictures did.7
The mere thought of food may be enough to get the mental juices
flowing. Scientists in Japan used fMRI to scan the brain activity patterns of
subjects who did nothing more than think about pickled plums (umeboshi),
a traditional Japanese food with a strong sour flavor. The scans showed a
pattern very similar to that seen when the pickle was actually tasted.8
people can’t taste MSG the first time they try it, but after some training, they can.9
The same thing happens with sugar, although you won’t find many people unfamiliar with its taste. Nonetheless, when Massachusetts researchers “trained”
their volunteers with the sugar fructose, sensitivity to the taste of another sugar,
glucose, rose. The effect lasted for about eleven days, but it was a “use it or lose
it” thing. The effect disappeared after a month.10
The training effect shows up in more than taste tests. French scientists captured fMRI images from volunteers who tasted harmless chemicals they had
never tasted before. Over several weeks, as the subjects’ ability to detect the new
flavors increased, so did their brain activity in certain regions.11
TASTE AND THE BRAIN
At least one neurotransmitter, serotonin, is known to carry messages between
neurons in two sites: in the taste buds of the mouth and in the brain. In the taste
buds, impulse-generating cells release serotonin after tastants bind to nearby tastereceptor cells; the release starts the “taste message” traveling toward the brain.
In the brain, serotonin sends all kinds of signals from one brain cell to another.
Thus, it’s not hard to see a link between the sense of taste and mental health,
and researchers indeed find such links. Deficiencies in serotonin and other neurotransmitters bring on mood disorders, which often carry with them a blunting
of the sense of taste. Depression, for example, decreases sensitivity to all tastes,
especially sweet. Panic disorders reduce sensitivity to bitter, and stress induced
in normal individuals increases sensitivity to the bitter taste of saccharin.12 This
association suggests that reduced levels of particular neurotransmitters may account for both certain mental complaints and the dysgeusia, or impairment of
the sense of taste, that goes along with them.
Expecting What You Taste and Tasting What You Expect
105
To see whether there is anything to that idea, researchers at the University
of Bristol in the United Kingdom tested twenty healthy volunteers for their anxiety levels. The most anxious participants were less sensitive to bitter and salty tastes.
Then the scientists gave all the subjects two antidepressant drugs. One raised the
level of the neurotransmitter serotonin the brain; it also increased people’s sensitivity to sweet and bitter tastes. The other drug increased the amount of another
neurotransmitter, noradrenalin; the result was greater recognition of bitter and
sour tastes.13
It doesn’t take a drug or chemical to change expectations and the tastes that
result from them. A team of University of Wisconsin-Madison scientists captured
images of the brain fooling itself. Psychiatrist Jack Nitschke recruited volunteers
to have MRI pictures of their brains taken while they tasted solutions of bitter
quinine, sweet sugar water, or tasteless distilled water. The researchers and the
subjects agreed ahead of time on a set of clues to precede the solutions. A minus
Craving Chocolate
If you want to understand why you crave (or don’t crave) chocolate, put
your brain inside an fMRI scanner and take a peek at what’s going on.
That’s what Oxford researchers did with sixteen women. Eight of them
craved chocolate; eight of them didn’t. All were of normal weight, although
the cravers consumed, on average, a whopping 370 grams (thirteen ounces,
or nearly nine bars)) of chocolate weekly compared to 22 grams (less than
one ounce) a week for the noncravers. The researchers studied the women’s
brains while they responded to the sight of chocolate, the flavor of chocolate, or both together.
The cravers and noncravers showed no differences in how their brains
responded in the primary taste- and visual-processing regions of the brain,
but both the sight of chocolate and the flavor of chocolate produced greater
activation in the orbitofrontal cortex and ventral striatum of cravers compared to noncravers. Sight combined with flavor produced a response that
was “greater than the sum of its parts” in the orbitofrontal cortex and cingulate cortex of cravers. The greater the activity in those regions, the more
pleasant the women rated the chocolate.14
Among other things, the orbitofrontal cortex is a major center for goaldirected behavior. It sends us toward the desirable and away from the undesirable. Stimulus/reward associations activate the ventral striatum. The
cingulate cortex has many functions, among them the linking of cognition
with emotions.
106
taste
sign flashed through fiber-optic goggles signaled quinine coming next. A zero signaled the tasteless distilled water, while a plus sign said a sweet treat was on the
way. During the experiment, however, Nitschke randomly mixed the tastes and
the cues, so that the signal did not necessarily precede its assigned taste. The interesting outcome occurred when a plus sign preceded the bitter quinine. The
brain responded in a characteristically “bitter taste” pattern, but less strongly than
when the expectancy sign was zero or minus. In other words, if the brain expected
a sweet treat, the bitter medicine tasted less bitter.15
THE POWER OF WORDS
Words can do the trick as well. Researchers at Oxford dripped solutions of
MSG into the mouths of volunteers whose brains were being scanned with fMRI.
The volunteers also rated the solutions according to intensity and pleasantness.
Their primary taste cortices got it right when it came to intensity. The participants could judge accurately which solutions contained more or less MSG, and
they found the highest concentrations both intense and unpleasant when tasted
in a neutral environment.
The malleable factor was pleasantness. When the words rich and delicious
taste preceded administration of the solution, people judged the solution as more
pleasant than when the words monosodium glutamate appeared on a projection
screen. Pleasantness was perceived as greater also for the words rich and delicious
flavor compared to boiled vegetable water. The MRI scans showed where those
responses originated. There was no difference in activity of the primary taste cortex. The differences lay in the secondary processing regions of the orbitofrontal
cortex and cingulate cortex. Those are the areas of the brain that represent the
emotional value of sensory rewards. The brain’s ventral striatum became active
in response to the word labels, too. It is a region of automatic learning, where we
learn to associate a stimulus with a reward.16 What’s more, paying attention makes
a difference. When people are told to remember and rate the pleasantness of a
taste, brain activity in those regions increases.17
If that’s true, then how much of the flavor of that Jell-O dinner came from
the dishes themselves and how much came merely from the word Jell-O? How
many of the so-so reviews came from the food and how many came from obsessing about all that Jell-O? In the interests of science, I’m planning another Jell-O
dinner, but this time I’m not telling anyone what they’re eating. They’ll be raving
about that meal for decades.
PART FOUR
VISION
Anyone who has common sense will remember that the
bewilderments of the eyes are of two kinds, and arise from
two causes, either from coming out of the light or from
going into the light, which is true of the mind’s eye, quite
as much as of the bodily eye.
—Plato
The Republic
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 16
The Big Picture
V
ision is the best understood of the senses. We know a lot about how it
works, in part because we can see what happens when people lose some
component of their visual sense.
CASE STUDIES1
Harry W. suffers from akinetopsia, or motion blindness. He sees no continuous motion. He perceives, instead, what he describes as a series of still images
with blurs in between. Harry, whose motion blindness has worsened along with
his Alzheimer‘s, likes to watch his cat race across the living room carpet. He sees
no motion as the cat bounds and leaps, but he knows the cat is moving because
the animal’s form appears at different places in the room. It’s only when the cat
curls up to sleep on a sunny windowsill that Harry sees his pet clearly.
Marianne R. has no trouble with motion vision but she cannot discriminate
objects. Her condition is called visual agnosia. It struck Marianne after a massive
stroke damaged parts of both her occipital and temporal lobes. When working
with her occupational therapist, Marianne can pick up an apple, peel it, and eat
it. She can describe its color as red, its shape as spherical, and its texture as waxy,
but she cannot say that the apple is an apple. She cannot identify geometric
shapes, the letters of the alphabet, or a photograph of a dog as a dog.
Alex S. is only eleven years old, but he has Balint’s syndrome, probably as a
result of a massive infection he incurred in early childhood. The infection caused
bleeding in his brain, and blood pockets had to be drained to relieve the pressure. Now, Alex has all three of the conditions that define Balint’s. He can’t see
109
110
vision
or perceive several objects at the same time, a disorder called asimultagnosia.
When he looks out his window at the city park near his home, he sees a single
tree, but cannot discern the bike path in front of the tree or the cyclist pedaling
along the path. At the mall, he bumps into people not because he is careless,
but because he doesn’t know they are standing in his path. Although his visual
acuity tests are normal, he has trouble picking up objects (optical ataxia) and directing his gaze toward a single object (optical apraxia). He does poorly in school.
In order to read, he has to move the book from side to side to see the page. He
skips letters and words and cannot follow lines of text.
Harry, Marianne, and Alex demonstrate a key feature of visual processing
in the brain: individual capacities can be lost, while others are retained. This
occurs because parts of the brain’s visual-processing machinery can operate
independently. They specialize—handling motion, orientation, color, or other
specifics. Other regions of the brain, beginning as early as the retina of the eye,
“put it all together” to achieve what the higher brain centers perceive as a unified image of the world. The story begins in the eye.
THE RETINA
The retina lies at the back of the eye, but it is actually part of the brain. A
mere half-millimeter thick,2 the retina is made up of three parallel layers of
nerve cells, with their tangled axons and dendrites forming alternating rows in
between. The layer closest to the front of the eye consists primarily of ganglion
cells. The second layer contains horizontal cells, bipolar cells, and amacrine cells.
In the deepest layer at the back of the retina lie the light-sensitive neurons—the
photoreceptors, cones, and rods—all 120 million of them.3
Cones are responsible for color vision in bright light. A single cone is individually fine-tuned to respond only to blue, red, or green light. In the center of
the retina lies the macula, the region that facilitates sharp vision in the middle
of the visual field. A spot in the macula called the fovea is composed almost entirely of cones; it’s where the sharpest images focus in bright light. Rods, which
respond to shades of gray, work best in dim light. Rods are plentiful in the peripheral areas of the retina, outside the macula. The fovea contains no rods.
The responses of rods are slow compared to those of the cones, but in the
end, the result is the same. When light strikes a rod or a cone, a specific chemical reaction occurs, triggering a nerve impulse, and messages travel among neurons in the eye, although not always in the usual fashion. Most neurons in other
parts of the body transmit signals across the synaptic gap (the space between
neurons) via the chemical action of a neurotransmitter. That does not always
happen in the retina. Some of the signal transmission in the eye is by direct, electrical means. Still, a large number of neurotransmitters operate at various stages
The Big Picture
111
of retinal processing, sometimes transmitting messages and sometimes influencing the flow of electrical signals.
One important neurotransmitter at work in the retina is glutamate, but it plays
a kind of backwards role. In the dark, photoreceptors constantly emit glutamate.
The bipolar and ganglion cells that fire in response to glutamate control the OFF
pathway in retinal processing. That pathway handles dark images viewed against
a light background. When photoreceptors are exposed to light, an impulse is triggered and glutamate release ceases. Certain bipolar and ganglion cells stop firing when glutamate is absent. Those cells control the ON pathway, which allows
detection of light images on a dark background.
Individual rods and cones in the deepest layer of the retina have very narrow
receptive fields; that is, each responds only to a single, minute point of light that
strikes it directly. The signal a rod or cone generates travels outward (toward the
front of the eye) into cells in other layers that have larger fields. In the surface
layer of the retina lie the ganglion cells. These cells have wide, circular receptive fields. Ganglion cells are of two main types. Some respond most to light in
the center of the circle. Others are activated when light falls on the periphery.
Together, these ganglion cells collect and organize impulses from the cell layers
below. They are responsible for most of the signals that travel to the brain via
more than a million optic nerve fibers.4
Pathways from the fovea to the ganglion cells consist of a single cone that
sends an impulse to a single bipolar cell and from there to only two ganglion
cells: one of the ON type and one of the OFF type. Communicating with both
ON and OFF cells means that the message from the fovea is not lost whatever
the object-background relationship. The straight-line route means that information from the fovea travels to the brain virtually unchanged. The blue-detecting
cones (found outside the fovea) operate a little differently from the red and green;
they transmit signals through different types of bipolar and ganglion cells. The
ON response is blue, and the OFF response is yellow.
Rod-dominated vision in dim light works through slightly different pathways.
The bipolar cells that receive messages from rods do not connect directly with
ganglion cells. Instead, amacrine cells in the middle layer of the retina act as
go-betweens, ferrying signals along to both ON and OFF ganglion cells, and from
there to the brain. It was once thought that only rods sent messages via amacrine
cells, but recent research suggests that at least some cones may transmit via
amacrine cells, too.5
IN THE BRAIN PROPER
Some of the impulses that travel from the ganglion cells of the retina through
the optic nerve never reach the brain’s visual centers. Some follow neuronal
112
vision
branches to other structures in the brain, including the suprachiasmatic nucleus
(SCN), which is the body’s primary time-keeping mechanism (see Chapter 30).
Some impulses go to parts of the brain that control automatic movements, such
as the dilation and constriction of the pupil in responses to changes in light level.
Some signals travel to a region called the superior colliculus. It triggers the automatic movements of the eyes and head needed to keep a sharp, central image
focused on the fovea. It also selects from the complicated visual environment the
specific object worthy or focused visual attention.6
But the first stop for 80 percent of the impulses that travel through the optic
nerve is the lateral geniculate nucleus (LGN), which lies in the thalamus of the
brain. The thalamus acts as a “central dispatcher” for the information that comes
in from all the senses except smell, but the thalamus is more than a sorting station. Certain structures in the thalamus initiate and sustain visual attention. Another part of the thalamus adjusts the brain’s perception of orientation, so that
an image appears stable no matter what the position of the head and body.
The LGN is organized into six cell layers. The layers have distinct functions.
In adults, each layer of the LGN receives inputs from one eye only. (This specialization develops through stimulation of both eyes early in infancy; it’s the reason why a newborn’s eyes should never be covered.) In the LGN, some crossover
occurs. Information from the right visual field goes to the left hemisphere of the
brain and vice versa. These signals end up on the two sides of the occipital lobe
(at the back of the head) in the primary visual cortex. That area is called the
striate cortex or V1.
V1 is organized in horizontal layers much the same as the LGN. The layers
have their own visual specialties. Some respond only to a certain color or to a
movement in one direction. Some detect only pinpoints of light; others, only
edges and lines. So precise is their action that one line-detecting neuron “sees”
only horizontal lines, while another detects only right angles.
The horizontal layers of the V1 are also organized into vertical columns.
Each column contains all the layers but handles a separate segment of the visual
field. V1 gets (more or less; see Chapter 18) an exact neural replica of the light
patterns that fall on the retina. Subsequently, higher visual-processing centers
can draw upon and utilize the visual information coded in the V1.
Nearly thirty different visual-processing regions in the brain have been named
and described. The best known are the primary area, V1; the secondary area, V2;
and the so-called higher associative areas, V3, V4, the medial temporal (MT) cortex (V5), and others, up to V8. Some of the specialties of these areas are known.
Like V1, V2 maintains a complete and accurate map of information coming
in from the retina. V3 is finely tuned to changes in orientation. It also seems to
“understand” the apparent change in shape that occurs when an object is tilted;
it “knows” the object still has the same shape, although the point of view has
The Big Picture
113
Wiring the Brain for Vision
The brain isn’t always in charge of the senses. If fact, there’s reason to argue
the opposite: the senses run the brain. That’s certainly true when we consider how the visual system develops in infancy. As with every other sensory
system, the control mechanisms are chemical. Scientists at Children’s
Hospital in Boston have found (in mice) a protein called Otx2. It’s made
during critical periods when the visual system is developing in the brain,
but the brain doesn’t make it. The retina does, but only when the eyes are
getting light stimulation. Otx2 travels from the eyes to the brain where it
triggers the wiring of the brain’s visual circuitry.7 The process has to be
timed to perfection. “The eye is telling the brain when to become plastic,
rather than the brain developing on its own clock,” says researcher Takao
Hensch. “If the timing is off, the brain won’t set up its circuits properly.”8
changed. V3 sends impulses to both V4 and MT (V5). V4 neurons are fine-tuned
for shape, orientation, and color.
The major motion-detection area is MT (V5). It receives input from V1, V2,
V3, and V4. No matter what the object, if it moves, MT neurons fire. Neurons
in the MT are organized in columns and are tuned specifically to particular line
orientation, much as in the LGN. MT also receives inputs directly from the
retina, with no stopovers in V1 through V4. Thus, doctors sometimes encounter
unusual cases in which a tumor, stroke, or injury in V1 renders a patient blind
to visual images but still capable of detecting motion.9
MT isn’t the only motion-processing region of the brain. The medial superior temporal (MST) cortex responds to motion in a straight line, but its neurons
are also tuned to circular motion (clockwise or counterclockwise) and radial
motion (expansion or contraction toward or away from the viewer). They also
handle the visual inputs that come from a complex series of movements, such as
when crossing a busy street. The superior temporal polysensory (STP) area specializes in biological movement. It lets the human brain recognize another human
being from only a few movement clues.
Other associative regions that process images lie outside the main visual areas.
The inferotemporal (IT) cortex, for example, receives many impulses from V4.
It responds to both colors and shapes and is thought to play a part in recognizing
objects and remembering images. One researcher, Nancy Kanwisher at the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, has used functional magnetic resonance
imaging (fMRI) over more than a decade to locate and describe a number of
other associative areas that she considers “functionally distinct.” They include
114
vision
the fusiform face area (FFA), which responds to faces; the parahippocampal place
area (PPA), which responds to places; and the extrastriate body area (EBA), which
responds selectively to images of human bodies or body parts. “The selective responses of these regions are robust enough that each of them can be found, in
the same approximate anatomical location, in virtually every normal subject
scanned with fMRI. Thus, the FFA, PPA, and EBA are part of the basic functional architecture of human extrastriate cortex,” Kanwisher says.10
Other researchers have identified additional areas that perform unique visual
functions. One area at the front of the brain just above the eyes specializes in the
faces of infants. It responds immediately (100 milliseconds) and instinctively to
the faces of the very young, but not to more mature faces. It’s an emotional area
of the brain, and its selective responses to baby faces may play an important role
in bonding adults to the infants in their care.11
The newest research also shows that visual processing isn’t limited to the
neurons of the brain’s outer layer, the cortex. In fact, most of the brain’s cells are
not neurons. They are glial cells. Somewhere between one and five trillion glial
cells protect and support the neurons of the two hemispheres.12 One important
type of glial cell is the astrocytes, or astroglia. Scientists once believed that astroglia merely provide nutrients, support, and insulation for neurons, but recent
research suggests that astroglia do much more. They “instruct” new, unspecialized
brain cells, “teaching” them what kind of mature neuron to become. They also
help regulate the transmission of nerve impulses and the formation of connections between brain cells.13 In the visual system, they respond directly to visual
stimuli much as nearby visual neurons do—sometimes even more finely tuned
to specific features, such as orientation, than neurons are.14
Different pathways and connections between and among cell types and regions take separate tracks in the brain. One major route is thought to head off to
the temporal lobes where objects are recognized and identified. A second major
pathway leads to the parietal lobe where the size, position, and orientation of objects are processed. This is the kind of information the brain uses not to name
objects but to manipulate them. These two separate, but interrelated, tracks have
been the subject of a great deal of research. Scientists at Ben-Gurion University
in Israel, for example, presented volunteers with optical illusions in which one
small bar appeared longer than another, when in fact the opposite was true. Participants also saw bars of equal length and bars in which the longer-looking one
was actually longer. In each case, the volunteers visually estimated and reported
bar lengths. Then, they either grasped the bars between thumb and forefinger or
indicated the lengths of the bars by holding their thumb and forefinger apart at
a distance they judged equal to the lengths of the bars. In nearly every case, visual perception was fooled, but the action sense was not. Even when participants
thought the shorter bar was longer, their fingers, nonetheless, got the length comparison right.15
The Big Picture
115
When Sight Is Gone
If you lose your sight, do your other senses sharpen? That question has been
much debated, but some evidence suggests the answer is yes. Furthermore,
the adaptation may occur in a matter of days.
Researchers at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston have
found that people with normal vision who are blindfolded for five days
learn Braille better than people who aren’t blindfolded. Brain scans of the
blindfolded Braille students reveal that the brain’s visual cortex becomes
extremely active in response to touch. No such activity is observed in pretest scans, and the increased activity disappears within twenty-four hours
after the blindfolds come off.16
“The speed and dynamic nature of the changes we observed suggest
that rather than establishing new nerve connections—which would take
a long time—the visual cortex is unveiling abilities that are normally concealed when sight is intact,” says senior author Alvaro Pascual-Leone. Says
principal investigator Lotfi Merabet, “In a sense, by masking the eyes, we
unmask the brain’s compensatory potential.”17
CROSSTALK, ADAPTATION, AND PLASTICITY
Harry, Marianne, and Alex experience visual difficulties because of damage
to a small region of the brain’s visual-processing centers, somewhere within the
V1–V8 network. Each one of them has a lesion in a different area, so their losses
in function are different. The localized damage robs them of a particular ability,
while leaving the remainder of their visual capacity unimpaired. For each of
them, it’s possible that the brain’s plasticity will allow a network of neurons
nearby to take over and perform the function that was lost.
All three are enrolled in experimental treatment programs designed to help
them overcome—or at least lessen—their visual deficits. All have experienced
improvement for three fundamental reasons. One is that different regions of
the visual system “talk” to one another, and not always in a bottom-up, directfrom-V1 fashion. Considerable feedback travels from the so-called “higher” regions back down to those areas that handle basic processing.
This leads to the second reason: adaptation. Sensory neurons change their
responses to match changes in input. As amazing as that sounds, neurons operate differently depending on what the environment is serving up at the moment.
Adaptation modifies how information is coded in populations of neurons. Studies in monkeys, for example, have shown that neurons of the V1 quickly find an
116
vision
efficient way to handle input from a fixed visual stimulus. They grow more efficient, more organized, and less variable in their activity.18
The third reason is plasticity, the brain’s ability to reorganize itself. Neuroscientists once thought that the adult brain was static, with its only change being
the inevitable, day-to-day loss of neurons. But research evidence that began accumulating in the 1990s proved that idea wrong. Faced with a lesion, the brain
can sometimes reroute sensory input into alternative processing areas. When existing connections among neurons are lost, new ones can be forged. New neurons
can even be born, differentiated, and remodeled to take over lost functions.
Those processes are aided by experience. Alex is now performing better in
school because he has been doing the same kinds of training exercises that educators recommend for children with dyslexia. Harry will probably never perceive
his cat’s motion, but he can navigate his home, using landmarks as clues to the
direction of his own motion. As for Marianne, she smiled at her therapist last week
when she called an apple an apple.
Chapter 17
Color and Memory
ant to remember a picture or scene? See it in living color! So says
a team of psychologists working at the Max Planck Institute in Germany. They showed pictures of forests, rocks, and flowers to volunteers who looked at a large number of photographs, half in color and half in black
and white. Then the volunteers viewed the same images randomly mixed with
many new images. Their task was to identify which pictures they had seen before
and which they had not. Memories of the colored pictures were 5 to 10 percent
better than those of the black-and-white ones, no matter how long the subjects
viewed the photos. Subjects who first saw pictures in color and later saw them in
shades of gray (or vice versa) did not remember the pictures as well.
Through several related experiments, the researchers were able to rule out
the idea that their volunteers were simply paying more attention to the colored
pictures. The investigators also found that artificially colored pictures, as opposed
to natural colors, offered no memory advantage.1 The study concluded that the
human brain stores colors as part of the overall memory of scenes and objects.
The question is how?
W
FIRST THINGS FIRST: HOW COLOR VISION WORKS
A physicist will tell you that there is no such thing as color in the real world.
Like beauty, color is in the eye—or more accurately, the brain—of the beholder.
Light acts like particles, but it also behaves like a wave. The distance between
the peaks of the waves can vary. That’s wavelength. White light contains many
wavelengths. Objects reflect different wavelengths, but wavelengths themselves
117
118
vision
have no color. Color vision is just the brain’s way of telling one wavelength from
another. Humans perceive wavelengths between 400 and 700 nanometers (nm)
long as colors ranging from violet (the shorter wavelengths) to red (the longer
ones). Within that range lie many thousands of color variations that the human
eye—and brain—can differentiate.
The color-sensitive cells of the retina, the cones, come in three varieties: the
S- or short-wavelength cones that are most sensitive to wavelengths around 430
nm; the M- or medium-wavelength cones that respond best around 530 nm; and
the L- or long-wavelength cones that have their optimal response at 560 nm.2
These cones are often dubbed the blue (S), green (M), and red (L) photoreceptors, although their color responsiveness is not, in truth, that limited. Individual
cones respond to light across a wider range of wavelengths; their designation as
S, M, or L comes only from the wavelength that elicits the strongest response.
The three cone types vary in their placement in the retina. There are no S-cones
in the fovea. Outside the fovea lie about twice as many L-cones as M-cones, but
their arrangement is not uniform or predictable; cones of a single type can occur
in clusters.
Each of the cone types contains a photopigment that changes chemically
when struck by light. Photopigments have two main chemical components: a
chromophore, which, in humans, is retinal (a form of vitamin A); and opsin,
a protein. Although each opsin has a different molecular structure depending
on the cone type, the function of S-opsin, M-opsin, and L-opsin is the same in
all cones (and the same as that of rhodopsin, the protein in the black-and-white
photoreceptors, the rods). When light strikes the photopigment, the opsin and
the chromophore split apart. That chemical change triggers a nerve impulse.
The impulse from a cone travels through a bipolar cell in the retina’s middle
later to a ganglion cell in the outer layer. These “spectrally opponent neurons”
are excited by one cone type and inhibited by another. For example, a signal from
an L-cone excites a +L/–M cell, but a signal from an M-cone inhibits it. Conversely, +M/–L cells are excited by inputs from M-cones and inhibited by inputs
from L-cones. Signals from the S-cones work in opposition to both L- and M-cone
signals. For example, +S/–(L+M) cells fire in response to short-wavelength light;
medium- and long-wavelength light signals block their firing.
The opponent process theory of color vision suggests that these cells “recode” information from the cones into three processes or channels: one no-color
channel (white-black, or the “luminance” channel) and two opposing color channels (red-green and blue-yellow). The new channels arise from differing patterns
of signals from the three cone types. The process uses, in theory, simple addition
and subtraction:
In the L + M or luminance channel, the signals from L- and M-cones
are added to compute the intensity of the stimulus. In the L - M colour-
Color and Memory
119
opponent channel, the signals from L- and M-cones are subtracted from
each other to compute the red-green component of a stimulus. Finally,
in the S – (L + M) channel the sum of the L- and M-cone signals is subtracted from the S-cone signal to compute the blue-yellow variation of a
stimulus.3
This reorganization of color information into three channels occurs both in
the retina and in three layers of the lateral geniculate nucleus (LGN) of the brain.
Cells in the LGN specialize in the inputs they receive, keeping the “channels”
organized pretty much the same way as the ganglion cells do. The magnocellular layer carries luminance information, and motion, too. The koniocellular
layer handles the blue-yellow. The parvocellular layer carries the red-green channel. Damage to the parvocellular layer results in an extreme loss of color vision.
Another way to look at pathways is to examine them from the ON–OFF
point of view. ON and OFF describe how luminance affects a neuron’s firing,
regardless of wavelength. In color vision, ON means a neuron’s firing rate speeds
up when illumination increases. OFF means the firing rate speeds up as illumination decreases. The majority of S-cone input is of the ON type. A specialized
kind of bipolar cell in the retina’s middle layer provides S-ON signals to the ganglion cells and LGN. Three types of ganglion cells in the retina receive S-cone
input: one type receives excitatory input, and two types receive inhibitory input.
The main conduit for S-ON signals in the LGN is the koniocellular layer. The
parvocellular layer in the LGN receives little or no input from S-cones; some
cells in the magnocellular pathway may respond to S-cone signals, although their
sensitivity to L- and M-cone signals is much greater.4
From the LGN, visual information travels to the primary visual cortex, or V1,
in the occipital lobe (at the back of the head). Most V1 cells are more “interested” in the orientation of edges and differences in illumination than they are
in color, so they don’t show the same pattern of color activation that’s seen in the
LGN. Only 5 to 10 percent of V1 neurons respond strongly to color alone (redgreen and blue-yellow), but as many as half respond to some combination of
color with luminance.5 The color-sensitivities of V1 cells differ markedly from
those of their counterparts in the LGN, so investigators assume that some recombination of color information is occurring as signals travel to the V1 or in the V1
itself.6
Although the process is little understood, the information about color that
leaves the V1 and travels to other visual-processing regions of the brain must be
separated from other types of information, such as the shape, texture, and form
of objects. If it were not, you would be unable to see objects in black and white.
Yet somehow, as the experiment on better memory for naturally colored scenes
suggests, color information also stays linked to other attributes of an object. Thus,
you can perceive an apple in shades of red or shades of gray, but if you see the
120
vision
red one, the red information stays linked to the information that was also available in black and white: the size, form, and surface characteristics of the apple.
Neurons capable of achieving this integration are known to lie in V2; the colorsensitivity of those cells depends on the background. About one third of the cells
in V2 are narrowly tuned to a small range of wavelengths; those cells could be
important to recognizing separate objects in scenes and detecting color in shadowed or dappled environments.
At least two higher color-processing areas (above V1 and V2) have been identified and studied. Researchers can’t always agree on the brain’s topography or the
names given to its regions, so the areas known to be especially color-responsive
go by various designations, usually V4 (also V8 or VO-1) and V4-alpha. Damage
to V4 sometimes induces a form of colorblindness called cerebral achromatopsia, in which a stroke or trauma victim sees the world in black and white, while
the perception of form, depth, and motion remains unimpaired. V4-alpha is active during tasks requiring color ordering, color imagery, knowledge about color,
color illusions, and processing of object color.7
A number of experiments have demonstrated the color-affinity of V4 and V4alpha. In one, researchers at Baylor College of Medicine in Houston used fMRI
to pinpoint neurons near the V4 that fired in response to the color blue-purple.
Subsequent electrical stimulation of those same neurons through tiny electrodes
caused a volunteer to “see” blue-purple, although no color was actually shown.
“[It’s a] blue, purple color, like aluminum foil when it burns,” the man reported.
In response to stimulation of neurons in the V1, he “saw” only flashes of white
light.8
Yet, as much as our sense of order might demand that we identify specific brain
regions for specific types of processing, nature refuses to cooperate. Evidence is
accumulating that color analysis and coding are inextricably linked with the analysis and coding of other visual elements, such as motion and form. For example,
difficulty in recognizing shapes often accompanies achromatopsia, suggesting
that color perception and shape recognition may be handled in the same brain
regions. Experiments show also that V4 qualifies as the brain’s spatial recognition center just as well as it does for color. Thus, “[t]hough there are some brain
areas that are more sensitive to color than others, color vision emerges through
the combined activity of neurons in many different areas,”9 say European researchers Karl Gegenfurtner and Daniel Kiper.
COLORFUL MEMORIES
“[C]olor is what the eye sees best,” says Gegenfurtner. Of all the inputs the
eye receives, small spots of red light are the most easily detected. Although the
eye and brain may fail to discern subtle changes in illumination, even slight shifts
on the red-green spectrum are obvious. Gegenfurtner has shown that color sig-
Color and Memory
121
Different Types of Memories
Some memories are fleeting, while others last a lifetime:
•
•
•
•
Sensory memory lasts only 300 to 500 milliseconds. For a twinkle in
time, your brain retains a nearly perfect image of what you see (iconic
memory) or hear (echoic memory).
Primary, or short-term, memory lasts up to 30 seconds. The average
person can store about seven bits of information in short-term memory. That lets you remember a phone number long enough to make
a call.
Working memory is the system that lets you keep track of a conversation, remember where you parked your car, or work through several
steps in a math problem. Working memory lasts for minutes, hours,
or days—as long as you need it—and then disappears.
Long-term memory is more or less permanent. In a lifetime, a brain
may retain one quadrillion separate bits of information. That’s a one
with 24 zeroes after it, or a million multiplied by itself four times.
Memories may also be classified by their content:
•
Verbal: language
•
Spatial: the forms, positions, and movement of objects
•
Episodic: times, places, and events of our lives
•
Declarative: facts; for example, Lincoln wrote the Gettysburg
Address
•
Procedural: how to do anything from hammering a nail to composing a sonnet
•
Habit: procedural memory associated with some reward
•
Motor learning: the process that improves movement skills
through practice
nificantly improves the speed at which images can be recognized. It also improves the memory of those images. “How does the brain do it?” he asks.10
No one knows the answer to that question, but future research will undoubtedly probe not only the nature of color perception, but also the nature of
memory itself. Ask a scientist what memory is, and you’ll probably get long-term
potentiation (LTP) as an answer. The idea goes something like this: When a
nerve impulse reaches the end of an axon, it triggers the release of a neurotransmitter into the gap of the synapse. When the neurotransmitter attaches to the
dendrite of the next neuron, it starts an impulse in the second cell. If this happens
many times, the signal is strengthened, maybe permanently. In this way, neurons
122
vision
become conditioned to respond strongly to signals they have received many
times before. Or, in simpler terms, “Neurons that fire together wire together.”11
The process of long-term potentiation requires the chemical action of
neurotransmitters. Among the hundreds of neurotransmitters that operate in the
brain, memory synapses in the hippocampus and cortex make the most use of
the neurotransmitter glutamate. It takes a lot of glutamate to trigger an impulse,
but once a synapse is excited by glutamate several times, it becomes persistently
more excitable. “The synapse has learned something; that is, it was ‘potentiated’
or strengthened. From then on, it takes less of a signal to recall a memory,” explains neuroscientist Robert Sapolsky.12
Repeated signals increase the concentration of a messenger molecule in the
receiving neuron. The messenger is cyclic adenosine monophosphate (cAMP).
It relays a signal to the nucleus of the neuron and triggers a series of chemical reactions that produce the memory protein CREB. CREB, in turn, promotes the
production of still other proteins that operate in the synaptic gap and strengthen
a memory.13 Yet more proteins may be responsible for maintaining a memory.
New York researchers studied an enzyme called PKMz. When it’s present, a memory persists. When its action is blocked, a memory is lost.14
While researchers generally agree on the LTP processes that form and maintain memories, they also recognize that not all memories are the same. The different types of memories (see sidebar) may explain, in part, why we remember
naturally colored scenes better than black-and-white ones, even when the luminance is the same. Although their conclusions are controversial, the researchers
at Max Planck who showed people the colored and gray-scale pictures think that
the color advantage begins in the earliest stages of visual processing. They say
color provides “sensory facilitation”; that is, we detect the shapes, sizes, and orientations of objects more easily and more quickly when we see them in color.
The detection happens during the sensory or iconic phase of memory formation,
within a mere 50 milliseconds. But iconic improvement doesn’t explain all the
memory advantage that color confers. The German researchers suggest that memories of objects are stored in an achromatic, black-and-white form in one memory system and in a surface-based, episodic form in another. However, memories
interact, and color is no exception; the recognition of objects and scenes improves only if the colors are the usual, natural, expected ones.
So you’ll remember a photograph of a yellow banana, but you’ll probably
forget a blue one. In the brain, “color is intricately linked to the identity of an
object,” the researchers say.15 Color perception affects memory, and memory
affects color perception. Our prior knowledge of the world changes the color
we see.
Chapter 18
Sizing Things Up
live by a mountain lake. It freezes in the winter. That’s one of the best times
to observe wildlife: foxes, eagles, white-tailed deer. I often spot the animals
in the distance, far on the other side of the icy expanse. They look like tiny
specks, but my brain recognizes them for what they are, and I know their true
size. How? Our eyes tell us only part of what we need to know. The brain does the
rest, making inferences about what’s “out there.”
Some of those inferences are all wrong.
I
THE MOON ILLUSION
When I was a child, I used to rush home from school to watch my favorite
television show, The Kate Smith Hour. Her theme song was “When the Moon
Comes Over the Mountain.” My imagination pictured the moon rising over East
River Mountain (where I lived) with every glissando that plus-sized crooner warbled. The image was clear in my mind. As it topped the summit, the moon looked
huge, as big as the mountain itself. As it ascended into the sky, its size diminished. Miles above me, the moon shrank.
It wasn’t until my adult years, however, that I heard about, and began to
wonder about, the moon illusion. My problem was that I didn’t realize it was an
illusion. I always assumed—if I thought about it at all—that the moon moved
farther away as it rose, appearing smaller as all objects do when their distance
from the eye increases. I came to realize that such an explanation is nonsense.
The moon moves no farther away when the earth turns. Its change in size is an
illusion.
123
124
vision
Since I’ve begun to investigate such matters, I found at least six plausible explanations for the moon illusion. Some of them require mathematics far beyond
my grasp, but the one that makes intuitive sense to me involves visual clues. When
the moon is on the horizon, it appears to be as far away as the horizon. Therefore,
the brain “judges” its size as roughly mountain size. When the moon rises in the
sky, the visual reference point is lost. The moon is a small sphere floating in a
vastly larger empty field, so the brain “decides” the moon’s size has decreased.
So, if that hypothesis is correct, the moon’s size appears to change only because its position relative to the landscape changes. Landscape artists use this
principle every time they draw perspective lines, and even primitive painters have
the idea: Put an object toward the top of a canvas and the brain assumes it is farther away than an object at the bottom.
Are optical illusions such as the moon illusion anything but curiosities? Scott
Murray at the University of Washington thinks they are more than tricks. He sees
them as clues to how the visual-processing regions of the brain work, and he has
used them to demonstrate some facts that existing theories about vision can’t explain. One of them is what happens in the brain’s visual centers when we “size
things up.”
I head off to Seattle to learn more.
A VISIT WITH SCOTT MURRAY
To enter the psychology department of the University of Washington in Seattle is to enter a rat’s maze of identical corridors and doors. Guthrie Hall, where
Murray and several dozen other psychologists work, is enormous, with a labyrinth of barren, dark hallways jutting off in this direction and that; the only distinctive architectural feature is a solid wall of vertically textured concrete that
constitutes the outer perimeter. When I go there to meet Scott Murray, I wander for a while, wondering behind which wooden door my reward of cheese
might lie.
I eventually find Murray and we ride a service elevator as featureless as the
office and conference room where we settle down to talk. No posters adorn the institutional walls. No cushions soften the metal chairs. No flowers grace the utility
table where we lean our elbows. Jumbles of scientific journals are strewn helterskelter on warehouse-style shelves. In an environment as austere as this one, small
signs of human habitation assume major significance. The conference room
sports a Foosball table, and Murray has chanced a nod toward decorating his
office with cow-print throw pillows and a framed photograph of his wife paddling
an ocean kayak. We are, after all, only miles from the natural splendor of Puget
Sound, so who needs artwork?
Murray is tall, rangy, bearded. He’s a soft-spoken academician and the quintessential scientist. His love for learning shines, although he eschews both demonstrative gestures and verbal excess. “Personally, I could probably be interested in
Sizing Things Up
125
any kind of scientific topic,” he says. “I just like science and thinking about the
scientific process.”1
Early in his studies, Murray struck an interest in what he calls intermediatelevel vision problems: how we group items in a scene or how we recognize objects and faces. For a time, he studied hearing, which works in a hierarchical fashion much like vision. But the auditory region of the brain is very small and hard
to measure with techniques such as functional magnetic resonance imaging
(fMRI). The visual system has conveniently organized itself at a resolution that
suits MRI investigative methods perfectly.
Vision research also attracted Murray because different people, working with
different methods, can interrelate their findings, he says. Animal studies, perceptual analyses, cellular morphology, brain imaging—all can come together to create what he hopes will someday coalesce into a meaningful understanding of how
vision works.
So how does it work? I ask
PROBING THE V’S
Do this. Run your hand up the back of your neck until you come to a bump.
Place your palm on the bump, and you’re squarely over your occipital lobe, the
region of the brain that handles input from the eyes. The region is organized in
a hierarchical fashion: first-level processing in the V1 (somewhere around your
palm), higher-level processing in V2 farther out (think the base of your fingers),
V3 farther out along your fingers, and so on. Vision researchers such as Murray
spend a lot of time trying to figure out what’s going on in V1, V2, V3—all the
way out to V8.
The existing theory that everybody works with (see Chapter 16) suggests that
V1 receives an exact copy of the neural stimulation that comes from the retina.
That means (perhaps oversimplifying) that every spot of light that triggers a neural firing in the retina should correspond to a pinpointed neural firing in the V1.
The V1, thus, should get an exact duplicate record of what the retina “sees.” The
V1 is expected to make that raw data available to the higher visual-processing
centers, V2 and so on, where the meaning of the data can then be parsed. Thus,
until Murray and his team published a landmark paper in 2006, most people assumed that V1 maintains the neural equivalent of a photographic image. If our
brains are going to be fooled about the size of the moon or some other optical illusion, most experts thought, then the trickery was going on higher up in the V2,
V3, or above.
Murray has challenged that view. He says he was explaining the idea of a
“photographic” V1 in a speech he was writing one day. He wrote that the fundamental nature of V1 was known and moved on to more interesting topics, but
his own words gave him pause. He described some size illusions and some color
illusions and stated, “We know at the level of V1 that the two representations
126
vision
Figure 1
Credit: Huseyin Boyaci, Bilkent University, Turkey.
[will] be the same.” But would they? “I had that phrase in my talk, but we didn’t
really know that they would be the same size in V1, so I thought I should go back
and test that before I said it.” That’s what Murray did. His breakthrough experiment was supposed to be nothing more than a control experiment—one meant
to verify what vision researchers already knew.
Here’s what Murray did. He captured fMRI scans of the brains of human
volunteers as they viewed the two images (among others) above (Figure 1). In
the picture without a background, it’s obvious that the two balls are the same size,
and Murray’s research subjects reported seeing them that way. Their self-reports
were confirmed in scans of the V1. The two balls occupied the same amount of
neural space—spots that the MRI detects as increased brain activity in a particular area. The images of the balls produced a “retinotopic image,” an exact duplicate of the information sent from the retina to the V1.
Where conventional wisdom failed was in predicting the V1 map of the balls
in the brick hallway image. What Murray expected was the same result as with
the no-background balls. The V1 should have received and recorded what the
retina “saw.” But it did not. The volunteers reported that the ball in the back was
at least 17 percent larger than the one in the front. The scans of their V1’s showed
that, too. The regions of activation were 17 percent larger, just as when the people viewed balls that actually were bigger. The illusion produced differences in
V1 activity just as a real size differences did.2
What is revolutionary about Murray’s results? No one expected size judgments to be made in (or even before) the V1. Sizing things up should be a higher-
Sizing Things Up
127
What You See Is What You Imagine
Somewhere along the road to perception lies the stopover called imagination. In terms of brain activity, imagining a thing is not much different from
actually seeing that thing. But can imagination actually change what we see?
New evidence from researchers at Vanderbilt University says yes. “Imagining something changes vision both while you are imagining it and later
on,” says psychologist Joel Pearson.3 He has shown that “top-down” expectations, imaginings, or memories can change what the eyes see. “You might
think you need to imagine something ten times or one hundred times before it has an impact,” says Pearson’s co-researcher Frank Tong. “Our results
show that even a single instance of imagery can tilt how you see the world
one way or another.”4
In the Vanderbilt experiments, subjects imagined simple patterns of
vertical or horizontal stripes. The imaginings stimulated the primary visual
areas of the brain. Then the investigators showed their subjects green, horizontal stripes in one eye and red, vertical stripes in the other. Normally,
such competing images cause viewers to perceive both patterns, with abrupt
switches back and forth as the brain attends to data coming in from one eye
and then the other. But that’s not what happened here. The subjects saw
the pattern they had imagined and missed the contradictory data coming
into one eye.
The effect of imagination was about the same as when subjects actually saw a faint image of one of the patterns between trials. The effect was
stronger if the subjects either viewed or imagined a pattern for a longer time.
The Vanderbilt team says that both seeing and imagining generate a “perceptual trace” that modifies what is seen later. As expected, some people
are more susceptible to the effects of imagination than are others.5
level process, but it isn’t. The perceived size of an object—not its true size—
determines the amount of processing space allocated to an image in the V1.
“You don’t have conscious access to the size of the image on the retina,” Murray
explains. “If you believe the hierarchical model of the visual system, this result
shouldn’t occur.” But it does.
FEEDBACK
How might this result be explained? Murray says no one knows, but he has
some ideas—ideas that came from some of his past research. In an earlier project,
128
vision
he asked volunteers to look at groups of stationary or moving dots or lines. Sometimes the dots and lines were random. At other times, they formed geometric
two-dimensional or three-dimensional shapes. Murray used fMRI to see what his
subjects’ visual areas were doing when they viewed the irregular or patterned
forms. In his analysis, he compared activity in the V1 with what was going on in
the lateral occipital complex (LOC). The LOC lies just outside the V areas, but
it is known to be active when shape recognition is occurring.
When the shapes grew more regular and geometric, activity in the LOC increased. That was expected. The surprise came when activity in the LOC and the
V1 were compared. If the V1 were simply holding information from the retina
and passing it on to other processing regions, then its activity should be constant,
no matter what occurs elsewhere. That’s not what Murray found. Instead, as
LOC activity increased, V1 activity decreased. Murray concluded that the LOC
was regulating the activity of the V1 via feedback. That is, neuronal projections
from the LOC to the V1 were altering V1’s action.6 It’s as if the LOC says, “V1,
you don’t have to work so hard. I recognize this as a shape, so I’ll take over, and
you can take a break.” So, what Murray showed is that the V1 is “seeing” what
the higher visual-processing regions “tell it to.”
This feedback results from an actual structural connection between and
among neurons. “A cell body in one visual area sends an axon that synapses back
in V1. That is the feedback,” Murray explains. The neuronal projections that
carry the feedback message may go directly from the LOC to the V1. Or they
may be indirect, traveling through other V areas before they reach V1. Murray
says that animal experiments provide evidence for both direct and indirect connections. But however the feedback message travels, it gets back to the primary
visual cortex, V1. “Activity in early visual areas is reduced as a result of grouping
processes performed in higher areas,” Murray says. “Inferences of high-level areas are subtracted from incoming sensory information in lower areas through
cortical feedback.”
BACK TO THE MOON ILLUSION
Murray’s feedback explanation makes sense, but I wonder why I can’t use a
bit of conscious feedback to modify what’s going on in my V1 when I misjudge
the size of the moon. It seems that knowing that the moon is the same size at the
horizon as it is high in the sky should allow me to override my visual perception.
I should be able to coax my recalcitrant brain into accepting the truth. But I cannot, no matter how hard I try, see the moons as the same size, any more than I
can coerce my eyes and brain into seeing Murray’s two balls in the corridor as
the same size. Why can’t I force myself to see things as they really are? Why do
these illusions persist no matter how hard we consciously attempt to correct them?
Sizing Things Up
129
“The reason we can’t make them go away,” Murray explains, “is [that] the
neural representations for these two stimuli are different at the very earliest stages
of the visual system.” The brain can’t start operating on a point-for-point representation of reality because it never has one in the first place. The environment
is interpreted long before the level of conscious awareness. The feedback that
adapts us to the environment we expect—not the one that is really there—is
hardwired into our visual system. “The perceptual system doesn’t care about
what is on the retina,” Murray says. “What it cares about is what is out there in
the world. It isn’t trying to explain information on your retina. It’s just trying to
use the information on your retina to explain what is out there.”
Chapter 19
On the Move
T
hose who lose a sense have much to teach us about it. Consider the cases
of the neurological patients known only as R.A. and F.D.
R.A. was a retired computer manager who suffered a right-hemisphere stroke
at the age of sixty-six. For three weeks after his stroke, his speech was slurred and
his left arm and leg were weak. He complained of a severe headache at the back
of his head, on the right side. His medical history was grim; he had heart disease,
diabetes, high blood pressure, and high cholesterol. After his stroke, he entered
a rehabilitation hospital in hopes of regaining strength on his left side. He did,
but there was more to R.A.’s story. The stroke affected his motion vision. He complained that, when riding in a car, he could no longer judge the speed or direction of other vehicles traveling on the road.1
F.D. was a forty-one-year-old social worker. He suffered a mild stroke in his
left hemisphere. He experienced weakness on his right side, but the weakness
disappeared in a few days. He had trouble naming objects for a few weeks, but
that difficulty also resolved itself. He could discriminate the speed and direction
of movement with no difficulty. His perception of two-dimensional and threedimensional objects was normal. His color vision was normal, too. Yet he complained of feeling disturbed by visually cluttered moving scenes, such as the countryside passing by when he was riding in a car.2
Both men recovered strength and speech, but their visual problems lingered
—so much so that several years later, they contacted the Brain and Vision Research Laboratory and NeuroVisual Clinic at Boston University. “When people
can’t get anywhere, they end up with me,” says Lucia Vaina, director of the lab130
On the Move
131
oratory and clinic. Vaina is a rare bird in academia: a neurologist with affiliations
at Massachusetts General Hospital and Harvard Medical School who works in
Boston University’s Department of Biomedical Engineering.
“Some of my patients are blind to only certain types of motion,” Vaina says,
and that’s why I’ve come to talk with her on this rainy day in May. She’s invented
and developed tests of motion vision, measured motion vision in normal people,
and worked with patients like R.A. and F.D. to discover how the brain’s visual
system processes and perceives motion. I’m eager to learn about her work.
TYPES OF MOTION VISION
The first thing I ask Vaina is whether all motion vision is the same. It isn’t.
Translational motion means up, down, left, or right. Circular motion is a wheel
going around. Radial motion is something coming toward you (it’s expanding) or
moving away (it’s contracting). These distinctions are of more than academic interest. “When you move,” Vaina explains, “the world seems to be expanding. It
grows bigger as you approach things. If you are going backwards, it gets smaller.
It is contracting, so that is the importance of expansion-contraction in navigation.” Vaina has patients who cannot differentiate coming from going. One, who
can’t perceive motion at all, nevertheless gets around, using landmarks. Comparing the change in size and position of a landmark, the patient infers whether
she has moved toward an object or away from it.
The most basic distinction among types of motion vision is first-order and
second-order.
First-order motion is easy to define: it’s motion perceived because of a change
in luminance across time and space. Imagine a black bug crawling across white
paper, and you have it. You perceive the bug’s motion because the black and the
white reflect different amounts of light to your eyes. When the luminance pattern changes from one time to the next and from one point on the paper to the
next, you perceive first-order motion.
Second-order motion is a little more difficult to explain. It is defined not by
a change in luminance but by a change in texture, flicker, or contrast. An example of second-order motion is a butterfly flying among the trees. The luminance of the butterfly and its spotted background is the same, but the difference
in texture between the butterfly’s wing tips and the background of leaves reveals
the insect’s motion.
To get the idea of how second-order motion vision works, imagine one hundred bugs. They are black on their backs and white on their bellies. The bugs
line up single file on a square grid of ten columns and ten rows. In the beginning, some are black side up and some are white side up in no particular order.
On a signal, all the bugs in column 1 flip over, so where there was black, there
is now white and vice versa. The bugs flip so fast that you don’t see the flip, only
132
vision
The Amazing Case of Biological Motion
In 1973 Gunnar Johansson attached small lights to the head, shoulders,
arm, and leg joints of an actor dressed all in black. He photographed the
actor moving in total darkness. In the resultant film, no sign of the actor’s
body shape or size was present. Only the lights were visible, but observers
recognized the moving human form immediately.3 Thus, the term biological motion was born. It’s a special kind of motion vision, unique unto itself.
Minimal clues reveal movement of the human body, whether it’s walking,
running, hopping, or jumping.4 Even the gender of the moving human is
easily identified by the motion-vision system. Male figures appears to face
the viewer. Female figures seem to be moving away.5 Some of Vaina’s patients who are seriously impaired in simpler types of motion vision can
nonetheless identify the human body in motion, using as clues only a few
spots of light or dark on a computer screen.
Now there’s evidence that the human brain’s propensity for recognizing other humans in motion is inborn. Researchers in Italy tested two-dayold babies with light displays of biological and nonbiological motion. The
infants could tell the difference between the two, and they looked longer
at the biological motion. Their preference was orientation dependent; the
babies gazed longer at upright displays of biological motion than at upside
down ones.6
the color change. Now, within milliseconds, the bugs in column 2 flip black to
white and white to black, and then column 3, and then column 4, and so on, all
the way to column 10. Then they reverse the process and start flipping again,
starting with column 10 and moving back to column 1. While watching this, you
would perceive not simply a reversal of the colors, but a vertical line moving from
left to right and then right to left. There would, in reality, be no moving line, but
you’d see one, simply because the contrast between the successive columns was
changing.7
TESTING MOTION VISION
Double dissociation. That’s what her research on motion vision is all about,
Vaina tells me. Double dissociation “means I have two tasks: task A and task B,”
she says. “You can do A but not B, or you can do B but not A. That means that
in the brain, A and B are not necessarily connected. You can dissociate them.
On the Move
133
You can doubly dissociate them: A but not B, B but not A. That tells us a lot about
the organization of the motion subsystem.”
Different types of motion vision are handled in different parts of the visual
cortex, and from patients such as R.A. and F.D., Vaina has learned that those
types can be doubly dissociated. A brain injury such as a stroke can rob a person
of one type of motion vision but not another. Furthermore, the lost of a “simple”
type of motion vision, such as translational motion, does not necessarily mean
loss of a “complex” form, such as radial. In fact, the opposite can occur; “simple”
motion vision can be lost, while the ability to perform “difficult” tasks remains
normal. That means that motion vision is not strictly hierarchical, Vaina explains. Information need not pass from the lower visual centers upward, in a
single direction. Instead, the perception of complex motions can be managed independently of other motion-detection tasks. A but not B; B but not A.
How does Vaina look for these double dissociations? She has invented and
perfected a series of visual tasks that she uses to test individuals—both normal
and neurologically impaired—on different types of motion vision. Her tests, which
were not possible until computers became as common as lead pencils, present a
test subject with a stimulus on a screen. The stimulus is tightly and narrowly defined, so only a single element of motion vision is assessed in any one test.
An example of one such test is coherence. Imagine one hundred bees in
a jar. Most of them move about randomly, but a certain number fly in a single
direction—perhaps left or right, up or down. How many of them have to be traveling in a same direction for the viewer to perceive the direction of their motion?
For people with normal motion vision, the answer lies somewhere around 10 percent. Only ten of those hundred bees need to be flying toward the right for the
test subject to say, “Right.” But for patients with brain lesions in certain regions
of the occipital lobe, where visual processing occurs, that number may rise to 30
or 40 percent. Yet such patients, highly impaired on coherence, may score in the
normal range for other motion-vision tests, even more complex ones.
Vaina uses a host of such tests to assess the motion vision of her subjects,
looking at but a single element of motion vision at a time. She can test for (among
others) sensitivity to contrast, detection of shape, wavelength discrimination,
color naming, binocular vision, location of a point, orientation of a line, speed
discrimination, inference of three-dimensional structure from motion, face
recognition, matching silhouettes to objects, object recognition, object memory,
topographic memory, and biological motion (see sidebar). Her patients can vary
in their capacities on all those tests, showing normal performance in one and impaired performance in another, in a doubly dissociated fashion.
Patient R.A. proved to be impaired in first-order motion vision, but not
second-order. Vaina worked with him for two years after his stroke. His depth
perception was normal, but he had problems recognizing objects. Initially, his
134
vision
See the Motion That Isn’t There?
Two regions of the brain specialize in motion vision: MT (medial temporal
cortex, also called V5) and MST (medial superior temporal cortex). Hundreds of brain-imaging studies have shown increased activity in MT and
MST when people view objects in motion, or even when they imagine a
moving object.
What happens if motion is not shown, but implied? Researchers at
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology captured fMRI images of brain
activity while volunteers viewed still photographs of athletes stopped midmotion, stationary athletes, people at rest, houses, and landscapes. Any human image evoked greater activation in MT and MST than did the houses
or landscapes, but the greatest activity came when subjects saw athletes
stopped at some point in a continuous movement, such as throwing a shot
put.
The researchers explained this as a “top-down” effect. They suggested
that the inference of motion is not constructed in MT/MST directly; instead, other, “higher” areas of the brain categorize the object, link it to
learned associations about the object, and subsequently moderate MT/MST
activity to perceive motion that isn’t there. This top-down association happens automatically, with no conscious awareness, attention, or deliberation
on the part of the viewer.8
Further evidence for this idea came in 2007 when scientists at the Salk
Institute in La Jolla, California, trained monkeys to associate a stationary
arrow with a display of moving dots. Arrows mean nothing to monkeys, but
just to be safe, some of the monkeys were trained to associate an arrow
pointing up with dots moving down and vice versa. Later, when signals
from the animals’ neurons were recorded electronically, the sight of the
static arrow produced activity in MT and MST, exactly as the moving dots
had. The association comes from learning, the researchers say. Other regions of the brain “tell” the MT to “see” motion that isn’t there.9
right hemisphere lesion impaired his vision on the left side of his body, but he
soon recovered that capacity. However, his first-order motion remained deficient.
He could detect movement from changes in texture, flicker, or contrast, but
changes in luminance defied him.
Patient F.D. showed the opposite pattern. His first-order motion vision remained normal after his stroke, but his second-order was impaired. Vaina tested
him with stimuli such as flickering bars. He could not see their movement. She
On the Move
135
tried rotating patterns of dots moving clockwise and counterclockwise. F.D.
could not discern their motion. For the most part, he was able to navigate normally, because he found ways of compensating for his loss of second-order motion vision. He was, however, sometimes aware of his second-order deficit. When
his son’s soccer ball rolled into the garden, he said, he could not trace its path.
The luminance of the rolling black-and-white shapes was the same as that of the
dappled light and shadows of trees on grass. Unable to use contrast, texture, and
flicker cues, and robbed of luminance cues, F.D. could not see the ball.
STEAL FROM YOUR NEIGHBOR
R.A. and F.D. had lesions in different areas of their brains. Comparing R.A.
and F.D., along with brain images from dozens of other patients, has enabled
Vaina to identify areas of the brain that specialize in the different types of motion
vision. Area V2, where R.A. experienced his lesion, processes first-order stimuli,
and its projections send information to the higher visual-processing centers,
notably MT (V5).10 Vaina believes that second-order motion may be localized in
a region in the visual cortex that lies next to, and slightly above, MT. The region
does not require direct inputs from V1 and V3. The fact that MT responds to any
Blindsight
After a stroke, the eyes continue working normally, but if the stroke killed
neurons in the brain’s visual centers, then vision may be impaired, even
destroyed. Nevertheless, the eyes are still sending visual information to the
brain—a condition known as blindsight. Can undamaged parts of the brain
be retrained to take over for the parts that were lost? Until recently, few
treatment centers had tried the intensive rehabilitation for vision that is
routine for the loss of mobility or speech in stroke patients. Then, in 2009,
researchers at the University of Rochester Eye Institute demonstrated what
vigorous visual exercises could achieve. The scientists worked with five
patients who had gone partially blind after strokes. All five had damage in
V1, often considered the “gateway” through which visual information must
enter the brain. The patients worked daily on a series of visual exercises
presented on a computer screen. One of the exercises “forced” the brain to
“guess” when dots were moving in an area of the visual field that the patient couldn’t consciously see. After nine months or more of training, all
the patients regained some vision, some of them even returning to such
prestroke activities as shopping and driving.11
136
vision
sort of motion, either first- or second-order, may explain why R.A. could perform
second-order tasks, although he was impaired on first-order ones.12
Vaina says her research has two goals: (1) to better understand motion vision
in the brain, and (2) to apply that understanding to the rehabilitation of patients
such as R.A. and F.D. In her clinic, some of the vision tests Vaina has devised do
double duty as training tools. Patients come in to work at her computers, attempting to improve on those specific tasks on which they consistently fall short. Many
of her patients do improve over time, and their training gains translate into better day-to-day functioning. One patient, Vaina says, was able to resume driving
again, once his training on rotational motion vision allowed him to discriminate
the movement of vehicles on Boston’s many roundabouts.
What’s more, Vaina’s latest research shows precisely how the brain may reorganize itself after a stroke or other injury to compensate for capacities that have
been lost. Neural plasticity, Vaina explains, is a localized process. The brain’s
motion-processing regions, once damaged, can’t appropriate neural territory in
a distant region of the brain, but they can “steal from their neighbors,” diverting
neurons that previously performed one task to perform another. She shows me a
PowerPoint presentation of unpublished research; it will become a scientific paper she hasn’t gotten around to writing yet. It is a report on a patient identified
as J.S., who suffered a right-hemisphere stroke in the visual-processing areas.
Vaina worked with J.S. and captured MRI images of his occipital lobe at three,
eight, and eleven months after the stroke. Using some complex mathematics, she
measured changes in the size of the visual-processing areas, specifically those
designated V2d, V3, VP, V3a, and V4. In J.S.’s left hemisphere, where the stroke
did no damage, the size of those regions changed little over time. However, on
the brain’s right side, areas VP and V4 shifted slightly, while V2d, V3, and V3a
grew dramatically—by as much as almost 7 millimeters. The growth occurred because the visual regions impinged on their neighbors. Predictably, as those visual
areas expanded, J.S.’s performance on motion vision tasks also improved.
The same thing must have happened in the brains of R.A. and F.D. As they
recovered from their strokes, various brain regions “stole from their neighbors,”
and neurons reorganized themselves to regain some, if not all, of what was lost.
“It is hard for me to acknowledge that this really works,” Vaina says. “I believe
scientifically that it works . . . but to say to my patients, ‘It is going to work,’ I can’t
do that. It is ethics. This may not work. If it does work, so much the better. If not,
that is that.”
Still, whether rehabilitative applications succeed or fail, each of Vaina’s patients advances our understanding of motion vision. And so does Vaina herself.
“My business is to find out how you do what you do. . . . That allows me to look
into neural rehabilitation and neural plasticity in order to help people who no
longer can do things,” she says.
Chapter 20
Vision and the Video Game
recently conducted a nonscientific email survey on a nonrandom, nonrepresentative sample of friends and family members. I posed this problem: Suppose you are considering laparoscopic surgery. Only two surgeons perform
such surgery in your town, and you have no reason to doubt the competence of
either. Both surgeons are male and the same age. The only difference between
them is that one is an avid video game player in his free time. The other is not.
Which surgeon would you choose? Would your choice change if one had more
experience than the other did?
My questions evoked a flurry of Internet exchanges. Some respondents refused to play the game. They insisted on investigating other variables they considered more relevant, such as surgical success records or infection rates. Some
thought experience was more important than game playing: “I would choose the
doctor with the most experience, so in case of an unexpected problem, he would
know what to do,” one responder said.
A psychotherapist friend admitted that she sees game players only as troubled
young people in counseling. “Most of the video gamers I meet,” she said, “feel
alienated from people; they construct an alternative reality for themselves. The
range of feelings that would normally be present in human interaction is absent
from their artificial world.” Presumably, she wouldn’t want such a person cutting
into her body.
Some respondents rejected the game player—experienced or not—for personality reasons. “Gamers are dorks,” commented one relative. Others doubted
the game player’s work ethic: “What is this free time he has so much of? Why isn’t
he outside mowing the lawn?”
I
137
138
vision
But some respondents—surprisingly neither the youngest nor the trendiest—
chose the game player hands-down. “The video game player would be my choice
because of the quick, nimble fingers. Manual dexterity in a surgeon would be a
plus. Also the ability to make quick decisions and react accordingly would be useful,” said one friend. “I would probably take the game player, even if he had less
experience,” said another. “He may be better suited to do the surgery via the kinds
of images video games demand.”
Aside from the diversity of responses, what interested me the most was the
acceptance of video game playing as a relevant variable. While some people said
they’d consider other factors as more important, no one thought game playing
didn’t matter. Implicit in the answers was the assumption that game playing
changes the brain—and the person who owns it. The only dispute is how. That’s
where brain research comes in.
EXPERIMENTS ON GAMERS
One of today’s young and innovative brain researchers is cognitive psychologist Shawn Green. When he entered vision research, he started with what he
knew: the video game. Himself an avid game player and a lover of active sports
of all kinds, Green began as an undergraduate at the University of Rochester
to investigate how video games affect the visual skill of expert players and of
beginners who learn to play the games. His graduate-level research resulted in
papers in prestigious journals such as Nature and Cognition. In 2008, at age
twenty-seven, Green became a postdoctoral research associate at the University
of Minnesota.
I go to visit him at his office one bright spring morning. I can see the Mississippi River from his window. He is waiting for me, tossing a football from one
hand to the other while simultaneously answering emails from the Brain and
Vision Lab back at the University of Rochester, where he still has experiments
running. He is tall and lodgepole thin, with baby fine brown hair curling on his
shoulders, sunglasses pushed to the top of his head, and a functioning pair
(untinted) perched on his nose. His face is ethereal; he reminds me of an angel
in a Renaissance painting. I congratulate him on his publications. “Writing the
papers is my least favorite part of science,” he replies. “I’d be happy just knowing
the answers myself.”
But Green shows no reluctance in sharing his answers with me. Visual attention interests him most, he explains, but he doesn’t define attention in the ordinary
way. It’s not purposely “paying attention,” the way a teacher might admonish a
student to do. Instead, it’s the focusing on an object, event, or feature within the
visual field that happens automatically in the brain. The trick for the researcher
lies in using a visual test that is specific enough to measure a single, reproducible
Vision and the Video Game
139
aspect of visual attention. I ask Green to walk me through some of the tests he
used on video game players, and he does:
1.
The Attentional Blink. Imagine you are looking at a screen. One by one, letters appear, then wink out. Most of the letters are black, but one is white.
Some time after the white one, an X may or may not appear. Your job is to
identify the white letter, then tell whether the X appeared. That seems simple enough, but test results show some anomalous patterns. If the X comes
immediately after the white letter, you have a better than average chance of
seeing it; the brain tends to chunk the X in with the white letter, a phenomenon called “lag one sparing.” But if the X appears within 200 to 500 milliseconds after the white letter, many people miss it. For an instant after one
stimulus is perceived, the visual system is “blind” to another. That’s the attentional blink.
Green says a number of hypotheses might explain the attentional blink,
but he offers a simple one. “You are switching to a new task. You are going
from an identification task to a detection task, so you need a little time.” But
some people do better overall, and some people need less time than others
do. Video game players outperform nongame players on this test. In the
lag one part of the test, where the X comes immediately, they outperform
nongame players by better than 30 percent. In the attentional blink window,
they do better by some 40 percent. As more time passes between the white
letter and the X, the nongame players catch up, but they never did better
than the game players.1 “I don’t have an attentional blink,” says Green.
2. Enumeration. Now back to imagining that screen. This time, squares flash
on the screen for 50 milliseconds. As few as one or as many as twelve may
appear. Your job is to say how many. Up to three, everyone tests pretty well.
There are few errors. Above that, frequent game players differ markedly from
nongame players. They score perfectly up to five, while nongame players are
making lots of mistakes at that number. At six, game players start to make
some mistakes, but they still score 10 to 20 percent better than nongame
players all the way up to twelve.
The smaller numbers are called the subitizing range. That’s the range
of numbers that the visual system can perceive without counting. Game
players have a greater subitizing range than nongame players (five versus
three). Above that, the brain switches to counting, and again game players
excel. They count more accurately and make fewer mistakes.2
3. Spatial Resolution. Back to the viewing screen. This time you see three T’s
in a vertical row. Sometimes they are crowded close together. Sometimes
they are farther apart. Your job is to tell whether the center T is right side up
or upside down. When the top and bottom T’s are far away from the center
140
vision
T, you don’t notice them, but as they begin getting closer, they start to interfere with your ability to discern the orientation of the central T. But not
so for game players. They do better at every distance and with every size T.
They even see the T better when it is presented alone, even though their
corrected visual acuity (what glasses correct for) is the same as everyone
else’s.3 Green thinks that timing may explain that effect. The T’s appear on
the screen for only 100 milliseconds.
4. Multiple Object Tracking. Return to the imaginary screen. This time you see
sixteen circles moving randomly and bumping into each other. In the beginning, a small number of them are red and the rest are green, but in an
instant, the red ones turn green. Your job is to keep track of the ones that
were red. For one or two cued (red) ones, everyone does equally well, but
game players start to outperform nongame players at three, and their advantage increases at four, five, and six.4 “Once you get to seven, no one can
do it anymore,” Green says.
5. Distracters. You’re back at that screen once more. This time, you are looking
for either a diamond or a square that will appear at some point on a circle,
placed like six number points on an analog clock. Sometimes other shapes
appear on the clock points, making your diamond or your square harder to
find. Sometimes a distracter shape appears inside or outside the circle. The
distracter may be a diamond or a square, but the experimenter tells you to
ignore the distracters. You must simply say “diamond” or “square”—whichever
one appears at one of the six clock points.
Despite those instructions, the brain pays attention to distracters. If the
distracter shape is the same as the shape to be identified (square–square or
diamond–diamond), respondents tend to answer more quickly. The distracter
lessens their response time. Opposite distracters (square–diamond, diamond–
square) lengthen response time. They slow the brain’s visual system.
The same is true of task difficulty—for most people, anyway. The greater
the number of different shapes on the clock points, the more time the brain
needs to find the square or the diamond. When tasks are very difficult, the
distracter advantage disappears—again for most people. The brain’s visual
system is so busy looking for the square or diamond among all the other
shapes, the “helpful” distracter no longer speeds their response time.
But expert video game players don’t perform that way on either measure.
The difficult tasks don’t faze them, and the same-shape distracter speeds them
up, even when all the nonstimulus clock points are filled with wrong cues.5
“Game players can process the outside things equally well regardless of how
much extra stuff you put in there,” Green says.
Vision and the Video Game
141
Two Sides of the Visual Coin
The distracter experiment poses an obvious question. Do game players
have greater attentional capacity, or are they simply more easily distracted?
Green thinks both are possible. Continuing to be influenced by distracters,
even when the task is difficult, isn’t necessarily an adaptive thing, he says.
Game players may not filter what’s relevant from what isn’t as well as
nongame players. Green explains attentional bottlenecks. “So if you’ve got
this whole world out there, only some of it can get in. . . . It seems that video
game players let more through.” That may not always be a good thing.
However, Green is not convinced that game players are more distractible
than are nongame players. He describes another experiment, one in which
game players and nongame players respond to “go/no go” signals. When
certain signals appear on a screen, subjects must either press a button (“go”)
or not press a button (“no go”). In one block of trials, the experimenters rig
the test to see if their subjects are overly impulsive. “Go” signals appear
repeatedly, so the viewer gets accustomed to pressing the button. Suddenly,
a “no go” signal pops up. Impulsive people have trouble stopping themselves from pressing the button, but game players show no signs of greater
impulsivity. They can block the “go” response when they need to.
The opposite test measures whether subjects’ minds tend to wander
from the task during periods of inactivity. Repeated “no go” cues appear,
with only an occasional “go” signal thrown in. Game players are no more
likely than anyone else to “blank out.” Even when the task habituates them
to inaction, game players can respond actively when they need to.6
“If game players have problems with staying on task or too much compulsiveness, they would show differences on this task, and they don’t,” Green
says, “except they do the task a lot faster, without sacrificing accuracy.”
YOUR SURGEON AND THE VIDEO GAME
So back to my bogus survey. Do video game players make better surgeons?
Green suspects they do, and some evidence supports his belief. In 2007 researchers at Beth Israel Medical Center in New York assessed the laparoscopic
skills of thirty-three surgical residents and attending physicians. The investigators
compared the surgeons’ skills on a training simulator, controlling mathematically for varying levels of surgical training and experience. They found that those
who had played video games in the past for more than three hours per week made
37 percent fewer errors and finished the surgery 27 percent faster. The most
142
vision
Serendipity in Science
Horace Walpole wrote in 1754: “I once read a silly fairy tale, called The
Three Princes of Serendip: as their highnesses traveled, they were always
making discoveries, by accidents and sagacity, of things they were not in
quest of.”7 So the word serendipity was coined, and ever since then, the role
of luck in science has been hotly debated. Some philosophers of science
say no discovery is ever made without it. Others say no discovery is luck;
new knowledge is invariably the product of a trained mind observing reality in a disciplined way.
Shawn Green’s start as a vision researcher provides evidence that both
arguments may have merit. As an undergraduate, he worked in Daphne
Bavelier’s lab at the University of Rochester. There he was charged with setting up an experiment called “useful field of view.” The task requires the
subject to fixate on a center point, then locate a rapidly flashed circle that
can appear on any of eight spokes that radiate from the center point. The
test is good at predicting accidents among elderly drivers. It tests a driver’s
ability to filter out distractions and detect hazards on the periphery.
“So I’m running this task on myself, and my results were off the scale.
I was way too good at this task, so . . . I get my roommate in and he can do
it perfectly, and I think I’ve got something wrong.” Green brings in still another friend to try the task. This friend did rather poorly, “exactly the way
the literature said he should.” Green brought still other friends in to try the
test and found nothing wrong with his programming. The difference lay in
the subjects. Those who scored near perfect on the test were video game
players. The low scorers were not.
“It became my senior thesis,” Green says.
skilled game players made 47 percent fewer errors, performed 39 percent faster,
and scored 41 percent better overall. Statistical tests showed that video game skill
and past video game experience were significant predictors of laparoscopic skills.
“Video games may be a practical teaching tool to help train surgeons,” the researchers concluded.8
Green’s work shows that training does indeed make a difference. Every
summer, he runs training programs in which nongame players come to his lab
in Rochester and participate in as many as fifty hours of training on a video game.
Some volunteers learn an action video game such as Medal of Honor or Allied
Assault. Others learn a more passive game such as Tetris (where rows of colored
dominoes must be aligned) or SIMS 2 (in which each player lives the life of a
mythical character in an imagined world).
Vision and the Video Game
143
On every measure of visual attention that Green has studied, people trained
on the action video games improve. The control-group Tetris and SIMS 2 players
don’t. It’s the action that makes the difference, Green thinks, although “off the
shelf” video games have so many components, it’s impossible to discern which
features change the brain’s visual-processing system. Green hopes to rectify that
in his future research, designing and testing simple video games that develop a
single aspect of visual processing.
“Right now, we don’t know what in the brain is changing, but we have a lot
of good ideas,” he says. “Odds are, one of them is right.”
This page intentionally left blank
PART FIVE
HEARING
All the sounds of the earth are like music.
—Oscar Hammerstein II
“Oh, What a Beautiful Mornin’”
(from Oklahoma)
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 21
Hearing, Left and Right
ith all this emphasis on the brain as the processor of sensory information, it’s tempting to think of the sense organs themselves as passive
receptors—the eyes little more than transmitters for wavelengths of
light, the nose a mere collector of molecules. That view is erroneous: the sense
organs are the first processors of sensory input. The image on the retina is formed
through a series of chemical reactions, long before any impulse is ever dispatched
toward the visual cortex. If the nose isn’t working, neither can the brain’s olfactory centers. The pattern of impulses generated in the nose is all the brain has to
work with in sensing and identifying odors. Damage the taste buds in the tongue,
and the sense of taste is lost. Damage the nerve endings or mechanoreceptors in
the skin, and any of the various sensations of touch is gone. The sense organs do
more than receive and transmit; they shape what the brain is and what it becomes. Without stimulation from the sensory nerves, specialized regions in the
newborn brain never develop their normal functions.
Likewise, it’s tempting to view the ear as a passive collector of sound vibrations. It looks like one, with its convoluted external shape reminiscent of the oldfashioned trumpets used as the first hearing aids and the flower-shaped horn of
the gramophone. And so neuroscientists viewed it for a long time, doing little
more than charting the course of vibratory pulses through the structures of the
ear before getting to the interesting part—somewhere topside from the auditory
nerve. Yet, if recent research gains support, the ears may be starting the processing of sound information before a single signal squeals off toward the brain. What’s
more, the right and left ears may do different kinds of processing, even beyond
locating a sound’s directional source. They may supply the kinds of differentiated
W
147
148
hearing
inputs the two side of the brain need to develop normally. The left and right ears
may actually induce the brain’s left–right specialization for sounds by the kinds
of stimuli they provide.
But that’s getting ahead of the story. Before looking at the specializations of
left and right ears, along with left and right brains, a summary of the basic processes of hearing is in order.
THE AUDITORY SYSTEM
Most schoolchildren learn the parts of the ear: the external auricles or pinnae, the chambers of the middle ear, and the sound-transmitting structures of the
inner ear, along with the organs of balance it also houses.
Audible sound waves (which for humans lie between the low notes at 20
cycles per second and the high notes at 20,000) are herded into the auditory
canal by the horn shape of the pinnae. Inside the canal, these waves of greater
and lesser air pressure travel about three centimeters (a little more than an inch)
before reaching the eardrum, the membranous surface and entryway to the
middle ear. When sound waves set the eardrum to vibrating, they’ve already been
modified by their interactions with the cartilaginous pinnae and the semiflexible
canal.
Attached to the eardrum is a tiny bone, called the hammer because of its
shape. The hammer attaches to another tiny bone, the anvil, which hooks up with
yet another, the stirrup. These bones vibrate, each in its turn, and their vibration
amplifies sound input, actually making sounds louder. The stirrup vibrates the
oval window, the gateway to the inner ear.
Fluid fills the spiral-shaped cochlea of the inner ear. The fluid jiggles and
bounces like ripples in a tide pool in response to the vibration of the oval window. Membranes lie between the three chambers within the cochlea. Attached
to one of them—the basilar membrane—lie three to five rows (depending on how
you count them) of tiny hair cells—some 16,000 to 20,000 of them in all. Those
cells, the basilar membrane, and the cells that support them form the organ of
Corti, sometimes called the microphone of the ear.
When the fluid in the organ of Corti vibrates, it vibrates the basilar membrane, and the hair cells on it wave about like seaweed in the surf. The waving
hair cells stretch and contract. Their “dancing” helps amplify sounds, but that’s
not the only way these structures “pump up the volume.” Somewhere between
fifty and three hundred hairlike tubes called stereocilia project from the top of
each hair cell. The stereocilia dance around, too, and their motion converts the
electric signal generated by incoming sound into mechanical work, adding power
to a sound and making it louder. The longer stereocilia respond best to lowpitched sounds. The short ones are best at amplifying high-pitched sounds.1
Hearing, Left and Right
149
The hair cells are firmly attached at one end, but at the other end they float
freely in fluid. At the floating end of each hair cell lies a puff of tiny filaments
only three to five micrometers (millionths of a meter) long. Those filaments can
touch another membrane, the tectorial (from the Latin for roof ) membrane. As
they move, some of the puffs at the top of the hair cells brush the tectorial membrane. This creates a shearing force that causes the hair cells to release a neurotransmitter. The neurotransmitter triggers a nerve impulse in neurons whose cell
bodies make up the spiral ganglion (a ganglion is a group of neurons) that lies
just outside the cochlea. The axons from the spiral ganglion form the auditory
nerve (cranial nerve VIII). It carries signals from the ears to the cochlear nucleus
in the brainstem.
In the cochlear nucleus, two paths diverge. The neurons toward the front of
the structure respond to individual sounds and transmit incoming signals more
or less unchanged; the rear part of the cochlear nucleus processes patterns, such
as changes in pitch or rhythm.2 From the cochlear nucleus, signals move upward
to the superior olivary nucleus of the brainstem and the inferior colliculus in the
midbrain. There appropriate responses to sound, such as turning the eyes, head,
or body toward a sound, are generated. There also about half the nerve fibers
cross to the opposite side of the brain, while the other half continue to carry the
impulse on the same side. This crossover means that each ear sends signals to
both sides of the brain.
The next way station is the medial geniculate nucleus of the thalamus (not
far from the first stop for visual information, the lateral geniculate nucleus). The
thalamus is the “gateway” to the cerebral cortex (for all the senses except smell,
which has a direct line). The “gates” in the thalamus either let the signal through
or they block it. The gating action of the thalamus may explain why you can focus attention on a single sound to the exclusion of others, such as listening to
your conversant while ignoring the cacophony of a cocktail party. If allowed
through, the sound impulse continues to the left and the right auditory cortices,
which lie in the temporal lobes, just above the ears. In the cortices, the conscious
recognition of a sound presumably occurs, as does the willful decision to act on
it—or not.
What differentiates one sound from another? The answer begins back in the
ear with the structure of the basilar membrane. It’s stiff near the oval window,
but increasingly flexible along its length. It gets wider and heavier as distance
from the oval window increases, too. Those variations cause different regions of
the membrane to vibrate in response to different frequencies. High-pitch (highfrequency) sounds cause the area near the oval window to vibrate most. Lower frequencies travel farther along the membrane and vibrate its more distant end. Thus,
the “neural code” for pitch is the region of hair cells that generates an impulse,
but other factors are involved. One is the rate of stimulation. High frequencies
150
hearing
stimulate hair cells more rapidly than do low frequencies. Especially for the lower
tones—up to about 3,000 cycles per second—the speed of impulse generation is
important to the brain’s interpretation of pitches. For higher frequencies, the
place information from the basilar membrane seems to be enough to get the message through to the brain. In short, the distinction between middle C and high C
is made in the ear, long before the impulse ever arrives in the auditory cortex to
signal conscious knowledge of the difference.
Loudness is processed in a similar fashion, but it’s a matter of amplitude: how
far up and down the basilar membrane moves. The louder the sound, the greater
the membrane’s vertical oscillation. The greater amplitude increases the number of hair cells that make contact with the tectorial membrane. It also increases
the speed at which impulses are generated.
Although no one has figured out exactly how the brain’s sound-processing
system is organized, neuroscientists suspect it may share some common features
with the visual system, perhaps using one stream of impulses for locating a sound
in space and another for identifying a sound. There may even be a third for handling the directions of moving sounds.3 Logic suggests that circuits in the brain
must allow auditory processing to communicate with memory systems, so that a
sound can be consciously recognized and named. So, too, communication must
flow back and forth between the visual system and the auditory system, so that
we can, for example, relate the lip movements of speakers to the speech sounds
they make or associate the roar of a jet engine with a 767 warming up on the tarmac. Similarly, complex connections must support the brain’s ability to localize
the source of a sound, tell two similar sounds from each other, gauge the timing
and duration of sounds in an orderly sequence, differentiate and separate two or
more competing sounds, and mentally filter out “noise” to home in on a single—
comparatively faint—sound stimulus.
It’s also obvious that information has to travel in both directions. Sound processing can’t be a one-way street. The ears send sound signals to the brain, it’s
true, but the brain has to modulate what the ears are up to. If it didn’t, the brain
would be bombarded by a confusing cacophony of sounds from the environment, so attention to a single sound, or ignoring irrelevant sounds altogether,
would be impossible. So, another road for traveling nerve impulses runs in the
opposite direction from the auditory cortex. Termed the “descending pathway,”
it courses through all the stops made by the “ascending pathway,” with tracks that
cross from one side to the other, preserving the ability of both sides of the brain
to communicate with both ears. The descending pathway ends in a distinctive
type of nerve fibers that lie beneath the base of the hair cells in the cochlea.
These fibers don’t respond to sound stimuli. Quite the opposite. Primarily through
the action of the neurotransmitter acetylcholine, they act as inhibitors, letting the
hair cells know “when enough is enough . . . or too much.” They actively block
some impulses while allowing others to pass.
Hearing, Left and Right
151
MUSIC TO MY (LEFT) EAR?
At one time it was commonly believed that the left brain handled language
and the right processed music. That old saw has proved overly simplistic, as researchers have learned more about how the brain handles sound. While it’s true
that some of the brain’s language centers lie in the left hemisphere in most people, other characteristics of sounds, such as pitch and volume, get their fair share
of attention in both hemispheres, and not just in the auditory cortex of the temporal lobe. Regions of the frontal and parietal lobes are involved, too, in a sort of
radiating pattern of cortical activation that moves outward as harmony, melody,
and rhythm are perceived. Forward, behind, and to the sides of these soundprocessing areas lie “associative regions.” They “put together” the experience of
a sound, whether it’s speech, music, or an environmental sound.4
Despite this diffuse processing, specializations have been proved. The left
brain excels in measuring the intervals between sounds and their duration; it’s
more proficient than the right in decoding the rapidly changing sounds of speech.
The right takes center stage in pitch, musical notes, and melodies; it’s a “big picture” thinker, zeroing in on music’s melodic contours and patterns.5
If the brain’s left and right hemispheres specialize, do the left and right ears
specialize, too? Until recently, the answer was thought to be no, although behavioral studies have shown that we react faster and identify speech-type sounds
more easily when they are played to the right ear; pure-tone pitches are more
quickly and easily recognized when played to the left ear.6 The explanation for
such differences was once thought to lie in the specialized processing of the brain
hemispheres, not in any difference in the early processing that occurs in the ears.
That changed in 2004 when Yvonne Sininger, of the Brain Research Institute
at the University of California at Los Angeles, and Barbara Cone-Wesson, of the
University of Arizona, published the results of their studies on infants. The researchers spent six years testing the hearing of nearly 1,600 newborns within days
after birth. The scientists tested the babies’ ears using a tiny probe that measured
minute amplifications of sound in different parts of the ear. Sininger and ConeWesson played two kinds of sounds to the infants: sustained tones and a series of
fast clicks timed to mimic speech. Measurements of sound volume in the inner
ear showed that the cochlea amplified the clicks more in the infants’ right ears
than in their left. Conversely, the infants’ ears “pumped up the volume” of sustained tones more in the left ear than in the right.
Sininger and Cone-Wesson concluded that the left and right ears were preferentially amplifying different sorts of sounds, showing an innate (because these
babies were only days old) preference for the kind of sound input “preferred” by
the hemisphere opposite each ear. Left–right auditory processing, they asserted,
begins not in the brain, but in the ears.7 If they are right, the reason may lie in
those feedback pathways that run from the brainstem down to the ears. Some of
152
hearing
them are known to be well developed at birth, so the selective ability of soundsensitive neurons may be at least partially in place within the first hours of life.
Sininger and Cone-Wesson have demonstrated such an inhibitory feedback
mechanism, suggesting that the right medial olivocochlear system, one of those
switching stations in the brainstem, suppresses certain kinds of auditory responses
in the left ear.8 If that’s true, then the brain is acting on the ears, but the ears are
also acting on the brain. Differentiated inputs from the ears may direct how the
right and left auditory cortices develop during childhood.
“Our findings demonstrate that auditory processing starts in the ear before it
is ever seen in the brain,” says Cone-Wesson. “Even at birth, the ear is structured
to distinguish between different types of sound and to send [them] to the right
place in the brain.”9
Where Is That Sound Coming From?
Relatives. You gotta love ‘em. Whenever a certain relative of mine (who
shall remain unidentified, in the interest of family harmony) comes to visit,
she uses the cordless telephone that normally rests on its charger in the
kitchen. She carries it upstairs to the guest bedroom. She carries it downstairs to the TV room. She carries it out onto the back porch, happily chatting away all the while. The trouble comes later when the phone rings. We
can all hear it, but where is the phone? Hard to tell. Maybe she left it in
the living room. Maybe it’s on the deck. The inevitable family scramble
ensues.
Scientists say our ears and brains are good at locating the source of a
sound, but I have my doubts. We use three main processes, experts say. The
first is timing. The idea is simple. Sound waves from a single source arrive
at the two ears at slightly different times. Suppose a sound is coming from
my right. The sound should hit my right ear a few nanoseconds sooner than
it reaches my left, setting my hair cells to firing at the same rate as the frequency of the sound. The firing begins slightly sooner in my right ear than
in my left, and my brain should be able to detect that difference. This works
especially well for low-pitched sounds, but not so well for the higher frequencies. That ringing phone is rather shrill, which may explain why we
can’t find it.
Another source of directional information is loudness. The idea is simple. If the sound is off to my right, it should be louder in my right ear than
my left. Why? Because my head blocks the sound. In the brainstem, one
of those “switching stations,” called the lateral superior olive, is supposed
to detect the difference in loudness between the two ears and give me some
Hearing, Left and Right
153
directional information. My relative has left the phone under a chair cushion somewhere, so the ring sounds muffled, no matter which way I turn my
head. So much for my lateral superior olive.
Another possible method for identifying the direction of a sound may
arise from the left–right differences that Sininger and Cone-Wesson have
studied. The right and left ears may selectively filter out certain kids of
sounds, “preferring” one or the other. The trouble with that ringing phone
is that it’s high-pitched and rhythmic, much like the music my left ear
yearns for. But it’s also intermittent and staccato, which my right ear seems
to equate with the staccato cadence of speech. Final score on left–right discrimination: nil–nil.
Part of the problem in locating that ringing phone is the echo effect.
The sound seems to bounce off the walls, ceilings, and floors in every direction. Another problem is our jabbering while we scramble about, looking for the pesky instrument that will give us no peace. (My relative turns
off the voice mail. She doesn’t want to miss an important call.) This interference is called masking. It’s when the threshold of audibility for one
sound is raised by the presence of another (masking) sound. We have
learned about this masking effect and taken action to avoid it. We all stay
quiet now when the phone rings, because we’ve given our family member
an ultimatum: Whoever loses it finds it.
Chapter 22
Listening and Language
s much as I love science, I love science fiction more. Science tells us what
is; science fiction tells us what might be. I recently read a unique and revealing science fiction story, “Immersion,” written by University of California at Irvine physics professor Gregory Benford.1 In his story, Benford invents
the technophile’s brand of ecotourism, in which visitors to Africa can undertake
not a photo safari, but a brain-meld adventure. Benford’s characters Kelly and
Leon move into the minds of two chimps, experiencing the sensory world from
the perspective of a primate species not their own.
Predictably, the humans find themselves trapped in their hosts, encountering hostile rivals and voracious predators, coping with crisis in chimp fashion
—their human mental faculties intact, but constrained. While sex, food, and
grooming are infinitely satisfying in chimp minds and bodies, Leon and Kelly
find themselves frustrated with their limited abilities to communicate. They invent some sounds and signs to get them through, but they long for language:
A
It was infuriating. [Leon] had so much to say to [Kelly] and he had to
funnel it through a few hundred signs. He chippered in a high-pitched
voice, trying vainly to force the chimp lips and palate to do the work of
shaping words.
It was no use. He had tried before, idly, but now he wanted to badly
and none of the equipment worked. It couldn’t. Evolution had shaped
brain and vocal chords in parallel. Chimps groomed, people talked.2
As Benford’s Leon observes through the mind of a chimp, human brains are
built for language. They are programmed to speak it and programmed to under154
Listening and Language
155
stand it. Real-life scientists don’t question the inevitability of language in the human species, but they want to find out when and how it develops. Is the human
brain hardwired for language from birth—or even before? New research on language development is answering a definite maybe.
RESEARCHING LANGUAGE IN NEWBORNS
Brain activity in what will become the brain’s left-hemisphere language centers can be detected in infants as young as five days.3 Behavioral experiments
have demonstrated that days- or weeks-old infants can distinguish the “melody”
of their native language from the pitches and rhythms of other languages.4 They
can assess the number of syllables in a word and perceive a change in speech
sounds (such as ba versus ga), even when they hear different speakers.5 Very
young babies can also pick up a change of words in a sentence. Two-month-olds
can tell the difference between “the rat chased white mice” and “the cat chased
white mice” even after a two-minute delay. This ability vanishes when the same
sounds are played backward.6
“From the first weeks of life,” says French researcher Ghislaine DehaeneLambertz, “the human brain is particularly adapted for processing speech.”7 Dehaene-Lambertz should know. She’s achieved something most other researchers
have only wished for. She’s persuaded parents to allow functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) studies of their babies’ brains, and she’s captured clear
brain images from the wriggling, mewling infants. The results have convinced
her that language processing in the very young relies largely on the same brain
circuits that adults use.
Like the rest of the cortex, the temporal lobe (just above the ears) is convoluted in a series of hills and valleys. Three of those “hills,” call gyri (gyrus is
singular), run parallel to one another horizontally in the temporal lobe. In them
most initial speech processing occurs. It begins in the superior (meaning not better but uppermost) temporal gyrus, which includes both primary and secondary
auditory-processing regions. Brain activity in this gyrus increases when we hear
speech sounds in any language—whether our own or someone else’s—but it’s
greatest in the left hemisphere when we hear our native tongue.
Numerous studies show activation of the superior and middle temporal gyri
when the sounds of speech are processed, as well as activation of the planum temporale, a region of the brain behind the superior temporal gyrus. It lies in the heart
of Wernicke’s area, which was identified in the nineteenth century as a major
center of speech comprehension. Forward from the superior temporal gyrus lies
Broca’s area, also identified more than one hundred years ago. It is important to
the production of intelligible speech. Higher-level language processing, such as
interpreting the meaning of complex sentences, gets parts of the frontal lobe involved, as well as the left premotor region of the parietal lobe and the cerebellum.
156
hearing
Language and the Brainstem
Jack Gandour at Purdue University has spent more than thirty years studying language and the brain. What he’s uncovered is a river both wide and
deep: language engages brain regions in every part of the cortex and employs processing capacity all the way down to the brain’s most primitive
region, the brainstem. The brainstem is usually described as the area that
controls heartbeat, blood pressure, respiration—the fundamental processes
of life. It’s the brainstem that continues to function in coma patients who
endure for years in a persistent vegetative state.
Gandour has found, however, that the brainstem does more than maintain vital signs. It’s actually involved in language processing. Gandour and
his research team studied brainstem activity in speakers of English and Mandarin Chinese. English is not a tonal language, but Mandarin is (as are
most of the world’s languages). The meaning of a word depends on the
pitch used to speak it. For example, yi in Mandarin can mean clothing, aunt,
chair, or easy depending on its melodic contour.
The volunteers in Gandour’s experiment heard a series of pitches presented in speech and nonspeech contexts. Speakers of both languages had
a stronger brainstem response to language sounds than to the tones, but the
Mandarin-speakers exhibited a stronger brainstem response to pitch than
the English speakers did, whether the sound was speech or a simple tone.
The Mandarin-speakers showed a greater response to sequences of rapidly
changing pitches, too.
Gandour concluded that the brainstem facilitates speech processing
in the cortex by capturing those parts of auditory signals that are related to
language.8 “Early activity in the brainstem is shaped by a person’s language
experience, even while the person is asleep,” Gandour says.9 His studies
have convinced him that the brainstem plays a greater role in understanding language than most people realize. “Everyone has a brainstem, but it’s
tuned differently depending on what sounds are behaviorally relevant to a
person, for example, the sounds of his or her mother tongue,” he says.10
Other anatomical differences of the brain suggest that the left hemisphere
plays a major role (but by no means a singular one) in the comprehension of language. Various studies11 have shown that:
•
•
•
The Sylvian fissure is longer on the left.
The planum temporale is larger on the left.
The white matter volume underlying the primary auditory region is greater
on the left.
Listening and Language
•
•
•
157
Pyramidal cells are larger in the left auditory cortex.
Nerve fibers have thicker myelination in the left auditory cortex.
The width of the neuronal columns and the distance between those columns
are greater in the left superior temporal gyrus than in the right.
Certainly some of those differences develop over time as we learn and use
language, but Dehaene-Lambertz’s work suggests that the basic circuitry for developing them is already in place in newborn babies. At birth, gray and white matter volumes are larger in the left hemisphere,12 the Sylvian fissure is longer on
the left side,13 and the left planum temporale is larger than the right.14 DehaeneLambertz studied two-month-old infants, looking at how a nerve bundle—the arcuate fasciculus—was developing. Its maturation, she found, was more advanced
on the left than on the right.15 The arcuate fasciculus runs between Wernicke’s
area and Broca’s area. It’s a major pathway for speech, and it develops early in
life, long before a child begins to understand or produce speech. Such left-right
differences occur in congenitally deaf babies and well as hearing ones,16 suggesting that the “architecture” is innate and not the result of exposure to sound
or language.
Other studies of infant brains during the first year of life show no differences in blood flow in the left and right hemispheres when the infant is resting,
in silence. But the left hemisphere becomes more active than the right in response to sounds, especially speech sounds. Dehaene-Lambertz played twentysecond-long speech recordings forward and backward to neonates and threemonth-olds while she captured brain images from the babies using fMRI. (The
backward recording served as a control. The sounds were the same, but they occurred in a different order, with a different rhythm than natural language.) Both
recordings triggered greater brain activation in the left planum temporale than
in the right, but the difference was greater still for the normal (forward) speech
sounds.17,18
Additional activation in parts of the right frontal cortex was seen in awake,
but not sleeping, infants who listened to normal speech. The activity occurred
in the same brain areas that become active when adults retrieve verbal information from memory.19
The French team also found a significant advantage for the native language
in the babies’ left angular gyrus.20 In adults, that area increases its activity when
subjects hear words, but not when they hear nonsense syllables.21 Similar increases occur in the area when adults hear sentences in a language they know,
but not when they hear a foreign language or backward speech.22
Recently Dehaene-Lambertz again used fMRI to measure cerebral activity
in three-month-old infants, this time when the babies heard short sentences spoken in their native language. She and her team measured how rapidly responses
to speech inputs occurred. They also investigated how particular regions of the
babies’ brains responded to repetition.
158
hearing
Melodic Intonation Therapy
We can learn a lot about language from those who lose it. Such people have
aphasia, or the loss of their ability to speak or understand spoken or written
language. Aphasia often results from a stroke that damages or destroys
one or more of the brain’s language-processing regions. The myriad forms
of aphasia range from the inability to generate words for oneself to the inability to understand words spoken by others.
Speech therapists employ numerous techniques to help people with
aphasia regain at least some of their language skills. One approach, called
melodic intonation therapy (MIT), has shown promise for patients who
have trouble making the sounds of speech. The therapy was developed
when health professionals noticed that some patients who couldn’t speak
words could nonetheless sing the lyrics of previously learned songs. MIT
can work for people who have lost speech production capacities in the left
brain, but who can understand instructions and access their brain’s lexicon,
the storehouse of words from which meaningful phrases and sentences can
be constructed.
The therapeutic course begins with two- or three-syllable phrases, sung
in two alternating pitches with contours and stresses that mirror ordinary
speech. (Try singing “Good morning. How are you?” using a higher pitch
for morn- and are and you’ll get the idea.) In rhythm with the singing, the
therapist taps the patient’s left hand. The theory is that the singing and lefthand tapping engage the right brain, coaxing it to develop language capacities it doesn’t have but conceivably could acquire. Later stages of the
therapy advance into more complex phrases and musical patterns, with a
gradual transition away from singing and back to normal speech.
Therapists who use the technique often report significant progress in
speech-impaired patients, if the patients are appropriately selected for the
treatment and the MIT program is carefully and consistently conducted.
Two patients treated at Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston
improved their ability to produce meaningful words and to name objects
in pictures after forty MIT sessions. MRIs showed significant changes in
the brain’s right hemisphere.23 Aphasics don’t have to be English speakers
to benefit from MIT. Researchers in Iran tried the musical approach with
seven patients who met the criteria for MIT. After fifteen sessions, the patients showed improvement in spontaneous speech production, oral expression, and auditory comprehension.24
It may be possible to extend the methods of MIT to other kinds of
aphasia. Australian researchers worked with four patients whose speech be-
Listening and Language
159
came slurred after traumatic brain injury or stroke. The twenty-four-session,
eight-week therapeutic course employed oral motor respiratory exercises,
rhythmic and melodic articulation exercises, rhythmic speech cuing, vocal
intonation therapy, and therapeutic singing using familiar songs. The patients’ speech intelligibility and naturalness improved significantly over time,
and the number of pauses they made diminished.25
The three-month-olds recognized a repeated sentence even after a fourteensecond interval of silence. The scans showed adult-like activity in the upper
region of the brain’s left temporal lobe. The fastest responses were recorded near
the auditory cortex. Responses slowed down toward the back of the languageprocessing region and in Broca’s area in the left hemisphere. Activity in that
region increased when a sentence was repeated, suggesting that infants may be
using a memory system based on Broca’s area just as adults do.26
These findings demonstrate that the precursors of adult cortical language
areas are already working in infants even before the time when babbling begins,
Dehaene-Lambertz asserts. “The processing abilities of an infant’s brain make it
efficiently adapted to the most frequent auditory input: speech,” she says.27
LANGUAGE AND THE HUMAN BRAIN
Benford didn’t write about brain research in his science fiction story, but
he had it right when he observed that humans yearn to speak and long to listen.
Language is characteristic of our species, so much so that we have some built-in,
redundant systems. If damage occurs in one of the left brain’s speech centers in infancy or early childhood, the right brain takes over, developing normal capacities
for understanding and producing language. Deaf people who learn sign language
use the same brain regions for signing that hearing individuals use for speech.
Broca’s area is activated when hearing individuals speak and when deaf people
sign. Wernicke’s area is used in comprehending both speaking and signing.28
At birth, the human brain’s asymmetry favors left-brain development of speech
capabilities. Although similar asymmetries are seen in other species, no other
animal has yet demonstrated a capacity for language. The language-related brain
asymmetries observed in human infants aren’t found in other primate species
that have been studied, including fetal macaques29 and infant rhesus monkeys.30
In the great apes, the planum temporale is larger on the left than on the right,
although the difference is less pronounced than in humans.31 Thus, Benford’s
story, while fiction, sprang from a reasonable premise: language is uniquely and
naturally a function of the human brain.
Chapter 23
My Ears Are Ringing
enius comes in all sorts of packages. Tim Iverson’s a genius in an unlikely package—gangly, freckled—an Andy Griffith Show Opie stretched
into the proportions of manhood, but with his boyishness unaltered.
He sits now in my upstairs office, shuffling his feet and mumbling as he figures
out why my telephone signal is so weak the answering machine cuts off. Tim’s
genius is for circuits of the telephonic kind. He probably knows as much about
phone lines and the various signals they carry as Stephen Hawking knows about
time and space. Tim has previously fixed my telephone, my DSL line, my router,
my modem, and a dozen other things mounted on boxes and poles only miles
from my house but leagues beyond my understanding.
Tim pulls out a few wires, hooks up some flashing light boxes, and calls a
colleague at his home base, asking for signal input. He glances at the pile of
paper on my desk, catching a word in a title.
“Tinnitus,” he says softly. “I have that.”
“You do?”
“Yep, a ringing in my ears. It’s there all the time. Annoying,” he says, turning his attention back to one of his testing devices. It’s buzzing—for real.
After he’s diagnosed my problem—in less time than it took me to persuade
the dispatcher at the phone company to schedule a service call—we settle in for
a chat. I like talking with Tim. He has access to universes of knowledge that I
don’t, but today he wants to know what I know about tinnitus.
“Is there a pill I can take for it?” he asks.
I explain that a number of drug treatments have been tried and more are being tested, but as of now, there is no pill. “There is, however, a sort of masker you
G
160
My Ears Are Ringing
161
can wear. It creates a sound something like whooshing ocean waves in your ear.
You train yourself to hear that instead of the ringing,” I say.
“Naw, I don’t want to bother with that. I’ve learned to live with it,” he says
as he maneuvers his rangy frame out my door.
“Til next time, Tim,” I call after him, but he’s off, his mind already moving
on to the next circuit problem that requires his genius. Tinnitus does not slow
him down.
WHAT IS TINNITUS?
People with tinnitus sense a sound in the ears or head that comes from no
external source. The sound varies among individuals, often described as ringing,
buzzing, chirping (like crickets), whistling, or humming. Most of the sounds are
high-pitched and loud. The sounds of tinnitus may be heard in one ear only, both
ears equally, or one ear more than the other.
Tinnitus is more common among men than women, and its prevalence increases with age. Nearly 12 percent of men ages sixty-five to seventy-four are affected. African Americans have a lower risk for tinnitus than do whites, and the
risk to those who live in the northeastern United States is half that of people residing in the south.1 It most often affects those who have a hearing loss, but it is
sometimes associated with other disorders such as inner ear damage, allergies,
high or low blood pressure, tumors, diabetes, thyroid problems, head or neck
injury, reaction to certain medications, stress, some forms of chemotherapy, surgery or damage to the auditory nerve, multiple sclerosis, and garden-variety sinus
infections.
Twelve million Americans have tinnitus.2 Most of them, like Tim, simply
learn to live with it, but about 1 million Americans have tinnitus severe enough
to interfere with their daily activities.3 Severe tinnitus can induce depression,
anxiety, insomnia, and other symptoms that can run the gamut from unpleasant
to miserable. With more and more people entering their old age hearing impaired after a lifetime of boom boxes, rock concerts, and airplane noise, tinnitus
is becoming increasingly common and increasingly distressing.
A RINGING IN THE BRAIN
Although tinnitus if often associated with hearing loss, it is not necessarily a
problem in the ears. In many cases, the problem lies in the brain. After an injury,
the auditory cortex reorganizes itself in ways that aren’t always adaptive.
Neurologist Alan Lockwood at the State University of New York at Buffalo
led the first research team to show that tinnitus arises in the brain’s auditoryprocessing centers. In 1999 he reported measures of blood flow in the brains of
people who could alter the loudness of their tinnitus at will. He compared their
162
hearing
blood flow patterns to those of normal control subjects. He found changes in the
left temporal lobe in patients with right ear tinnitus. Stimulation of the right ear
produced increased temporal lobe activity on both sides of the brain. He suggested that tinnitus comes not from the ear but from hyperactivity in the brain’s
sound-processing system, involving a large network of neurons in the brain’s
primary auditory cortex, higher-order association areas, and parts of the limbic
system. Lockwood calls tinnitus “the auditory system analog to phantom limb
sensations in amputees.”4
In 2001 Lockwood studied eight patients with gaze-evoked tinnitus (GET).
When GET patients look sideways, the loudness and pitch of their tinnitus increase. The same thing happens to a lesser degree when they look up or down.
The condition often develops after surgery to remove tumors near the auditory
nerve or the brain’s auditory region. Not all GET sufferers have had surgery, however; in some people it develops for unknown reasons.
Lockwood’s team mapped the regions of the brain that are active in GET
patients and compared the scans with brain activity in normal subjects. The comparison revealed that people with GET have an imbalance between the auditory
and visual parts of the brain. In people who don’t have tinnitus, looking sideways
suppresses the auditory system, almost as if the eyes tell the brain to pay attention to visual inputs, not sounds. But in patients with GET, the visual system fails
to suppress the brain’s auditory centers.5 Vision may not be the only cross-wiring
that’s going on. Some people can change the loudness or pitch of their tinnitus
by moving their jaws or pressing on their head or neck. Lockwood thinks the effect of voluntary movements on tinnitus probably comes from abnormalities in
the brain’s connections between auditory and sensorimotor regions.6
Further evidence in support of that idea came in 2008 when University of
Michigan researchers showed that touch-sensing neurons in the brain increase
their activity after hearing cells are damaged. Susan Shore and her team looked
at the cochlear nucleus, the region of the brain where sounds first arrive from
the ear, traveling via the auditory nerve. Shore compared normal guinea pigs
with guinea pigs that had lost some of their hearing ability due to noise damage.
She found that hearing loss altered the sensitivity of neurons in the cochlear
nucleus, changing the balance between those that trigger impulses and those
that stop them. Shore showed that the some of the neurons actually change their
shape, sprouting abnormal axons and dendrites. They may also redistribute
themselves, operating in areas where they normally would not.7
So taking one source of stimulation away—in this case, sound—triggers
neurons that normally deal with input from another source (touch) to change both
their structure and their function. “The somatosensory system is coming in (to
compensate for hearing loss), but may overcompensate and help cause tinnitus,”
Shore says.8
My Ears Are Ringing
163
TREATMENTS
Various treatments have been tried for tinnitus, and some produce better
results than others. Some people find that a simple hearing aid works for them.
Various forms of counseling and training in relaxation exercises can sometimes
help. Acupuncture offers hope to some sufferers, especially those who find that
head movement, jaw movement, or facial pressure improve or worsen their tinnitus. People with mild tinnitus who notice the noise mostly at night sometimes
get relief from “white noise” machines or “sound maskers.” The incoming sounds
block the ringing of tinnitus and allow tinnitus sufferers to get to sleep. Wearable maskers are available for daytime use. An audiologist tunes the sound of the
masker to match the frequency of the tinnitus sound; the external sound from
the masker overrides the phantom sound of tinnitus for some people.
Despite numerous studies on a variety of drugs, no medication has been
found effective against tinnitus, and none has been approved by the U.S. Food
and Drug Administration for tinnitus treatment. Still, the search for an antiear-ringing pill goes on. In 2008 Oregon Health and Science University began
clinical trials on acamprosate, a drug traditionally used in the treatment of alcoholism. In preliminary tests it’s been shown to reduce tinnitus symptoms, perhaps
by affecting the levels of the neurotransmitters glutamate and gamma-aminobutyric acid (GABA) in the brain.
Tinnitus retraining therapy (TRT) is another option. It coaxes the brain to
become unaware of the tinnitus sound, much as the normal brain ignores a background noise like a whirring fan or a humming refrigerator. TRT combines counseling with the use of low-level broadband noise generators that patients wear
in or behind their ears. TRT takes about eighteen months to complete.9 The idea
is that the sounds of tinnitus don’t go away, but the patient learns to live with
them. Controlled trials of TRT have achieved mixed results. Scientists in Japan
demonstrated improvement in patients after only one month, but more than half
of the subjects dropped out of the study, saying they could not tolerate the noise
generator they were required to wear.10
Researchers at the VA Medical Center in Portland, Oregon, screened over
eight hundred veterans to find 123 with severe tinnitus. The scientists randomly
assigned the veterans to two treatment groups: half went through TRT and half
used tinnitus masking. Both groups showed improvement, but the masking patients tended to show early benefits at three and six months that remained stable
over the following months. Those veterans getting TRT improved more gradually and steadily over a year and a half.11
Structured counseling is the linchpin of TRT, and the Oregon team also
assessed its effects among veterans. They divided nearly three hundred subjects
into three groups: educational counseling, traditional support, and no treatment.
164
hearing
What Is TMS?
Transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) has been around since the mid1980s, but it wasn’t until the mid-1990s that researchers began to use it and
study it in a serious way. TMS uses a specially designed electromagnet
that’s placed on the scalp. (Not, you can’t do this at home with a toy magnet.) The magnet delivers short magnetic pulses to regions of the brain.
The pulses are about the same strength as those experienced in an MRI
scanner, but pinpointed to a particular area. The pulses travel through the
bones of the head, where they can influence the underlying layers of the
brain’s cerebral cortex. Low-frequency (once per second) pulses may reduce
brain activity, but higher frequency pulses (more than five per second) increase brain activation.12
Trials are underway to assess the use of TMS in treating depression,
chronic pain, speech disorders, drug abuse, posttraumatic stress disorder,
Parkinson’s disease, and more.
Those who received the counseling attended four group sessions each week.
After one, six, and twelve months, the researchers evaluated the severity of the
veterans’ tinnitus symptoms. The group that received counseling showed greater
improvement than the other two groups.13
Recently German researchers have begun experimenting with magnetic
stimulation, precisely targeted at the brain’s most overactive tinnitus regions. In
one study, nine patients with chronic tinnitus underwent low-frequency transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) for five, fifteen, and thirty minutes. For most,
the loudness of their tinnitus was lessened after the treatment—the longer the
treatment, the better—and the reduction lasted for up to thirty minutes. Thirty
minutes may not seem like much, but the research yielded a valuable piece to
add to the tinnitus puzzle. The decrease in perceived loudness didn’t come from
changes in the brain’s primary sound-receiving centers, but from higher up, in the
association areas of the cortex where sounds are interpreted and understood.14
Longer term use of TMS has produced better, longer-lasting results. In one
study, treatment over a five-day period produced significant improvement compared to a sham treatment, in which the patients thought they were getting TMS,
but they were not. The improvement lasted for six months according to the patients’ self-reports.15 In 2008 researchers at the University of Arkansas reported
success in treating a patient for tinnitus with TMS repeatedly over a period of six
months. The researchers found that maintenance sessions helped their patient
reduce the severity of his tinnitus, even when it rose again after the original TMS
treatment. Positron emission tomography (PET) scans showed that activity in the
My Ears Are Ringing
165
tinnitus-producing region of the brain fell to normal levels after the long-term treatment, with no deleterious effects on the patient’s hearing or cognitive abilities.16
So promising is TMS for the treatment of tinnitus that German researchers
are now experimenting with various forms of magnetic stimulation applied to
different brain areas. Noting that tinnitus patients often demonstrate abnormal
activity in the brain’s attention- and emotion-processing regions, physicians at
the University of Regensburg have combined high-frequency stimulation of the
prefrontal lobe with low-frequency stimulation of the temporal lobes. In 2008
they gave thirty-two patients either low-frequency temporal stimulation alone or
a combination treatment of both frequencies and both lobes. Immediately after
the therapy, both groups reported improvement, but after three months the combined group reported a greater, longer-lasting improvement.17
The next time I see my phone-genius friend, I’ll suggest TMS treatment
for his tinnitus, but I doubt he’ll take much heed. He’s learned to live with the
condition—as have three out of every four who have it.18
Chapter 24
Music and the Plastic Brain
ome music teachers are born to perseverance, some achieve perseverance,
and some have perseverance thrust upon them. Long-suffering Miss Donahue, my violin teacher, probably qualified on all three counts. Let me tell
you about her and her student.
I grew up a poor kid, residing in a cheap, prefabricated house that some
unscrupulous developer plopped onto a side street on the rich side of town, while
the community’s more affluent were looking the other way, failing to recognize
the erosion of their property values. Ours was a very class-conscious community,
and the ignominy of my lowly position on the socioeconomic pecking order was
not lost on me. I felt it every single day, so I tried to keep my head down and my
mouth shut—a feat I rarely managed to accomplish.
On the plus side, my lowly status had motivational properties, and I longed
to achieve some of the successes that the wealthy girls took so for granted—from
their aristocratic bearing (if one can have aristocratic bearing in the second grade)
to their mastery of the fine arts. Enter music.
I yearned to play the piano. My fingers skipped across my desktop at school
and the kitchen tabletop at home in imitation of what I imagined to be piano
playing. I conjured up daydreams of myself, dressed in the latest and most expensive fashions, gliding onto a piano bench to thrill an admiring audience with
a masterful performance of something melodious and classical. All the well-to-do
girls at my school were performing in piano recitals. I pined to be among them.
Alas, my family had no money either for a piano or for lessons, and there was
no room in our small house for a piano. But a teacher in my school contacted
S
166
Music and the Plastic Brain
167
my mother and suggested that scholarship money was available for an earnest
and capable child like me who might take violin lessons. My mother seized this
notion faster than a mantis shrimp traps a hermit crab. She could afford an inexpensive violin (bought on time), and the instrument didn’t take up much
room. My mother saw me as a violinist—although I did not—so my lessons with
violinist Evangeline Donahue began in earnest. I was eight.
Back and forth I trudged to school, carrying my awkward violin case, dragging myself over to the junior high school after hours, when all was dark and
quiet, to sequester myself in a tiny room where Miss Donahue attempted to teach
me. We labored in a claustrophobic storage room, with shelves of unused textbooks on three walls and high, never-washed windows on the fourth. The windows were painted shut. Dust motes floated effortlessly and endlessly through the
dry, hot, still air of what I came to think of as my Tuesday/Thursday prison. But,
like a prison cell, my music lesson room had all the necessities. Miss Donahue
had a chair and a metronome. I had a music stand, my sheet music, and my
violin.
Here’s where the perseverance part comes in. Miss Donahue was an accomplished violinist. Sometimes she would gently take my violin from me and play
the piece, so I could hear how it should sound. Lovely tones poured from that
instrument when she played it. That rosined bow, which moved so effortless for
her and so stiffly and uncooperatively for me, released melodies that made my
heart sing and my eyes water. Then she would hand the instrument back to me
with a soft, “Hear it?” uttered hopefully.
I could not. “Intonation!” Miss Donahue would cry as I fingered and sawed.
“Intonation!” she would repeat, perhaps twenty times in every hour we spent together as I tried and tried again to re-create the sounds she had made. Sometimes
I thought I had the notes right, but I never did. I longed all the more for the
piano where, if one pushed the right key, one reliably got the correct note. Not
so with the violin. Even the tiniest difference in the position of a finger produces
a pitch too sharp or too flat. I was always one or the other, and I never heard the
difference.
Doggedly, Miss Donahue strove for any sign of improvement in her pupil.
She heard none, but she persevered. I never progressed beyond stripping horsehairs off my recalcitrant bow and lumbering stiff, pudgy fingers up and down the
neck of the instrument. I never even learned to tune it. Close enough sounded
fine to me. I did play in some recitals—early in the lineup, so the accomplished
players could bring it home for tumultuous applause from the audience before
the tea and cookies were served. I had some recital dresses, too, all of them stiff
and hot and itchy.
Miss Donahue had her perseverance thrust upon her. She endured me for
six interminable years. I still long to play the piano.
168
hearing
The Perfection of Perfect Pitch
Perhaps if I had been blessed with perfect pitch, I might have detected the
subtle differences in tone that Miss Donahue expected of me. Perfect or
absolute pitch, the ability to recognize a pitch without any point of comparison, was once considered an ability found only in trained musicians.
That’s because perfect pitch was tested by playing a pitch and asking a person to name it. Since only musicians can name an A-flat or an F-sharp, they
were the only ones who could succeed on the test.
Recently, researchers have expanded their testing methods and identified people who lack musical training but can, nevertheless, remember
and identify a pitch. Researchers at the University of Rochester’s Eastman
School of Music and Department of Brain and Cognitive Sciences played
groups of three notes in twenty-minute streams to both musicians and nonmusicians. Later the listeners heard the note-groups replayed; their job was
to say whether the notes were familiar or unfamiliar. The researchers had
a trick in the test. Some of the note groups were played in a different key.
The listeners who had perfect pitch (whether musically trained or not)
had trouble with the note groups in a new key. They didn’t recognize them.
Subjects who relied on relative pitch, however, recognized the note groups
as familiar. The test correlated well with the conventional test for perfect
pitch in people who were musically trained. More important, it disclosed
a small but significant number of nonmusicians who have perfect pitch but
never knew it.1
Although most researchers attribute the differences in musicians’ brains
not to genetics but rather to training and practice, the case of perfect pitch
may be an exception. It appears that you are either born with perfect pitch
or you aren’t. The ability is probably inherited as an autosomal dominant
trait: if one of your parents has it, you have a 50-50 chance of having it, too.2
YOUR BRAIN ON MUSIC
I didn’t go to Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center in Boston to recount
the musical miseries of my childhood, but I ended up doing so anyway, because
music-brain researcher Andrea Norton was so pleasant, so kind, so approachable
—and oh-so-eager for every child to benefit from the gift of music. Mine was a
sad saga she thought no child should relive. “Are people like me musically hopeless?” I asked her. “Certainly, music comes more easily to some people, and some
people are more naturally musical than others,” she answered,“ but I have never
yet met a person that I couldn’t teach or a person who couldn’t learn.” As for
Music and the Plastic Brain
169
teaching music to school-age children, Norton’s a big advocate. She thinks music can and should be taught for its own sake, as well as for the benefits it delivers
in the academic domains of reading, writing, and arithmetic.
She comes by her opinion honestly. For six years she worked at the New England Conservatory’s Research Center for Learning Through Music. She wrote
curricula and taught in the public schools to test her approach, teaching young
children basic skills through music. First-graders used rhythm to learn to read.
Third-graders used melody to learn fractions—all with stellar results. In 2002
Norton joined head neurologist Gottfried Schlaug and his team at the Music
and Neuroimaging Laboratory of Beth Israel Deaconess. Since then, she’s been
working with Schlaug and others on a longitudinal study. Over several years, the
researchers have been using fMRI to track children’s brain development, attempting to see how the brain changes (or doesn’t change) when children study
(or don’t study ) music.
The Beth Israel team started with normal five-year-olds, Norton says, and
found no MRI-detectable differences in the children’s brains “at baseline,” before some of the children went on to take music lessons and others did not. Over
the years, Norton and Schlaug have continued interviewing the children and
their families, monitoring music lessons and practice time, testing skills, and capturing MRIs of the children’s brains at fourteen-month intervals. The researchers’
perseverance is paying off. They have begun to see differences. The children who
study music are ahead in fine-motor skills such as computer keyboarding and
finger-tapping speed, a finding that is not surprising, Norton says, because playing a musical instrument trains the brain’s motor system.3
But some other findings are less predictable. Norton says the music students
tend to score higher on tests of nonverbal IQ, in which they look at a geometric
pattern and must choose the correct missing piece. The children who study music “are better at pattern recognition,” Norton says, “and they are ahead in vocabulary as well.” MRIs show some brain differences, too. The brains of kids who
study music are, on average, bigger in one particular region of the corpus callosum, the stalk of nerve fibers that connect the brain’s right and left hemispheres.
Similar differences have been noted between adult musicians and nonmusicians;
a possible explanation is that the larger corpus callosum promotes rapid communication between the hemispheres—a cooperation that’s needed, for example,
when playing a difficult piano piece.4 In children, the corpus callosum difference correlates with practice time, Norton reports. The more a child practices,
the larger that region of the corpus callosum becomes.5
MUSIC AND LEARNING
Norton’s team is trying to answer two basic questions. The first is whether training in music changes the brain, and the answer is emerging as an unequivocal
170
hearing
(Music) Lessons from Williams Syndrome
Charlie Betz, age thirteen, has Williams syndrome.6 Some time when either his mother’s egg or his father’s sperm was forming, about twenty genes
were dropped from chromosome seven. Those twenty might not seem like
many out of the 25,000 or so that it takes to make a human being, but they
made a big difference in who Charlie is, what he loves, and what he can
do. Ask Charlie his favorite thing, and he’ll squeal with enthusiasm, “The
drums!” Charlie is very good at the drums, and he spends many hours a
day practicing. He even plays in a garage band with some of his teenage
neighbors.
Not so unusual for an adolescent boy, but Charlie is unusual in some
other ways. He can neither read nor write, and he probably never will, his
doctors say, although his vocabulary is large and he speaks with clarity and
expression. His IQ has been measured at 60, but his social graces show
no impairment. He’s charming with people—bubbly, sociable, trusting—
perhaps indiscriminately trusting—with everyone he meets, and he remembers everyone’s face. Charlie can’t button his shirt and manipulating a fork
at the dinner table is tough, but his motor coordination is excellent when
he hits a downbeat. Charlie goes to a special school and loves the people
there. When he’s not in school or playing the drums, he’s listening to
music on his iPod. He adores every style from classical to jazz, but not all
sounds are pleasurable. He used to cover his ears and cry whenever he
heard a car engine starting, but lately he’s come to enjoy the sound of a
spinning motor. Some sounds that don’t seem especially loud to other
people—such as the whoosh of the vacuum cleaner—are too loud for
Charlie; he covers his ears and runs away. Other sounds—such as the whir
of the kitchen blender—can keep him fascinated for hours.
Neuroscientists have studied the brains of children like Charlie is hopes
of better understanding not only Williams syndrome, but also the structure
and development of the normal brain. Compared to control-group children, children like Charlie tend to have a small volume when both overall brain size and the size of the cerebrum are measured, but the volume
of the cerebellum is no different, although the brainstem is disproportionately small. Relative to typically developing children, Charlie probably has
less white matter in his cerebrum and less gray matter in his right occipital
lobe.7 (The gray matter is composed primarily of the bodies of neurons.
It’s found mostly in the brain’s outer layer, the cerebral cortex. The white
matter lies beneath the cortex. It’s made mostly of axons, thin projections
from neurons that carry impulses away from the cell body.) In Charlie’s
Music and the Plastic Brain
171
primary visual cortex, the neurons are smaller and more densely packed
than they should be—perhaps reducing the number of connections that
can be made between and among them. In the primary auditory cortex, it’s
the opposite: cells are larger and more loosely packed, perhaps allowing for
more connections.8
Charlie’s brain is convoluted into folded gyri and sulci, but not everywhere in the normal way. The central sulcus, the large deep groove that
runs across the top of the head separating the frontal and parietal lobes, is
abnormally shaped, as if it failed at some point during development to twist
back on itself.9 In the right hemisphere, the Sylvian fissure (also called the
lateral sulcus), which is a prominent valley in the temporal lobe, cuts horizontally, and fails to ascend into the parietal lobe the way it should.10 Studies have also revealed an abnormality of the planum temporale, a region of
the auditory cortex known to play a role in musical learning and processing. In most people, it’s larger in the left hemisphere than in the right, but
in children like Charlie, it’s the same on both sides, because the right is
greatly expanded.11
Differences are seen, too, when fMRIs reveal patterns of activity while
listening to music or noise. In children with Williams syndrome, the brain
regions that “light up” in normal children (such as the superior temporal
and middle temporal gyri) don’t always respond to either music or noise.
But children like Charlie tend to produce less brain activation in the temporal lobes along with greater activation of the right amygdala—a part of
the limbic system intimately involved with emotion. What’s more, children
like Charlie show a much more widely distributed network of activation
while listening to music, from the higher cortical regions all the way down
to the brainstem.12
Perhaps this greater pattern of brain activation explains Charlie’s love
of music. Perhaps auditory processing and sociability are somehow related
to the same set of twenty genes, although what the causal pathway might
be is anybody’s guess. Charlie’s not bothered. He loves music for its own
sake and for the joy that it brings to his life and the lives of others. Maybe
in that respect, Charlie’s not so different after all.
yes. Study after study has confirmed differences between the brains of trained
musicians and the rest of us (who never learned to tune our violins). In one such
research project, fMRI was used to compare brain activity in professional violinists with that of amateur players while they performed the left-hand finger
movements of a Mozart concerto. The brain scans showed many similarities, but
172
hearing
some important differences, too, especially when it came to efficiency or economy of effort. Brain activity in the professional players was more intense and more
tightly focused spatially. It centered in the primary motor cortex on the right side
of the brain, the region that controls the left hand. In the amateurs, activity patterns were more diffuse and spread into both hemispheres. The supplementary
and premotor regions of the cortex were more active in the amateurs. Those same
areas are known to be active when complex skills are being learned but have not
yet become automatic.13
In a study published in 2003, Norton’s team leader Gottfried Schlaug and a
German colleague, Christian Gaser, compared gray matter volumes in the brains
of three groups: professional musicians, amateur musicians, and nonmusicians.
The researchers found a correlation. The better trained and more skilled the
musician, the greater the volume of gray matter in a number of regions, including the primary motor and somatosensory areas, the premotor areas, and parts of
the parietal and temporal lobes, as well as in the left cerebellum (automatic skills)
and the left primary auditory cortex (sound processing).14
The second question is harder to answer. It’s whether musical training can
facilitate learning in other domains. Because of her experience teaching reading
and math using music, Norton believes that it can. But objective evidence for such
crossover abilities—from music to language or computation—is hard to come
by. Nevertheless, support is mounting. Several studies have shown that training in music enhances visual-spatial performance, a set of skills important to—
among other things—mathematics.15 Music training also appears to enhance
coordination between visual perception and the planning of related actions.16
Music training enhances verbal memory in both adults17 and children.18 Some
studies suggest that music training can even effect significant, albeit modest, increases in IQ.19 Consistent with Norton’s classroom experience, rhythm-based
music training has been shown to help children with dyslexia become better
spellers.20
Norton offers some plausible explanations for how musical training might
enhance other domains of learning. Spatial skills may be developed through musical training because musical notation is itself spatial, with relative pitches denoted by a series of lines and spaces. Mathematical skill may grow because the
rhythm of musical notes is inherently a mathematic relationship of proportion,
ratios, and fractions. For example, a half note is sustained twice as long as a quarter note. Spelling and reading might improve because both music and language
require the brain to break streams of sound down into smaller perceptual units
and to find meaning in the pitch—a skill that’s required in inferring meaning from
the melody of language. An example is the questioning attitude revealed when
the pitch rises at the end of what might otherwise be a declarative sentence.21
(To hear the distinction, try reading these sentences out loud: You’ve come to see
Mary. You’ve come to see Mary?)
Music and the Plastic Brain
173
Norton convinces me that musical training does some very fine things for
the brain, although how much training is required and how apt the student needs
to be remain a mystery. But evidence is accumulating that positive effects are significant and they don’t stop in childhood. For example, researchers a Vanderbilt
University asked matched groups of college students—half music students and
half nonmusic students—to dream up novel uses for common household items.
The musicians suggested a larger number of uses, and their ideas were more creative. Brain imaging using near-infrared spectroscopy (NIRS) measured oxygen
flow to brain regions. While the nonmusicians used primarily their left hemispheres during the task, the musicians used both the left and the right. While it’s
possible that the students who studied music were better divergent thinkers to
begin with—and maybe better cross-brain thinkers, too—the researchers offer a
different explanation. They suggest that learning to use both hands when playing an instrument may explain why musicians use both hemispheres more and
do better on a task that requires divergent thinking.22
I end my visit to Beth Israel Deaconess a little wiser about my youthful failures. I never became a violinist, but I became a voracious reader and an indefatigable writer. Maybe I learned something from Miss Donahue after all, if
nothing more—and nothing less!—than perseverance.
Chapter 25
Cochlear Implant
One Man’s Journey
tephen Michael Verigood is a twenty-seven-year-old deaf poet who lives in
Aliquippa, Pennsylvania, about twenty miles north of Pittsburgh. He lives
alone, and his family is spread “all over,” Stephen says, in Georgia, Ohio,
and Arkansas. He’s the author of three poetry collections and “a very scratchy
golfer.” He designs his own Web site, featuring his photographs and poetry.
Stephen was born completely deaf, but he was good at reading lips so his condition went unnoticed until he started preschool. He was fitted for his first hearing
aid when he was four years old. “With the hearing aid,” Stephen says, “I was only
able to hear the things that were necessary to get through life, going through mainstream education with a speech therapy class every week.” His hearing aid worked
for him for more than twenty years. Then . . . I’ll let Stephen tell the story in his
own words:1
“I was working as a salesman at Macy’s, helping a customer, when my hearing aid started making a weird vibration in my ear. This had happened before,
but this time the buzz wouldn’t go away. Over the next two weeks, the din got
to the point where I couldn’t handle it anymore. I couldn’t function in the work
force without my hearing aid, so I knew I had to look for a solution. I was afraid
that I had a brain tumor and it was affecting my ears. I was afraid that I was going to have to be on disability for the rest of my life. I was only twenty-four. I still
had a lot of living to do.
“I went in for testing. There was no brain tumor, but no one could give me
a reason for the buzzing of my hearing aid either. The doctor suggested a cochlear
implant. I was against the idea. I had done some research on implants when I
was in high school, and I didn’t like what I’d learned. I thought I was too old for
S
174
Cochlear Implant: One Man’s Journey
175
one and that if I did decide to get one, I would have to start over again learning
sounds, even speech therapy. I did not want to do that, but I knew I needed to
keep an open mind, so I did some new research—this time with a clearer insight
and a fresh eye for details. I saw that I had been too quick to judge and that the
technology had improved since I was in high school. I decided to try an implant
after all.
“What followed was nearly a year of tests, paperwork, referrals, more tests,
more paperwork, and waiting—the interminable waiting. The problem was that
I had no health insurance, and even when I finally became insured through a
government program, the insurance people rejected me for the procedure, saying cochlear implants were not covered. But the cochlear implant specialist at
Pittsburgh Ear Associates (located at the Allegheny General Hospital in downtown
Pittsburgh) appealed on my behalf—attesting that an implant was a medical
necessity for me. Wonder of wonders, she won the appeal! The date and time for
my surgery were set: July 16, 2007, at five o’clock in the morning.
“At first, I was elated, but about a week before my surgery date, I started to
have serious doubts. I was organizing a poetry reading to be held at my church
the night before my operation, and I was thinking hard about canceling the reading and the surgery, too. I was wondering if I was ready for what was to come. I
kept trying to imagine all the wonderful things that would happen once I could
hear, but my excitement invariably turned to nervousness. Was I ready? I didn’t
know. I realized that life wouldn’t be the same, but if I didn’t go through with
the surgery, I would be letting a lot of people down. In the end, a simple message of support from a woman I love pushed the clouds of doubt away.
“The poetry reading went off without a hitch. After reading a few poems and
telling the stories behind them, some friends of mine sang a song. While they
were singing, I kept imagining what the song would sound like once my implant
was turned on. Surrounded by family and friends, my nerves faded fast, but I tried
to sleep that night and I couldn’t. As my father and I were driving to the hospital, my stomach was in knots. This was going to be only the second surgery in my
lifetime, and the first one took place when I was too young to remember. I think
it was a hernia, but I cannot recall.
“The morning of the surgery, I thought I’d never get through all the forms,
questions, waiting rooms, and lines. There were dozens of people there, waiting
just as I was, and I wondered about their stories. Were they getting implants, too?
After changing into a hospital gown (open in the back!) and climbing into a bed,
I had to answer still more questions from a nurse who was carrying a huge folder.
I felt like a suspect in custody. After a good ten minutes of questions, she told me
it was time. I took off my hearing aid and handed it to my father. The nurses
wheeled me out of the room and down a long hallway. I felt like I was being paraded down Main Street in Aliquippa. They pushed me into a room that felt like
a morgue. Ten or fifteen other patients lay on gurneys there, and they all had
176
hearing
names on the fronts of their gurneys. I couldn’t hear a thing, but somehow I knew
what people were saying.
“My surgeon stopped by my bed and shook my hand. He told me that everything was all set and that they were just waiting for the drugs to kick in. What
drugs? I looked at my arm and saw a needle sticking out. Oh, that drug. The one
to knock me out. I was so nervous about the surgery, I hadn’t noticed that they
had placed a needle in my arm. The last thing that I remember was being wheeled
into a smaller room. I saw the surgeons and a few nurses. They packed me in tight
wrap and placed my head straight up. The nurse looked at me and, from reading her lips, I know she said, ‘Think of something good.’
“I woke up in what felt like five minutes. I saw my father standing over me,
and then I saw on the clock that it was nearly two in the afternoon. My head was
throbbing, and a huge bandage covered my ear. It looked like an athletic cup
with a strap around my head. The worse part was that it felt as if there were a little man standing inside my ear, blowing a whistle as loud as he could. It was
nearly five o’clock before I could be discharged. They brought me a wheelchair,
and I wanted my father to push me as fast as he could through the halls. I guess
the drugs hadn’t worn off yet.
“I cannot recall anything about the drive home. I do remember that once I
got to my grandmother’s house, I went straight to my father’s bedroom and fell
on the bed. I was out for the rest of the day. When I woke up, I think it was close
to eight or nine that night, and my father had already been to the pharmacy to
get my prescriptions. He gave me directions on how and when to take the pills.
I didn’t pay any attention to his directions. I just took the pills. The little guy was
still blowing his whistle in my ear. The pills made me tired, so I went back to
bed, and I didn’t wake up until the next morning.
“The next day, the surgeon called my dad to follow up on me. I asked if the
ringing in my ear was normal. He told me that it was, and that it would go away
in a couple of days. (It did.) He also said to keep the ‘cup’ on my head for one
more day. In between the times that I was asleep and the times I was being miserable around the house, things were not that bad, but I couldn’t open my mouth.
I tried slurping milkshakes and soup, but I couldn’t get much down. Because I
couldn’t eat, I lost a lot of weight, most of which I gained back later.
“Two nights later, I went home to my apartment and emailed everyone that
I knew to tell them that the surgery was a success. Not too long after that, I received about two hundred emails, all wanting to know how and what I was feeling.
Some people wanted to see pictures of my face and ear. I took out my camera and
did my best to capture those images. I posted them on my Web site. Not pretty!
“The next afternoon, I got restless and tired of holing up in my apartment,
so I decided to go for a drive. I went to Macy’s to see coworkers I hadn’t seen in
a week. To cover my weird surgical haircut, I wore my Steelers ‘Gilligan’ hat. My
Cochlear Implant: One Man’s Journey
177
eye was swollen, as if I had survived a fight with Rocky. I must have looked pretty
weird walking around Macy’s talking to people.
“That little jaunt took more out of me than I realized. When I got home, I
sat on my couch and turned on my television. I took my pills and before I knew
it, I was asleep. When I woke, it was getting close to three in the morning. I had
slept for ten hours. I went into the bathroom and saw that the swelling on my
face had gone down. I took my pills again and went back to sleep. I was out until the next afternoon. I spent the weekend with my grandparents. I told them
that I was getting bored and I wanted to get back to work. My grandfather, the
wisest man I know, told me to rest. ‘It’s not every day your head gets cut open and
operated on,’ he said.
“As I began to feel better, the next step of the journey was to be ‘turned on.’
That was when the external device of the cochlear implant was connected to
my head and activated. It would be another month before that could happen, so
there I was . . . waiting again. On Tuesday, August 14, 2007, my wait ended. All
through the day, I felt jumpy and anxious. Some friends went to the hospital with
me, and we borrowed a video camera so we could record everything.
“It was not a foregone conclusion that my implant would work. I had heard
stories about people who went through the procedure, only to find that the device did not improve their hearing or that they did not like the sounds they heard
once it was turned on. I sat nervously as the implant specialist put me through
the paces. She played a series of beeping sounds and I had to acknowledge when
I heard them. When I had taken that test before, I had strained just to pick up that
beep. Now, noticing the sound was almost effortless.
“My implant came with four software programs, I learned. It was up to me
to choose which program I wanted to keep. The implant specialist gave me the
basic program that allowed me to hear almost everything. She also gave me another program that lets background noise fade away in a noisy situation. She made
copies of the two programs and told me to try them at home and figure out which
kind of environment I was going to be in most often. She told me to stay off the
telephone because I was not ‘ready’ for that step.
“After the session was over and we left the office, I kept looking around trying to place where each sound was coming from. It was a very noisy world, as
I was only beginning to find out. We hit rush hour traffic leaving Pittsburgh. I
rolled down the window and heard a car radio playing in the vehicle behind us.
When I got back to my apartment, I watched the video we had just shot. Amazingly, I was able to hear and understand everything that was said. After I finished
the video, I sat on my couch and just listened. I began to hear things I had never
heard before: creaking noises, running water, people talking next door, the phone
ringing. I did not answer it. I took it off the hook. I did not want to tempt myself
into doing something the doctor had told me not to.
178
hearing
The Brain and the Cochlear Implant
Stephen’s implant is the Nucleus Freedom model, manufactured by the
Australian company Cochlear, Ltd. His implant was surgically inserted just
under the skin behind his right ear. An electrode array extends from the
implant into the cochlea (see Chapter 21). Behind his ear, Stephen wears
an external sound processor with an attached coil. The sound processor
converts sound waves to digital code. The code is then transmitted via the
coil to the implant. The implant changes the digital code to electrical signals and sends them along the electrode array. The electrical signals stimulate nerve fibers in the cochlea to trigger an impulse, transmitting sound
signals to Stephen’s brain. Stephen is one of 120,000 people worldwide
who’ve received one of the company’s implants.
Not all do as well as Stephen, but the device is seldom to blame. Ironically, the brain’s remarkable plasticity—which is so beneficial when recovering from a stroke or a paralyzing injury—is at fault. Children born
profoundly deaf do best if they have implants before age four. Any later and
the auditory cortex may never fully develop the neuronal connections
needed to process sound inputs. It’s a sort of “use it or lose it” situation. The
brain’s sound-processing centers can mature properly only if sound impulses trigger them to do so. Stephen thinks he adapted easily to new sounds
after his implant because he was ready for sounds, having experienced
some through the hearing aid he had worn since childhood.
To find out how brains like Stephen’s adapt, British and German researchers used positron emission tomography (PET) to study brains at
work when they process syllables, words, and environmental sounds. The
researchers compared people who had received cochlear implants after a
period of profound deafness with normal hearing subjects. Both groups
used the left and right superior temporal cortices and the left insula (at the
back of the temporal lobe) to process sound. Wernicke’s area responded to
speech sounds in people with normal hearing but was not specialized in
those with cochlear implants. The subjects with implants recruited additional regions to process speech, especially parts of the left occipital lobe,
which is usually a visual-processing area of the brain.2
“Later, I went to my grandparents’ house. It was getting dark, and dew was
forming on the grass. I took a walk through the yard and, for the first time, I heard
my feet slosh through the wet grass. My uncle, ever the prankster, lit a firecracker
and threw it. The loudness of the explosion made my head so dizzy, I had to grab
a chair on the deck to keep from fainting.
Cochlear Implant: One Man’s Journey
179
“As I got ready to go back to work at Macy’s, I began to get nervous again.
After working with these people for six years, I was going to hear their voices ‘naturally’ for the first time. I dawdled. I wanted to be the last one to arrive at work.
I wanted everyone to be working already when I walked in, so I could avoid being the center of attention. At the store I headed straight for my team’s room,
but a coworker stopped me to ask, ‘Did it work?’ I heard her and understood her.
I nodded and she gave me a big hug. Then it started. People gathered around,
asking questions. I made it a point to walk around the store, finding people to
hear and to answer their questions. They had a lot of questions. The most annoying one was, ‘Can you hear me now?’
“Yes, I can. I can hear you now.
“By the end of my day, I wanted to escape. I wanted to get the device off my
head. Everything was just too loud. My head was spinning, and I wondered how
I was going to make it home. I left the store and walked to my truck in the parking lot. I heard my feet pound the pavement and the starting of many cars. My
eyes hurt and I was getting a migraine. I made it home and turned the device off.
The silence was so welcoming. Now I know what they mean by peace and quiet.
“The next morning, I turned the device on again. Morning sounds flooded
over me, and I feared an anxiety attack. I plopped onto my couch and sat there,
staring into the blackness of the television screen. I asked myself, Why did I go
through all that? What am I going to hear from now on? How are people going to
treat me? Will this change what my poetry is about? Am I going to be a different
person? Will I be accepted now that I can hear? What is going to happen to me?
Will the sounds get any better? Did I do the right thing?
“When I snapped out of it, I looked at my clock and saw that I was going to
be very late for work. People would be worried about me. I took a deep breath
and left my apartment. When I got to Macy’s, I went around to tell my team
members that I was okay—that I had only needed to think about some things.
The rest of day went as normally as normal can . . . and it’s been that way ever
since.”
This page intentionally left blank
PART SIX
BEYOND THE BIG FIVE
Reality is merely an illusion, albeit a very persistent one.
—Albert Einstein
This page intentionally left blank
Chapter 26
Synesthesia
When Senses Overlap
ne of my favorite pieces of music is Ferde Grofé’s Grand Canyon Suite.
Hearing that music seems to transport the listener to the canyon. The
melodies and rhythms evoke mental images of majestic cliffs, rocky
trails, and plodding donkeys hauling heavy packs from the canyon’s rim to the
muddy Colorado River far below. When Grofé spins up an orchestral lightning
storm, the listener can almost feel the rain.
Almost.
For most of us, Grofé’s music is simply bringing back memories. We have
experienced—either in real-life or on TV—the clip-clop of donkeys and the roar
of thunder. It is easy for us to relate these sounds to visual memories.
But for a small number of people, listening to music is an entirely different
experience. Some people see sound as color. Others get taste sensations from
musical sounds. For one professional musician, a major third tastes sweet, while
a minor third is salty.1
Hearing isn’t the only sense that can overlap and meld with other senses.
Some people perceive numbers as shapes, words as tastes, or odors as tactile sensations in the hands. People who experience such an overlapping or intermingling of the senses are called synesthetes, a term that means literally “those who
combine the senses.” The phenomenon itself is called synesthesia.
O
A CASE STUDY IN SYNESTHESIA
“Jerry Springer changed my life,” says Karyn Siegel-Maier.2
183
184
beyond the big five
“I’m fairly normal (ahem), forty-seven years of age, married with three grown
sons and I live in the Catskill Mountains of New York,” she relates. “I’ve scratched
out a living over the years as a singer, bookkeeper, legal assistant, Web master,
online community manager, certified software consultant, balanced life coach,
and freelance writer and editor.” Karyn has written hundreds of magazine articles and authored two books published in four languages. Her specialty is herbal
medicine.
All her life she has experienced letters as colors. The association is so strong
that Karyn can easily visualize any letter or word in its associated colors. “For instance,” she explains, “the letter d to me has a dark, brownish-red color, sort of
like burnt sienna. The letter o is an off-white color. The letter g is a dull yellowgolden color.” When Karyn perceives a word made from those letters, dog, it’s a
lighter shade of sienna because the first letter of the word dominates the color of
the word in its entirety. Her name, she says, is a deep maroon. Thunder is brown.
Ball is a pale grayish-blue.
Karyn explains that she does not actually see letters and words in color on
paper. Black type is black type. Only when she hears or thinks of a word does the
color image flood her mind. “The interesting thing is that if you asked me what
color I associate with any particular letter, word, or number today, I’ll consistently
give you the same answer, whether it’s two weeks from now or two years.” Karyn
says she sometimes has difficulty explaining the color of a letter because there
is no word for a color like greenish-gray-white. But she can easily pick the right
color from a palette or color wheel.
Back to Jerry Springer.
Karyn says she watched an episode sometime in the 1980s, back when
Springer’s program was “a talk show with a panel of guests who weren’t inclined
to tear off their clothes and beat the crap out of each other. In fact, Jerry’s show
introduced very serious topics,” Karyn explains. “One day, I was flipping channels
when I saw that he had guests who were talking about synesthesia. I had never
heard the term before, but was stunned when these people described tasting
shapes. . . . One guest said he could see words in color. I called my ex-boyfriendnow-friend on the phone and told him to turn on the show. So there. Now he
gets it!”
Karyn says her synesthesia is not a hindrance in any way, “[but neither] will
it help me win a Pulitzer Prize!” Color does, however, influence her daily life
in a big way. She’s always had an artistic bent, and she describes herself as once a
“fairly good artist with pastels. . . . At one time, I was in possession of high-quality
French pastels that numbered more than three hundred shades. For someone
with synesthesia, that is drool producing.”
Her personal environment is important to her, and she’s an excellent decorator. She paints walls in colors that make most people nervous until they see the
final result. “My entire home is decorated in early American primitive, with the
Synesthesia: When Senses Overlap
185
primary colors being black, barn red, hunter green, mustard, and colonial blue.
I’m not afraid to mix those colors in the same space. In fact, my home is an experience in visual stimulation,” she says.
WHAT IS SYNESTHESIA?
Karyn isn’t the first synesthete, and she won’t be the last. Synesthetes have
been around throughout human history, and their talents have occasionally been
noticed and described. The nineteenth-century French poet Baudelaire captured
synesthetic experiences in his poem “Correspondances,” meaning associations.
To Baudelaire, echoes mixed together as shadows. Some smells were the sound
of an oboe; others were the green of meadow grass. A similar synesthetic portrayal
came from another French poet of that same era, Arthur Rimbaud. In his “Le
Sonnet des Voyelles,” he associated each of the vowels with a color: A was black,
E was white, I was red, O was blue, and U was green. Experts aren’t sure whether
Baudelaire and Rimbaud were genuine synesthetes or if they were simply writing in metaphor.
Most of us use synesthetic metaphors in everyday communication, scarcely
thinking about what we’re saying. When my friend Ida proclaims she’s “all points
and plugs today,” her meaning is clear: she’s feeling out-of-sorts, edgy, nervous.
While Ida relates emotions to shapes and objects, other common comparisons
use colors for mood states: “I’m feeling blue,” for sadness; “I saw red,” for anger;
and “She was in a brown study,” for contemplation. We often use synesthetic
phrases to describe objects or events. Examples include “loud suit,” “bitter cold,”
or “prickly disposition.” Old whiskey tastes “smooth” and wild women are “rough.”
But true synesthesia is much more than figurative language. The combining of senses is real for those who experience it. Some synesthetes see sounds
as colors. Others perceive sounds or tastes as shapes felt by the skin. In his book
The Man Who Tasted Shapes, Richard Cytowic tells of his friend, Michael, who
wouldn’t serve a chicken dish until it had enough points on it. To Michael every
flavor had shape, temperature, and texture. He felt and sometimes saw geometric shapes when he tasted or smelled food. Flavors produced a touch sensation:
“When I taste something with an intense flavor,” Michael [said], “the
feeling sweeps down my arms into my fingertips. I feel it—its weight, its
texture, whether it’s warm or cold, everything. I feel it like I’m actually
grasping something.” He held his palms up. “Of course, there’s nothing
really there,” he said, staring at his hands. “But it’s not an illusion because I feel it.”3
Synesthetes typically experience their “joined” senses for many years before
discovering that others do not perceive the world as they do. Karyn wasn’t aware
186
beyond the big five
of her synesthesia until she was in her early twenties. She had learned to dismiss
it years earlier. “That’s probably because I realized that other kids didn’t have the
same perception when I was in grade school, so I just didn’t talk about it for fear
of getting labeled,” she explains.
She confided her secret to her college boyfriend. He felt certain that her association of colors with letters stemmed from cards she might have used to learn
the alphabet as a child. Karyn disagrees. She recalls the alphabet posted above
the blackboard in the classroom: dark green cards with white letters. “The funny
thing is that this boyfriend has remained a close friend for the last twenty-some
years, and he’s tested me a few times. What color is the letter W? It’s greenishgray-white. Same answer, every time. Give me a pack of crayons and I’ll color War
and Peace the same way today as I would ten years from now. This leads me to
believe that this color association is innate for me, not learned or random. I just
do it without thinking and without the slightest hesitation.”
How many of us experience some of our senses in combination? Cytowic
estimates that one in every 25,000 individuals “is born to a world where one sensation involuntarily conjures up others,” but he suspects that figure is too low.
Hearing words, letters, or numbers as colors is the most common form of synesthesia. British scientists suspect that as many as one in every 2,000 people can do
it.4 Professor Joel Norman of the University of Haifa thinks that perhaps one person in ten has some synesthetic ability without knowing it.5
Although researchers have long believed that synesthetic experiences are
unique to each synesthete, and not generalizable across all synesthetes, recent
evidence suggests that synesthetes may actually share some commonalities—at
least as far as color-letter synesthesia is concerned. Psychologists Julia Simner of
the University of Edinburgh and Jamie Ward of the University of Sussex found
that synesthetes often share the same associations. For example, the letter a frequently evokes the color red, while the letter v is often purple. The common letters tend to pair up with common colors, while less frequently used letters induce
rarer hues. The researchers think their studies show that synesthetic match-ups
are at least partly learned.6
No one knows how synesthesia works, but the best guess is it comes from
some kind of cross-communication between adjacent areas in the brain’s cortex.7
Evidence also suggests that synesthetes
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inherit their cross-sensory abilities from their parents.
Are more often women than men.
Are often left-handed or ambidextrous.
Have normal nervous systems and mental health.
Are often highly intelligent and have excellent memories.
Sometimes experience certain learning or thinking difficulties such as a poor
sense of direction or trouble with math.
Synesthesia: When Senses Overlap
187
ARE WE ALL SYNESTHETES?
Studies suggest we may all be synesthetes of a sort, whether we realize what’s
happening or not. Why? Because the senses influence each other in the “firststop,” stimulus-processing regions of the brain, as well as “higher up,” where
sensory information is integrated. This was demonstrated in one study in which
researchers at the University of California at San Diego presented volunteers with
a flash of light, pulsed in between two brief bursts of sound. Although the light
flashed only once, many subjects reported seeing two flashes of light, one after
each sound. Event-related potentials, which are recordings of electrical activity
in various brain regions, showed that those people who saw the illusion experienced a spike in a particular waveform in their visual cortex within thirty to sixty
milliseconds after hearing the second sound. That spike by itself, however, couldn’t
predict seeing the phantom flash, but a spike of a different wave type occurring
in the auditory cortex even earlier, at twenty to forty milliseconds, could. Thus,
the investigators attributed the illusion to extremely rapid interaction between the
brain’s hearing and visual circuitry.8
In another study, Canadian researchers used magnetoencephalography
(MEG) to study changes in the brain that occurred after volunteers viewed famous
and not-famous faces or heard famous and not-famous names. It was no surprise
that famous faces produced big changes in the brain’s visual areas—more so than
not-famous faces did. The same is true of activity in the auditory-processing region for famous versus not-famous names. But it was the crosstalk of the two
senses that proved most interesting. Famous faces triggered activity in the auditory region; famous names caused the visual areas to rev up. The brain doesn’t need
much time to make these associations and serve up an enhanced sensory perception of a known quantity—something on the order of 150 to 250 milliseconds.9
Such pseudosynesthetic experiences occur, in part, because different sensory signals provoked by the same object or event are integrated in other areas
of the brain besides the primary sensory areas. Such multisensory, integrative
regions include several areas of the parietal, temporal, and frontal cortex, as well
as underlying regions, including the superior colliculus, the basal ganglia, and
the putamen.10 Information exchange occurs between and among those multisensory areas and the primary-processing regions. The integrative areas send
feedback to the individual sensory-processing regions and influence their continuing action. This can result in illusions such as the ventriloquist effect, in
which the location of a sound can be perceived as shifting toward its apparent visual source; and the McGurk effect, in which viewing lip movements can change
how speech sounds are heard.11 Other examples include the following:
•
A research team at Oxford University scanned volunteers with fMRI while
the subjects smelled odors, viewed colors, or did both at the same time.
188
beyond the big five
Closet Synesthetes
There’s no doubt in my mind that some people are synesthetes, but they
never know it. One who comes to mind is Septimus Piesse, the nineteenthcentury French chemist who thought that smells affect the nose just as
sound affects the ear. For Piesse, smell was a musical thing, and he plotted
odors on the same kind of scale musicians use. The odors that Piesse considered “heavy” he assigned to the bass clef. Sharp, pungent odors he placed
high on the treble clef. He wrote in 1857:
Scents, like sounds, appear to influence the olfactory nerve in
certain definite degrees. There is, as it were, an octave of odors
like an octave in music; certain odors coincide, like the keys of
an instrument. Such as almond, heliotrope, vanilla, and orangeblossoms blend together, each producing different degrees of a
nearly similar impression. Again, we have citron, lemon, orangepeel, and verbena, forming a higher octave of smells, which blend
in a similar manner. The metaphor is completed by what we are
pleased to call semi-odors, such as rose and rose geranium for the
half note; petty grain, neroli, a black key, followed by fleur d’orange.
Then we have patchouli, sandal-wood, and vitivert, and many
others running into each other.12
I’d also nominate for synesthete-hood the modern-day scent maverick,
Luca Turin (see Chapter 7), whose olfactory sense has to be something
Synesthesia: When Senses Overlap
189
superhuman—an assertion he vehemently denies. Protestations aside, Turin
describes scents in ways that defy mere mortal comprehension, and his
descriptions often possess synesthetic attributes. For example, Turin told
Chandler Burr, while discussing scents: “I’ve always thought that esters,
fruity, are Mozart. The melon notes—helional, for example—strike me as
the watery Debussy harmonies, the fourths. Beethoven in his angrier moments is quinolines, which you get in green peppers.”13
Spoken like a true synesthete.
•
•
They found that activity in caudal regions of the orbitofrontal cortex and
in the insular cortex increased in proportion to what the people perceived
as better and better “matches” between the olfactory and visual cues.14
A different Oxford team asked volunteers to judge the roughness of abrasive surfaces while they heard a variety of sounds. High-pitched sounds made
the surfaces feel smoother.15 When subjects smelled lemon and felt fabric
swatches, they judged the fabrics as softer that when an animal-like odor
accompanied the touching.16
Wine tasters in Bordeaux described the “nose” of a white wine and the
same white wine that had been colored—without their knowledge—with
an odorless red dye. They perceived the white wine as have a red wine smell
(described in terms such as prune, clove, cherry, cedar, musk, violet, and
cinnamon) when it was colored red.17
All of us—true synesthetes or not—have to admit that we have little control
over our perceptions. Synesthetes can no more stop themselves from hearing colors or tasting shapes than the rest of us can block out the music of an orchestra
or the flavor of chocolate. Seldom do synesthetes describe their commingling of
the senses as a handicap. In fact, quite the opposite. “I think the color association helps me on several levels, including in my profession,” Karyn says. “First,
being able to ‘see’ words in color allows me to recall information that I’ve read
without necessarily having to memorize facts. That was very helpful in college
when I was taking a lot of earth science courses. That kind of recall is also useful
when encountering unfamiliar words or terms. By simply ‘seeing’ the first few letters of the word or term in color, I can then assign a ‘feeling’ to the word, by the
‘warmth’ or ‘coolness’ the colors represent. In short, the crazy thing has helped
me to develop somewhat of a photographic memory. . . . So it might be fair to
say that my synesthesia has helped to expand my creativity and self-expression.
Or, it could be the other way around: the creative processes in my brain have led
to seeing letters and words in color. Who knows?” Karyn asks. “Maybe it’s both.”
Chapter 27
If This Looks Like Déjà Vu,
You Ain’t Seen Nuthin’ Yet
Sudden Light
I have been here before,
But when or how I cannot tell:
I know the grass beyond the door,
The sweet keen smell,
The sighing sound, the lights around the shore,
You have been mine before,How long ago I may not know:
But just when at that swallow’s soar
Your neck turned so,
Some veil did fall,- I knew it all of yore,
Has this been thus before?
And shall not thus time’s eddying flight
Still with our lives our love restore
In death’s despite,
And day and night yield one delight once more?
—Dante Gabriel Rossetti (1854)1
éjà vu is like love. If you’ve experienced it, you know it. If you haven’t,
it’s a mystery.
D
Most of us fall in love at least once in our lives. So, too, with déjà vu. Studies
say 70 percent of us have that eerie feeling of I’ve lived through this before, I’ve
seen this before, or I’ve been here before.2 Unlike love, déjà-vu feelings pass quickly.
190
If This Looks Like Déjà Vu, You Ain’t Seen Nuthin’ Yet
191
Also different from love is the forgetability factor. Most of us know we’ve felt déjà
vu, but we can’t remember where or when.
Love draws us into an analysis of our own mental processes. We grow eager
to comprehend our own feelings. Déjà vu does the same, albeit only briefly.
Wouldn’t you love to figure out why that sensation of “been here, done this”
came over you when first you set foot in the temple at Karnak, attended a political rally for an obscure candidate, or played golf against a new opponent only to
feel that the game had been played before—and that the bogey on the twelfth
was a precognitive revelation. The feeling can be strange enough and intense
enough to set you plotting episodes for The Twilight Zone. Perhaps you were a
servant or a priest at Karnak in your past life as an Egyptian. Maybe that candidate ran for office in an alternative reality. Maybe you played that golf game in
some parallel, antimatter universe.
Or maybe your brain is playing tricks on you.
WHAT IS DÉJÀ VU?
Déjà vu has been with us since the dawn of history, and since we first grunted
our way out of caves, we’ve tried to understand it, explain it, rationalize it. It’s not
like any other experience. It’s not a flashback, an illusion, a false memory, or a
hallucination. There is no sense of depersonalization or dislocation—no feeling
of being outside one’s body or looking down on oneself. In fact, quite the opposite. Déjà vu is very much “here” and very much “now,” just as it was, it seems,
when the same thing happened before.
There’s no shortage of déjà-vu accounts in literature (the Rossetti poem
above among them) and no shortage of explanations. Past lives and reincarnations are popular hypotheses. Rossetti’s poem serves up that notion, as does the
nineteenth-century Dutch author Louis Couperus in the novel Ecstasy:
Her head sank a little, and, without hearing distinctly, it seemed to her
that once before she had heard this romance played so, exactly so, in
some former existence ages ago, in just the same circumstances, in this
very circle of people, before this very fire, the tongues of the flames shot
up with the same flickerings as from the logs of ages back, and Suzette
blinked with the same expression she had worn then.3
Some thinkers and writers have posited less supernatural explanations. Perhaps déjà vu occurs because present reality resembles some past dream or memory. Writes Ivan Goncharov in his novel Oblomov:
Whether he dreams of what is going on before him now, or has lived
through it before and forgotten it, the fact remains that he sees the same
192
beyond the big five
people sitting beside him again as before and hears words that have already been uttered once.4
Although visual theories have been proposed to explain déjà vu, vision is unnecessary for the experience. Chris Moulin at the University of Leeds studies déjà
vu. Some of his research subjects are blind people who experience déjà vu just
as vividly as sighted people do.5 And, although déjà vu literally means “already
seen,” vision is not the only sense that can be involved. Various authors have
coined a veritable déjà dictionary: déjà entendu (already heard), déjà pensé (already thought), déjà gouté (already tasted), déjà revé (already dreamed), and déjà
rencontré (already met).
DÉJÀ AND DISEASE
Despite its commonplace nature, déjà vu can be associated with mental disorders in certain cases. In some studies, for example, schizophrenia patients actually report fewer déjà-vu experiences than healthy people do, but their episodes
last longer and create greater feelings of unease.6 Other researchers find a greater
incidence of déjà vu among neuropsychiatric patients, and some evidence suggests the nature of the experience may be different.7 People with schizophrenia
tend to experience déjà vu when stressed either mentally or physically, but the
content of their déjà vu, some researchers say, is no different from anyone else’s.8
Some people who have epilepsy report a vivid sense of déjà vu preceding a
seizure. The reason lies in the brain. The rapid firing of neuronal circuits in the
temporal lobe, including the hippocampus, can precede both the seizure and
the sense of déjà vu, perhaps explaining both. Researchers have triggered déjà
vu by stimulating those brain areas with electrodes,9 but such research may not
explain garden variety déjà vu, in part because epilepsy-provoked déjà vu doesn’t
carry with it that same sense of disorientation—even the paranormal—that healthy
people report after experiencing that been-here-before sensation.
Frequent and long-lasting déjà vu can become a pathology in itself with a
name of its own, déjà vécu: a persistent or chronic state of déjà vu. Brain scans
in such cases sometimes reveal diffuse changes in the temporal lobes, but no
simple cause–effect relationship is apparent. Moulin describes three illustrative
cases, all among elderly people, in which déjà vecu goes along with poor shortterm memory and denial that the déjà vu is an illusion:
•
•
An eighty-year-old man stopped watching television programs and reading
newspapers because he believed he had seen them all before and knew
their contents and outcomes.
A seventy-year-old woman complained to her doctor that she had a bad
memory. Her husband suspected she was psychic, believing that she could
If This Looks Like Déjà Vu, You Ain’t Seen Nuthin’ Yet
•
193
predict the future because of her strong sense of having lived through events
before. For example, after she heard about a terrorist attack in Bali, she
claimed she knew the casualty count before the report came in.
A sixty-five-year-old woman suffered a stroke and developed epilepsy. The
first time she met a member of Moulin’s research team, she kissed the scientist on the cheek and greeted her visitor like an old friend. When informed
that this was a first meeting, the woman said she felt that the researcher had
visited her hundreds of times before.10
Jamais vu (“never seen”) is the opposite of déjà vu. It is the perception that
a familiar object or occurrence is unknown, and it may be easier to evoke in normal brains than déjà vu. Try this: Think long and hard about the word that. Turn
it and twist it in your mind. Write it over and over again on paper. Use it in sentences and examine its meaning from every angle. After a while, you may find
yourself having no idea what the word means or even how it is spelled, although
you use it regularly everyday without difficulty. “Jamais vu is a temporary sensation
of unfamiliarity. It may include a sensation that something is new to you even
though you’ve known it for a long time. It may include feelings of unreality, novelty, or merely a lack of fluency,” says Moulin.11
The “word alienation” you induced when you overthought the word that is
one example, but Moulin offers others: “[g]etting very briefly lost in a very familiar place, a loved one looking different or like a stranger, losing your way in
a very familiar musical piece if you’re a musician, or forgetting what pedal does
what when you’re driving.” Moulin says 40 to 60 percent of us experience jamais
vu, but it’s reported less frequently and by fewer people than déjà vu. Ordinarily,
it’s no big deal, but when it becomes continuous and long lasting, it can be pathological. Neurologists describe cases in which victims of stroke or injury insist that
family members are imposters. The patients may recognize facial features and
even acknowledge a sense of familiarity but stand firm in their conviction that
loved ones are actually strangers.
WHAT CAUSES DÉJÀ VU?
Although theories abound, no one has yet determined what’s happening in
your brain when you experience déjà vu. Psychologist Alan Brown has written
the definitive book on the subject: The Déjà Vu Experience: Essays in Cognitive
Psychology.12 In his book, Brown explores several categories of possible causes
for déjà vu. I’ve posed them as questions.
1.
Is something misfiring in my nervous system?
Theorists have constructed several different versions of this idea, all centering around the fact that sensory messages travel across multiple pathways
194
2.
beyond the big five
from a sense organ to the brain and within the brain itself. If something goes
wrong at the synapse—the juncture of two neurons and the gap between
them—the travel time in one pathway might be a little longer or a little shorter
than the travel time in another. This “time lapse” might lead the brain to
conclude that certain information has already been received and is, therefore, remembered.
Am I overgeneralizing?
Perhaps a few details trigger an erroneous recognition of an overall
pattern—one that may seem familiar—thus prompting déjà vu.
Brown offers an example:
Recall [your] first visit to a friend’s home. . . . [T]he room has a layout similar to the one in your aunt’s house: a sofa to the right of the
love seat with a stairway to the left going up the wall, a grandfather
clock against the back wall, and an Oriental rug on the floor. None
of the elements in the newly entered living room is identical to one
from the previous context, but the particular configuration of elements
fits the same template.13
3.
4.
Am I getting the sense of remembering something when I’m not actually
remembering?
Consider ordinary remembering, without that feeling of déjà vu. You
recall something. At the same time, you know you are recalling it. But what
if you get that sensation of remembering without actually pulling up a
memory? Suppose the process of remembering comes uncoupled from the
awareness of remembering. If that happened, you might experience déjà
vu—feeling as if some occurrence in the here and now happened before—
although you can’t recall when.
Was I distracted before but I’m paying attention now?
This “double perception” theory goes like this: You see something once,
but you are paying attention to other things, so the sight doesn’t register in
your conscious perception. Nonetheless, your brain stores the image away.
Later, when you see the same thing and pay attention to it, you get that disconcerting feeling that you’ve seen it before.
For most of these ideas, theorizing abounds, while solid evidence is scant.
However, Brown, a professor at Southern Methodist University, and Elizabeth
Marsh, a psychologist at Duke University, actually tested the distraction hypothesis. They ran a series of experiments using students at both schools. The students
tried to spot crosses superimposed on background photographs; the photographs
showed places on both campuses. The students saw the photographs for only half
a second. After a three-week break, the students looked at more photographs—
If This Looks Like Déjà Vu, You Ain’t Seen Nuthin’ Yet
195
some new ones and some they had seen before. Between 70 and 91 percent of
the students thought they definitely or probably had visited one or more sites on
the other campus, although in truth they had never traveled there. Most described some sense of confusion about whether they had been there, and about
half said they felt an eerie sensation of déjà vu or something like it.14
YOUR BRAIN ON DÉJÀ VU
Although the causes of déjà vu remain a mystery, more is known about who
reports it. You are more likely to experience everyday, ordinary, garden-variety
déjà vu if you travel a lot, hold liberal political views, have a good memory, or
frequently exercise an active imagination. You are also vulnerable if you’re tired
or stressed. More money and more education make you prone to déjà vu, as does
being age twenty or so. Middle-aged and elderly people hardly ever experience
it, although it may turn up as part of a constellation of symptoms associated with
strokes or Alzheimer’s.
Is Déjà Vu in Your Genes?
No one will ever find the gene for déjà vu, but one particular gene and its
inheritance patterns do intrigue molecular scientists interested in déjà vu.
The gene is called LGI1; it lies on chromosome 10. Certain forms of the
gene are associated with a type of epilepsy called autosomal dominant lateral temporal epilepsy (ADLTE). If one of your parents has that disorder,
chances are (usually) 50-50 you’ll have it, too. It‘s a mild form of epilepsy
that usually appears in people in their early twenties. It involves recurrent
seizures with an aura and (usually) auditory hallucinations. Though by
no means a certainty, déjà vu occurs often enough during the seizure that
researchers suspect a link to the gene.
People who have ADLTE have mutations (changed forms) of the LGI1
gene, but not everyone with an LGI1 mutation experiences seizures-cumdéjà vu.15 Nobody knows what LGI1 does. It may have something to do with
the migration of neurons during fetal development, or it may play a part in
controlling what substances get into neurons through the cell membrane.
One thing’s for sure: it gets around. LGI1 operates in many different parts
of the brain, guiding the manufacture of at least two different proteins.16
Different mutations of LGI1 produce different clinical symptoms.17 “Thus,
the gene may be expressed or responded to differently in individuals who
experience déjà vu,” says neurologist Edward Wild, who thinks further
study of the gene may yield a “neurochemical explanation for déjà vu.”18
196
beyond the big five
Understandably, no scientists have yet captured an MRI or PET image of
the brain in the midst of a déjà-vu experience. Researchers have, however, uncovered some clues that suggest where the brain’s déjà-vu response may be centered. Investigators in France used stereo electroencephalograms (EEGs in three
dimensions) to evaluate surgical options for twenty-four patients with epilepsy.
In doing so, they applied direct electrical stimulation (harmless and sometimes
therapeutic) to two parts of the brain called the perirhinal cortex (PC) and the
entorhinal cortex (EC). Both lie near the hippocampus and amygdala, brain
structures known to be important in forming memories. The stereo EEGs showed
that stimulation of the PC often prompted memory retrieval. Stimulation of the
EC often produced a feeling of déjà vu.19
Scientists in the United Kingdom and Australia are using hypnosis in hopes
of producing déjà vu in the laboratory. The researchers, led by Akira O’Connor at
the University of Leeds in the U.K., hypnotized twelve highly suggestible subjects.
Under hypnosis, six of them played a game and then received the posthypnotic
suggestion to forget the game; they were the posthypnotic amnesia (PHA) group.
The other six did not play the game, but they were told under hypnosis that the
game would seem familiar to them later on; those people formed the posthypnotic
familiarity (PHF) group. Later, after playing the game for the first or second time,
the subjects were interviewed and their spontaneous comments recorded and analyzed. None of the PHA participants experienced a strong sense of déjà vu when
replaying the game, but five of the six PHF subjects did, although they had never
actually seen the game before. “Their déjà-vu experiences were characterized by
perceptual salience and confusion,” O’Connor says, “very similar to déjà vu ‘in
the wild.’”20
Salience? Confusion? Wildness? That brings us full circle: Déjà vu is like
love . . .
Chapter 28
Feeling a Phantom
y psychotherapist friend Dr. P. told me about one of her patients, an
elderly woman we’ll call Myra. Myra was five when her mother told
her that her father was having an affair. She was ten when her mother
left her in the care of her maternal grandmother. She was twelve when she was first
told how beautiful she was. At age sixteen every boy in the high school was vying
for her attention, but Myra was shy, almost reclusive.
Today Myra is a petite woman at five-feet-two and one hundred ten pounds,
and still beautiful at age eighty-four. Her blue-green eyes dazzle and laugh as
they mix with her infectious smile. Her hair is thick and worn in a pageboy style
reminiscent of the 1950s. She has osteoporosis and its telltale sign, a dowager’s
hump.
She came to therapy to discuss the death of her second husband. She and
Carl were married for thirty-five years. The couple had not yet celebrated their
second anniversary when Myra received the diagnosis of breast cancer. Myra had
always had fibrocystic breasts and lumps, but Carl didn’t believe she had cancer
at age fifty. He said the doctors were in collusion and trying to make money off
women by removing breasts.
Myra was terrified, then mortified, and then Carl went on his “it’s not cancer tirade” and she settled for terrified. Despite his objections, she had two radical
mastectomies.
What was the hardest part? asks Dr. P. Myra responds,
M
The hardest part was wondering what they do with the breasts once they
remove them. I wondered if they just put them in a trash bag and then
197
198
beyond the big five
they end up in a landfill or do they grind them up in a disposal. Your
breasts are a sacred space; they define a big part of what it means to be
a female.
It must have taken a long time to recover from two separate radical mastectomies.
It did. It still does in ways. I went to a plastic surgeon about a month after Carl died and asked if he could do anything. He gasped when he saw
what the surgeons did to me. I am so disfigured. Scars crisscross every
which way, and scar tissue has erupted in fissures. It is very ugly. I wish
they could do something, but the doctor said that it would be very difficult since it has been so many years. He asked me, ‘Why now?’ And you
know what I said? I told him that now that Carl is dead it is time to start
living. I also told him that my breasts have kept speaking to me. He
smiled and patted me on the shoulder when I said that.
What did you mean when you said your breasts speak to you?
Well, they’ve never stopped speaking to me. You are going to think I am
crazy. I still feel them. I even can feel my nipple on my left side harden
when I am chilled. There is no nipple. So anyway, I feel them and they
speak to me by still being present. It was worse in the early years, but it
continues. Sometimes they itch. If I don’t have my form bra on I will
rub my hands over my chest just to make sure they are gone. All I feel
is the scar tissue. Because I had fibrocystic breasts, I was always aware of
three lumps to the left of the right nipple. Since losing the breast I sometimes feel this feeling like when I had the lumps. It feels like a tingling
and pressure. I know the spirit of my breasts is still alive because I still feel
like I have breasts. I may just have to be satisfied to have their spirit and
these reminders of what was.
WHAT IS A PHANTOM?
The sensation that Myra feels comes from a phantom. Her breasts are no
longer there, but she feels them nonetheless. Many women who’ve had mastectomies continue to feel the missing breast, but phantoms are more often reported
by amputees or accident victims who have lost all or part of a digit or limb—a
finger, hand, arm, foot, or leg. Many people who have lost a limb perceive the
missing body part as moving on its own or moving when willed to do so. Some
feel that the limb is paralyzed or numb. In many cases, the phantom is extremely
painful—thus the terms phantom pain or phantom limb pain.
Feeling a Phantom
199
Phantom pain is not the same as the pain of surgical healing or of damaged
nerves that regrow abnormally in scar tissue. It’s pain in what feels like the missing body part. In addition to pain, sensations of touch, temperature, pressure,
itch, vibration, tingling, or “pins and needles” may be perceived in the missing
body part. Nearly all patients with an amputation experience the sensation of a
phantom;1 50 to 80 percent develop phantom pain.2
That pain is rooted in the reorganization of the brain’s “body map” after
amputation. Normally, the brain regions that process sensations from the skin—
collectively designated the somatosensory cortex—are organized into specialized
regions that constitute organized “maps” of the skin’s surface. Certain regions receive inputs—whether pressure, heat, cold, or pain—from a particular body part.
The famous Penfield map, named for its creator Wilder Penfield (1891–1976),
was drawn when Penfield applied electrical stimulation to the brains of hundreds
of epilepsy patients he was treating (Figure 1). He found that pinpoint stimulation of a particular brain area produced a sensation perceived in a particular body
part, perhaps tongue or foot or genitals. The Penfield map shows how the perception of body parts wraps itself in a band across the top of the parietal lobe,
with thumb lying above the face and the face above the tongue, like Canada, the
United States, and Mexico in a neat north-south row.
Figure 1
200
beyond the big five
When a limb or other body part is lost, drastic changes occur in the map.
The brain regions where input from the lost body part was once handled are
taken over by nearby areas. For example, if a person has a hand amputated, the
face-representing area of the cortex that lies nearby can creep into the handrepresenting area. When that happens, the patient feels a referred sensation; a
touch on the face feels like a touch on the hand. So just as political boundaries
between nations can change on a map, the space allocated to a particular body
region can change in the brain, sometimes by as much as two or three centimeters,3 which, in geographic terms, would be something akin to Canada annexing half of Montana.
The brain’s body map undoubtedly has something to do with the phantom
breasts that Myra feels, and reorganization of the map must be related to phantom pain, although no one know exactly how. It’s a chicken-and-egg question.
Does reorganization of the brain map somehow promote the pain? Or do aberrant signals from touch nerves in the area produce both the reorganization and
the pain that goes along with it? Questions persist also about the relationship
of phantom pain to the posttraumatic stress disorder that for so many patients accompanies the loss of a body part. Our most emotional memories are the ones
we store best, so changes in the brain’s limbic system and hippocampus are implicated in phantom pain, too, although no one knows exactly how.
RESEARCHERS CHASING PHANTOMS
University of Montreal researcher Emma Duerden is looking for some of
those answers. She works with the most severe cases of phantom pain. Mostly she
sees patients who have suffered traumatic amputations as a result of an accident.
Some of them lost their limbs in car crashes or in work-related mishaps in which
limbs were caught in moving machinery. “Their lives have entirely changed due
to their chronic pain,” Duerden says. “They have to undergo physical rehabilitation in order to learn how to rebalance their bodies after the loss of the limb,
and they often are in intense pain. Patients most times describe their pain as
burning, or as if their skin is being grated. Some patients limbs feel entirely frozen
and as if clenched in a vise. Duerden says,
The pain affects their sleeping habits and, in conjunction with pain
medications, their memory and attention skills can suffer. They have to
take time off work or school, and in some instances they lose their social networks. . . . The pain, lack of sleep, and physical exhaustion from
using a prosthesis affect every relationship they have in their lives. Some
patients that I have seen were divorced after several years into their new
situation in life. Needless to say, depression can be common among
these individuals. What can compound these feelings is the lack of understanding of others.4
Feeling a Phantom
201
Duerden is one of a phalanx of bright young researchers now investigating
the causes of phantom pain and experimenting with treatments. She’s a doctoral
candidate at the University of Montreal, but her interest in the brain’s organization goes back nearly a decade, when she worked as a research assistant in a
speech pathology laboratory. There she met aphasic patients whose lives had been
turned upside-down by their loss of communication and physical abilities. At the
same time, Duerden was learning about brain-imaging techniques, creating atlases of subcortical structures. She met patients who were having neurosurgery
for Parkinson’s disease and chronic pain, and she experimented with various training regimens that could help them in their recovery. For example, healthy volunteers who train over several weeks can learn to detect increasingly close-spaced
points of contact on their fingertips. As a result, the area of the brain that handles touch input from the finger expands. Duerden thinks findings like those can
help patients with phantom pain.
EXPERIMENTING WITH TREATMENTS
Doctors and researchers have experimented with numerous potential treatments for phantom pain. Some therapies have achieved mixed success, but none
has emerged as a cure, and no factors can predict whether a therapy will work
for an individual patient. Physicians often try medications first. Pain relievers
such as acetaminophen (Tylenol), nonsteroidal antiinflammatories (ibuprofen
and naproxen), and stronger stuff such as various opioids can sometimes help.
Some benefits have been derived from antidepressant drugs, which alter levels
of neurotransmitters in the brain, notably serotonin and norepinephrine.5 Drugless approaches often include massage, hypnosis, biofeedback, acupuncture, and
meditation.
Neurosurgeons have tried their hand at phantom pain relief. They’ve blocked
peripheral nerve signals and injected painkilling agents into the epidural space
of the spine. They’ve tried sympathectomy, a surgical procedure that cuts or destroys a cluster of nerve cell bodies in the spinal cord; rhizotomy, the cutting or
blockage of nerve roots in the spine; and cordotomy, a surgical severing of painconducting fibers in the spinal cord.6 Results have been mixed.
Another potential treatment is the deep brain stimulation procedure sometimes used to help patients with Parkinson’s disease. To effect this treatment, a
battery-operated neurostimulator—similar to a heart pacemaker and about the
size of a stopwatch—is implanted in the brain. The stimulator delivers electrical
impulses to specific areas of the brain, perhaps blocking the abnormal nerve signals that trigger the perception of phantom pain.
Transcutaneous electrical nerve stimulation (TENS) delivers an electrical
stimulus to an area of the skin, activating one category of nerve fiber that may, in
turn, inhibit the activity of pain-signaling fibers. Some theorists explain the effect
as a gate control mechanism: the electrical stimulation closes the gate (through
202
beyond the big five
Five Centuries of Phantoms
The phantom phenomenon is nothing new. In the mid-1500s French surgeon Ambroise Paré treated numerous patients whose limbs were amputated, mostly as a result of gangrene. “Verily it is a thing wondrous strange
and prodigious,” he wrote. “Patients . . . have many months after the cutting
away of the Leg, grievously complained that they yet felt exceeding great
pain of that leg so cut off.”7 Paré was among the first to write about phantom pain; before his innovations of ligating large vessels to staunch blood
flow and applying tourniquets above the site of the amputation, few amputees survived to develop it.8
The philosopher René Descartes used phantoms to argue that the senses
are untrustworthy, unreliable deceivers of the mind and brain:
Many experiences little by little destroyed all the faith which I had
rested in my senses; . . . I have learned from some persons whose
arms and legs have been cut off, that they sometimes seemed to
feel pain in the part which had been amputated, which made me
think I could not be quite certain that it was a certain member
which pained me, even although I felt pain in it.9
The Scottish physician William Porterfield (1696–1771) took a different approach. Rather than questioning his senses, he theorized that his
brain was creating the perception of his own phantom, which he experienced for (apparently) some number of years after his leg was amputated:
I sometimes still feel Pains and Itchings, as if in my Toes, Heel or
Ancle, etc. tho’ it be several Years since my Leg was taken off. . . .
[T]ho’ all our Sensations are Passions or Perceptions produced in
the Mind itself, yet the Mind . . . always considers them as belonging either to the Object, the Organs, or both, but never as
belonging to the Mind itself, in which they truely are. . . . Information must be carried to the Mind, and the Mind must have the
same Sensation, and form the same Judgment concerning it, viz,
that it is at a Distance from it, as if in the Toes, Heel or Ancle, tho’
these have long ago been taken off and removed from that Place
where the Mind places the Sensation.10
American physician Silas Weir Mitchell (1829–1914) wrote extensively
about phantom sensation and pain, his knowledge coming largely from his
experiences at Turner’s Lane Hospital in Philadelphia. There Mitchell
Feeling a Phantom
203
treated soldiers who lost limbs in the American Civil War. Mitchell also
encountered phantom breast pain, and even cases of perceived erections
experienced by men who lost their penises.
In his book Injuries of Nerves and Their Consequences, published in
1872, he wrote, “Nearly every man who loses a limb carries about with him
a constant or inconsistent phantom of the missing member, a sensory ghost
of that much of himself, and sometimes a most inconvenient presence,
faintly felt at times, but ready to be called up to his perception by a blow,
a touch, or a change of the wind.”11 Among ninety cases of amputation,
Mitchell found only four in which phantom sensation was absent. All others felt the limb was still there, or as one of Mitchell’s patients put it, “If . . .
I should say I am more sure of the leg which ain’t than the one which are,
I guess I should be about correct.”12
Mitchell published several case studies of patients who experienced
phantom sensations, sometime to the detriment of daily activities:
One of my cases attempted, when riding, to pick up his bridle with
the lost hand, while he struck his horse with the other, and was reminded of his mistake by being thrown. Another person, for nearly
a year, tried at every meal to pick up his fork, and was so disturbed
emotionally at the result as frequently to be nauseated, or even to
vomit.13
Despite four hundred years of reports, it was not until 1941 that phantom limb pain gained credence among most medical professionals. In that
year Allan Bailey and Frederick Moersch reported on more than one hundred patients at the Mayo Clinic who either had limbs amputated at the
clinic or came seeking relief from phantom pain. Most reported pain of a
burning, aching, or cramping type; some felt a tight, wirelike band constricting around the phantom. Others described the sensation as crushing,
twisting, grinding, tingling, or tearing. Some felt prickles in the phantom,
while other said the phantom felt numb. Some felt the phantom frozen in
an awkward, painful pose, while others perceived the phantom as moving
of its own accord, often in painful ways.
Bailey and Moersch employed more than fifteen different treatments,
but none produced more than temporary relief, and the researchers concluded that no single theory could explain phantom pain. Their best guess
(for this was a time when Freud reigned supreme): obsessional neurosis.14
So phantom pain remained a psychological aberration until the 1990s,
when researchers discovered the reorganization of the somatosensory cortex
after amputation.
204
beyond the big five
the spinal cord leading to the brain) that phantom pain impulses would normally
travel through.
Another promising approach is mirror-box therapy. The idea is to fool the
brain into seeing the phantom as real, moving it at will, and experiencing (perhaps) a concomitant reduction in pain. Here’s how the mirror box works. Suppose the left hand has been amputated. Watching the movements of the normal
right hand in a mirror, the patient “sees” the missing left hand moving. Mirror
training involves trying to perform movements with the amputated limb while
viewing the movement of the normal limb. Thus, the mirror tricks the brain into
seeing normal movement in the limb that isn’t there, while the brain is sending
signals in an attempt to elicit such movement in the phantom.
The trick seems to work in many cases. In 2007 researchers reported a trial
in which twenty-two patients with phantom limb pain either practiced with a
mirror, or did the same practice but with a covered mirror, or closed their eyes
and imaged movement of the phantom. The patients practiced for only fifteen
minutes daily; they reported their pain over four weeks. Mirror training reduced
the number and duration of pain episodes and the intensity of the pain for all
members of the mirror-training group. No such improvement occurred among
the other patients. Nine patients from the other groups switched to mirror therapy, and eight of them noted improvement in four weeks.15 Why? No one knows,
but it’s possible that visual signals might override the perception of pain. In essence,
the brain might be fooled into thinking, “My limb is moving normally, so it must
not hurt.” A similar approach is employed in various virtual reality therapies that
seek to convince the brain that the limb is still a functioning limb.
“Therapies such as mirror-box training and virtual reality are all based on the
concept that the brain, once subserved with an active representation of the missing limb, will be able to harness control over the pain,” Duerden says. “Largely,
these theories are consistent with the idea that the brain’s body maps have become distorted and that active ‘use’ of the phantom will increase the missing
limb’s representation in the brain, a sort of reverse back to the original organization.” Duerden hopes to develop other training experiments to coax the brain
into reorganizing its body region maps. She’s planning to integrate training with
neuroimaging techniques, allowing patients to view and perhaps control the representation of their brain’s body maps.
Myra is not a candidate for mirror-box therapy and she won’t be working with
Duerden. Her phantom breasts are persistent but not physically painful. Myra
lives with other phantoms that induce pains of a different sort. Says my therapist
friend Dr. P.:
For many women phantom breast pain is a haunting. This haunting urges
them to look at loss, to explore grief, and to weave together the totality
of all felt sensations, pain, and feelings. Myra experienced many losses
Feeling a Phantom
long before her breasts were removed. Her father left her, her mother
left her, then one boyfriend after another left her, too. Her first husband
had many affairs. She left him. Her second husband, Carl, suffered from
posttraumatic stress disorder; he was never emotionally available to Myra.
Nevertheless, after Carl died, Myra had a mounting feeling of anxiety.
Her doctors recommended counseling. On her first session she said, ‘I
have always been proper. This is the first time I am not going to be
proper and this is the only place I can imagine doing that. I am going to
show all my anger.’ Therapy is helping Myra be the person she wants
to be rather than the person she felt she had to be. She uses her phantom sensations to remember all of who she is. She uses them to let go of
things she cannot change. The haunting inspires her.
205
Chapter 29
Probabilities and
the Paranormal
Rate Your Belief in the Paranormal
Using a five-point scale, where
1 = strongly disagree,
2 = disagree,
3 = uncertain,
4 = agree,
5 = strongly agree,
respond to each of the following statements:
1. The human spirit lives on after the human body dies.
2. Some people can use their minds to lift themselves or others into the
air (levitation).
3. The mind or spirit can leave the body and travel (astral projection).
4. Some psychics can accurately predict the future.
5. Horoscopes predict the future.
6. The spirits of the dead can come back as ghosts.
7. Witchcraft exists, and it can be a powerful force for good or evil.
8. Some people have a lot of good luck. Some people have a lot of bad luck.
9. Some places are haunted by ghosts.
206
Probabilities and the Paranormal
207
10. Some numbers are lucky. Some are unlucky.
11. The spirit can be reincarnated (reborn) into another body at another
time.
12. Some mediums can call the spirits of the dead and entice those spirits
to speak or materialize.
13. It is possible to be possessed by a demon.
14. Some people have the power to move objects using only their minds
(telekinesis or psychokinesis).
15. Some people can read other people’s minds.
16. Some psychics can use extrasensory perception to find lost objects or
solve crimes.
17. Some people can communicate just with their thoughts (telepathy).
18. Some people can heal themselves or others of disease or injury using
only their mental or spiritual powers.
19. Some people know what’s going to happen before it happens (precognition).
20. Dreams can predict the future.
Rate your score as follows:
20 to 45: You are a diehard skeptic. You reject most, if not all, paranormal beliefs. The lower your score, the less your tolerance for what you
regard as delusional thinking. Have you considered moonlighting as a professional debunker?
46 to 66: You’re not a staunch believer in the paranormal, but you’re
not a disbeliever, either. You sit on the fence, perhaps agreeing with Hamlet: “There are more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, than are dreamt
of in your philosophy.”
67 to 100: You are a believer in paranormal phenomena. Scores between 67 and 80 show that you question sometimes, but not often. Above
80, and you’re a believer without reservation. The world of the paranormal
is very real for you. Doubts are out of the question.
obel Laureate Charles Richet died in 1935, but were he alive today, I’m
guessing he would score somewhere around 65 on my paranormal propensity quiz. The author of Thirty Years of Psychical Research,1 Richet
coined the term métapsychique from the Greek meaning “beyond the soul.” The
term has been translated into English as metapsychics, and Richet spent a lifetime trying to get other scientists to take seriously the clairvoyance, telekinesis,
and telepathy that so fascinated him.
N
208
beyond the big five
METAPSYCHICS MEETS SCIENCE
Richet became a respected scientist not because of his psychical research,
but in spite of it. The Frenchman was a true polymath. He followed in the footsteps of Pasteur and Lavoisier, studying lactic fermentation and oxidative metabolism. He did groundbreaking work on the chemical action of gastric enzymes.
He investigated the effects of anesthetics on reflexes. He studied the resistance of
bacteria to metallic poisons and the mechanisms by which animals regulate their
body temperature, including panting in dogs. He measured oxygen conservation
in diving ducks and was the first to postulate the action of neurotransmitters. Not
to limit his scientific endeavors to physiology, he designed a monoplane that flew
before the Wright Brothers did. Richet won the Nobel Prize in 1913 for his discovery of anaphylaxis, the extreme allergic reaction to a foreign protein that results
from previous exposure to it. He did not confine his erudition to science. He
wrote many poems, plays, and novels, some of which achieved critical acclaim
in literary and dramatic circles.2
But at the end of his life, as in his early years, Richet was fascinated above
all else with metapsychics. As a young man, he became proficient in hypnotism
and used it to effect temporary “cures” for various maladies suffered by some of
his friends. While still serving his medical residency, he became fascinated with
clairvoyance, and he published an article on the subject in a nonscientific journal. In his article, he applied the mathematics of probability to experiments in
which a person in one room guesses which playing card has been turned over by
a person in another room. The better-than-expected findings of such experiments
could not be attributed to chance, Richet concluded, and neither could instances
of precognition, in which future events had been predicted by individuals gifted
with extrasensory perception.
In the final decade of his life, Richet devoted himself solely to what his peers
derided as spiritualism and the occult, but Richet rejected any notion that supernatural forces were at work. “The terms ‘supernatural’ and ‘supernormal’ . . . are
. . . both inadmissible, for there can be nothing in the universe but the natural
and the normal,” Richet wrote.3 He asserted that the brain is the source of extrasensory perception in all its forms, making telepathy, telekinesis, and even the
materialization of spirits nothing more—and nothing less!—than a sixth sense.
While Richet had little doubt that the human mind had such capabilities, he
attributed them to natural laws, laws yet to be elucidated through the methods
of scientific inquiry. “The facts of metapsychics are neither more nor less mysterious than the phenomena of electricity, of fertilization, and of heat. They are
not so usual; that is the whole difference. But it is absurd to decline to study them
because they are unusual,” he wrote.4
Probabilities and the Paranormal
209
A Short Course on Probability
One of the problems with the “sixth sense” is that, if it exists at all, it’s not
a big thing. It’s a small, subtle phenomenon, and numbers get in the way.
To look at the problem in a simple fashion, consider tossing coins. With
one coin, the probability of heads or tails is easy to figure out: 1⁄2. The
chance of a head exactly equals the chance of a tail. What is the chance of
tossing five heads in a row? Since the probability of a head is the same with
every toss, the correct answer is (1⁄2)5 or 1⁄2 × 1⁄2 × 1⁄2 × 1⁄2 × 1⁄2, or 1/32. So,
on average, in every series of 32 tosses of five, five heads will come up once.
But you can perform 32 tosses of five each and never get five heads. Or
you might get all heads several times. The only way to get a number that
comes out very, very close to the mathematical probability of 1/32 is to toss
the coins perhaps 32,000,000 times. Then you’ll get 1,000,000 five-head
sequences, or maybe you’ll get 1,000,003, or 999,997. Chance operates even
in big numbers.
Now, let’s say you sand one side of the coin so that you dramatically
alter its tossing properties. Now, the chance of a head is not 1⁄2 but 1⁄3. The
probability of five heads in a row is now (1⁄3)5 or 1/243. That’s a big change,
or what statisticians call a large effect size. If you tossed a series of five coins
for 500 trials, you’d nearly always notice a difference between 1/32 and
1/243, something on the order of 15 versus 2 in that many tosses.
But let’s say that you changed the tossing properties of the coin only
very slightly, reducing the probability of a head from 1⁄2 to 1/2.01. Now the
probability of five in a row drops from 1 in 32 to 1 in 32.8. Over many, many
trials, you might be able to pick up that difference and find a statistically
significant factor operating over and above chance. But it would take thousands, maybe millions. In a small number such as 500, the random fluctuations of chance would probably mask that subtle change in probabilities.
Thus, a large effect size is easily found in a small number of trials. But
if the effect size is small, it takes very big numbers to find it. In statistical
terms, the power of the test is too low, and low power may explain why senses
like ESP or telepathy—if they exist—are so difficult to demonstrate experimentally. The experiments simply aren’t powerful enough to find them.
METAPSYCHIC RESEARCH TODAY
Richet, were he alive today, would be dismayed to find that his plea for more
attention to metapsychic research has largely been ignored. Scientific studies on
210
beyond the big five
telekinesis and telepathy are scarce, and those investigators who conduct them
often operate on the fringes of academe. Nevertheless, some efforts have been
made, but few of them have yielded evidence strong enough to change the minds
of those who scored high or low on my paranormal quiz.
Some studies attribute the perception of psychic anomalies to suggestibility
on the part of observers. In one study, British researchers staged a fake séance in
which an actor said that a table levitated. Later, one third of the participants
in the séance reported that the table had risen, although in truth it had not. The
reports of observed telekinesis ran higher among believers in the paranormal
than among self-identified skeptics.5 In another experiment, the same researchers
showed participants a videotape of a fake psychic placing a bent key on a table.
In some recorded segments, subjects heard the psychic declare that the key was
continuing to bend; in other recorded segments, no such observation was stated.
Those who heard the suggestions were more likely to report that the key continued to bend—and that result was statistically significant (see sidebar, A Short
Course on Probability). What’s more, those observers who reported that the key
continued to bend were significantly more confident of their recall than were
those who reported no bending. Those who “saw” the continued bending were
also less likely to recall that the fake psychic had said anything about the bending key.6
Other researchers have used brain-wave recordings and brain-imaging
technologies to investigate metapsychic occurrences and beliefs. Scientists at
Harvard studied sixteen pairs of emotionally connected individuals (five couples,
four close roommate/friend pairs, two identical twin pairs, one mother–son pair,
and one pair of sisters). One member of each pair was classed as the “receiver,”
and fMRI images of his or her brain were captured while the other member of
the pair, the “sender,” sat in another room, viewing a photograph. The sender
attempted by whatever means possible to communicate the photograph to the
receiver. Inside the fMRI scanner, the receiver saw two photographs and pressed a
button to indicate which one the sender was transmitting. The photographs were
varied in their emotional content and in the order of their presentation.
Out of 3,687 recorded responses, the receivers correctly guessed the sender’s
photograph 1,842 times (50.0 percent). None of the receivers did any better than
chance in guessing the correct photograph. Although the emotional content of
the photographs had the expected effect on patterns of brain activation, no differences showed up when transmitted or nontransmitted images were compared
or selected. “These findings are the strongest evidence yet obtained against the
existence of paranormal mental phenomena,” the investigators concluded.7
While only a little research is being done on paranormal phenomena per se,
a great deal more is being conducted on people who believe in such phenomena. Some researchers have hypothesized that believers and disbelievers differ in
some measure of cognitive competence or critical thinking, but investigations
Probabilities and the Paranormal
211
The Other Side of the Coin!
Readers who scored above 70 on the quiz may want to invest in Georges
Charpak and Henri Broch’s book Debunked! ESP, Telekinesis, and Other
Pseudoscience (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2002). A Frenchman like Richet, Charpak won a Nobel Prize in physics in 1992 for the
invention and development of particle detectors. Unlike Richet, Charpak
gives no credence to anything remotely connected to metapsychics. The
book reveals how, for pleasure or profit, fakers can amaze observers with feats
of telepathy, telekinesis, and precognition. It’s all simple science, Charpak
and Broch argue—and in that they agree with Richet.
have produced mixed results. Tests of academic achievement can’t predict belief
status, nor can concrete variables such as grade-point average or years of formal
education. However, several studies have found that believers are more likely
to underestimate the probability of a chance occurrence and less accepting
of coincidence as a logical explanation than are nonbelievers. Some evidence
suggests also that believers perform worse on tests of syllogistic reasoning than do
skeptics.8 (Examples of a syllogism: Is this series logical? All ducks are birds. All
mergansers are ducks. Therefore, all mergansers are birds. Is this one? All ducks
are birds. All mergansers are birds. Therefore, all mergansers are ducks.)
Under the auspices of the KEY Institute for Brain-Mind Research in Zurich,
Switzerland, an international team of researchers investigated whether believers
in the paranormal are more right-brain dominant than nonbelievers. The researchers recorded resting EEGs for strong believers and disbelievers. Compared
to disbelievers, believers showed more right-side sources of certain types of brain
waves and fewer left-right differences in other types, a finding that the researchers
interpreted as evidence of greater right-brain activation in believers. The right
hemisphere, they noted, is the seat of “coarse rather than focused semantic processing [which] may favor the emergence of ‘loose’ and ‘uncommon’ associations.”9 Other researchers are more charitable in their interpretation of the
right-brain dominance findings. They argue that right hemisphere overactivation
may explain why believers are better able to find meaningful connections between experiences and events, resulting in what the scientists termed “individual
differences in guessing behavior.”10
I suspect Richet would object to the reduction of his beloved metapsychics
to idiosyncratic guessing. “Everything of which we are ignorant appears improbable, but the improbabilities of today are the elementary truths of tomorrow,”
Richet wrote.11 Only a psychic can predict where paranormal research will take
us in the next century. Or maybe not.
Chapter 30
Time
Body Clock
What have I been missing?
While staring at artificial time
Modern, civilized and disarming
Buzzers and beepers, alarms and reminders
Training me to ignore the subtle
Clock face down, cell phone off
Computer off, TV off, light switch off
No calendars, weather reports, GPS data
Stop screaming through my days
Release my nights from bondage
Wonder
Without plug-ins
Sighs of knowing
Without utilities
Trusting self and surroundings
I will feel again, in my blood
The sunrise
The moonrise
The Milky Way
Sundogs and clouds
212
Time
213
I will feel again, in my bones
The smell of spring
The taste of fall
The touch of winter
The passion of summer
I will feel again, in my soul
Within the cells of my being
What I have missed
And the reunion with life
Will be joyous
—Kim McKee
he poet Kim McKee is right. If we unplug our alarm clocks, drain our
cell phones of their charge, and deactivate our beepers and buzzers, we
find joy in reuniting with human experience. Try this. For one week (if
you can stand it and you have time away from work or school), go to bed when
you are sleepy. Rise when you wake naturally and feel rested. Eat when you are
hungry. Drink when you are thirsty. Ignore the clock. Don’t answer the phone.
Turn off its ringer if you can. Put your cell phone, Blackberry, and Bluetooth in
a drawer. Put your laptop in the closet and put a sheet over your desktop computer. Turn clocks toward the wall. Turn off your electric lights.
Live in tune with life’s natural rhythm and feel, if only for once in your life,
what it means to be in touch with your time sense.
Time sense? Yes, you have one, and I argue that it’s as powerful as vision,
hearing, touch, or the chemical senses in shaping our lives. While we’ve been
busy developing technology to replace or overpower it, we’ve subverted our time
sense less than we might believe. We still must sleep, though we take pills to prevent it. We still lie awake, when we wish we wouldn’t—but then we take pills for
that, too. Some people argue that we would do well to abolish the body’s natural sense of time. I argue the opposite. In these days of all-night supermarkets and
twenty-four-hour banking, I believe the sense of time is the most important brain
sense of all.
T
HOW THE BODY AND THE BRAIN KEEP TIME
The body and the brain have several built-in, automatic, self-regulating
systems for measuring and keeping time. One such system is the organic “stopwatch” that lets the brain judge (more or less accurately) when five minutes have
passed. Other timekeeping systems regulate monthly changes (for example, the
menstrual cycle in females) and seasonal cycles (which can cause some people
to feel depressed in the winter months, when light levels are low).
214
beyond the big five
The most important clock for timing sleep and waking is the twenty-fourhour, circadian (meaning “about one day”) clock in the brain. The circadian
clock is centered in the suprachiasmatic nucleus (SCN). That cluster of cells—
smaller than a pencil eraser—is located in the hypothalamus of the brain, just
above where the optic nerves cross. When the SCN is absent or damaged, animals lose their daily rhythms. If they receive “transplants” of SCN cells, they
regain their daily periodicity.
Signals from the SCN travel to several brain regions, including the pineal
gland. The pineal secretes the sleep hormone melatonin. During the day, the
SCN blocks melatonin release. In the evening, the blocking action subsides, and
the pineal releases melatonin, usually about two hours before a person’s habitual
bedtime. Melatonin prepares the body for sleep. It induces a feeling of drowsiness and trips the “sleep switch” in another area of the brain.
The SCN uses chemical messengers and nerve impulses to regulate more
than sleeping and waking. It “schedules” rises in blood pressure, heart rate, blood
sugar, and the stress hormone cortisol to coincide with the beginning of the day.
It also regulates the body’s daily temperature cycle. Body temperature rises before
waking, peaks in the afternoon or early evening, and falls to its lowest between
2 and 5 in the morning. Some of the SCN’s daily cycling triggers illness. Its action may be the reason that heart attacks occur more frequently in the morning1
and asthma attacks often come at night.2
The neurons of the SCN do something that no other neurons can do. On
their own—even growing in a laboratory dish—they create cycles of chemical
and electrical activity that correspond to a twenty-four-hour day. Genes control
their timed action. A few of the genes that regulate cells of the SCN have been
studied. In mammals, some of the best known are called clock, bmal, period, and
cryptochrome. Those genes switch on and off in rhythmic cycles, giving the neurons of the SCN their timekeeping ability.
One such rhythmic cycle is produced by the interaction of the period and
cryptochrome genes. They cause the cells to make proteins, nicknamed “per” and
“cry,” that are self-regulating. When the levels of per and cry become high enough,
they “switch off” the action of period and cryptochrome, the same genes that cause
their production. Period and cryptochrome are, in turn, switched on by the action
of clock and bmal.3 Thus, in a repeating daily cycle, genes switch on and off, creating a twenty-four-hour cycle of protein production. In this way, a molecular clock
drives a cellular clock that, in turn, drives an entire organism.
The circadian clock of the SCN needs no external cues to make it run. It
works automatically. It sticks to a twenty-four-hour day despite changes in periods
of light and dark. Volunteers who stay in continuous light or dark for many days
nevertheless maintain a twenty-four-hour cycle of sleeping and waking. Even under the influence of large amounts of caffeine, which many coffee drinkers ex-
Time
215
The Bowel’s Body Clock
Virtually all organs in the body have their own “clocks” and operate in concert with them. Heart rate, metabolism, digestion, breathing—all cycle daily.
The need to eliminate solid wastes, for example, is suppressed at night.
It starts up again in the morning, under the direction of the SCN. The
communication between the SCN and body organs depends on chemical
messengers. No one knows for sure all the chemicals that keep body actions such as bowel movements on schedule, but one likely candidate for
at least part of the job is the small protein prokineticin 2 (PK2).4 It is not a
part of the clock itself, but it communicates clock time to other parts of the
brain and body.5 One of its jobs is to regulate the daily rhythms of movements in the stomach and intestines. That’s why bowel movements are regular, morning events and why shiftworkers and jet travelers often suffer
from constipation.
perience, the SCN stays accurate to within 1 percent.6 That 1 percent is a small,
but important, difference. It gives the SCN system enough flexibility that
changes in the light-dark cycle of the environment can “reset” the clock.
RESETTING THE SCN
Fine-tuning of the SCN happens every day, so that the internal clock stays
in synchrony with the earth’s rotation and with the changing seasons. The reset
relies on nerve impulses that travel from the eyes to the brain. Extremely important in this process are the retinal ganglionic cells (RGCs) in the eyes. There
are only about two thousand such cells, compared to millions of the visual cells,
rods, and cones. RCGs are actually extremely insensitive to light, but when they
are activated, they produce a big signal that goes directly to the brain.7 The signal results from a chemical change in the pigment melanopsin, which is a rarer
pigment than other light-sensitive pigments in the eyes. Impulses from RGCs
travel to the SCN, where they cause the body clock to reset.8
For several years, scientists thought that melanopsin was the only system that
reset the circadian system, but recent evidence suggests that the circadian clock
resets itself even when the melanopsin system is not operating. Researchers in
Oregon showed that RGCs receive light information from rods and cones, the
ordinary cells of vision. Light triggers impulses in RGCs when rods and cones
release certain neurotransmitters, some of the same ones that operate in the
216
beyond the big five
visual system of the brain. How RGCs combine the different inputs to reset the
circadian clock is not known.9
SLEEPING AND WAKING
The drive to sleep cannot be overcome, despite our best efforts. The brain
induces it, and—happily, I’d say—we are powerless to resist it, no matter how
alluring our technologies. Certain parts of the brain trigger and maintain wakefulness. Other parts put us to sleep and keep us that way. The brain’s “sleep
switch” is the ventrolateral preoptic (VLPO) nucleus. This grape-sized cluster of
cells lies in the front of the hypothalamus, not far from the SCN. “The VLPO
turns out the lights in the brain and lets it go to sleep,” says Clifford Saper, a neurologist at Harvard Medical School.10
Like all neurons, the nerve cells of the VLPO do their job chemically. One
of the most important inhibitory neurotransmitters is gamma-aminobutyric acid
(GABA). The nerve cells of the VLPO release GABA. Molecules of GABA bind
to neurons in another part of the hypothalamus, the tuberomammillary nucleus
(TMN). When the TMN is active, the neurotransmitter histamine in the TMN
promotes wakefulness. GABA from the VLPO shuts that system down. Without
signals from the TMN saying, “Stay awake,” sleep begins. The VLPO has no
GABA receptors, so the inhibitory neurotransmitter doesn’t affect it.11
The brain’s main “stay-awake” centers are located in the hypothalamus and
the brainstem. A complex cocktail of neurotransmitters regulates them. The neurotransmitters include acetylcholine, norepinephrine, serotonin, and histamine.
Some scientists think another neurotransmitter, hypocretin (also called orexin),
is the main chemical that pushes the “awake button” in the hypothalamus.12
Brain cells that produce hypocretin are normally active during waking and inactive during sleep. Without hypocretin, we’d stay asleep all the time. When it’s
produced, however, we are awake.13 Another awake chemical is corticotropinreleasing hormone (CRH). It promotes the awake state and may be the reason
we wake naturally, without the help of an alarm clock.14
WHEN THE TIME SENSE FAILS
Shifts in the body’s daily rhythms can disrupt work and play. One disorder of
the circadian clock is delayed sleep phase syndrome (DSPS). People with DSPS
can’t fall asleep as early as their jobs or social lives demand, and they have trouble rising as early as they need to. They toss and turn for hours trying to fall asleep,
but sleep won’t come until the early morning hours. Once asleep, the person
with DSPS sleeps normally, but rising when the alarm clock rings is difficult.
Advanced sleep phase syndrome (ASPS) is the opposite of DSPS. The individual with ASPS feels sleepy earlier than most people do, typically between 7
Time
217
Does Time Slow Down During a Crisis?
Once, while driving on an icy road in Colorado, my car spun through a
full 360-degree circle on a hill with traffic coming in both directions. At
the time, the spin seemed to occur in slow motion. Minutes passed, my
brain told me, during that rotation, although in truth only seconds went
by. Did my time sense truly slow during that traumatic event? Researchers
at the California Institute of Technology say no. To reach that conclusion,
the investigators suspended twenty brave volunteers from a tether and timed
them as they dropped thirty-one meters (more than one hundred feet) into
a safety net. The volunteers experienced no change in their perception of
time but, after the fall, they estimated their drop time as 36 percent longer
than it actually was. It’s the richer encoding of the memory of the event
that distorts the brain’s time sense, the researchers say, perhaps because the
amygdala—one of the brain’s emotion-processing centers—plays a major
role in forming memories of emotionally charged events.15
and 9 p.m. Early morning waking may occur between 2 and 5 a.m. Sleep in
between is normal. ASPS is much rarer than DSPS. It occurs most often in the
elderly. The disorder may result from a reduced capacity to respond to daily cues
that reset the SCN. One form of ASPS is inherited from one parent. The gene
for it is located on chromosome 2.16
Another circadian disorder is described simply as irregular sleep–wake patterns. Sleeping and waking occur at unpredictable times of the day and night, in
episodes of no more than four hours. This disorder is rare. It is usually seen only
in people with long-term illnesses who require months of bed rest or those with
brain injuries or diseases that damage the SCN.
A fourth circadian disorder is the non-twenty-four-hour sleep-wake disorder.
It is extremely rare, affecting only those few individuals whose body clocks do
not operate on a twenty-four-hour cycle. Their body clocks are said to be “freerunning.” They typically delay sleep and wake times by one or two hours daily.
People who are totally blind are most likely to develop this disorder, affecting
perhaps as many as three in every four.17
Since everyone has occasional problems getting to sleep or staying asleep,
disorders in the sleep cycle are diagnosed only if the problem persists for several
months. Sleep interventions are used to treat the condition, the goal being to
reset the SCN. Chronotherapy, a scheduled exposure to bright lights at certain
times, is one such intervention. It uses light to reset the SCN and thus change
sleeping and waking times. Doses of the sleep chemical melatonin—a hormone
normally produced at night and in the dark—can also help in some cases.18
218
beyond the big five
In the end, perhaps all of us are “phase disrupted.” We ignore our body clocks
or attempt to destroy them. We stay up too late, get up too early, try to pack our
days and nights with activities on the weekdays, only to crash and burn on the
weekends. Fighting the brain’s natural time sense robs us of our youth. It makes
us old before our time. Resist that. Follow the poet’s advice. Feel again, in the
cells of your being, your brain’s time sense—indeed, all your senses. The reunion
will be joyous.
Appendix: The Brain and the
Nervous System—A Primer
The point for me isn’t to develop a map of the brain, but
to understand how it works, how the different regions coordinate their activity together, how the simple firing of
neurons and shuttling around of neurotransmitters leads
to thoughts, laughter, feelings of profound joy and sadness,
and how all these, in turn, can lead us to create lasting,
meaningful works of art. These are the functions of the
mind, and knowing where they occur doesn’t interest me
unless the where can tell us something about how and why.
An assumption of cognitive neuroscience is that it can.
—Daniel J. Levitin1
ou may have turned right past this newspaper headline: “International
Team Creates First High-Res Map of the Human Cerebral Cortex.” You
may have been interested in sports or politics or the weather that day, and
that story didn’t seem to have much to do with your everyday life. But in truth,
that map captures everything about life as you experience it. The cerebral cortex is the outer layer of the brain, and it’s responsible for just about everything
you think, feel, say, and know. The map mentioned in that headline shows how
neurons in the cortex communicate in highly complicated networks.2
This appendix does not trace all these connections; rather, it summarizes
some of the basics of the brain’s structure and function. It describes how the brain
maintains its two-way communication with all parts of the body. It also provides
Y
219
220
Appendix
Brain-Imaging Techniques
Scientists have several ways of looking at the brain, but ordinary x-rays aren’t
of much use. They can’t reveal depth, so they don’t show much detail in
the overlapping, soft structures of the brain. The computed tomography
(CT) scanner, introduced in the 1970s, was the first technology to open the
door to brain-imaging research.
As the CT scanner rotates, measured amounts of x-rays travel along a
narrow beam. As the beam passes through, the brain absorbs more or less
of the radiation depending on the density of the tissue. Detectors convert
the rays that pass through into electronic signals that are transmitted to a
computer. The computer calculates the difference between what went in
and what came out. From this comparison, it draws pictures of thin “slices”
of the brain. It then puts the slices together into a three-dimensional image
and projects it on a television screen.
Another way to look inside the skull is magnetic resonance imaging
(MRI). An MRI scanner is a tube that is really nothing more than a powerful magnet. The magnet causes the hydrogen atoms in the brain’s water
molecules to line up in one direction. When the atoms flip back to their
original state, they emit a weak radio signal. The speed of the signal depends
on how dense the tissue is. From the signals, a computer can create an image. As far as we know, MRI is perfectly safe. There seem to be no health
hazards associated with the magnetism it uses.
A related procedure is functional MRI (fMRI). It shows not only structures but also the organ in action. Suppose a part of the brain is at work on
a problem. More blood flows to that area. The increased oxygen changes
the radio signal from that area. Thus, fMRI can show which part of the brain
does a certain job.
Positron emission tomography (PET), introduced in the 1980s, can do
that, too. The subject is injected with a radioactive isotope. (Isotopes are
atoms of an element that differ in their number of neutrons.) As it travels
through the body, the isotope emits positively charged electrons, or positrons,
which collide with negatively charged electrons in the body. When the
particles destroy one another, they release gamma rays. PET equipment
detects the gamma rays, and a computer turns the data into a colored map
of “where the action is.”
Another useful brain-imaging technique is magnetoencephalography
(MEG). It records magnetic fields produced by the living brain without any
interference from the skull or scalp tissue. These fields are extremely small,
but MEG can determine their location to within two to three millimeters
in less than one one-thousandth of a second.
Appendix
221
Another promising new technology is diffusion MRI technology, a noninvasive scanning technique that estimates how nerve fibers “hook up” in
the brain based on different rates of the diffusion of water molecules. One
form of this method, diffusion spectrum imaging (DSI), can capture the
angles of multiple fibers crossing in a single location. The technique has
been used to map the trajectories of millions of neural fibers that course
through the hills and valleys of the brain’s surface.3
some diagrams to help interested readers locate various structures and regions in
the brain that are mentioned in some of the previous chapters.
BRAIN STRUCTURE
Your brain contains about 100 billion nerve cells, or neurons.4 A fissure runs
down the middle of the brain, from front to back, dividing it into two hemispheres, the right and the left. The left hemisphere contains nearly 200 million
more neurons than the right.5 The two hemispheres control opposite sides of the
body, so when you lift your left leg, it’s your right brain that sends the command.
Between the hemispheres lies the corpus callosum. This band of about 300 million nerve fibers carries messages between the two hemispheres and coordinates
conscious thought, perception, and action.6
The hemispheres are made of a mixture of gray matter—which is actually
pink in the living brain—and white matter. The gray matter is composed primarily of the bodies of neurons. It’s found mostly in the brain’s outer layer, the
cerebral cortex, which is only about one quarter of an inch (six millimeters)
thick.7 The white matter lies beneath the cortex. It’s made mostly of axons, which
are thin projections from the cell bodies of neurons. Axons carry messages away
from the bodies of neurons, so they are important when neurons “communicate”
with one another. The fibers of the corpus callosum are the white matter of axons.
They are white because the insulating protein myelin surrounds them.
Most of the brain’s cells are not neurons. They are glial cells. Somewhere
between one and five trillion glial cells protect and support the neurons of the
two hemispheres.8 The different types of glial cells include the following:
•
•
•
Oligodendrocytes, which form protective sheaths around the axons of
neurons
Satellite cells, which surround the cell bodies of neurons
Neuroglia, which guide the path of growing neurons during fetal development
222
Appendix
Spotlight on Glial Cells
Once considered supporting actors who never got starring roles, glial cells
are now coming into the research limelight. And, it turns out, while the
leading actors, the sensory neurons, often get all the credit, it’s the humble
glial cells that are, in fact, delivering a star performance. Researchers at
Rockefeller University are working with sensory organs in the humble nematode, C. elegans (see Chapter 5). Those organs contain both glial cells and
neurons. To see what the glial cells do, the scientists removed them and observed the outcomes. The loss of glia affected the structure of the sensory
neurons. They shriveled in size and lost their treelike branches. They also
lost their ability to respond to stimuli. Normally, nematodes find a spot
that is neither too hot nor too cold, but the glia-less animals just kept crawling toward warmer and warmer regions. They couldn’t discriminate odors,
either. Looking for a molecular explanation for those changes, the researchers found a protein, FIG-1 that is manufactured in the glial cells
of the nematode’s sense organ. When it’s present, sensory neurons form
properly and work correctly. FIG-1 resembles a human protein called thrombospondin, which suggests glial cells may play some of the same roles in
humans as in nematodes.9
Another important type of glial cells is the microglia. These cells constantly
extend microscopic “arms” into surrounding brain tissue where they clean out
dead cells and check for damage. They spring into action—manufacturing disease-fighting chemicals—when the brain is injured or infected. Also important
are the astrocytes, or astroglia. Scientists once believed that astroglia merely provide nutrients, support, and insulation for neurons, but recent research suggests
they do much more. They “instruct” new, unspecialized brain cells, “teaching”
them what kind of mature neuron to become. They also help regulate the transmission of nerve impulses and the formation of connections between brain cells.10
BRAIN REGIONS
The brain has three main regions: the hindbrain, midbrain, and forebrain
(Figure 1). Each has its own specialized structures.
The hindbrain includes the upper part of the spinal cord, the lower part of
the brainstem, and the cerebellum. The spinal cord is a large bundle of nerve
Appendix
223
Figure 1
fibers enclosed within the vertebrae of the backbone. It carries messages between
the brain and the rest of the body. The brainstem regulates heartbeat, breathing,
blood pressure, and reflexes such as coughing, sneezing, swallowing, and hiccupping. Just above the brainstem lies the cerebellum. It coordinates muscle
actions and maintains balance. It controls muscle tone and posture. The memories of learned activities that become automatic, such as riding a bicycle or driving a car, are stored in the cerebellum.
The uppermost part of the brainstem is the midbrain. It controls some reflex
(automatic) actions. The midbrain also initiates voluntary movements of the eyes.
An injury of the midbrain brings about unconsciousness or coma.
Toward the front and top of the head lies the forebrain, which includes the
“thinking” brain, or cerebrum. The cerebrum has a thin covering called the cerebral cortex. This part of the brain looks bumpy and wrinkled. Its “hills” are called
gyri; the “valleys” are sulci. The extensive wrinkling and folding serve a purpose.
They increase the brain’s surface area while packing more neurons in less space.
The cerebral cortex contains two thirds of the 100 billion neurons in the brain
and nearly three quarters of its 100 trillion neuronal connections.11 In this thin
layer lie the neurons that process sensory perception, voluntary movement, conscious thought, purpose, and personality (Figure 2).
Figure 2
Appendix
225
Figure 3
In the forebrain, under the cerebrum, lies a group of structures collectively
called the limbic system. The limbic system includes the hypothalamus, thalamus,
hippocampus, amygdala, and other structures. These structures govern emotions
ranging from love and compassion to violence and aggression. They also play various roles in motivation, behavior, and some involuntary functions. The hypothalamus, for example, controls thirst, blood sugar levels, hunger, and body temperature. Near the hypothalamus lies the thalamus. It acts as “central dispatch,” sorting
through the messages that come into the brain via the nerves of the spinal cord
and sending them to the appropriate higher brain centers for action (Figure 3).
LOBES OF THE CORTEX
The cortex has four lobes (Figure 4):
•
•
Frontal, under the forehead toward the top of the head
Parietal, at the crown of the head
226
Appendix
Figure 4
•
•
Occipital, at the back of the head just above the cerebellum
Temporal, along the side of the head behind the eyes and above the ears
The frontal lobe is the largest. It’s where most planning, decision making,
and purposeful behavior begin. People with damaged frontal lobes can’t adapt
to new situations or understand complex ideas. The frontal lobe connects with
the seat of emotions, the limbic system. Much of your awareness of danger comes
from your frontal lobe as it processes signals from the brain’s fear centers deep
in the limbic system. At the back of the frontal lobe lies the brain’s motor area,
where voluntary movement is controlled. Broca’s area in the frontal lobe transforms thoughts into words.
In the parietal lobes the body processes the sensory information it obtains
from touch. Neurons there process information about the position of the body in
space, muscles, contact, and pressure. Neurons in the parietal lobe also integrate
movements. The motor cortex is a thin strip that lies at the rear of the frontal lobe.
It handles voluntary movements. The more a body part is used or the more sensory neurons it contains, the more space it gets in the sensorimotor cortex. For example, although your back is larger than your hand, it makes fewer complex movements and is less sensitive, so it gets less space in the parietal lobe than your hand
and fingers, which are sensitive to touch and move in myriad ways (Figure 5).
The occipital lobes lie at the back of the head. Because they handle vision,
they are often called the visual cortex. Information goes from the eyes through a
relay station (the lateral geniculate nucleus) to the visual cortex. Damage to the
occipital lobes can result in blindness even if the rest of the visual system is normal. The figure shows some additional detail on the specialized regions within the
visual system of the occipital lobe (Figure 6). (See Part Four for more information
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Appendix
229
Figure 8
on the functions of the V-designated regions, as well as the lateral geniculate
nucleus and superior colliculus) (Figures 7 and 8).
The temporal lobe performs several functions, including hearing, perception, and some kinds of memory. An area of the temporal cortex about as big as
a poker chip is responsible for hearing. It’s called the auditory cortex. Damage to
the left temporal lobe can cause loss of language (Figure 9).
NAMES OF BRAIN STRUCTURES
One of the problems with learning about the brain is that different researchers
use different names for the same brain structures. For example, the nucleus accumbens may also be called the ventral striatum. It’s a part of a larger structure
called the striatum, which is also called the caudate putamen (if rats are being
studied). In humans, the caudate can be differentiated from the putamen, and
together they are sometimes called the basal ganglia, particularly by people who
study movement. The trouble is that the basal ganglia include other structures
besides the striatum, such as substantia nigra, which is where the dopamineproducing neurons die in people who have Parkinson’s disease. In Chapter 12,
230
Appendix
Figure 9
you read about work on the reward centers of the ventral pallidum. It’s also called
the globus pallidus and is yet another part of the basal ganglia, as shown in Figure 10.
Confused? Don’t feel alone. Even the experts can’t agree, and they sometimes have trouble sharing their results because they are using the same terms
to mean different things or different terms to mean the same thing. That’s up to
the researchers to sort out, and they will—probably over the next decade or two.
In the meantime, the easiest thing for the rest of us to do is use our favorite search
engine to locate diagrams of brain structure, relying on Web sources that come
from governmental and educational institutions (the dot.coms don’t always get
it right), carefully comparing what we find in several sites (even the most academic sources don’t always show the same thing). In the end, it’s important to
remember that brain mapping is still an inexact science, and that the regions
mentioned in this book and elsewhere give us only a general idea of the brain’s
complex architecture.
Appendix
231
Figure 10
THE NERVOUS SYSTEM
The nervous system has two parts: the central nervous system, which consists
of the brain and spinal cord; and the peripheral nervous system, which carries
messages to and from the central nervous system via twelve pairs of cranial nerves
and thirty-one pairs of spinal nerves (Figure 11). The twelve sets of nerve fibers
that connect directly to the brain (not through the spinal cord) are often referred
to by Roman numerals I to XII or by their names (in order): olfactory, optic,
oculomotor, trochlear, trigeminal, abducens, facial, vestibulocochlear, glossopharyngeal, vagus, accessory, and hypoglossal nerves.
Cells in the peripheral nervous system include sensory neurons that respond
to changes in the environment (touch, heat, pain, light, sound vibrations, and
more) and send messages to the brain. Motor neurons are also part of the peripheral nervous system. They cause a muscle to contract or a gland to secrete in
232
Appendix
Figure 11
response to a signal from the central nervous system. Interneurons, a third type
of nerve cell, are the “go-betweens.” In the spinal cord, one of the jobs of interneurons is to pass messages between sensory and motor neurons (Figure 11).
Some peripheral nerves carry sensory information from the body to the brain
via the spinal cord. Others carry signals from the brain to the body, again using
the spinal cord as an “information highway.” Your brain knows when your back
itches because electrical impulses travel along nerve cells to the brain. There the
brain interprets the input as an itch and sends the signal to scratch.
The part of the peripheral nervous system that controls the internal organs
is called the autonomic nervous system. It regulates the heart muscle and the
smooth muscle in internal organs such as the intestine, bladder, and uterus. It
has two divisions. The sympathetic division usually promotes rapid change in
body systems, such as making the heart beat faster when danger looms. The parasympathetic nervous system has the opposite effect; it tends to slow things down.
The two systems work in opposition and allow the body to maintain a healthy
balance.
Appendix
233
NEURONS
In most ways, neurons are the same as other cells in the body. They have a
nucleus, a membrane around the outside, and mitochondria where energy is released to power the cell. (That’s where oxygen is used to “burn” food and get the
energy out.) But neurons have some unique structures. The axon is a single fiber
at one end that carries messages away from the cell body. At the other end of the
neuron are short fibers called dendrites. They receive information from the axons
of other neurons.
Neurons do not touch, so when scientists speak of connections, they don’t
mean actual physical hook-ups. They mean pathways for sending signals. The
transmission of impulses between neurons that do not touch is achieved by chemical messengers.
The axon of one neuron, a dendrite of another, and the gap between them
are collectively called a synapse. Axons release chemicals called neurotransmitters
into the synaptic gap. Neurotransmitters may be amino acids, proteins, or even
gases (Figure 12).
Neurotransmitter molecules move across the gap the same way a drop of food
coloring diffuses in water. When a neurotransmitter molecule reaches the dendrite of another neuron, it attaches to a site called a receptor. Receptors are large
protein molecules that stick out from the membrane. They have a particular shape
that fits only the neurotransmitter they receive. Think of a lock and key. Only
one key fits one particular lock. When enough neurotransmitter molecules latch
onto their receptors, a nervous impulse begins (or stops) in the receiving neuron.
Something like ten quadrillion synapses (that’s a thousand trillion or a 1 with
fifteen zeroes after it) connect the neurons in the brain.12 It might seem that such
vast numbers would make the brain an incomprehensible tangle of competing
electrical signals, but not so. The brain is remarkably efficient in using relatively
few signals to direct the great repertoire of senses, thoughts, and actions that
humans and other animals can achieve. Recent research suggests, for example,
that a mouse can tell how fast its body is moving from the firing of a mere one
hundred of its motion-sensitive synapses.13
THE NEURAL IMPULSE
Nerve impulses are sometimes compared to electrical wires, with the messages traveling along them like a current. That comparison isn’t exactly right, but
it is true that electrical potentials change across the outer membranes of neurons. Here’s what happens: A neuron at rest has a slightly negative charge inside it,
compared with a positive charge outside. When an excitatory neurotransmitter
attaches to a receptor, it causes tiny channels in the membrane of the axon to
open. The channels let charged particles flood in, thus changing the charge along
234
Appendix
Figure 12
the membrane. For a tiny fraction of a second, the inside of the cell becomes
positive and the outside becomes negative. This reversal in one tiny area creates
a current that affects the membrane farther along. Channels there open, and
charged particles flow into another section of the axon, then another, then another. That’s how the impulse travels the length of the axon. Inhibitory neurotransmitters make the inside of the axon even more negatively charged than usual,
so it is harder to excite.
A nerve cell continues firing as long as enough excitatory neurotransmitter
molecules stay bound to it. (In the same way, receiving neurons won’t fire when
large numbers of inhibitory neurotransmitter molecules are bound to them.)
Also, habituation can occur. The longer the excitatory stimulus continues, the
less often neurons react.
In time, neurotransmitters either break down or are reabsorbed. Why don’t
the channels just stay open and neurons keep firing forever? Because a mechanism in the cell membrane called an ion pump pushes charged particles of the
axon in the same way that a water pump clears a flooded basement.
Notes
PREFACE: FALLING IN LOVE WITH SCIENCE
1. Richard M. Restak, The Brain. New York: Bantam, 1984, 349.
CHAPTER 1: LIFE WITHOUT TOUCH
1. All quotes from Chuck Aoki and Jennifer Nelson are personal communications.
2. Felicia B. Axelrod and Gabrielle Gold-von Simson, “Hereditary Sensory and
Autonomic Neuropathies: Types II, III, and IV,” Orphanet Journal of Rare Diseases
(2007) 2: 39. http://www.pubmedcentral.nih.gov/articlerender.fcgi?artid=2098750. Accessed June 3, 2008.
3. Larry Gray, Lisa Watt, and Elliot M. Blass, “Skin-to-Skin Contact Is Analgesic in
Healthy Newborns,” Pediatrics (January 2000) 105(1): e14.
CHAPTER 2: IN FROM THE COLD
1. Andrea M. Peier, Aziz Moqrich, Anne C. Hergarden, Alison J. Reeve, David A.
Andersson, Gina M. Story, Taryn J. Earley, Ilaria Dragoni, Peter McIntyre, Stuart Bevan,
and Ardem Patapoutian, “A TRP Channel that Senses Cold Stimuli and Menthol.” Cell
(March 8, 2002) 108(5): 705–15.
2. G. Reid and M. L. Flonta, “Ion Channels Activated by Cold and Menthol in Cultured Rat Dorsal Root Ganglion Neurones,” Neuroscience Letter (May 17, 2002) 324(2):
164–8.
3. Carline Seydel, “How Neurons Know That It’s C-c-c-c-cold Outside,” Science
(February 22, 2002) 295(5559): 1451.
235
236
Notes
4. David D. McKemy, Werner M. Neuhausser, and David Julius, “Identification of a
Cold Receptor Reveals a General Role for TRP Channels in Thermosensation,” Nature
(March 7, 2002) 416: 52–8.
5. Peier et al., 2002.
6. Seydel, 2002.
7. R. F. Johnstone, W. K. Dolen, and H. M. Hoffman, “A Large Kindred with Familial Cold Autoinflammatory Syndrome,” Annals of Allergy Asthma and Immunology
(February 2003) 90(2): 233–7.
8. Doherty quoted in “Dermatology Team Finds Treatment for Rare ‘Life-ruining’
Condition,” Press release from Dalhousie University (March 11, 2008).
9. J. B. Ross, L. A. Finlayson, P. J. Klotz, R. G. Langley, R. Gaudet, K. Thompson,
S. M. Churchman, M. F. McDermott, and P. N. Hawkins, “Use of Anakinra (Kineret) in
the Treatment of Familial Cold Autoinflammatory Syndrome with a 16-month Follow-up,”
Journal of Cutaneous Medicine and Surgery (January–February 2008) 12(1): 8–16.
10. Félix Viana, Elvira de la Peña, and Carlos Belmonte, “Specificity of Cold Thermotransduction Is Determined by Differential Ionic Channel Expression,” Nature Neuroscience (2002) 5: 254–60.
11. Wei Cheng, Fan Yang, Christina L. Takanishi, and Jie Zheng, “Thermosensitive
TRPV Channel Subunits Coassemble into Heteromeric Channels with Intermediate
Conductance and Gating Properties,” Journal of General Physiology (March 2007)
129(3): 191–207.
CHAPTER 3: ON WHICH SIDE IS YOUR BREAD BUTTERED?
1. E. Roy and C. MacKenzie, “Handedness Effects in Kinesthetic Spatial Location
Judgements,” Cortex (1978) 14: 250–8.
2. Daniel J. Goble and Susan H. Brown, “Task-Dependent Asymmetries in the Utilization of Proprioceptive Feedback for Goal-Directed Movement,” Experimental Brain
Research (2007)180: 693–704.
3. Daniel J. Goble and Susan H. Brown, “Upper Limb Asymmetries in the Matching of Proprioceptive versus Visual Targets,” Journal of Neurophysiology (June 2008)
99(6):3063–74.
4. S. G. Kim, J. Ashe, K. Hendrich, J. M. Ellermann, H. Merkle, K. Uğurbil, and
A. P. Georgopoulos, “Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging of Motor Cortex: Hemispheric Asymmetry and Handedness,” Science (1993) 261(5121): 615–7.
5. G. Rains and B. Milner, “Right-Hippocampal Contralateral-Hand Effect in the
Recall of Spatial Location in the Tactual Modality.” Neuropsychologia (1994) 32:
1233–42.
6. Eiichi Naito1, Per E. Roland, Christian Grefkes, H. J. Choi, Simon Eickhoff,
Stefan Geyer, Karl Zilles, and H. Henrik Ehrsson, “Dominance of the Right Hemisphere and Role of Area 2 in Human Kinesthesia,” Journal of Neurophysiology (2005) 93:
1020–34.
7. A. Butler, G. Fink, C. Dohle, G. Wunderlich, L. Tellmann, R. Seitz, K. Zilles,
and H. Freund, “Neural Mechanisms Underlying Reaching for Remembered Targets
Cued Kinesthetically or Visually in Left or Right Hemispace,” Human Brain Mapping
(2004) 21: 165–77.
Notes
237
CHAPTER 4: PAIN AND THE PLACEBO EFFECT
1. Andrea Dalton and Meredyth Daneman, “Social Susceptibility to Central and
Peripheral Misinformation,” Memory (May 2006) 14(4): 486–501.
2. Estimate from the Society for Neuroscience.
3. “Cannabinoids and Pain,” Brain Briefings, Society for Neuroscience, March 1999.
4. Jon-Kar Zubieta, Mary M. Heitzeg, Yolanda R. Smith, Joshua A. Bueller, Ke
Xu, Yanjun Xu, Robert A. Koeppe, Christian S. Stohler, and David Goldman, “COMT
val158met Genotype Affects μ-Opioid Neurotransmitter Responses to a Pain Stressor,”
Science (February 21, 2003) 299(5610): 1240–3.
5. S.D. Dorn, T. J. Kaptchuk, J. B. Park, L. T. Nguyen, K. Canenguez, B. H. Nam,
K. B. Woods, L.A. Conboy, W. B. Stason, and A. J. Lembo, “A Meta-analysis of the
Placebo Response in Complementary and Alternative Medicine Trials of Irritable Bowel
Syndrome,” Neurogastroenterology and Motility (August 2007) 19(8): 630–7.
6. M. E. Kemeny, L. J. Rosenwasser, R. A. Panettieri, R. M. Rose, S. M. Berg-Smith,
and J. N. Kline, “Placebo Response in Asthma: A Robust and Objective Phenomenon,”
Journal of Allergy and Clinical Immunolog y (June 2007) 119(6): 1375–81.
7. For a good overview of these and other findings, see Steve Stewart-Williams, “The
Placebo Puzzle: Putting Together the Pieces,” Health Psychology (March 2004) 23(2):
198–206.
8. Fabrizio Benedetti, Claudia Arduino, and Martina Amanzio, “Somatotopic Activation of Opioid Systems by Target-Directed Expectations of Analgesia,” Journal of Neuroscience (May 1, 1999) 19(9): 3639–48.
9. J. D. Levine, N. C. Gordon, and H. L. Fields, “The Mechanisms of Placebo Analgesia,” Lancet (1978) 2: 654–7.
10. J. J. Lipman, B. E. Miller, K. S. Mays, M. N. Miller, W. C. North, and W. L. Byrne,
“Peak B Endorphin Concentration in Cerebrospinal Fluid: Reduced in Chronic Pain
Patients and Increased During the Placebo Response,” Psychopharmacology (September
1990) 102(1): 112–6.
11. M. Amanzio and F. Benedetti, “Neuropharmacological Dissection of Placebo
Analgesia: Expectation-Activated Opioid Systems versus Conditioning-Activated Specific
Subsystems,” Journal of Neuroscience (January 1, 1999) 19(1): 484–94.
12. Fabrizio Benedetti, Antonella Pollo, Leonardo Lopiano, Michele Lanotte, Sergio
Vighetti, and Innocenzo Rainero, “Conscious Expectation and Unconscious Conditioning in Analgesic, Motor, and Hormonal Placebo/Nocebo Responses,” Journal of Neuroscience (May 15, 2003) 23(10): 4315–23.
13. P. Petrovic, T. Dietrich, P. Fransson, J. Andersson, K. Carlsson, and M. Ingvar,
“Placebo in Emotional Processing-Induced Expectations of Anxiety Relief Activate a
Generalized Modulatory Network,” Neuron (June 16, 2005) 46(6): 957–69.
14. M. N. Baliki, P. Y. Geha, A. V. Apkarian, and D. R. Chialvo, “Beyond Feeling:
Chronic Pain Hurts the Brain, Disrupting the Default-Mode Network Dynamics,” Journal
of Neuroscience (February 6, 2008) 28(6): 1398–403.
15. All quotes from Dante Chialvo are personal communications.
16. Raúl de la Fuente-Fernández, Thomas J. Ruth, Vesna Sossi, Michael Schulzer,
Donald B. Calne, and A. Jon Stoessl, “Expectation and Dopamine Release: Mechanism
of the Placebo Effect in Parkinson’s Disease,” Science (August 10, 2001) 293(5532): 1164–6.
238
Notes
17. Thomas Luparello, Harold A. Lyons, Eugene R. Bleecker, and E. R. McFadden,
“Influences of Suggestion on Airway Reactivity in Asthmatic Subjects,” Psychosomatic
Medicine (1968) 30: 819–25.
18. J-K. Zubieta, J. A. Bueller, L. R. Jackson, D. J. Scott, Y. Xu, R. A. Koeppe, T. E.
Nichols, and C. S. Stohler, “Placebo Effects Mediated by Endogenous Opioid Activity
on Mu-opioid Receptors,” Journal of Neuroscience (2005) 25(34): 7754–62.
CHAPTER 5: NEMATODES, HAPTICS,
AND BRAIN–MACHINE INTERFACES
1. Robert O’Hagan and Martin Chalfie, “Mechanosensation in Caenorhabditis elegans,” International Review of Neurobiology (2006) 69: 169–203.
2. Laura Bianchi, “Mechanotransduction: Touch and Feel at the Molecular Level
as Modeled in Caenorhabditis elegans,” Molecular Neurobiology (December 2007) 36(3):
254–71.
3. M. Chalfie and J. Sulston, “Developmental Genetics of the Mechanosensory
Neurons of Caenorhabditis elegans,” Developmental Biology (1981) 82: 358–70.
4. Bianchi, 2007.
5. Rajesh Babu Sekar and Ammasi Periasamy, “Fluorescence Resonance Energy
Transfer (FRET) Microscopy Imaging of Live Cell Protein Localizations,” Journal of Cell
Biology (March 3, 2003) 160(5): 629–33.
6. Bianchi, 2007.
7. Miriam B. Goodman and Erich M. Schwarz, “Transducing Touch in Caenorhabditis elegans,” Annual Review of Physiology (2003) 65: 429–52.
8. K. Dandekar, B. I. Raju, and M. A. Srinivasan, “3-D Finite-Element Models of
Human and Monkey Fingertips to Investigate the Mechanics of Tactile Sense,” Journal
of Biomechanical Engineering (October 2003) 125: 682–91.
9. “MIT and London Team Report First Transatlantic Touch,” MIT News, October
28, 2002. http://web.mit.edu/newsoffice/nr/2002/touchlab3.html. Accessed July 14, 2008.
10. Mandayam A Srinivasan, “What Is Haptics?” http://www.sensable.com/documents/
documents/what_is_haptics.pdf. Accessed July 14, 2008.
11. Gil Yosipovitch, Yozo Ishiuji, Tejesh S. Patel, Maria Isabel Hicks, Yoshitetsu Oshiro, Robert A. Kraft, Erica Winnicki, and Robert C. Coghill, “The Brain Processing of
Scratching,” Journal of Investigative Dermatology (July 2008) 128(7): 1806–11.
12. “Research Suggests Why Scratching Is So Relieving,” Press release from Wake
Forest University Baptist Medical Center, January 31, 2008, available at http://www
.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2008–01/wfub-rsw012808.php. Accessed March 3, 2008.
13. Srinivasan, 2008.
14. M. Velliste, S. Perel, M. C. Spalding, A. S. Whitford, and A. B. Schwartz, “Cortical
Control of a Prosthetic Arm for Self- Feeding,” Nature (June 19 2008) 453: 1098–1109.
CHAPTER 6: IT’S VALENTINE’S DAY . . . SNIFF!
1. Michelle L. Schlief and Rachel I. Wilson, “Olfactory Processing and Behavior
Downstream from Highly Selective Receptor Neurons,” Nature Neuroscience (May 1,
2007) 10: 623–30.
Notes
239
2. Rachel I. Wilson, “Neural Circuits Underlying Chemical Perception,” Science
(October 26, 2007) 318: 584–5.
3. Eric H. Holbrook and Donald A. Leopold, “Anosmia: Diagnosis and Management,” Current Opinion in Otolaryngology & Head and Neck Surgery (2003) 11: 54–60.
4. Z. Zou and L. B. Buck, “Combinatorial Effects of Odorant Mixes in Olfactory
Cortex,” Science (March 10, 2006) 311(5766): 1477–81.
5. Z. Zou, F. Li, and L. B. Buck, “Odor Maps in the Olfactory Cortex,” Proceedings
of the National Academy of Sciences (May 24, 2005) 102(21): 7724–9.
6. Leslie B. Vosshall, “How the Brain Sees Smells,” Developmental Cell (November
2001) 1(5): 588–90.
7. Friedrich quoted in “When the Nose Doesn’t Know: Cornell Scientists Develop
Standard Spectrum of Smell to Separate ‘Ahhh’ from ‘Ugghh,’” Press release from Cornell University, March 26, 2000. http://www.news.cornell.edu/releases/March00/ACS
.SmellStandards.bpf.html. Accessed March 22, 2008.
8. M. Tsunozaki, S. H. Chalasani, and C. I. Bargmann, “A Behavioral Switch: cGMP
and PKC Signaling in Olfactory Neurons Reverses Odor Preference in C. elegans,” Neuron (September 25, 2008) 59(6): 959–71.
9. Weihong Lin, Tatsuya Ogura, Robert F. Margolskee, Thomas E. Finger, and
Diego Restrepo, “TRPM5-expressing Solitary Chemosensory Cells Respond to Odorous
Irritants,” Journal of Neurophysiology (March 1, 2008) 99(3): 1451–60.
10. D. Rinberg, A. Koulakov, and A. Gelperin, “Speed Accuracy Tradeoff in Olfaction,”
Neuron (August 3, 2006) 51 (3): 351–8.
11. Wen Li, Erin Luxenberg, Todd Parrish, and Jay A. Gottfried, “Learning to Smell
the Roses: Experience-Dependent Neural Plasticity in Human Piriform and Orbitofrontal
Cortices,” Neuron (December 21, 2006) 52(6): 1097–1108.
12. Gottfried quoted in “Researchers Discover How We Differentiate Smells,” Medical News Today, December 27, 2006, http://www.medicalnewstoday.com/articles/59697
.php. Accessed September 7, 2008.
13. P. N. Steinmetz, A. Roy, P. J. Fitzgerald, S. S. Hsiao, K. O. Johnson, and E. Niebur,
“Attention Modulates Synchronized Neuronal Firing in Primate Somatosensory Cortex,”
Nature (March 9, 2000) 404: 187–90.
14. N. Sobel, V. Prabhakaran, J. E. Desmond, G. H. Glover, R. L. Goode, E. V. Sullivan, and J. D. E. Gabrieli, “Sniffing and Smelling: Separate Subsystems in the Human
Olfactory Cortex,” Nature (March 19, 1998) 392: 282–6.
15. Steven D. Munger, Andrew P. Lane, Haining Zhong, Trese Leinders-Zufall, KingWai Yau, Frank Zufall, and Randall R. Reed, “Central Role of the CNGA4 Channel Subunit in Ca2+-Calmodulin-Dependent Odor Adaptation,” Science (December 7, 2001)
294: 2172–5.
16. Yuan Gao1 and Ben W Strowbridge, “Long-Term Plasticity of Excitatory Inputs
to Granule Cells in the Rat Olfactory Bulb,” Nature Neuroscience Published online: May
3, 2009, at http://www.nature.com/neuro/journal/vaop/ncurrent/abs/nn.2319.html.
17. Jess Porter, Brent Craven, Rehan M Khan, Shao-Ju Chang, Irene Kang, Benjamin
Judkewitz, Jason Volpe, Gary Settles, and Noam Sobel, “Mechanisms of Scent-Tracking
in Humans,” Nature Neuroscience (December 17, 2007) 10: 27–9.
240
Notes
CHAPTER 7: DO ODORS DANCE IN YOUR NOSE?
1. “Luca Turin on Etat Libre d’Orange in NZZ Folio {Fragrant Reading},” http://www
.mimifroufrou.com/scentedsalamander/2007/08/luca_turin_on_etat_libre_doran.html.
Accessed September 20, 2008
2. Chandler Burr, The Emperor of Scent: A True Story of Perfume and Obsession. New
York: Random House, 2003: 10.
3. Avery Gilbert, “The Emperor’s New Theory,” (A Review of The Emperor of Scent
by Chandler Burr), Nature Neuroscience (April 2003) 6(4): 1.
4. Luca Turin, The Secret of Scent. New York: HarperCollins, 2006: 133.
5. Luca Turin, “A Spectroscopic Mechanism for Primary Olfactory Reception,” Chemical Senses (December 1996) 21(6): 773–91.
6. Stephen Hill, “Sniff ‘n’ Shake,” NewScientist (January 3, 1998) 157(2115): 34–7.
7. Ibid.
8. L. J. W. Haffenden, V. A. Yaylayan, and J. Fortin, “Investigation of Vibrational
Theory of Olfaction with Variously Labelled Benzaldehydes,” Food Chemistry (2001) 73:
67–72.
9. Gilbert, 2003.
10. Andreas Keller and Leslie B. Vosshall, “A Psychophysical Test of the Vibration
Theory of Olfaction,” Nature Neuroscience (April 2004) 7(4): 337–8.
11. “Testing a Radical Theory,” Nature Neuroscience (April 2004) 7(4): 315.
12. Turin, Secret of Scent, 188.
13. Shin-ya Takane and John B. O. Mitchell, “A Structure–Odour Relationship Study
Using EVA Descriptors and Hierarchical Clustering,” Organic and Biomolecular Chemistry (November 21, 2004) 2(22): 3250–5.
14. Philip Ball, “Rogue Theory of Smell Gets a Boost,” published online December 7,
2006, http://www.nature.com/news/2006/061204/full/news061204–10.html. Accessed
March 2, 2008.
15. Jennifer C. Brookes, Filio Hartoutsiou, A. P. Horsfield, and A. M. Stonehamx,
“Could Humans Recognize Odor by Phonon Assisted Tunneling?” Physical Review Letters (January 19, 2007) 98(3): 38101–4.
16. Zeeya Merali, “Nose Model Gets a Cautious Sniff,” NewScientist (December 9,
2006): 12.
17. London Centre for Nanotechnology, “Rogue Odour Theory Could Be Right.”
ScienceDaily. (February 5, 2007), http://www.sciencedaily.com—/releases/2007/02/
070204162541.htm. Accessed March 2, 2008.
CHAPTER 8: LIFE WITHOUT SCENT
1. All quotes from Theresa Dunlop are personal communications.
2. Matthieu Louis, Thomas Huber, Richard Benton, Thomas P. Sakmar, and Leslie
B. Vosshall, “Bilateral Olfactory Sensory Input Enhances Chemotaxis Behavior,” Nature
Neuroscience (February 1, 2008) 11: 187–99.
3. A. Brämerson, L. Johansson, L. Ek, S. Nordin, and M. Bende, “Prevalence of Olfactory Dysfunction: The Skövde Population-Based Study,” Laryngoscope (April 2004)
114(4): 733–7.
Notes
241
4. C. Murphy, C. R. Schubert, K. J. Cruickshanks, B. E. Klein, R. Klein, and D. M.
Nondahl, “Prevalence of Olfactory Impairment in Older Adults,” Journal of the American Medical Association (November 13, 2002) 288 (18): 2307–12.
5. Andreas F. P. Temmel, Christian Quint, Bettina Schickinger-Fischer, Ludger
Klimek, Elisabeth Stoller, and Thomas Hummel, “Characteristics of Olfactory Disorders
in Relation to Major Causes of Olfactory Loss,” Archives of Otolaryngology and Head and
Neck Surgery (June 2002) 128: 635–41.
6. I. J. Swann, B. Bauza-Rodrigue, R. Currans, J. Riley, and V. Shukla, “The Significance of Post-Traumatic Amnesia as a Risk factor in the Development of Olfactory Dysfunction Following Head Injury,” Emergency Medicine Journal (2006) 23: 618–21.
7. Brämerson et al., 2004.
8. Eric H. Holbrook and Donald A. Leopold, “Anosmia: Diagnosis and Management,”
Current Opinion in Otolaryngology & Head and Neck Surgery (2003) 11: 54–60.
9. Antje Haehner, Antje Rodewald, Johannes C. Gerber, and Thomas Hummel,
“Correlation of Olfactory Function with Changes in the Volume of the Human Olfactory Bulb,” Archives of Otolaryngology Head and Neck Surgery (2008) 134(6): 621–4.
10. X. Grosmaitre, L. C. Santarelli, J. Tan, M. Luo, and M. Ma, “Dual Functions of
Mammalian Olfactory Sensory Neurons as Odor Detectors and Mechanical Sensors,”
Nature Neuroscience (March 2007) 10(3): 348–54.
11. Ma quoted in “Explaining Why We Smell Better When We Sniff,” Press release
from the University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, March 13, 2007, http://www
.upenn.edu/researchatpenn/article.php?1206&sci. Accessed September 8, 2008.
12. C. T. Leung, P. A. Coulombe, and R. R. Reed, “Contribution of Olfactory Neural
Stem Cells to Tissue Maintenance and Regeneration,” Nature Neuroscience (June 2007)
10(6): 673–4.
CHAPTER 9: THE SWEATY SCENT OF SEX
1. Stephen D. Liberles and Linda S. Buck, “A Second Class of Chemosensory Receptors in the Olfactory Epithelium,” Nature (August 10, 2006) 442(10): 645–50.
2. According to http://honeymoons.about.com.
3. Liberles and Buck, 2006, 648.
4. Leslie B. Vosshall, “Olfaction: Attracting Both Sperm and the Nose,” Current Biology (November 9, 2004) (14): R918–20.
5. Suma Jacob, Martha K. McClintock, Bethanne Zelano, and Carole Ober, “Paternally Inherited HLA Alleles Are Associated with Women’s Choice of Male Odor,”
Nature Genetics (February 2002) 50: 175–9.
6. Rockefeller University, “Male Body Odor Can Stink Like Urine or Have A Pleasant Vanilla Smell, Depending On One Gene.” ScienceDaily. (September 17, 2007), http://
www.sciencedaily.com /releases/2007/09/070916143523.htm. Accessed March 8, 2008.
7. Public Library of Science, “Why Are Some People Oblivious to the ‘Sweaty’ Smell
of a Locker Room?” ScienceDaily (November 1, 2007), http://www.sciencedaily.com /
releases/2007/10/071030080645.htm. Accessed March 8, 2008
8. P. S. Santos, J. A. Schinemann, J. Gabardo, and Mda G. Bicalho, “New Evidence
That the MHC Influences Odor Perception in Humans: A Study with 58 Southern
Brazilian Students,” Hormones and Behavior (April 2005) 47(4): 384–8.
242
Notes
9. B. I. Grosser, L. Monti-Bloch, C. Jennings-White, and D. L. Berliner, “Behavioral
and Electrophysiological Effects of Androstadienone, a Human Pheromone,” Psychoneuroendocrinology (April 2000) 25(3): 289–99.
10. Ivanka Savic, Hans Berglund, and Per Lindström, “Brain Response to Putative
Pheromones in Homosexual Men,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences
(May 17, 2005) 102(20): 7356–61.
11. S Jacob and M. K McClintock, “Psychological State and Mood Effects of Steroidal
Chemosignals in Women and Men,” Hormones and Behavior (2000) 37(1): 57–78.
12. C. Wyart, W. W. Webster, J. H. Chen, S. R. Wilson, A. McClary, R. M. Khan, and
N. Sobel, “Smelling a Single Component of Male Sweat Alters Levels of Cortisol in
Women,” Journal of Neuroscience (February 2007) 27(6): 1261–5.
13. Ibid.
14. J. N. Lundström and M. J.Olsson, “Subthreshold Amounts of Social Odorant Affect Mood, But Not Behavior, in Heterosexual Women When Tested by a Male, But Not
a Female, Experimenter,” Biological Psychology (December 2005) 70(3): 197–204.
15. M. Bensafi, W. M. Brown, R. Khan, B. Levenson, and N. Sobel, “Sniffing Human
Sex-Steroid Derived Compounds Modulates Mood, Memory and Autonomic Nervous
System Function in Specific Behavioral Contexts,” Behavioral Brain Research (June 4,
2004) 152(1): 11–22.
16. S. Jacob, L. H. Kinnunen, J. Metz, M. Cooper, and M. K. McClintock, “Sustained Human Chemosignal Unconsciously Alters Brain Function,” NeuroReport (2001)
12(11): 2391–4.
17. J. N. Lundström, M. J. Olsson, B. Schaal, and T. Hummel, “A Putative Social
Chemosignal Elicits Faster Cortical Responses Than Perceptually Similar Odorants,”
Neuroimage (May 1, 2006) 30(4): 1340–6.
18. J. N. Lundström, J. A. Boyle, R. J. Zatorre, and M. Jones-Gotman, “Functional
Neuronal Processing of Body Odors Differs from that of Similar Common Odors,” Cerebral Cortex (June 2008) 18(6): 1466–74.
19. I. Savic, H. Berglund, B. Gulyas, and P. Roland, “Smelling of Odorous Sex
Hormone-Like Compounds Causes Sex-Differentiated Hypothalamic Activations in
Humans,” Neuron (2001) 31(4): 661–8.
20. Jakob C. Mueller, Silke Steiger, Andrew E. Fidler, and Bart Kempenaers, “Biogenic Trace Amine–Associated Receptors (TAARs) Are Encoded in Avian Genomes: Evidence and Possible Implications,” Journal of Heredity (March–April 2008) 99(2): 174–6.
CHAPTER 10: EXPRESS TRAIN TO HAPPINESS
1. Jean-Louis Millot, Gérard Brand, and Nadège Morand, “Effects of Ambient Odors
on Reaction Time in Humans,” Neuroscience Letters (April 5, 2002) 322(2): 79–82.
2. Reiko Sakamoto, Kazuya Minoura, Akira Usui, Yoshikazu Ishizuka, and Shigenobu
Kanba, “Effectiveness of Aroma on Work Efficiency: Lavender Aroma During Recesses
Prevents Deterioration of Work Performance,” Chemical Senses (2005) 30(8): 683–91.
3. M. Luisa Demattè, Robert Österbauer, and Charles Spence, “Olfactory Cues
Modulate Facial Attractiveness,” Chemical Senses (2007) 32(6): 603–10.
4. Boris A. Stuck, Desislava Atanasova, Kathrin Frauke Grupp, and Michael Schredl,
“The Impact of Olfactory Stimulation on Dreams.” Paper presented at the 2008 Ameri-
Notes
243
can Academy of Otolaryngology–Head and Neck Surgery Foundation (AAO-HNSF)
Annual Meeting & OTO EXPO in Chicago, September 21, 2008.
5. J. P. Royet, D. Zald, R. Versace, N. Costes, F. Lavenne, O. Koenig, and R.Gervais,
“Emotional Responses to Pleasant and Unpleasant Olfactory, Visual, and Auditory Stimuli: A Positron Emission Tomography Study,” Journal of Neuroscience (October 15, 2000)
20(20): 7752–9.
6. O. Pollatos, R. Kopietz, J. Linn, J. Albrecht, V. Sakar, A. Anzinger, R. Schandry,
and M. Wiesmann, “Emotional Stimulation Alters Olfactory Sensitivity and Odor Judgment,” Chemical Senses (July 2007) 32(6): 583–9.
7. J. P. Royet, J. Plailly, C. Delon-Martin, D. A. Kareken, and C. Segebarth, “fMRI
of Emotional Responses to Odors: Influence of Hedonic Valence and Judgment, Handedness, and Gender,” Neuroimage (October 2003) 20(2): 713–28.
8. C. Villemure, B. M. Slotnick, and M. C. Bushnell, “Effects of Odors on Pain Perception: Deciphering the Roles of Emotion and Attention,” Pain (November 2003)
106(1–2): 101–8.
9. J. Lehrner, G. Marwinski, S. Lehr, P. Johren, and L.Deecke, “Ambient Odors of
Orange and Lavender Reduce Anxiety and Improve Mood in a Dental Office,” Physiology and Behavior (September 15, 2005) 86(1–2): 92–5.
10. Jeffrey J. Gedney, Toni L. Glover, and Roger B. Fillingim, “Sensory and Affective
Pain Discrimination after Inhalation of Essential Oils,” Psychosomatic Medicine (2004)
66: 599–606.
11. J. Willander and M. Larsson, “Smell Your Way Back to Childhood: Autobiographical Odor Memory,” Psychonomic Bulletin and Review (April 2006) 13(2): 240–4.
12. J. Willander and M. Larsson, “Olfaction and Emotion: The Case of Autobiographical Memory,” Memory and Cognition (October 2007) 35(7): 1659–63.
13. R. S. Herz, “A Naturalistic Analysis of Autobiographical Memories Triggered
by Olfactory, Visual and Auditory Stimuli,” Chemical Senses (March 2004) 29(3):
217–24.
14. Rachel Herz, The Scent of Desire. New York: William Morrow, 2007: 67.
15. R. S. Herz, J. Eliassen, S. Beland, and T. Souza, “Neuroimaging Evidence for the
Emotional Potency of Odor-Evoked Memory,” Neuropsychologia (2004) 42(3): 371–8.
16. G. N. Martin, “The Effect of Exposure to Odor on the Perception of Pain,” Psychosomatic Medicine (July–August 2006) 68(4): 613–6.
17. S. Marchand and P. Arsenault, “Odors Modulate Pain Perception: A GenderSpecific Effect,” Physiology and Behavior (June 1, 2002) 76(2): 251–6.
18. Xiuping Li, “The Effects of Appetitive Stimuli on Out-of-Domain Consumptive
Impatience,” Journal of Consumer Research (February 2008) 34: 649–56.
19. Janice K. Kiecolt-Glasera, Jennifer E. Graham, William B. Malarkey, Kyle Porter,
Stanley Lemeshow, and Ronald Glaser, “Olfactory Influences on Mood and Autonomic,
Endocrine, and Immune Function,” Psychoneuroendocrinology (2008) 3: 328–39.
20. J. Djordjevic, J. N. Lundstrom, F. Clément, J. A. Boyle, S. Pouliot, and M.JonesGotman, “A Rose by Any Other Name: Would It Smell as Sweet?” Journal of Neurophysiology (January 2008) 99(1): 386–93.
21. Malarkey quote from “Aromatherapy May Make Your Feel Good, But It Won’t
Make You Well,” Press release from Ohio State University, March 3, 2008, http://research
news.osu.edu/archive/aromathe.htm. Accessed September 8, 2008.
244
Notes
CHAPTER 11: THE BITTER TRUTH
1. Linda Bartoshuk. “The Tongue Map,” http://www.museumofhoaxes.com/hoax/
weblog/permalink/the_tongue_map/. Accessed September 8, 2008.
2. L. A. Lucchina, O. F. Curtis, P. Putnam, A. Drewnowski, J. .M. Prutkin, and L. M.
Bartoshuk, “Psychophysical Measurement of 6-n-propylthiouracil (PROP) Taste Perception,” In C. Murphy (Ed.) International Symposium on Olfaction and Taste XIX. New
York: New York Academy of Sciences (1998) 855: 816–9.
3. R. D. Mattes, “The Taste of Fat Elevates Postprandial Triacylglycerol,” Physiology
and Behavior (October 2001) 74(3): 343–8.
4. Michael G. Tordoff, “Chemosensation of Calcium,” Symposium, “Chemical
Senses and Health,” Paper presented at the American Chemical Society National Meeting, Philadelphia, August 20, 2008.
5. Adam Drewnowski, Susan Ahlstrom Henderson, and Anne Barratt-Fornell, “Genetic Taste Markers and Food Preferences,” Drug Metabolism and Disposition (2001)
29(4): 535–8.
6. Ibid.
7. Feng Zhang, Boris Klebansky, Richard M. Fine, Hong Xu, Alexey Pronin, Haitian Liu, Catherine Tachdjian, and Xiaodong Li, “Molecular Mechanism for the Umami
Taste Synergism,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (December 30, 2008):
105(52): 20930–4.
8. Jayaram Chandrashekar, Ken L. Mueller, Mark A. Hoon, Elliot Adler, Luxin Feng,
Wei Guo, Charles S. Zuker, and Nicholas J. P. Ryba, “T2Rs Function as Bitter Taste Receptors,” Cell (March 17, 2000) 100: 703–11; “Researchers Discover How Bitter Taste Is
Perceived,” Howard Hughes Medical Institute (March 10, 2005) http://www.hhmi.org/
news/zuker7.html. Accessed January 5, 2008.
9. Ken L. Mueller, Mark A. Hoon, Isolde Erlenbach, Jayaram Chandrashekar,
Charles S. Zuker, and Nicholas J. P. Ryba, “ The Receptors and Coding Logic for Bitter
Taste,” Nature (March 10, 2005) 434: 225–9.
10. Y-Jen Huang, Yutaka Maruyama, Gennady Dvoryanchikov, Elizabeth Pereira,
Nirupa Chaudhari, and Stephen D. Roper, “The Role of Pannexin 1 Hemichannels in
ATP Release and Cell-Cell Communication in Mouse Taste Buds,” Proceedings of the
National Academy of Sciences (April 10, 2007): 104 (15): 6436–41.
11. G. K. W. Frank, T. A. Oberndorfer, A. N. Simmons, M. P. Paulus, J. L. Fudge,
T. T. Yang, and W. H. Kaye, “Sucrose Activates Human Taste Pathways Differently from
Artificial Sweetener,” NeuroImage (February 15, 2008) 39(4): 1559–69.
12. I. E. de Araujo, A. J. Oliveira-Maia, T. D. Sotnikova, R. R. Gainetdinov, M. G.
Caron, M. A. L. Nicholelis, and S. A. Simon, “Food Reward in the Absence of Taste
Receptor Signaling,” Neuron (March 27, 2008) 57: 930–41.
13. Fang-li Zhao, Tiansheng Shen, Namik Kaya, Shao-gang Lu, Yu Cao, and Scott
Herness, “Expression, Physiological Action, and Coexpression patterns of Neuropeptide
Y in Rat Taste-bud Cells,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (August 2,
2005) 102 (31): 11100–5.
14. Quotes from Scott Herness. “Bitter or Sweet? The Same Taste Bud Can Tell the
Difference,” Press Release from Ohio State University, July 18, 2005, http://www
.newswise.com/articles/view/513195. Accessed January 9, 2008.
Notes
245
15. Quote from Charles Zuker, “Researchers Discover How Bitter Taste is Perceived,”
Howard Hughes Medical Institution News Release, March 10, 2005, http://www.hhmi
.org/news/zuker7.html. Accessed January 9, 2008.
16. Leslie B. Vosshall, “Putting Smell on the Map,” Trends in Neuroscience (April 4,
2003) 4(2): 169–70.
17. M. L. Kringelbach, I. E. de Araujo, and E. T. Rolls, “Taste-Related Activity in the
Human Dorsolateral Prefrontal Cortex,” Neuroimage (February 2004) 21(2): 781–9.
18. J. O’Doherty, E. T. Rolls, S. Francis, R. Bowtell, and F. McGlone, “Representation of Pleasant and Aversive Tastes in the Human Brain,” Journal of Neurophysiology
(March 2001) 85(3) :1315–21.
CHAPTER 12: COCONUT CRAZY
1. Amy J. Tindell, Kyle S. Smith, Susana Pecina, Kent C. Berridge, and J. Wayne
Aldridge, “Ventral Pallidum Firing Codes Hedonic Reward: When a Bad Taste Turns
Good,” Journal of Neurophysiology (2006) 96: 2399–409. See also Robert A. Wheeler and
Regina M. Carelli. “The Neuroscience of Pleasure: Focus on ‘Ventral Pallidum Firing
Codes Hedonic Reward: When a Bad Taste Turns Good.’” Journal of Neurophysiology
(2006) 96: 2175–6.
2. S. Fenu, V. Bassareo, and G. J. Di Chiara. “A Role for Dopamine D1 Receptors
of the Nucleus Accumbens Shell in Conditioned Taste Aversion Learning,” Neuroscience
(September 1, 2001) 21(17):6897–904.
CHAPTER 13: COOKING UP SOME BRAIN CHEMISTRY
1. Jakob P. Ley, “Masking Bitter Taste by Molecules,” Chemosensory Perception (2008)
1(1): 58–77.
2. Hervé This, Kitchen Mysteries. New York: Columbia University Press, 2007,
90–1.
3. Peter Barham, The Science of Cooking. Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 2001, 34.
4. H. Fukuda, S. Uchida, S. Kinomura, and R. Kawashima, “Neuroimaging of Taste
Perception,” Advances in Neurological Sciences (2004) 48(2): 285–93.
5. E. T. Rolls, “Smell, Taste, Texture, and Temperature Multimodal Representations
in the Brain, and Their Relevance to the Control of Appetite,” Nutrition Review (November 2004) 62(11 Pt 2): S193–204.
6. C. Viarouge, R. Caulliez, and S. Nicolaidis, “Umami Taste of Monosodium Glutamate Enhances the Thermic Effect of Food and Affects the Respiratory Quotient in the
Rat,” Physiology and Behavior (November 1992) 52(5): 879–84.
7. M. Jabbi, M. Swart, and C. Keysers, “Empathy for Positive and Negative Emotions
in the Gustatory Cortex,” Neuroimage (February 15, 2007) 34(4): 1744–53.
8. A Niijima, “Reflex Effects of Oral, Gastrointestinal and Hepatoportal Glutamate
Sensors on Vagal Nerve Activity,” Journal of Nutrition (April 2000) 130(4S Suppl):
971S–3S.
9. Nirupa Chaudhari, Ana Marie Landin, and Stephen D. Roper, “A Metabotropic
Glutamate Receptor Variant Functions as a Taste Receptor,” Nature Neuroscience (2000)
3: 113–9.
246
Notes
10. N.D Luscombe-Marsh, A. J. Smeets, and M. S. Westerterp-Plantenga, “Taste Sensitivity for Monosodium Glutamate and an Increased Liking of Dietary Protein,” British
Journal of Nutrition (April 2008) 99(4): 904–8.
CHAPTER 14: HOW TO KNIT A BABY TASTE BUD
1. Richard Restak , The Secret Life of the Brain. Washington, DC: Dana Press and
Joseph Henry Press, 2001, 2–3.
2. Martin Witt and Klaus Reutter, “Embryonic and Early Fetal Development of Human Taste Buds: A Transmission Electron Microscopical Study,” The Anatomical Record
(December 1996) 246(4): 507–23; Martin Witt and Klaus Reutter. “Scanning Electron
Microscopical Studies of Developing Gustatory Papillae in Humans,” Chemical Senses
(December 1997) 22(6): 601–12.
3. Fei Liu, Shoba Thirumangalathu, Natalie M. Gallant, Steven H. Yang, Cristi L.
Stoick-Cooper, Seshamma T. Reddy, Thomas Andl, Makoto M. Taketo, Andrzej A.
Dlugosz, Randall T. Moon, Linda A. Barlow, and Sarah E Millar, “Wnt-Beta-Catenin
Signaling Initiates Taste Papilla Development,” Nature Genetics (January 2007) 39(1):
106–1.
4. Ken Iwatsuki, Hong-Xiang Liu, Albert Gründer, Meredith A. Singer, Timothy F.
Lane, Rudolf Grosschedl, Charlotte M. Mistretta, and Robert F. Margolskee, “Wnt Signaling Interacts with Shh to Regulate Taste Papilla Development,” Proceedings of the
National Academy of Sciences (February 13, 2007) 104(7): 2253–8.
5. C. M. Kotz, D. Weldon, C. J. Billington, and A.S. Levine, “Age-related Changes
in Brain Prodynorphin Gene Expression in the Rat,” Neurobiology of Aging (November,
December 2004) 25(10): 1343–7.
CHAPTER 15: EXPECTING WHAT YOU TASTE
AND TASTING WHAT YOU EXPECT
1. A. Soter, J. Kim, A. Jackman, I. Tourbier, A. Kaul, and R. L. Doty, “Accuracy of
Self-Report in Detecting Taste Dysfunction,” Laryngoscope (April 2008) 118(4): 611–7.
2. C. Strugnell, “Colour and Its Role in Sweetness Perceptions,” Appetite (1997)
28: 85.
3. R. L. Alley and T. R. Alley, “The Influence of Physical States and Color on Perceived Sweetness,” Journal of Consumer Research (1985) 12: 301–15.
4. Eric C. Koch, “Preconceptions of Taste Based on Color,” The Journal of Psychology
(May 2003) 137(3): 233–42.
5. R. A. Frank, K. Ducheny, and S. J. Mize, “Strawberry Odor, But Not Red Color,
Enhances the Sweetness of Sucrose Solutions,” Chemical Senses (1989) 14: 371–7.
6. Marcus Cunha Jr., Chris Janiszewski, and Juliano Laran, “Protection of Prior
Learning in Complex Consumer Learning Environments.” Journal of Consumer Research
(April 2008) 34: 850–64.
7. W. K. Simmons, A. Martin, and L. W. Barsalou, “Pictures of Appetizing Foods Activate Gustatory Cortices for Taste and Reward,” Cerebral Cortex (October 2005) 15(10):
1602–8.
Notes
247
8. S. Kikuchi, F. Kubota, K. Nisijima, S. Washiya, and S. Kato, “Cerebral Activation
Focusing on Strong Tasting Food: A Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging Study,”
Neuroreport (February 28, 2005) 16(3): 281–3.
9. C. Kobayashi, L. M. Kennedy, and B. P. Halpern, “Experience-Induced Changes
in Taste Identification of Monosodium Glutamate (MSG) Are Reversible,” Chemical
Senses (May 2006) 31(4): 301–6.
10. Kristina M. Gonzalez, Catherine Peo, Todd Livdahl, and Linda M. Kennedy, “Experience Induced Changes in Sugar Taste Discrimination,” Chemical Senses (February
1, 2008) 33(2): 173–9.
11. A. Faurion, B. Cerf, A. M. Pillias, and N Boireau, “Increased Taste Sensitivity by
Familiarization to Novel Stimuli: Psychophysics, fMRI, and Electrophysiological Techniques Suggest Modulation at Peripheral and Central Levels.” In C. Rouby (Ed.), Olfaction, Taste and Cognition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002, 350–66.
12. Tom P. Heath, Jan K. Melicher, David J. Nutt, and Lucy P. Donaldson, “Human
Taste Thresholds Are Modulated by Serotonin and Noradrenaline,” Journal of Neuroscience (December 6, 2006) 26(49): 2664–71.
13. Ibid.
14. E. T. Rolls and C. McCabe. “Enhanced Affective Brain Representations of
Chocolate in Cravers vs. Non-Cravers,” European Journal of Neuroscience (August 26,
2007) 26(4):1067–76.
15. Jack B Nitschke, Gregory E. Dixon, Issidoros Sarinopoulos, Sarah J. Short,
Jonathan D. Cohen, Edward E. Smith, Stephen M. Kosslyn, Robert M. Rose, and
Richard J. Davidson, “Altering Expectancy Dampens Neural Response to Aversive Taste
in Primary Taste Cortex,” Nature Neuroscience (February 5, 2006) 9: 435–42.
16. F. Grabenhorst, E. T. Rolls, and A. Bilderbeck, “How Cognition Modulates Affective Responses to Taste and Flavor: Top-down Influences on the Orbitofrontal and
Pregenual Cingulate Cortices,” Cerebral Cortex (July 2008) 18(7): 1549–59.
17. Fabian Grabenhorst and Edmund T. Rolls, “Selective Attention to Affective Values Alters How the Brain Processes Taste Stimuli,” European Journal of Neuroscience
(2008) 27: 723–9.
CHAPTER 16: THE BIG PICTURE
1. The case studies are composites of multiple cases reported in the medical literature.
2. Helga Kolb, “How the Retina Works,” American Scientist (January-February 2003)
91(1): 28.
3. Neuroscience for Kids, “The Retina,” http://faculty.washington.edu/chudler/
retina.html. Accessed July 3, 2008.
4. Ibid.
5. M. B. Manookin, D. L. Beaudoin, Z. R. Ernst, L. J. Flagel, and J. B. Demb, “Disinhibition Combines with Excitation to Extend the Operating Range of the OFF Visual
Pathway in Daylight,” Journal of Neuroscience (April 16, 2008) 28(16): 4136–50.
6. Z. M. Hafed and R. J. Krauzlis, “Goal Representations Dominate Superior Colliculus Activity During Extrafoveal Tracking,” Journal of Neuroscience (September 17,
2008) 28(38): 9426–9.
248
Notes
7. Sayaka Sugiyama, Ariel A. Di Nardo, Shinichi Aizawa, Isao Matsuo, Michel Volovitch, Alain Prochiantz, and Takao K. Hensch, “Experience-Dependent Transfer of Otx2
Homeoprotein into the Visual Cortex Activates Postnatal Plasticity,” Cell (August 8, 2008)
134: 508–20.
8. Quoted in “Trigger for Brain Plasticity Identified,” Press Release from Children’s
Hospital Boston, August 7, 2008. http://www.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2008–08/chbtfb073108.php. Accessed August 15, 2008.
9. S. Zeki, “Thirty Years of a Very Special Visual Area, Area V5,” Journal of Physiology (2004) 557 (1): 1–2.
10. From Nancy Kanwisher’s research page, MIT, http://web.mit.edu/bcs/nklab/. Accessed July 3, 2008.
11. M. L. Kringelbach, A. Lehtonen, S. Squire, A. G. Harvey, M. G. Craske, I. E. Holliday, A. L. Green, T. Z. Aziz, P. C. Hansen, P. L. Cornelissen, and A. Stein, “A Specific and
Rapid Neural Signature for Parental Instinct,” PloS ONE (February 27, 2008) 3(2): e1664.
12. Neuroscience for Kids, “Brain Facts and Figures,” http://faculty.washington.edu/
chudler/facts.html. Accessed September 8, 2008.
13. H. Song, C. F. Stevens, and F. H. Gage, “Astroglia Induce Neurogenesis from
Adult Neural Stem Cells,” Nature (May 2, 2002), 39–44.
14. James Schummers, Hongbo Yu, and Mriganka Sur, “Tuned Responses of Astrocyctes and Their Influence on Hemodynamic Signals in the Visual Cortex,” Science
(June 20, 2008) 320: 1638–43.
15. Tzvi Ganel, Michal Tanzer, and Melvyn A. Goodale, “A Double Dissociation
Between Action and Perception in the Context of Visual Illusions: Opposite Effects of
Real and Illusory Size,” Psychological Science (March 2008) 19(3): 221–5.
16. Lotfi B. Merabet, Roy Hamilton, Gottfried Schlaug, Jascha D. Swisher, Elaine T.
Kiriakopoulos, Naomi B. Pitskel, Thomas Kauffman, and Alvaro Pascual-Leone, “Rapid
and Reversible Recruitment of Early Visual Cortex for Touch,” PLOS One (August
27, 2008). http://www.plosone.org/article/info%3Adoi%2F10.1371%2Fjournal.pone
.0003046. Accessed September 6, 2008.
17. Quotes from “Scientists Unmask Brain’s Hidden Potential,” Press Release from
Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center,“ August 26, 2008. http://www.newswise.com/p/
articles/view/543770. Accessed September 6, 2008.
18. Diego A. Gutnisky and Valentin Dragoi, “Adaptive Coding of Visual Information
in Neural Populations,” Nature (March 2008) 452: 220–4.
CHAPTER 17: COLOR AND MEMORY
1. Felix A. Wichmann, Lindsay T. Sharpe, and Karl R. Gegenfurtner, “The Contributions of Color to Recognition Memory for Natural Scenes,” Journal of Experiment Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition (2002) 28(3): 509–20.
2. Samuel G. Solomon and Peter Lennie, “The Machinery of Colour Vision,” Nature (April 2007) 8: 276–86.
3. Karl R. Gegenfurtner, “Cortical Mechanisms of Colour Vision,” Nature Reviews
Neuroscience (July 2003) 4: 563–72.
4. Ibid.
Notes
249
5. Ibid.
6. Solomon and Lennie, 2007.
7. D. K. Murphey, D. Yoshor, and M. S. Beauchamp, “Perception Matches Selectivity in the Human Anterior Color Center,” Current Biology (February 12, 2008) 18(3):
216–20.
8. Ibid.
9. K.R. Gegenfurtner and D.C. Kiper, “Color Vision,” Annual Review of Neuroscience 26 (2003): 181–206.
10. Gegenfurtner, 2003.
11. Diane Ackerman, An Alchemy of Mind: The Marvel and Mystery of the Brain. New
York: Scribner, 2004, 91.
12. Robert M. Sapolsky, “Stressed-Out Memories,” Scientific American Mind (2004),
18(8): 28–34.
13. Richard Restak, The New Brain: How the Modern Age Is Rewiring Your Mind. Emmaus, PA: Rodale, 2003, 143.
14. E. Pastalkova, P. Serrano, D. Pinkhasova, E. Wallace, A. A. Fenton, and T. C.
Sacktor, “Storage of Spatial Information by the Maintenance Mechanism of LTP,” Science (August 25, 2006) 313(5790): 1141–4.
15. Wichmann, Sharpe, and Gegenfurtner, 2002.
CHAPTER 18: SIZING THINGS UP
1. All quotes from Scott Murray are personal communications.
2. Scott O. Murray, Huseyin Boyaci, and Daniel Kersten, “The Representation of
Perceived Angular Size in Human Primary Visual Cortex,” Nature Neuroscience (March
2006) 9(3): 429–34.
3. Quoted in Melanie Moran, “‘Mind’s Eye’ Influences Visual Perception,” Vanderbilt Exploration: News and Features,“ July 1, 2008, http://www.vanderbilt.edu/exploration/
stories/mindseye.html . Accessed July 13, 2008.
4. Ibid.
5. Joel Pearson, Colin W. G. Clifford, and Frank Tong, “The Functional Impact of
Mental Imagery on Conscious Perception,” Current Biology (July 8, 2008) 18: 982–6.
6. S. O. Murray, D. Kersten, B. A. Olshausen, P. Schrater, and D. L. Woods, “Shape
Perception Reduces Activity in Human Primary Visual Cortex,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (2002) 99(23): 15164–9.
CHAPTER 19: ON THE MOVE
1. R.A.’s case is discussed in detail in L. M. Vaina, N. Makris, D. Kennedy, and
A. Cowey, “The Selective Impairment of the Perception of First-Order Motion by Unilateral Cortical Brain Damage,” Visual Neuroscience (1998) 15: 333–48.
2. F.D.’s case is discussed in detail in L. M. Vaina and A. Cowey, “Impairment of the
Perception of Second Order Motion But Not First Order Motion in a Patient with Unilateral Focal Brain Damage,” Proceedings of the Royal Society of London, Series B, Biological Sciences (1996): 263: 1225–32.
250
Notes
3. G. Johansson, “Visual Perception of Biological Motion and a Model for its Analysis,” Perception and Psychophysics (1973) 14: 201–11.
4. See biological motion at http://www.lifesci.sussex.ac.uk/home/George_Mather/
Motion/BM.HTML . Accessed June 23, 1008.
5. Anna Brooks, Ben Schouten, Nikolaus F. Troje, Karl Verfaillie, Olaf Blanke, and
Rick van der Zwan, “Correlated Changes in Perceptions of the Gender and Orientation
of Ambiguous Biological Motion Figures,” Current Biology (September 9, 2008) 18:
R728–9.
6. Francesca Simion, Lucia Regolin, and Hermann Bulf, “A Predisposition for Biological Motion in the Newborn Baby,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences
(January 3, 2008) 105(2): 809–13.
7. If you are having trouble visualizing this, there’s a good movie at http://www
.lifesci.sussex.ac.uk/home/George_Mather/Motion/SECORD.HTML. Accessed June 23,
2008.
8. Zoe Kourtzi and Nancy Kanwisher, “Activation in Human MT/MST by Static
Images with Implied Motion,” Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (2000) 12(1): 48–55.
9. Anja Schlack and Thomas D. Albright, “Remembering Visual Motion: Neural
Correlates of Associative Plasticity and Motion Recall in Cortical MT,” Neuron (March
15, 2007) 53: 881–90.
10. L. M. Vaina and S. Soloviev, “First-Order and Second-Order Motion: Neurological Evidence for Neuroanatomically Distinct Systems,” Progress in Brain Research (2004)
144: 197–212.
11. Krystel R. Huxlin, Tim Martin, Kristin Kelly, Meghan Riley, Deborah I. Friedman, W. Scott Burgin, and Mary Hayhoe, “Perceptual Relearning of Complex Visual
Motion after V1 Damage in Humans,” Journal of Neuroscience (April 1, 2009) 29:
3981–91.
12. L. M. Vaina, A. Cowey, and D. Kennedy, “Perception of First- and Second-Order Motion: Separable Neurological Mechanisms,” Human Brain Mapping (1999) 7:
67–77.
CHAPTER 20: VISION AND THE VIDEO GAME
1. C. Shawn Green and Daphne Bavelier, “Action Video Game Modifies Visual Selective Attention,” Nature (May 29, 2003) 423: 534–7.
2. Ibid.
3. C. S. Green and D. Bavelier, “Action-Video-Game Experience Alters the Spatial
Resolution of Vision,” Psychological Science (2007) 18(1): 88–94.
4. C. S. Green and D. Bavelier, “Enumeration Versus Multiple Object Tracking:
The Case of Action Video Game Players,” Cognition (2006) 101: 217–45.
5. C. Shawn Green and Daphne Bavelier, “Effect of Action Video Games on the
Spatial Distribution of Visuospatial Attention,” Journal of Experimental Psychology (2006)
32(6): 1465–78.
6. M. W. G. Dye, C. S. Green, and D. Bavelier, “Transfer of Learning with Action
Video Games: Evidence from Speed and Accuracy Measures” (submitted).
7. Quote attributed to Walpole in Richard Boyle, 2000, “The Three Princes of
Serendip: Part One” http://livingheritage.org/three_princes.htm. Accessed June 6, 2008.
Notes
251
8. J. C. Rosser Jr., P. J. Lynch, L. Cuddihy, D. A. Gentile, J. Klonsky, and R. Merrell, “The Impact of Video Games on Training Surgeons in the 21st Century,” Archives
of Surgery (February 2007) 142(2): 181–6.
CHAPTER 21: HEARING, LEFT AND RIGHT
1. Kathryn D. Breneman, William E. Brownell, and Richard D. Rabbitt. “Hair Cell
Bundles: Flexoelectric Motors of the Inner Ear,” PloS One (April 22, 2009) 4(4): e5201.
2. Eckart O. Altenmüller, “Music in Your Head,” Scientific American: Mind (January 2004): 24–31.
3. P. Rama, A. Poremba, J. B. Sala, L. Yee, M. Malloy, M. Mishkin, and S. M. Courtney, “Dissociable Functional Cortical Topographies for Working Memory Maintenance
of Voice Identity and Location,” Cerebral Cortex (2004) 14: 768–80.
4. Ibid.
5. “One Ear Is Not Like the Other, Study Finds.” September 13, 2004. Scientific
American.com. http://www.sciam.com/article.cfm?id=one-ear-is-not-like-the-o. Accessed
August 10, 2008.
6. F. L. King and D. Kimura, “Left-ear Superiority in Dichotic Perception of Vocal
Nonverbal Sounds,” Canadian Journal of Psychology (June 1972) 26(2): 111–6.
7. Y. S. Sininger and B. Cone-Wesson, “Asymmetric Cochlear Processing Mimics
Hemispheric Specialization,” Science (September 10, 2004) 305(5690): 1581.
8. Y. S, Sininger and B. Cone-Wesson, “Lateral Asymmetry in the ABR of Neonates:
Evidence and Mechanisms,” Hearing Research (February 2006) 212(1–2): 203–11.
9. Quote in “Left and Right Ears Not Created Equal as Newborns Process Sound,
Finds UCLA/UA Research,” Press release, UCLA. September 9, 2004. http://www
.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2004–09/uoc—lar090804.php. Accessed August 12, 2008.
CHAPTER 22: LISTENING AND LANGUAGE
1. In Gardner Dozois (Ed.), The Year’s Best Science Fiction: Fourteenth Annual Collection. New York: St. Martin’s, 1997: 1–58.
2. Ibid, 33.
3. M. Pena, A. Maki, D. Kovacic, G. Dehaene-Lambertz, H. Koisumi, F. Bouquet, and
J. Mehler, “Sounds and Silence: An Optical Topography Study of Language Recognition
at Birth,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (2003) 100(20): 11702–5.
4. A. D. Friederici, “The Neural Basis of Language Development and Its Impairment,” Neuron (2006) 52: 941–52.
5. G. Dehaene-Lambertz, “Cerebral Specialization for Speech and Non-Speech
Stimuli in Infants,” Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (2000) 12: 449–60.
6. D. R. Mandel, P. W. Jusczyk, D. G. Nelson, “Does Sentential Prosody Help Infants
Organize and Remember Speech Information?” Cognition (1994) 53(2): 155–80.
7. Quoted in Faith Hickman Brynie, “Newborn Brain May Be Wired for Speech,”
BrainWork (July–August 2008), 7–8.
8. Jayaganesh Swaminathan, Ananthanarayan Krishnan, and Jackson T. Gandour,
“Pitch Encoding in Speech and Nonspeech Contexts in the Human Auditory Brainstem,” NeuroReport (July 16, 2008) 19(11): 1163–7.
252
Notes
9. Quoted in “Linguist Tunes in to Pitch Processing in Brain,” February 16, 2008,
Press release from Purdue University, http://www.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2008–02/
pu-lti011808.php. Accessed August 17, 2008.
10. Ibid.
11. For original sources on all these comparisons, see G. Dehaene-Lambertz, L.
Hertz-Pannier, and J. Dubois, “Nature and Nurture in Language Acquisition: Anatomical and Functional Brain-Imaging Studies in Infants,” Trends in Neuroscience (2006)
29(7): 367–73.
12. J. H, Gilmore, W. Lin, M. W Prastawa, C. B. Looney, Y. S. Vetsa, R. C. Knickmeyer, D. D. Evans, J. K. Smith, R. M. Hamer, J. A. Lieberman, and G. Gerig, “Regional
Gray Matter Growth, Sexual Dimorphism, and Cerebral Asymmetry in the Neonatal
Brain,” Journal of Neuroscience (February 7, 2007) 27(6): 1255–60.
13. E. R. Sowell, P. M. Thompson, D. Rex, D. Kornsand, K. D. Tessner, T. L. Jernigan, and A. W. Toga, “Mapping Sulcal Pattern Asymmetry and Local Cortical Surface
Gray Matter Distribution in Vivo: Maturation in Perisylvian Cortices,” Cerebral Cortex
(January 2002) 12(1): 17–26.
14. J. Dubois, M. Benders, A Cachia, F. Lazeyras, R. Ha-Vinh Leuchter, S. V. Sizonenko, C. Borradori-Tolsa, J. F. Mangin, and P. S. Hüppi,“ Mapping the Early Cortical
Folding Process in the Preterm Newborn Brain,” Cerebral Cortex (June 2008) 18(6):
1444–54.
15. J. Dubois, L. Hertz-Pannier, A. Cachia, J. F. Mangin, D. Le Bihan, and G. Dehaene-Lambertz, “Structural Asymmetries in the Infant Language and Sensori-Motor
Networks,” Cerebral Cortex (June 2008). [Epub ahead of print http://cercor.oxford
journals.org/cgi/content/abstract/bhn097 ]. Accessed August 18, 2008.
16. K. Emmorey, J. S. Allen, J. Bruss, N. Schenker, and H. Damasio, “A Morphometric Analysis of Auditory Brain Regions in Congenitally Deaf Adults,” Proceedings of the
National Academy of Sciences (2003) 100(17): 10049–54.
17. G. Dehaene-Lambertz, S. Dehaene, and L. Hertz-Pannier, “Functional Neuroimaging of Speech Perception in Infants,” Science (2002) 298: 2013–5.
18. Pena et al., 2003.
19. Dehaene-Lambertz et al., 2002.
20. Ibid.
21. J. R. Binder, J. A. Frost, T. A. Hammeke, P. S. Bellgowan, J. A. Springer, J. N.
Kaufman, and E. T. Possing, “Human Temporal Lobe Activation by Speech and Nonspeech Sounds,” Cerebral Cortex (2000) 10(5): 512–28.
22. D. Perani, S. Dehaene, F. Grassi, L. Cohen, S. F. Cappa, E. Dupoux, F. Fazio,
and J. Mehler, “Brain Processing of Native and Foreign Languages,” NeuroReport (1996)
7(15–17): 2439–44.
23. G. Schalug, S. Marchina, and A. Norton, “From Singing to Speaking: Why Singing
May Lead to Recovery of Expressive Language Function in Patient’s with Broca’s Aphasia,” Music Perception (2008) 25(4): 315–23.
24. B. Bonakdarpour, A. Eftekharzadeh, and H. Ashayeri, “Melodic Intonation Therapy in Persian Aphasic Patients,” Aphasiology (2003) 17(1): 75–95.
25. J. Tamplin, “A Pilot Study into the Effect of Vocal Exercises and Singing on
Dysarthric Speech,” NeuroRehabilitation (2008) 23(3): 207–16.
Notes
253
26. G. Dehaene-Lambertz, L. Hertz-Pannier, J. Dubois, S. Meriaux, A. Roche, M.
Sigman, and S. Dehaene, “Functional Organization of Perisylvian Activation During
Presentation of Sentences in Preverbal Infants,” Proceedings of the National Academy of
Sciences (2006) 103(38): 14240–5.
27. Quoted in Brynie, 2008.
28. Gregory Hickok, Ursula Bellugi, and Edward S. Klima, “Sign Language in the
Brain,” Scientific American (June 2001): 46–53. Updated version available at http://lcn
.salk.edu/publications/2008/HIckok_Sci_Amer_SI_2002.pdf. Accessed August 15, 2008.
29. M. Kashima, K. Sawada, K. Fukunishi, H. Sakata-Haga, H. Tokado, and Y. Fukui,
“Development of Cerebral Sulci and Gyri in Fetuses of Cynomolgus Monkeys (Macaca
fascicularis). II. Gross Observation of the Medial Surface,” Brain Structure and Function
(August 2008) 212(6): 513–20.
30. M. D. Hauser and K. Andersson, “Left Hemisphere Dominance for Processing
Vocalizations in Adult, But Not Infant, Rhesus Monkeys: Field Experiments,” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences (1994) 91(9): 3946–8.
31. C. Cantalupo, D. L. Pilcher, and W. D. Hopkins, “Are Planum Temporale and
Sylvian Fissure Asymmetries Directly Related? A MRI Study in Great Apes,” Neuropsychologia (2003) 41(14): 1975–81.
CHAPTER 23: MY EARS ARE RINGING
1. Alan H. Lockwood, Richard J. Salvi, and Robert F. Burkard, “Tinnitus,” New England Journal of Medicine (September 9, 2002) 347(12): 904–10.
2. According to the American Tinnitus Association (ATA).
3. Ibid.
4. A. H. Lockwood, R. J. Salvi, R. F. Burkard, P. J. Galantowicz, M. L. Coad, and
D. S. Wack, “Neuroanatomy of Tinnitus,” Scandinavian Audiology, Supplementum
(1999) 51: 47–52.
5. A. H. Lockwood, D. S. Wack, R. F. Burkhard, M. L. Coad, S. A. Reyes, S. A.
Arnold, and R. J. Salvi, “The Functional Anatomy of Gaze-Evoked Tinnitus and Sustain
Lateral Gaze,” Neurology (February 27, 2001) 56(4): 472–80.
6. R. J. Pinchoff, R. F. Burkard, R. J. Salvi, M. L. Coad, and A. H. Lockwood, “Modulations of Tinnitus by Voluntary Jaw Movements,” American Journal of Otology (November 19, 1998) 19: 785–9.
7. S. E. Shore, S. Koehler, M. Oldakowski, L. F. Hughes, and S. Syed, “Dorsal
Cochlear Nucleus Responses to Somatosensory Stimulation Are Enhanced After NoiseInduced Hearing Loss,” European Journal of Neuroscience (January 2008) 27: 155–68.
8. Shore quoted in “Overactive Nerves May Account for ‘Ringing in the Ears,’” Medical News Today, January 11, 2008, http://www.medicalnewstoday.com/articles/93655
.php. Accessed September 12, 2008.
9. Lockwood, Salvi, and Burkard, 2002.
10. A. Hatanaka, Y. Ariizumi, and K. Kitamura, “Pros and Cons of Tinnitus Retraining Therapy,” Acta Otolaryngolica (April 2008) 128(4): 365–8.
11. J. A. Henry, M. A. Schecter, T. L. Zaugg, S. Griest, P. J. Jastreboff, J. A. Vernon,
C. Kaelin, M. B. Meikle, K. S. Lyons, and B. J. Stewart, “Clinical Trails to Compare
254
Notes
Tinnitus Masking and Tinnitus Retraining Therapy,” Acta Otolaryngologica, Supplement
(December 2006) 556: 64–9.
12. National Alliance on Mental Illness, “Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation (TMS),”
http://www.nami.org/Content/ContentGroups/Helpline1/Transcranial_Magnetic_
Stimulation_(rTMS).htm. Accessed May 5, 2008.
13. J. A. Henry, C. Loovis, M. Montero, C. Kaelin, K. A. Anselmi, R. Coombs, J. Hensley, and K. E. James, “Randomized Clinical Trail: Group Counseling on Tinnitus Retraining Therapy,” Journal of Rehabilitation Research and Development (2007) 44(1):
21–32.
14. C. Plewnia, M. Reimond, A. Najib, B. Brehm, G. Reischi, S. K. Plontke, and
C. Gerloff, “Dose-Dependent Attenuation of Auditory Phantom Perception (Tinnitus) by
PET-Guided Repetitive Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation,” Human Brain Mapping
(March 2007) 28(3): 238–46.
15. T. Kleinjung, P. Eichhammer, B. Langguth, P. Jacob, J. Marienhagen, G. Hajak,
S. R. Wolf, and J. Strutz, “Long-Term Effects of Repetitive Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation (rTMS) in Patients with Chronic Tinnitus,” Otolaryngology: Head and Neck Surgery (April 2005) 132(4): 566–9.
16. M. Mennemeier, K. C. Chelette, J. Myhill, P. Taylor-Cooke, T. Bartel, W. Triggs,
T. Kimbrell, and J. Dornhoffer, “Maintenance Repetitive Transcranial Magnetic Stimulation Can Inhibit the Return of Tinnitus,” Laryngoscope (July 2008) 118 (7):1228–32.
17. T. Kleinjung, P. Eichhammer, M. Landgrebe, P. Sand, G. Hajak, T. Steffens,
J. Strutz, and B. Langguth, “Combined Temporal and Prefrontal Transcranial Magnetic
Stimulation for Tinnitus Treatment: A Pilot Study,” Otolaryngology: Head and Neck Surgery (April 2008) 138(4): 497–501.
18. Mennemeier et al., 2008.
CHAPTER 24: MUSIC AND THE PLASTIC BRAIN
1. Elizabeth W. Marvin and Elissa L. Newport, “Statistical Learning in Language
and Music: Absolute Pitch Without Labeling,” Presented at the International Conference
on Music Perception and Cognition in Sapporo, Japan, August 26, 2008.
2. S. Baharloo, S. K. Service, N. Risch, J. Gitschier, and N. B. Freimer, “Familial
Aggregation of Absolute Pitch,” American Journal of Human Genetics (2000) 67: 755–58.
3. Andrea Norton, personal communication.
4. G. Schlaug, L. Jancke, Y. Huang, J. F. Staiger, and Helmuth Steinmetz, “Increased
Corpus Callosum Size in Musicians,” Neuropsychologia (August 1995), 1047–1055.
5. Norton, personal communication.
6. Charlie is not a real patient. He is a composite compiled from numerous research
reports of the behavior and neurocognitive development of children who have Williams
syndrome.
7. Allan L. Reiss, Stephan Eliez, J. Eric Schmitt, Erica Straus, Zona Lai, Wendy
Jones, and Ursula Bellugi, “Neuroanatomy of Williams Syndrome: A High-Resolution
MRI Study,” Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (2000) 12: S65–S73.
8. Albert M. Galaburda and Ursula Bellugi, “Multi-Level Analysis of Cortical Neuroanatomy in Williams Syndrome,” Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (2000) 12: S74–S88.
Notes
255
9. Ibid.
10. Mark A. Eckert, Albert M. Galaburda, Asya Karchemskiy, Alyssa Liang, Paul
Thompson, Rebecca A. Dutton, Agatha D. Lee, Ursula Bellugi, Julie R. Korenberg, Debra Mills, Fredric E. Rose, and Allan L. Reiss, “Anomalous Sylvian Fissure Morphology
in Williams Syndrome,” NeuroImage (October 15, 2006) 3(1): 39–45.
11. Ibid.
12. Daniel J. Levitin, Vinod Menonc, J. Eric Schmitt, Stephan Eliez, Christopher D.
White, Gary H. Glover, Jay Kadise, Julie R. Korenberg, Ursula Bellugi, and Allan L. Reiss,
“Neural Correlates of Auditory Perception in Williams Syndrome: An fMRI Study,” NeuroImage (January 2003) 18(1): 74–82.
13. M. Lotze, G. Scheler, H. R. Tan, C. Braun, and N. Birbaumer, “The Musician’s
Brain: Functional Imaging of Amateurs and Professionals during Performance and Imagery,” NeuroImage (2003) 20(3): 1817–29.
14. Christian Gaser and Gottfried Schlaug, “Behavioral/Systems/Cognitive Brain
Structures Differ Between Musicians and Non-Musicians,” Journal of Neuroscience (October 8, 2003) 23(27): 9240–5.
15. F. H. Rauscher and M. A. Zupan, “Classroom Keyboard Instruction Improves
Kindergarten Children’s Spatial–Temporal Performance: A Field Experiment,” Early
Childhood Research Quarterly (2000) 15: 215–28.
16. L. K. Miller and G. I. Orsmond, “Cognitive, Musical and Environmental Correlates of Early Music Instruction,” Psychology of Music (1999) 27(1): 18–37.
17. A. S. Chan, Y. C. Ho, and M. C. Cheung, “Music Training Improves Verbal Memory,” Nature (1998) 396: 128.
18. Y. C. Ho, M. C. Cheung, and A. S. Chan, “Music Training Improves Verbal But
Not Visual Memory: Cross-sectional and Longitudinal Explorations in Children,” Neuropsychology (2003) 17(3): 439–50.
19. E. G. Schellenberg, “Music Lessons Enhance IQ,” Psychological Science (2004)
15(8): 511–4.
20. K. Overy, “Dyslexia and Music: From Timing Deficits to Musical Intervention,”
Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences (2003) 999: 497–505.
21. Andrea Norton, Ellen Winner, Karl Cronin, Katie Overy, Dennis J. Lee, and
Gottfried Schlaug, “Are There Pre-existing Neural, Cognitive, or Motoric Markers for
Musical Ability?” Brain and Cognition (2005) 59: 124–34.
22. C. Gibson, B. S. Folley, and S. Park. “Enhanced Divergent Thinking and Creativity in Musicians: A Behavioral and Near-infrared Spectroscopy Study,” Brain and
Cognition (February 2009): 69(1): 162–9.
CHAPTER 25: COCHLEAR IMPLANT: ONE MAN’S JOURNEY
1. Stephen Michael Verigood, personal communication.
2. A. L. Giraud, C. J. Price, J. M. Graham, and R. S. Frackowiak, “Functional Plasticity of Language-Related Brain Areas After Cochlear Implantation,” Brain (July 2001)
124(Pt 7):1307–16.
256
Notes
CHAPTER 26: SYNESTHESIA: WHEN SENSES OVERLAP
1. “Musical Taste: Synesthesia,” The Economist (US) (March 5, 2005) 374 (8416): 79.
2. All quotes from Karyn Siegel-Maier are personal communications.
3. Richard Cytowic, The Man Who Tasted Shapes. New York: Putnam, 1993, 4.
4. Alison Motluk, “How Many People Hear in Colour?” New Scientist (May 27, 1995)
146: 18.
5. Judy Siegel-Itzkovich, “Listen to Those Blues and Reds,” Jerusalem Post (January
7, 1996).
6. Julia Simner and Jamie Ward, “Synaesthesia, Color Terms, and Color Space:
Color Claims Came from Color Names in Beeli, Esslen, and Jäncke (2007),” Psychological Science (April 2008) 19(4): 412–4.
7. R. J. Stevenseon and C. Tomiczek, “Olfactory-Induced Synesthesias: A Review
and Model,” Psychological Bulletin (2007) 133(2): 294–309.
8. J. Mishra, A. Martinez, T. Sejnowski, and S. A. Hillyard, “Early Cross-Modal Interactions in Auditory and Visual Cortex Underlie a Sound-Induced Visual Illusion,”
Journal of Neuroscience (April 11, 2007) 27(15): 4120–31.
9. J. D. Ryan, S. N. Moses, M. Ostreicher, T. Bardouille, A. T. Herdman, L. Riggs,
and E. Tulving, “Seeing Sounds and Hearing Sights: The Influence of Prior Learning on
Current Perception,” Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (January 22, 2008) 20: 1030–42.
10. B. E. Stein and M. A. Meredith, The Merging of the Senses. Cambridge, MA: MIT
Press, 1993, 27.
11. Emiliano Macaluso and Jon Driver, “Multisensory Spatial Interactions: A Window onto Functional Integration in the Human Brain,” Trends in Neurosciences (May
2005) 28(5): 264–71.
12. G. W. Septimus Piesse, The Art of Perfumery. Originally published in 1867. University of Michigan Historical Reprint Series, www.lib.umich.edu, page 85.
13. Burr, The Emperor of Scent, 109.
14. R. A. Osterbauer, P. M. Matthews, M. Jenkinson, C. F. Beckmann, P. C. Hansen,
and G. A. Calvert, “Color of Scents: Chromatic Stimuli Modulate Odor Responses in
the Human Brain,” Journal of Neurophysiology (June 2005) 93(6): 3434–41.
15. S. Guest, C. Catmur, D. Lloyd, and C. Spence, “Audiotactile Interactions in
Roughness Perception,” Experimental Brain Research (September 2002) 146(2): 161–71.
16. M. L. Demattè, D, Sanabria, R. Sugarman, and C. Spence, “Cross-Model Interactions Between Olfaction and Touch,” Chemical Senses (February 1, 2006) 31: 291–300.
17. G. Morrot, F. Brochet, and D. Dubourdieu, “The Color of Odors,” Brain and Language (November 2001) 79(2): 309–20.
CHAPTER 27: IF THIS LOOKS LIKE DEJA VU,
YOU AIN’T SEEN NUTHIN’ YET
1. D. G. Rossetti, “Sudden Light” in The Collected Works of Dante Gabriel Rossetti.
London: Ellis and Elvey: 1897, 295.
2. Takashi Kusumi, “Understanding the Déjà vu Experience,” Chapter 14 in Kazuo
Fujita and Shoji Itakura (Eds.), Diversity of Cognition: Evolution, Development, Domestication and Pathology. Balwyn North, Victoria, Australia: Trans Pacific Press, 2006, 310.
Notes
257
3. Louis Couperus, Ecstasy: A Study of Happiness. London: Henry and Company,
1897:16–17. Quoted in Herman N. Sno, Don H. Linszen, and Frans de Jonghe, “Art Imitates Life: Déjà vu Experiences in Prose and Poetry,” British Journal of Psychiatry (1992)
160: 511–8.
4. I. A. Goncharov, Oblomov. New York: Penguin Books: 1980 [reprint from 1859],
470. Quoted in Sno et al., 514–5.
5. A. R. O’Connor and C. J. A. Moulin, “Normal Patterns of Déjà Experience in a
Healthy, Blind Male: Challenging Optical Pathway Delay Theory,” Brain and Cognition
(December 2006) 62(3): 246–9.
6. T. Adachi, N. Adachi, Y. Takekawa, N. Akanuma, M. Ito, R. Matsubara, H. Ikeda,
M. Kimura, and H. Arai, “Déjà Vu Experiences in Patients with Schizophrenia,” Comprehensive Psychiatry (September–October 2006) 47(5): 389–93.
7. Edward Wild, “Déjà Vu in Neurology,” Journal of Neurology (2005) 252: 1–7.
8. Adachi et al., 2006.
9. J. Bancaud, F. Brunet-Bourgin, P. Chauvel, and E.Halgren, “Anatomical Origin
of Déjà Vu and Vivid ‘Memories’ in Human Temporal Lobe Epilepsy,” Brain (February
1994) 117 (Pt 1): 71–90.
10. R. G. Thompson, C. J. A. Moulin, M. A. Conway, and R. W. Jones, “Persistent
Déjà Vu: A Disorder of Memory,” International Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry (2004) 19:
906–7.
11. “Jamais vu: Frequently Asked Questions,” http://chris.moulin.googlepages.com/
jamaisvufaq. Accessed April 6, 2008.
12. Alan S. Brown, The Déjà Vu Experience: Essays in Cognitive Psychology. New York:
Psychology Press, 2004.
13. Alan S. Brown, “A Review of the Déjà Vu Experience,” Psychological Bulletin (2003)
129(3): 394–413.
14. Alan S. Brown and Elizabeth J. Marsh, “Evoking False Beliefs About Autobiographical Experience,” Psychonomic Bulletin & Review (2008) 15(1): 186–90.
15. Sergey Kalachikov, Oleg Evgrafov, Barbara Ross, Melodie Winawer, Christie
Barker-Cummings, Filippo Martinelli Boneschi, Chang Choi, Pavel Morozov, Kamna
Das, Elita Teplitskaya, Andrew Yu, Eftihia Cayanis, Graciela Penchaszadeh, Andreas H.
Kottmann, Timothy A. Pedley, W. Allen Hauser, Ruth Ottman, and T. Conrad Gilliam,
“Mutations in LGI1 Cause Autosomal-Dominant Partial Epilepsy with Auditory Features,”
Nature Genetics (2002) 30: 335–41.
16. Sandra Furlan, Federico Roncaroli, Francesca Forner, Libero Vitiello, Elisa Calabria, Salomé Piquer-Sirerol, Giorgio Valle, Jordi Perez-Tur, Roberto Michelucci, and
Carlo Nobile, “The LGI1/Epitempin Gene Encodes Two Protein Isoforms Differentially
Expressed in Human Brain,” Journal of Neurochemistry (2006) 98(3): 985–91.
17. R. Michelucci, J. J. Poza, V. Sofia, M. R. de Feo, S. Binelli, F. Bisulli, E. Scudellaro, B. Simionati, R. Zimbello, G. d’Orsi, D. Passarelli, P. Avoni, G. Avanzini, P. Tinuper, R. Biondi, G. Valle, V.F. Mautner, U. Stephani, C. A. Tassinari, N. K. Moschonas,
R. Siebert, A. L. de Munain, J. Perez-Tur, and C. Nobile, “Autosomal Dominant
Lateral Temporal Epilepsy: Clinical Spectrum, New Epitempin Mutations, and Genetic Heterogeneity in Seven European Families,” Epilepsia (October 2003) 44(10):
1289–97.
18. Wild, 2005.
258
Notes
19. F. Bartolomei, E. Barbeau, M. Gavaret, M. Guye, A. McGonigal, J. Régis, and
P. Chauvel, “Cortical Stimulation Study of the Role of Rhinal Cortex in Déjà Vu and
Reminiscence of Memories,” Neurology (September 14, 2004) 63(5): 858–64.
20. Akira O’Connor, Amanda J. Barnier, and Rochelle E. Cox, “Déjà Vu in the Laboratory: A Behavioral and Experiential Comparison of Posthypnotic Amnesia and Posthypnotic Familiarity,” International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis
(October 2008) 56(4): 425–50.
CHAPTER 28: FEELING A PHANTOM
1. R. Melznack, “Phantom Limbs and the Concept of a Neuromatrix,” Trends in
Neuroscience (1990) 13: 88–92.
2. L. E. Pezzin, T. R. Dillingham, and E. J. MacKenzie, “Rehabilitation and the
Long-Term Outcomes of Persons with Trauma-Related Amputations,” Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation (2000) 81: 392–300.
3. V. S. Ramachandran and William Hirstein, “The Perception of Phantom Limbs:
The D. O. Hebb Lecture.” Brain (1998) 121: 1602–30.
4. All quotes from Emma Duerden are personal communications.
5. C. H. Wilder-Smith, L. T. Hill, and S. Laurent, “Postamputation Pain and Sensory Changes in Treatment-Naive Patients: Characteristics and Responses to Treatment
with Tramadol, Amitriptyline, and Placebo,” Anesthesiology (2005) 103: 619–28.
6. Steven A. King, “Exploring Phantom Limb Pain,” Psychiatric Times. (April 1,
2006) 23(4). http://www.psychiatrictimes.com/display/article/10168/49106?pageNumber
=2. Accessed August 2, 2008.
7. Ambroise Paré, The Workes of That Famous Chirurgion Ambrose Parey (1649),
Trans. by T. Johnson. London: Clarke, 338.
8. Nicholas Wade, “The Legacy of Phantom Limbs,” Perception (2003) 32: 517–24.
9. E. S. Haldane and G. R. T. Ross, The Philosophical Works of Descartes. New York:
Dover, 1955, 189.
10. Quoted in Nicholas Wade, “The Legacy of Phantom Limbs,” http://www
.artbrain.org/phantomlimb/wade.html . Accessed August 2, 1008. Attributed to W. Porterfield, A Treatise on the Eye, the Manner and Phaenomena of Vision, Volume 2, Edinburgh
and Balfour: 1759, 362–5.
11. S. Weir Mitchell, Injuries of Nerves and Their Consequences. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1972, 348.
12. Mitchell, 349.
13. Mitchell, 350.
14. Allan A. Bailey and Frederick P. Moersch, “Phantom Limb,” Canadian Medical
Association Journal (July 1941): 37–42.
15. Brenda L. Chan, Richard Witt, Alexandra P. Charrow, Amanda Magee, and
Robin Howard, “Mirror Therapy for Phantom Limb Pain,” New England Journal of Medicine (November 22, 2007) 357(21): 2206–7.
Notes
259
CHAPTER 29: PROBABILITIES AND THE PARANORMAL
1. Charles Richet, Thirty Years of Psychical Research: Being a Treatise on Metapsychics, Stanley De Brath (Translator). London: W. Collins Sons, 1923.
2. For details of the life of Charles Richet, see Stewart Wolf, Brain, Mind, and Medicine: Charles Richet and the Origins of Physiological Psychology. New Brunswick: Transaction Publishers, 1993.
3. Richet (1923), 3–4.
4. Richet (1923), 10.
5. R. Wiseman, E. Greening, and M. Smith, “Belief in the Paranormal and Suggestion in the Séance Room,” British Journal of Psychology (August 3002) 93(Pt. 3): 285–97.
6. R. Wiseman and E. Greening, “‘It’s Still Bending’: Verbal Suggestion and Alleged
Psychokinetic Ability,” British Journal of Psychology (February 2005) 96(Pt. 1): 115–27.
7. S. T. Moulton and S. M. Kosslyn, “Using Neuroimaging to Resolve the Psi Debate,”
Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience (January 2008) 21(1): 182–93.
8. Numerous (often conflicting) studies are reviewed in Richard Wiseman and Caroline Watt, “Belief in Psychic Ability and the Misattribution Hypothesis: A Qualitative
Review,” British Journal of Psychology (2006) 97: 323–38.
9. D. Pizzagalli, D. Lehmann, L. Gianotti, T. Koenig, H. Tanaka, J. Wackermann,
and P. Brugger, “Brain Electric Correlates of Strong Belief in Paranormal Phenomena:
Intracerebral EEG Source and Regional Omega Complexity Analyses,” Psychiatry Research (December 22, 2000) 100(3): 139–54.
10. P. Brugger and K. I. Taylor, “ESP: Extrasensory Perception or Effect of Subjective
Probability?” Journal of Consciousness Studies (2003) 10: 221–46.
11. Richet, 9.
CHAPTER 30: TIME
1. C. P. Cannon, C. H. McCabe, P. H, Stone, M. Schactman, B. Thompson,
P. Theroux, R. S. Gibson, T. Feldman, N. S. Kleiman, G. H. Tofler, J. E. Muller, B. R.
Chaitman, and E. Braunwald, “Circadian Variation in the Onset of Unstable Angina and
Non-Q Wave Acute Myocardial Infarction (The TIMI III Registry and TIMI IIIB),” American Journal of Cardiology (February 1, 1997) 79(3): 253–8.
2. N.N. Jarjour, “Circadian Variation in Allergen and Nonspecific Bronchial Responsiveness in Asthma,” Chronobiology International (September 1999) 16(5): 631–9.
3. D Holzberg and U. Albrecht, “The Circadian Clock: A Manager of Biochemical
Processes Within the Organism,” Journal of Neuroendocrinology (April 2003) 15(4): 339–43.
4. Michael Hastings, “A Gut Feeling for Time,” Nature (May 23, 2002) 417(6887):
391–2.
5. M. Y. Cheng, C. M. Bullock, C. Li, A. G. Lee, J. C. Bermak, J. Belluzzi, D. R.
Weaver, F. M. Leslie, and Q. Y. Zhou, “Prokineticin 2 Transmits the Behavioural Circadian Rhythm of the Suprachiasmatic Nucleus,” Nature (May 23, 2002) 417(6887):
405–10.
6. Karen Wright, “Times of Our Lives,” Scientific American (September 2002):
58–65.
260
Notes
7. Michael Tri H. Do1, Shin H. Kang, Tian Xue, Haining Zhong1, Hsi-Wen Liao,
Dwight E. Bergles, and King-Wai Yau, “Photon Capture and Signalling by Melanopsin
Retinal Ganglion Cells,” Nature (January, 15 2009) 457: 281–7.
8. D. M. Berson, F. A. Dunn, and M. Takao, “Phototransduction by Retinal Ganglion Cells that Set the Circadian Clock,” Science (February 8, 2002) 295 (5557): 955–7.
9. J. A. Perez-Leon, E. J. Warren, C. N. Allen, D. W. Robinson, and R. Lane Brown,
“Synaptic Inputs to Retinal Ganglion Cells that Set the Circadian Clock,” European Journal of Neuroscience (August 2006) 24(4): 1117–23.
10. C. B. Saper, T. C. Chou, and T. E. Scammell, “The Sleep Switch: Hypothalamic
Control of Sleep and Wakefulness,” Trends in Neuroscience (December 2001) 24(12):
726–31.
11. W. Mignot, S. Taheri, and S. Nishino, “Sleeping with the Hypothalamus: Emerging Therapeutic Targets for Sleep Disorders,” Nature Neuroscience Supplement (November 2002) 5 (Suppl.): 1071–5.
12. C.B. Saper et al., 2001.
13. “Sleep Master Chemical Found,” BBC News (January 16, 2003). http://news.bbc
.co.uk/1/health/2664697.stm . Accessed June 9, 2008.
14. F. C. Chang and M. R. Opp, “Corticotropin-Releasing Hormone (CRH) as a Regulator of Waking,” Neuroscience and Biobehavioral Reviews (July 2001) 25(5): 445–53.
15. C. Stetson, M. P. Fiesta, and D. M. Eagleman, “Does Time Really Slow During
a Frightening Event?” PloS ONE (December 12, 2007) 2(12): ea2p5.
16. K. L. Toh, C. R. Jones, Y. He, E. J. Eide, W. A. Hinz, D. M. Virshup, L. J. Ptácek,
and Y. H. Fu, “An hPer2 Phosphorylation Site Mutation in Familial Advanced Sleep
Phase Syndrome,” Science (February 9, 2001) 291(5506): 1040–3.
17. T. I. Morgenthaler, T. Lee-Chiong, C. Alessi, L. Friedman, R. N. Aurora,
B. Boehlecke, T. Brown, A. L. Chesson Jr., V. Kapur, R. Maganti, J. Owens, J. Pancer,
T. J. Swick, and R. Zak, “Practice Parameters for the Clinical Evaluation and Treatment
of Circadian Rhythm Sleep Disorders. An American Academy of Sleep Medicine Report,”
Sleep (November 2007) 30(11): 1445–59.
18. L. C. Lack and H. R. Wright, “Clinical Management of Delayed Sleep Phase Disorder,” Behavioral Sleep Medicine (2007) 5(1): 57–76.
APPENDIX: THE BRAIN AND THE NERVOUS SYSTEM—A PRIMER
1. Daniel J. Levitin, This Is Your Brain on Music: The Science of a Human Obsession.
New York: Penguin (Plume Edition), 2007, 96.
2. Patric Hagmann, Leila Cammoun, Xavier Gigandet, Reto Meuli, Christopher J.
Honey, Van J. Wedeen, Olaf Sporns, “Mapping the Structural Core of Human Cerebral
Cortex,” PLoS Biology (July 1, 2008) (6)7: e159. http://biology.plosjournals.org/perlserv/
?request=get-document&doi=10.1371/journal.pbio.0060159. Accessed August 18, 2008.
3. Ibid.
4. Society for Neuroscience, Brain Facts: A Primer on the Brain and Nervous System.
Washington, DC: Society for Neuroscience, 2005, 10.
5. B. Pakkenberg, D. Pelvig, L. Marner, M. J. Bundgaard, H. J. G. Gundersen, J. R.
Myengaard, and L. Regeur, “Aging and the Human Neocortex,” Experimental Gerontology (January 2003): 95–9.
Notes
261
6. Anne D. Novitt-Morena, How Your Brain Works Emoryville. CA: Ziff-Davis,
1995, 15.
7. Richard Restak, The Secret Life of the Brain. Washington, DC: Dana Press and
Joseph Henry Press, 2001, 5
8. Estimate from “The Brain’s Inner Workings,” National Alliance for the Mental
Ill/Ohio, National Institute of Mental Health Outreach, http://namiohio.org/BRAINfor
web.ppt. Accessed August 15, 2008.
9. Taulant Bacaj, Maya Tevlin, Yun Lu, and Shai Shaham, “Glia Are Essential for
Sensory Organ Function in C. elegans,” Science (October 31, 2008): 322 (5902): 744–7.
10. H. Song, C. F. Stevens, and F. H. Gage, “Astroglia Induce Neurogenesis from
Adult Neural Stem Cells,” Nature (May 2, 2002) 417: 39–44.
11. Restak, 5.
12. A. Arenz, R.A. Silver, A.T. Schaefer, and T.W. Margrie, “The Contribution of
Single Synapses to Sensory Representation in Vivo,” Science (August 15, 2008) 321:
977–80.
13. Ibid.
This page intentionally left blank
Recommended Resources
BOOKS
Blakeslee, Sandra, and Matthew Blakeslee. The Body Has a Mind of Its Own: How Body Maps
in Your Brain Help You Do (Almost) Everything Better. New York: Random House, 2007.
Brown, Alan S. The Déjà Vu Experience: Essays in Cognitive Psychology. New York: Psychology Press, 2004.
Cole, Jonathan. Pride and a Daily Marathon. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1995.
Cytowic, Richard E. Synesthesia: A Union of Senses. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2002.
Doidge, Norman. The Brain That Changes Itself: Stories of Personal Triumph from the Frontiers of Brain Science. New York: Penguin, 2007.
Herz, Rachel. The Scent of Desire: Discovering Our Enigmatic Sense of Smell. New York:
HarperCollins, 2007.
Levitin, Daniel J. This Is Your Brain on Music: The Science of a Human Obsession. New York:
Penguin, 2006.
Meyers, Morton A. Happy Accidents: Serendipity in Modern Medical Breakthroughs. New
York: Arcade, 2007.
Pinker, Steven. The Stuff of Thought: Language as a Window into Human Nature. New York:
Penguin, 2007.
Sacks, Oliver. Musicophilia: Tales of Music and the Brain. New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 2007.
Tammet, Daniel. Born on a Blue Day. New York: Free Press, 2007.
This, Hervé. Molecular Gastronomy: Exploring the Science of Flavor. New York: Columbia
University Press, 2006.
van Campen, Cretien. The Hidden Sense: Synesthesia in Art and Science. Cambridge, MA:
MIT Press, 2008.
Wilson, Frank R. The Hand. New York: Random House, 1998.
263
264
Recommended Resources
ARTICLES
Ballantyne, Coco. “Losing Scents.” Scientific American (December 2007) 297(6): 27–28.
Begley, Sharon. “How the Brain Rewires Itself.” Time (January 29, 2007): 72–79.
Cunningham, Aimee. “Smells Like the Real Thing.” Science News (July 15, 2006) 170(3):
40–41.
Foer, Joshua. “The Psychology of Déjà Vu.” Discover (September 9, 2005). http://discover
magazine.com/2005/sep/psychology-of-deja-vu.
Moseley, Lorimer. “Phantom Limb Cure: Retraining the Brain.” Scientific American (September 9, 2008). http://www.scientificamerican.com/article.cfm?id=phantom-limb-cureretrain-brain.
Motluk, Alison. “Particles of Faith.” New Scientist (January 28, 2006): 34–36.
Murphy, Kate. “New Therapies Fight Phantom Noises of Tinnitus.” New York Times (April
1, 2008). http://www.nytimes.com/2008/04/01/health/research/01tinn.html?em&ex=
1207195200&en=6f028091d95aad08&ei=5087%0A.
Ramachandran, Vilayanur S., and Diane Rogers-Ramachandran, “I See, But I Don’t Know,”
Scientific American Mind (December 2008/January 2009) 19(6): 20–22.
Ratliff, Evan. “Déjà Vu, Again and Again.” New York Times (July 2, 2006). http://www.nytimes
.com/2006/07/02/magazine/02dejavu.html.
Scientific American: Special Edition: Secrets of the Senses. (2006) 16(3).
Scientific American Reports: Special Edition on Perception. (2008) 18(2).
Shreve, James. “The Mind Is What the Brain Does.” National Geographic (March 2005):
2–31.
Shulman, Matthew. “When Music Becomes Medicine for the Brain.” U.S. News and World
Report (September 1–8, 2008) 145(5): 89–90.
Smith, David V., and Robert F. Margolskee. “Making Sense of Taste.” Scientific American
(March 2001): 32+.
Stewart-Williams Steve. “The Placebo Puzzle: Putting Together the Pieces.” Health Psychology (March 2004) 23(2): 198–206.
Weinberger, Norman M. “Music and the Brain.” Scientific American (November 2004): 88–95.
WEB SITES
http://thebrain.mcgill.ca/flash/index_a.html. “The Brain from Top to Bottom” at this site offers answers and explanations for beginning, intermediate, and advanced users. It’s maintained by McGill University in Montreal.
http://www.ninds.nih.gov/disorders/brain_basics/know_your_brain.htm. This site provides
information on the basics of brain structure and function.
http://www.hhmi.org/senses/. This page features an article entitled, “Seeing, Hearing, and
Smelling the World.”
http://science.education.nih.gov/supplements/nih2/addiction/activities/activities_toc.htm.
This site discusses interactive activities on the brain and provides information on how
neurons work and the effects of drugs on the brain.
http://science.education.nih.gov/supplements/nih3/hearing/activities/activities_toc.htm.
This site discusses how your brain interprets what you hear.
Recommended Resources
265
www.synesthete.org/index.php. This site has battery of tests you can take to determine if you
are a synesthete.
www.senseofsmell.org. This site is maintained by the Sense of Smell Institute, which is the
research and education division of the Fragrance Foundation.
https://www.ata.org/index.php. This is the American Tinnitus Association Web site.
http://www.parapsych.org. This is the Web site of Parapsychological Association, Inc., which
is the international professional organization of scientists and scholars engaged in the study
of “psi” (or “psychic”) experiences, such as telepathy, clairvoyance, remote viewing, psychokinesis, psychic healing, and precognition. The Web site offers links to online experiments, quizzes, and references related to paranormal research.
http://www.brainconnection.com/topics/?main=anat/auditory-phys. This site offers an excellent explanation of how the ears and brain localize sound; see “How We Hear” by Ashish
Ranpura.
http://www.hhmi.org/bulletin. This is the Web site of the Howard Hughes Medical Institute.
It provides readable and informative summaries of the latest research on a variety of topics
in the HHMI Bulletin, which can be downloaded.
http://www.dana.org. This is the Web site of the Dana Foundation, which publishes books,
pamphlets, and articles about the brain and nervous system, often related to the senses. All
are available here.
http://www.sciencedaily.com and www.sciencenews.org. Search these Web sites for readable
accounts of what’s new in brain science.
This page intentionally left blank
Index
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP), 79
Age, and taste, 99, 102
Aldridge, Wayne, 84, 85–88
Amputees, and phantom pain/sensations,
198–199, 200, 202–203, 204
Amygdala, 223, 225
Androstadienone (AND), 62–64
Anosmia, 53–58
Anterior insula and frontal operculum
(IFO), 93
Anticipation. See also Expectation
placebo effect and, 102
taste and, 102–104
Aoki, Chuck, 3–9
Arm research, 16–20
Aromatherapy, 65–67, 69–70, 71
Asthma, 24, 28
Astrocytes, 222
Astroglia, 222
ATP. See Adenosine triphosphate
Attention, vision, 138–141, 143
Auditory cortex, 161, 227, 230
Auditory system, 148–152. See also Hearing
Autonomic nervous system, 232
Axel, Richard, 41, 43
Axons, 221, 233, 234. See also Neurotransmitters
Babies
hearing in, 152–153, 155–157, 159
language and, 155–157, 159
taste and, 95–97, 99, 100
Back scratchers, 35
Bailey, Allan, 203
Bartoshuk, Linda, 76
Basal ganglia, 227–228, 231
Baudelaire, 185
Behavioral psychologists, xii
Belief, in paranormal, 206–207, 210–211
Benford, Gregory, 154, 159
Berridge, Kent, 84, 85, 86
Beth Israel Medical Center, 141, 158, 168,
173
Biochemists, xii
Biological motion, 132
Biomechanicists, xii
Biophysicists, xii
Blindness, 135
motion, 109
Blindsight, 135
Body
map of brain, 199–200
time sense of, 213–215, 216, 218
Bone, Ophelia, 65
Boston University, 130–131, 132–136
267
268
Index
Bowels, and body clock, 215
Brain, 224. See also Cerebral cortex; Left
brain; Memory; Right brain
body map, 199–200
color and, 117–122
damage, 20
déjà vu and, 192, 193, 195–196
epilepsy and, 199
hearing and, 148, 149, 150–153, 154–159,
161–165, 166, 168, 169–173, 174, 178
HSAN type 2 and, 6–7, 8
language and, 152, 154–159
left hemisphere, 152, 153, 155, 156, 221
metaphysics and, 210
music and, 166, 168, 169–173
nervous system and, xiv, 92–94, 231, 232,
234
neurons and, 234
phantom pain and, 199, 201, 202, 203,
204
pheromones and, 64
placebo effect in, 24–25, 28
reorganization, 8
right hemisphere, 152, 153, 221
senses interaction with, xii, 147, 154
smell and, 39–41, 147
speech and, 158–159
synesthesia and, 186–187, 189
taste and, 79–82, 85, 91–94, 96, 97–100,
104–106, 147
time sense of, 213–216
without touch, 6
understanding itself, xii
vision and, 110–116, 117–122, 124,
125–129, 130–131, 132, 133–136,
138–143, 147
Brain-imaging techniques, 220–221
Brain-machine interfaces, 34–36
Brain mappers, xii, 81, 219
Brain mapping, 228
body, 199–200
Brain plasticity
music and, 166
rehabilitation and, 20
senses and, xiii
vision and, 136
Brain regions, 22, 222–225. See also
Forebrain; Hindbrain; Midbrain
Brain research. See Hearing research;
Research; Smell research; Taste research;
Touch research; Vision research
Brain sense, xii, xiv
Brainstem, 156, 222–223
Brain structure, 221–222
names of, 227–228, 231
Breslin, Paul A. S., 73
Broch, Henri, 211
Brown, Alan, 193–194
Brown, Susan, 16–20
Buck, Linda, 41, 43, 60
Burr, Chandler, 45–46, 49
Caenorhabditis elegans (C. elegans), 29, 30,
32, 42, 222
Cells. See also Glial cells; Horizontal basal
cells; Retinal ganglionic cells; Satellite
cells; Smell cells; Solitary chemosensory
cells; Stem cells; Taste cells
differentiation, 96
Central nervous system, 231, 232. See also
Brain; Spinal cord
Cerebellum, 222, 223
Cerebral cortex, 22, 219, 221, 223
Cerebral palsy, 20
Cerebrum, 223
Chalfie, Martin, 30–31
Charcot joints, 4
Charpak, Georges, 211
Chialvo, Dante, 27
Chocolate, 105
Circadian clock, 214, 215–216
Clinical psychologists, xii
Cochlear implant, 174–179
Coconut, 83–84
Cognitive psychologists, xii
Cold
sensing, 11–14
sensitive neurons, 11–14
sickness and, 13
Color
brain and, 117–122
memory and, 117, 120–122
synesthesia and, 183, 184–185, 186, 187,
189
taste and, 102–103
vision and, 117–121, 122
Computed tomography (CT) scanner, 220
COMT enzyme, 22
Conditioned learning, 25, 26
Cone-Wesson, Barbara, 150, 152–153
Cooking, 89, 91, 93
Cortex. See also Auditory cortex; Cerebral
cortex; Motor cortex; Orbitofrontal cortex; Somatosensory cortex; Visual cortex
lobes of, 225–227
Couperus, Louis, 191
Index
CSCs. See Solitary chemosensory cells
CT scanner. See Computed tomography (CT)
scanner
Cytowic, Richard, 185, 186
Deafness, 159, 174–179
Dehaene-Lambertz, Ghislaine, 155, 157
Déjà vu, xiii, 190–191. See also Jamais vu
brain and, 192, 193, 195–196
research, 192–193, 194–195, 196
Dendrites, 233
Depression, 26, 27, 104
Descartes, René, 202
Diabetic neuropathy, 4
Diffusion spectrum imaging (DSI), 221
Disease, and déjà vu, 192–193
Distraction, and déjà vu, 194–195
Dopamine, 27, 87
DSI. See Diffusion spectrum imaging
Duerden, Emma, 200–201, 204
Dunlop, Theresa, 53–54, 56, 57, 58
Dyson, Malcolm, 47
Ear. See also Hearing; Tinnitus
left, 147–148, 150, 152, 153
mechanics/parts of, 148–153
right, 147–148, 150, 152, 153
ringing, 160–165, 176
Eating, and taste, 90–91
Einstein, Albert, 181
Emotional pain, and placebo effect, 26
Emotions
smell research on, 66–67
synesthesia and, 185
The Emperor of Scent (Burr), 45–46, 49
Endorphins, 25, 28
Engineers, xii
Epilepsy
brain and, 199
déjà vu and, 192, 195
ESP. See Extrasensory perception
Expectation. See also Anticipation
placebo effect and, 25, 26
taste and, 101, 102–104, 105–106
Extrasensory perception (ESP), xiii, 207, 208,
209, 210, 211. See also Metaphysics;
Paranormal
Eyewitness accounts, 21
Familial cold autoinflammatory syndrome
(FCAS), 13
Familial dysautonomia (FD, HSAN type 3,
Riley-Day syndrome), 6
269
FCAS. See Familial cold autoinflammatory
syndrome
FD. See Familial dysautonomia
Flavors, 78, 79. See also Taste
taste and, 77, 81
fMRI. See Functional MRI
Forebrain, 222, 223–224. See also Cerebral
cortex; Cerebrum; Limbic system
Frontal lobe, 225, 226, 227
Fuller, R. Buckminster, 1
Functional MRI (fMRI), 19, 27, 91, 105, 113,
125, 126, 134, 157, 220
Gamers. See Video game
Gandour, Jack, 156
Gays, and pheromones, 63
Gegenfurtner, Karl, 120–121
Gender
smell and, 59–64, 66, 67, 69
taste and, 102
Genetics
déjà vu and, 195
pain and, 22
Glial cells, 221, 222
Glutamate, 77, 78, 93, 111. See also
Monosodium glutamate
Goble, Dann, 16–20
Goncharov, Ivan, 191–192
Gottfried, Jay, 43
Green, Shawn, 138–143
Gyri, 223
Hammerstein, Oscar, 145
Hand research, 18–20
Haptics, 32
devices, 33–34, 35–36
touch research, 34–36
HBCs. See Horizontal basal cells
Headache, 22–23
Hearing, xiii, 145. See also Ear; Sound;
Speech
in babies, 152–153, 155–157, 159
brain and, 148, 149, 150–153, 154–159,
161–165, 166, 168, 169–173, 174, 178
differentiation, 149, 151
dysfunctions, 158–159, 160–165, 174
language and, 152, 154–159
left brain and, 148, 152, 155, 156–157, 159
loss of, 158–159, 161, 174
loudness, 150, 151
mechanics of, 147, 148–153
music and, 152, 166–173, 183
right brain and, 148, 152, 157, 159
270
Index
Hearing (continued )
synesthesia and, 183, 185, 186, 187, 188,
189
treatments, 163–165, 174–179
Hearing research, 147, 150–151, 152–153, 178
on language, 155–159
music and, 168, 169–173
on tinnitus, 161–162, 163–165
Hedonic dysfunction, 84, 88
Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathy
(HSAN) type 2
brain and, 6–7, 8
diagnosing, 5–6
hazards/limitations of, 4–5
Hereditary sensory neuropathies (HSNs), 6
Herness, Scott, 80
Herz, Rachel, 68–69
Hindbrain, 222–223. See also Cerebellum
Hippocampus, 223, 225
HLA. See Human leukocyte antigen (HLA)
Horizontal basal cells (HBCs), 56–57
Hormones, and taste, 92
HSAN type 2. See Hereditary sensory and
autonomic neuropathy type 2
HSNs. See Hereditary sensory neuropathies
Human leukocyte antigen (HLA), 60–62
Hypothalamus, 223, 225
IFO. See Anterior insula and frontal operculum
Illusion, 181
moon, 123–124, 128–129
optical, 123–124, 125–129
Imagination, and vision, 127
Interneurons, 232
Ion channels, 12
Irritable bowel syndrome, 24
Jamais vu, 193. See also Déjà vu
Jell-O, 101–102, 106
Johansson, Gunnar, 132
John Hopkins University, 43, 44, 56
Kanwisher, Nancy, 113, 114
Keller, Andreas, 49, 51
Kinesiology, 15
Language
babies and, 155–157, 159
brain and, 152, 154–159
hearing and, 152, 154–159
synesthesia and, 184, 185, 186, 187, 189
Lateral geniculate nucleus (LGN), 112, 119,
128
Laterality, 16–20
Left brain, 15, 18, 19, 221. See also Brain
hearing and, 148, 152, 153, 155, 156–157,
159
Levitin, Daniel J., 219
LGN. See Lateral geniculate nucleus
Liberles, Stephen, 60
Limbic system, 81, 223, 225, 226
Listening. See Hearing
Lockwood, Alan, 161–162
Long-term potentiation (LTP), 44, 121–122
Love, 190–191, 196
LTP. See Long-term potentiation
Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), 105, 106,
125, 220. See also Functional MRI
Magnetoencephalography (MEG), 187, 220
Mahler, Steve, 84, 85
Maillard, Louis-Camille, 91
Maillard reaction, 91
Marsh, Elizabeth, 194
Mastectomies, and phantom pain/sensations,
197–198, 204–205
Mating, and pheromones, 60–62
McKee, Kim, 212–213
Mechanoreceptors, 29, 30, 31
Medial superior temporal cortex (MST), 134
Medial temporal cortex (MT), 112, 113, 134.
See also V1-V8 network
MEG. See Magnetoencephalography
Melodic intonation therapy (MIT), 158–159
Memory. See also Déjà vu; Jamais vu; Longterm potentiation; Phantom sensations
color and, 117, 120–122
different types of, 121
mechanics of, 121–122
music and, 183
smell research on, 68–69
Mental health
déjà vu and, 192–193
taste research and, 104–105
Metaphysics, 207. See also Extrasensory
perception; Paranormal
brain and, 210
research, 208, 209–211
science and, 208, 211
Met gene, 22
Microglia, 222
Midbrain, 222, 223
Miller, Sarah, 98
MIT. See Melodic intonation therapy
Mitchell, Silas Weir, 202–203
MIT Touch Lab, 32, 33
Index
Moersch, Frederick, 203
Monell Chemical Senses Center, 73, 77
Monosodium glutamate (MSG), 92–94, 104,
106
Motion
biological, 132
blindness, 109
sound, 151
vision, 130–136
Motor cortex, 6, 7, 18, 226, 227
Motor neurons, 232
Moulin, Chris, 192–193
Movement
disability rehabilitation, 20
science, 16–20
MRI. See Magnetic resonance imaging
MRI technology, 221
MSG. See Monosodium glutamate
MST. See Medial superior temporal cortex
MT. See Medial temporal cortex
Murray, Scott, 124–129
Music
brain and, 166, 168, 169–173
brain plasticity and, 166
hearing and, 152, 166–173, 183
learning, 166–167, 168–172
memory and, 183
synesthesia and, 183, 188, 189
Myelin, 4, 221
Naloxone, 25
National Institutes of Health, 22, 24
Nature, 45, 51, 52
Negotiable reality, xiii
Nelson, Jennifer, 4–6, 8
Nematode, 29, 42, 222. See also Caenorhabditis elegans
Nerve
peripheral, 231, 232
sensory, 4
Nerve fibers, 22. See also Nociceptors
Nerve impulses, 4, 234
Nervous system, 231–232. See also Central
nervous system; Peripheral nervous
system
autonomic, 6
brain and, xiv, 92–94, 231, 232, 234
déjà vu and, 193–194
taste and, 92–94
vibration and, 19
Neural pulse, 234
Neuroglia, 221
Neurologists, xii, 4
271
Neurons, 29, 221, 223, 233–234. See also
Axons; Dendrites; Interneurons; Motor
neurons; Nerve impulses; Receptors;
Sensory neurons; Smell neurons;
Synapses; Touch neurons
brain and, 234
Neuropathy, 6
Neuroscience, xiv
cognitive, 219
Neuroscientists, xii, xiv, 44, 151
Neurotransmitters, 22, 27, 79, 233, 234. See
also Adenosine triphosphate; Glutamate;
Serotonin
Niijima, Akira, 92–93
Nitschke, Jack, 105–106
Nocebo effect, 28
Nociceptors, 22
Norton, Andrea, 168–173
Nose, 59, 60. See also Vomeronasal organ
Occipital lobe, 225, 226–227, 228, 229, 230.
See also Visual cortex
O’Connor, Alkira, 196
Odorants, 39, 41, 43, 61
Odors. See Smell
Ohio State University, 69–70, 80
Olfactory bulb, 225
Oligodendrocytes, 221
Optical illusions, 123–124, 125–129
Orbitofrontal cortex, 105, 106
Oxford University, 105, 106, 187, 189
Pain. See also Phantom pain
chronic, 27
genetics and, 22
physics/chemistry of, 22
placebo effect and, 21, 22–24, 25, 26, 27, 28
senses and, 21
smell research on, 67, 69
taste and, 93
tolerance, 22
touch and, 7, 198–199
Papillae, 98, 99
Paranormal. See also Extrasensory perception;
Metaphysics
belief in, 206–207, 210–211
probabilities and, 209
research, 208, 209–211
right brain and, 211
Parasympathetic nervous system, 232
Paré, Ambroise, 202
Parietal lobe, 225, 227
Parkinson’s disease, 26, 27
272
Pearson, Joel, 127
Peer review problem, 50–51
Penfield, Wilder, 199
Penfield map, 199–200
Perfume, 45
Peripheral nerves, 231, 232
Peripheral nervous system, 231–232. See also
Autonomic nervous system; Motor neurons; Parasympathetic nervous system;
Sympathetic nervous system
PET. See Positron emission tomograpy
Petrovic, Predrag, 26
PHANTOM (haptic device), 33, 34
Phantom pain, xiii, 198
brain and, 199, 201, 202, 203, 204
research, 200
treatments, 201, 203, 204, 205
Phantom sensations, xiii, 197–199, 202–203
research, 200–201
treatments, 201, 203, 204, 205
Pheromones, 59
brain and, 64
gays and, 63
mating and, 60–62
smell research, 60–64
sweat and, 62–64
Physicians, xii
Piesse, G. W. Septimus, 37, 188
Pinocchio’s nose, 19
Pitch, 168
Placebo effect
anticipation and, 102
in brain, 24–25, 28
conditioned learning and, 25, 26
emotional pain and, 26
expectation and, 25, 26
negative side effects of, 28
pain and, 21, 22–24, 25, 26, 27, 28
Parkinson’s disease and, 26, 27
Plato, 107
Porterfield, William, 202
Positron emission tomography (PET), 27, 28,
63, 64, 91, 220
Pregnancy, and taste, 95–97
Probabilities, and paranormal, 209
Proprioception, 16, 17–18
disability rehabilitation, 20
right brain and, 19, 20
Protein, 91. See also Sonic hedgehog; Wnt
protein
Proust phenomenon, 68–69
Psychologists, xii
Purdue University, 77
Index
Receptors, 234. See also Taste receptors; Trace
amine-associated receptors
TRP, 12, 13, 14
Rehabilitation
brain plasticity and, 20
movement/proprioception disability, 20
Research. See also Hearing research; Smell
research; Taste research; Touch research;
Vision research
arm, 16–20
déjà vu, 192–193, 194–195, 196
hand, 18–20
paranormal/metaphysics, 208, 209–211
phantom pain/sensations, 200–201
synesthesia, 186–187, 189
time sense, 217
Restak, Richard, xii
Retina, 110–111, 125
cones of, 118
Retinal ganglionic cells (RCGs), 215–216
Richet, Charles, 207–208, 209, 211
Right brain, 15, 18, 221. See also Brain
hearing and, 148, 152, 153, 157, 159
paranormal and, 211
proprioception and, 19, 20
Rimbaud, Arthur, 185
Rockefeller University, 55, 61
Rolls, Edmund, 92
Rossetti, Dante Gabriel, 190, 191
Rostral ventromedial medulla (RVM), 22
RVM. See Rostral ventromedial medulla
Ryba, Nicholas, 78
Salas, Andrea, 9–11, 14
Saper, Clifford, 216
Satellite cells, 221
Scent, 46. See also Smell
Science
love of, xi–xii, xiv, 125, 154
metaphysics and, 208, 211
movement, 16–20
serendipity in, 142
Science fiction, 154
Scientist, xiv, 1
SCN. See Suprachismatic nucleus
The Secret of Scent (Turin), 51
Senses, xiii, 30. See also Hearing; Smell;
Synesthesia; Taste; Time sense; Touch;
Vision
beyond the big five, 181
brain interaction with, xii, 147, 154
brain plasticity and, xiii
environmental representations of, 21
Index
overlapping, 183–189
pain and, 21
Sensory nerve, 4
Sensory neurons, 222, 231–232
Serendipity, in science, 142
Serotonin, 79, 104, 105
Sex. See Gender
Shh. See Sonic hedgehog
Shore, Susan, 162
Sickness, and cold, 13
Siegel-Maier, Karyn, 183–186, 189
Simner, Julia, 186
Sininger, Yvonne, 150, 152–153
Size, and vision, 123–124, 125–129
Sleeping/waking, 213, 214–215, 216–217
Smell, xiii, 37, 46. See also Anosmia;
Pheromones; Scent; Sniffing
brain and, 39–41, 147
chemistry of, 40–41
disorders, 53–58
gender and, 59–64, 66, 67, 69
importance of, 53
life without, 53–58
mechanics of, 46
sniffing and, 57
synesthesia and, 185, 187, 188–189
taste and, 77, 81, 84
Smell cells, 42. See also Solitary chemosensory
cells
Smell neurons, 41, 42
Smell research, 41–42, 55, 56
aromatherapy, 66–67, 69–70
on emotions, 66–67
into human smelling differences, 42–44
on impatience, 70
on memory, 68–69
on odor naming, 71
on pain, 67, 69
pheromones, 60–64
sniffing, 57
vibration theory, 49, 51–52
Smell theory. See also Vibration theory of
smell
shape, 46, 48, 51
Sniffing, 39, 43
smell and, 57
Solitary chemosensory cells (CSCs), 42
Somatosensory cortex, 6, 7
Sonic hedgehog (Shh), 98
Sound
identification, 151
location, 150–151
motion, 151
273
Speech
brain and, 158–159
loss of, 158–159
therapy, 158–159
Spinal cord, 222, 231, 232
Srinivasan, Mandayam, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36
Stem cells, 56
Stroke, 20
Strowbridge, Ben, 44
Sulci, 223
Suprachismatic nucleus (SCN), 112, 214–217
Surgeons, xii
video game and, 137–138, 141–142
Sweat, and pheromones, 62–64
Sympathetic nervous system, 232
Synapses, 233, 234
Synaptic gap, 233, 234
Synesthesia, xiii, 183–185, 188
brain and, 186–187, 189
research, 186–187, 189
T2R receptors, 78
TAARs. See Trace amine-associated receptors
Taste, xiii, 73. See also Flavors
age and, 99, 102
anticipation and, 102–104
babies and, 95–97, 99, 100
bitter, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 90, 96, 102,
104, 105, 106
brain and, 79–82, 85, 91–94, 96, 97–100,
104–106, 147
color and, 102–103
craving and, 105
dysfunctions, 102, 104
eating and, 90–91
expectation and, 101, 102–104, 105–106
experience and, 103–104
flavor and, 77, 81
formation, 96–97
gender and, 102
hormones and, 92
imagining, 104
knowing what you, 102, 103
liking vs. wanting and, 86–88
pain and, 93
perception and, 103
pregnancy and, 95–97
salty, 77, 81, 90, 96, 102, 105
smell and, 77, 81, 84
sour, 77, 78, 81, 90, 96, 102, 104, 105
sweet, 77, 78, 80, 81, 82, 90, 92, 96,
102–103, 104, 105, 106
synesthesia and, 184, 185, 189
274
Index
Taste (continued )
tongue and, 75–76
umami, 77, 78, 80, 81, 92, 93, 96
vision and, 105
words and, 106
Taste buds, 76, 77, 79, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 104
Taste cells, 76, 78, 99
peptides, 79–81
Taste receptors, 76–79, 81. See also T2R receptors
Taste research, 76, 77, 98–99, 102–104
on mental health, 104–105
on MSG, 92–94
on preferences, 84–88
taste receptors, 78–79, 80
Temperature-detecting neurons, 11–14
Temporal lobe, 225, 227, 230
Thalamus, 22, 223, 225
Therapy, speech, 158–159
This, Hervé, 89
Time sense, xiii, 212
brain and, 213–216
failure of, 216–218
research, 217
Tinnitus, 160–165
TMS. See Transcranial magnetic stimulation
Tongue, 98
map, 75–76, 82
Touch, xiii, 1, 226. See also Haptics; Hereditary sensory and autonomic neuropathy
type 2; Phantom pain; Phantom sensations; Proprioception
life without, 3–9
mechanics of, 30–32, 33
neurons, 11–14
pain and, 7, 198–199
Touch neurons, 29, 30, 31, 32. See also
Mechanoreceptors
cold-sensitive, 11–14
temperature-detecting, 11–14
Touch research, 29, 30–33
haptic, 34–36
Trace amine-associated receptors (TAARs), 59,
60, 64
Transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS),
164–165
Treatments, for phantom pain/sensations, 201,
203, 204, 205
TRPM8 (receptor/ion channel), 12, 13
Turin, Luca, 45–52, 188–189
V1-V8 network, 112–113, 115, 119, 120,
125–127, 128, 134, 135, 136. See also
Medial temporal cortex
Vaina, Lucia, 130–131, 132–136
Valentine’s Day, 39, 43, 44
Val gene, 22
Ventral pallidum (VP), 85, 86, 88
Verigood, Stephen Michael, 174–179
Vibration theory of smell, 46–48, 50
smell research, 49, 51–52
Video game
surgeons and, 137–138, 141–142
vision and, 137–143
Vision, xiii, 107. See also Optical illusions
attention, 138–141, 143
brain and, 110–116, 117–122, 124,
125–129, 130–131, 132, 133–136,
138–143, 147
brain plasticity and, 136
case studies, 109–110
color and, 117–121, 122
crosstalk/adaptation/plasticity and, 115–116
déjà vu and, 192
imagination and, 127
loss of, 109–110, 115–116, 130, 133–136
mechanics of, 125–127
motion, 130–136
size and, 123–124, 125–129
synesthesia and, 183, 184, 185, 187, 189
taste and, 105
video game and, 137–143
Vision research, 113–115, 124–125
on color/memory, 117, 120–121, 122
motion, 131, 132–136
on size, 126–128
video game, 138–143
Visual cortex, 119, 226–227, 228, 229, 230.
See also Occipital lobe
VNO. See Vomeronasal organ
Vomeronasal organ (VNO), 59, 60, 64
Vosshall, Leslie, 49, 51, 55, 61
VP. See Ventral pallidum
Walpole, Horace, 142
Ward, Jamie, 186
Williams Syndrome, 170–171
Wnt protein, 98
Wright, Robin, 47
Yosipovitch, Gil, 35
University of California, San Diego, 78, 80, 187
University of Michigan, 15–16, 20, 22, 28, 84,
98, 162
Zubieta, Jon-Kar, 28
Zuker, Charles, 78, 81
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement